]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - doc/lispintro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi
Merge branch 'master' of git.sv.gnu.org:/srv/git/emacs
[gnu-emacs] / doc / lispintro / emacs-lisp-intro.texi
1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
2 @comment %**start of header
3 @setfilename ../../info/eintr.info
4 @c setfilename emacs-lisp-intro.info
5 @c sethtmlfilename emacs-lisp-intro.html
6 @settitle Programming in Emacs Lisp
7 @include docstyle.texi
8 @syncodeindex vr cp
9 @syncodeindex fn cp
10 @finalout
11
12 @include emacsver.texi
13
14 @c ================ How to Print a Book in Various Sizes ================
15
16 @c This book can be printed in any of three different sizes.
17 @c Set the following @-commands appropriately.
18
19 @c 7 by 9.25 inches:
20 @c @smallbook
21 @c @clear largebook
22
23 @c 8.5 by 11 inches:
24 @c @c smallbook
25 @c @set largebook
26
27 @c European A4 size paper:
28 @c @c smallbook
29 @c @afourpaper
30 @c @set largebook
31
32 @c (Note: if you edit the book so as to change the length of the
33 @c table of contents, you may have to change the value of 'pageno' below.)
34
35 @c <<<< For hard copy printing, this file is now
36 @c set for smallbook, which works for all sizes
37 @c of paper, and with PostScript figures >>>>
38
39 @set smallbook
40 @ifset smallbook
41 @smallbook
42 @clear largebook
43 @end ifset
44
45 @c ================ Included Figures ================
46
47 @c If you clear this, the figures will be printed as ASCII diagrams
48 @c rather than PostScript/PDF.
49 @c (This is not relevant to Info, since Info only handles ASCII.)
50 @set print-postscript-figures
51 @c clear print-postscript-figures
52
53 @comment %**end of header
54
55 @c per rms and peterb, use 10pt fonts for the main text, mostly to
56 @c save on paper cost.
57 @c Do this inside @tex for now, so current makeinfo does not complain.
58 @tex
59 @ifset smallbook
60 @fonttextsize 10
61
62 @end ifset
63 \global\hbadness=6666 % don't worry about not-too-underfull boxes
64 @end tex
65
66 @c These refer to the printed book sold by the FSF.
67 @set edition-number 3.10
68 @set update-date 28 October 2009
69
70 @c For next or subsequent edition:
71 @c create function using with-output-to-temp-buffer
72 @c create a major mode, with keymaps
73 @c run an asynchronous process, like grep or diff
74
75 @c For 8.5 by 11 inch format: do not use such a small amount of
76 @c whitespace between paragraphs as smallbook format
77 @ifset largebook
78 @tex
79 \global\parskip 6pt plus 1pt
80 @end tex
81 @end ifset
82
83 @c For all sized formats: print within-book cross
84 @c reference with ``...'' rather than [...]
85
86 @c This works with the texinfo.tex file, version 2003-05-04.08,
87 @c in the Texinfo version 4.6 of the 2003 Jun 13 distribution.
88
89 @tex
90 \if \xrefprintnodename
91 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{\unskip, ``#1''}
92 \else
93 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{ ``#1''}
94 \fi
95 % \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{, ``#1''}
96 @end tex
97
98 @c ----------------------------------------------------
99
100 @dircategory Emacs lisp
101 @direntry
102 * Emacs Lisp Intro: (eintr). A simple introduction to Emacs Lisp programming.
103 @end direntry
104
105 @copying
106 This is an @cite{Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp}, for
107 people who are not programmers.
108 @sp 1
109 @iftex
110 Edition @value{edition-number}, @value{update-date}
111 @end iftex
112 @ifnottex
113 Distributed with Emacs version @value{EMACSVER}.
114 @end ifnottex
115 @sp 1
116 Copyright @copyright{} 1990--1995, 1997, 2001--2015 Free Software
117 Foundation, Inc.
118 @sp 1
119
120 @iftex
121 Published by the:@*
122
123 GNU Press, @hfill @uref{http://www.fsf.org/licensing/gnu-press/}@*
124 a division of the @hfill email: @email{sales@@fsf.org}@*
125 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @hfill Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942@*
126 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor @hfill Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652@*
127 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
128 @end iftex
129
130 @ifnottex
131 Printed copies available from @uref{http://shop.fsf.org/}. Published by:
132
133 @example
134 GNU Press, http://www.fsf.org/licensing/gnu-press/
135 a division of the email: sales@@fsf.org
136 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942
137 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652
138 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
139 @end example
140 @end ifnottex
141
142 @sp 1
143 ISBN 1-882114-43-4
144
145 @quotation
146 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
147 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
148 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; there
149 being no Invariant Section, with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU
150 Manual'', and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of
151 the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free
152 Documentation License''.
153
154 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have the freedom to
155 copy and modify this GNU manual. Buying copies from the FSF
156 supports it in developing GNU and promoting software freedom.''
157 @end quotation
158 @end copying
159
160 @c half title; two lines here, so do not use 'shorttitlepage'
161 @tex
162 {\begingroup%
163 \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{An Introduction to}%
164 \endgroup}%
165 {\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 0.25in \chaprm%
166 \centerline{Programming in Emacs Lisp}%
167 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
168 @end tex
169
170 @titlepage
171 @sp 6
172 @center @titlefont{An Introduction to}
173 @sp 2
174 @center @titlefont{Programming in Emacs Lisp}
175 @sp 2
176 @center Revised Third Edition
177 @sp 4
178 @center by Robert J. Chassell
179
180 @page
181 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
182 @insertcopying
183 @end titlepage
184
185 @iftex
186 @headings off
187 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
188 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
189 @end iftex
190
191 @ifnothtml
192 @c Keep T.O.C. short by tightening up for largebook
193 @ifset largebook
194 @tex
195 \global\parskip 2pt plus 1pt
196 \global\advance\baselineskip by -1pt
197 @end tex
198 @end ifset
199 @end ifnothtml
200
201 @shortcontents
202 @contents
203
204 @ifnottex
205 @node Top
206 @top An Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp
207
208 @ifset WWW_GNU_ORG
209 @html
210 <p>The homepage for GNU Emacs is at
211 <a href="/software/emacs/">http://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/</a>.<br>
212 To view this manual in other formats, click
213 <a href="/software/emacs/manual/eintr.html">here</a>.
214 @end html
215 @end ifset
216
217 @insertcopying
218
219 This master menu first lists each chapter and index; then it lists
220 every node in every chapter.
221 @end ifnottex
222
223 @c >>>> Set pageno appropriately <<<<
224
225 @c The first page of the Preface is a roman numeral; it is the first
226 @c right handed page after the Table of Contents; hence the following
227 @c setting must be for an odd negative number.
228
229 @c iftex
230 @c global@pageno = -11
231 @c end iftex
232
233 @set COUNT-WORDS count-words-example
234 @c Length of variable name chosen so that things still line up when expanded.
235
236 @menu
237 * Preface:: What to look for.
238 * List Processing:: What is Lisp?
239 * Practicing Evaluation:: Running several programs.
240 * Writing Defuns:: How to write function definitions.
241 * Buffer Walk Through:: Exploring a few buffer-related functions.
242 * More Complex:: A few, even more complex functions.
243 * Narrowing & Widening:: Restricting your and Emacs attention to
244 a region.
245 * car cdr & cons:: Fundamental functions in Lisp.
246 * Cutting & Storing Text:: Removing text and saving it.
247 * List Implementation:: How lists are implemented in the computer.
248 * Yanking:: Pasting stored text.
249 * Loops & Recursion:: How to repeat a process.
250 * Regexp Search:: Regular expression searches.
251 * Counting Words:: A review of repetition and regexps.
252 * Words in a defun:: Counting words in a @code{defun}.
253 * Readying a Graph:: A prototype graph printing function.
254 * Emacs Initialization:: How to write a @file{.emacs} file.
255 * Debugging:: How to run the Emacs Lisp debuggers.
256 * Conclusion:: Now you have the basics.
257 * the-the:: An appendix: how to find reduplicated words.
258 * Kill Ring:: An appendix: how the kill ring works.
259 * Full Graph:: How to create a graph with labeled axes.
260 * Free Software and Free Manuals::
261 * GNU Free Documentation License::
262 * Index::
263 * About the Author::
264
265 @detailmenu
266 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
267
268 Preface
269
270 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
271 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
272 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
273 * Lisp History::
274 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
275 * Thank You::
276
277 List Processing
278
279 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
280 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
281 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
282 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
283 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
284 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
285 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
286 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
287 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
288 * Summary:: The major points.
289 * Error Message Exercises::
290
291 Lisp Lists
292
293 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
294 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
295 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
296 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
297
298 The Lisp Interpreter
299
300 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
301 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
302
303 Evaluation
304
305 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
306 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
307
308 Variables
309
310 * fill-column Example::
311 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
312 without a function.
313 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
314
315 Arguments
316
317 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
318 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
319 of a variable or list.
320 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
321 variable number of arguments.
322 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
323 to a function.
324 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
325
326 Setting the Value of a Variable
327
328 * Using set:: Setting values.
329 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
330 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
331
332 Practicing Evaluation
333
334 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
335 causes evaluation.
336 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
337 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
338 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
339 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
340 the buffer.
341 * Evaluation Exercise::
342
343 How To Write Function Definitions
344
345 * Primitive Functions::
346 * defun:: The @code{defun} macro.
347 * Install:: Install a function definition.
348 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
349 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
350 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
351 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
352 * if:: What if?
353 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
354 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
355 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point and buffer.
356 * Review::
357 * defun Exercises::
358
359 Install a Function Definition
360
361 * Effect of installation::
362 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
363
364 Make a Function Interactive
365
366 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
367 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
368
369 @code{let}
370
371 * Prevent confusion::
372 * Parts of let Expression::
373 * Sample let Expression::
374 * Uninitialized let Variables::
375
376 The @code{if} Special Form
377
378 * if in more detail::
379 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
380
381 Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
382
383 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
384
385 @code{save-excursion}
386
387 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
388 * Template for save-excursion::
389
390 A Few Buffer-Related Functions
391
392 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
393 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
394 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
395 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
396 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
397 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
398 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
399 * Buffer Exercises::
400
401 The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
402
403 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
404 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
405
406 The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
407
408 * append-to-buffer overview::
409 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
410 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
411 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
412
413 A Few More Complex Functions
414
415 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
416 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
417 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
418 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
419 * Second Buffer Related Review::
420 * optional Exercise::
421
422 The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
423
424 * insert-buffer code::
425 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
426 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
427 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
428 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
429 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
430 * New insert-buffer::
431
432 The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
433
434 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
435 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
436
437 Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
438
439 * Optional Arguments::
440 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
441 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
442
443 @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
444
445 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
446 * Large buffer case::
447 * Small buffer case::
448
449 Narrowing and Widening
450
451 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
452 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
453 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
454 * narrow Exercise::
455
456 @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
457
458 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
459 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
460 * cons:: Constructing a list.
461 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
462 * nth::
463 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
464 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
465 * cons Exercise::
466
467 @code{cons}
468
469 * Build a list::
470 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
471
472 Cutting and Storing Text
473
474 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
475 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
476 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
477 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
478 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
479 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
480 * cons & search-fwd Review::
481 * search Exercises::
482
483 @code{zap-to-char}
484
485 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
486 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
487 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
488 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
489 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
490 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
491
492 @code{kill-region}
493
494 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
495 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
496 * Lisp macro::
497
498 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
499
500 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
501 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
502
503 The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
504
505 * last-command & this-command::
506 * kill-append function::
507 * kill-new function::
508
509 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
510
511 * See variable current value::
512 * defvar and asterisk::
513
514 How Lists are Implemented
515
516 * Lists diagrammed::
517 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
518 * List Exercise::
519
520 Yanking Text Back
521
522 * Kill Ring Overview::
523 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
524 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
525
526 Loops and Recursion
527
528 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
529 * dolist dotimes::
530 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
531 * Looping exercise::
532
533 @code{while}
534
535 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
536 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
537 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
538 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
539 * Incrementing Loop Details::
540 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
541
542 Details of an Incrementing Loop
543
544 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
545 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
546 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
547
548 Loop with a Decrementing Counter
549
550 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
551 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
552 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
553
554 Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
555
556 * dolist::
557 * dotimes::
558
559 Recursion
560
561 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
562 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
563 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
564 * Recursive triangle function::
565 * Recursion with cond::
566 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
567 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
568 * No deferment solution::
569
570 Recursion in Place of a Counter
571
572 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
573 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
574
575 Recursive Patterns
576
577 * Every::
578 * Accumulate::
579 * Keep::
580
581 Regular Expression Searches
582
583 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
584 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
585 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
586 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
587 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
588 * Regexp Review::
589 * re-search Exercises::
590
591 @code{forward-sentence}
592
593 * Complete forward-sentence::
594 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
595 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
596
597 @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
598
599 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
600 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
601 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
602
603 Counting: Repetition and Regexps
604
605 * Why Count Words::
606 * @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
607 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
608 * Counting Exercise::
609
610 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} Function
611
612 * Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
613 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
614
615 Counting Words in a @code{defun}
616
617 * Divide and Conquer::
618 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
619 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
620 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
621 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
622 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
623 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
624 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
625 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
626 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
627
628 Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
629
630 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
631 * append:: Attach one list to another.
632
633 Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
634
635 * Data for Display in Detail::
636 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
637 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
638 * Counting function definitions::
639
640 Readying a Graph
641
642 * Columns of a graph::
643 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
644 * recursive-graph-body-print::
645 * Printed Axes::
646 * Line Graph Exercise::
647
648 Your @file{.emacs} File
649
650 * Default Configuration::
651 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
652 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
653 * Beginning init File:: How to write a @file{.emacs} init file.
654 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
655 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
656 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
657 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
658 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
659 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
660 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
661 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
662 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
663 * Miscellaneous::
664 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
665
666 Debugging
667
668 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
669 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
670 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
671 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
672 * Debugging Exercises::
673
674 Handling the Kill Ring
675
676 * What the Kill Ring Does::
677 * current-kill::
678 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
679 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
680 * ring file::
681
682 The @code{current-kill} Function
683
684 * Code for current-kill::
685 * Understanding current-kill::
686
687 @code{current-kill} in Outline
688
689 * Body of current-kill::
690 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
691 * Determining the Element::
692
693 A Graph with Labeled Axes
694
695 * Labeled Example::
696 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
697 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
698 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
699 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
700
701 The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
702
703 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
704 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
705 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
706 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
707 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
708 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
709
710 The @code{print-X-axis} Function
711
712 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
713 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
714
715 Printing the Whole Graph
716
717 * The final version:: A few changes.
718 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
719 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
720 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
721 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
722 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
723 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
724
725 @end detailmenu
726 @end menu
727
728 @node Preface
729 @unnumbered Preface
730
731 Most of the GNU Emacs integrated environment is written in the programming
732 language called Emacs Lisp. The code written in this programming
733 language is the software---the sets of instructions---that tell the
734 computer what to do when you give it commands. Emacs is designed so
735 that you can write new code in Emacs Lisp and easily install it as an
736 extension to the editor.
737
738 (GNU Emacs is sometimes called an ``extensible editor'', but it does
739 much more than provide editing capabilities. It is better to refer to
740 Emacs as an ``extensible computing environment''. However, that
741 phrase is quite a mouthful. It is easier to refer to Emacs simply as
742 an editor. Moreover, everything you do in Emacs---find the Mayan date
743 and phases of the moon, simplify polynomials, debug code, manage
744 files, read letters, write books---all these activities are kinds of
745 editing in the most general sense of the word.)
746
747 @menu
748 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
749 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
750 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
751 * Lisp History::
752 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
753 * Thank You::
754 @end menu
755
756 @ifnottex
757 @node Why
758 @unnumberedsec Why Study Emacs Lisp?
759 @end ifnottex
760
761 Although Emacs Lisp is usually thought of in association only with Emacs,
762 it is a full computer programming language. You can use Emacs Lisp as
763 you would any other programming language.
764
765 Perhaps you want to understand programming; perhaps you want to extend
766 Emacs; or perhaps you want to become a programmer. This introduction to
767 Emacs Lisp is designed to get you started: to guide you in learning the
768 fundamentals of programming, and more importantly, to show you how you
769 can teach yourself to go further.
770
771 @node On Reading this Text
772 @unnumberedsec On Reading this Text
773
774 All through this document, you will see little sample programs you can
775 run inside of Emacs. If you read this document in Info inside of GNU
776 Emacs, you can run the programs as they appear. (This is easy to do and
777 is explained when the examples are presented.) Alternatively, you can
778 read this introduction as a printed book while sitting beside a computer
779 running Emacs. (This is what I like to do; I like printed books.) If
780 you don't have a running Emacs beside you, you can still read this book,
781 but in this case, it is best to treat it as a novel or as a travel guide
782 to a country not yet visited: interesting, but not the same as being
783 there.
784
785 Much of this introduction is dedicated to walkthroughs or guided tours
786 of code used in GNU Emacs. These tours are designed for two purposes:
787 first, to give you familiarity with real, working code (code you use
788 every day); and, second, to give you familiarity with the way Emacs
789 works. It is interesting to see how a working environment is
790 implemented.
791 Also, I
792 hope that you will pick up the habit of browsing through source code.
793 You can learn from it and mine it for ideas. Having GNU Emacs is like
794 having a dragon's cave of treasures.
795
796 In addition to learning about Emacs as an editor and Emacs Lisp as a
797 programming language, the examples and guided tours will give you an
798 opportunity to get acquainted with Emacs as a Lisp programming
799 environment. GNU Emacs supports programming and provides tools that
800 you will want to become comfortable using, such as @kbd{M-.} (the key
801 which invokes the @code{find-tag} command). You will also learn about
802 buffers and other objects that are part of the environment.
803 Learning about these features of Emacs is like learning new routes
804 around your home town.
805
806 @ignore
807 In addition, I have written several programs as extended examples.
808 Although these are examples, the programs are real. I use them.
809 Other people use them. You may use them. Beyond the fragments of
810 programs used for illustrations, there is very little in here that is
811 ``just for teaching purposes''; what you see is used. This is a great
812 advantage of Emacs Lisp: it is easy to learn to use it for work.
813 @end ignore
814
815 Finally, I hope to convey some of the skills for using Emacs to
816 learn aspects of programming that you don't know. You can often use
817 Emacs to help you understand what puzzles you or to find out how to do
818 something new. This self-reliance is not only a pleasure, but an
819 advantage.
820
821 @node Who You Are
822 @unnumberedsec For Whom This is Written
823
824 This text is written as an elementary introduction for people who are
825 not programmers. If you are a programmer, you may not be satisfied with
826 this primer. The reason is that you may have become expert at reading
827 reference manuals and be put off by the way this text is organized.
828
829 An expert programmer who reviewed this text said to me:
830
831 @quotation
832 @i{I prefer to learn from reference manuals. I ``dive into'' each
833 paragraph, and ``come up for air'' between paragraphs.}
834
835 @i{When I get to the end of a paragraph, I assume that that subject is
836 done, finished, that I know everything I need (with the
837 possible exception of the case when the next paragraph starts talking
838 about it in more detail). I expect that a well written reference manual
839 will not have a lot of redundancy, and that it will have excellent
840 pointers to the (one) place where the information I want is.}
841 @end quotation
842
843 This introduction is not written for this person!
844
845 Firstly, I try to say everything at least three times: first, to
846 introduce it; second, to show it in context; and third, to show it in a
847 different context, or to review it.
848
849 Secondly, I hardly ever put all the information about a subject in one
850 place, much less in one paragraph. To my way of thinking, that imposes
851 too heavy a burden on the reader. Instead I try to explain only what
852 you need to know at the time. (Sometimes I include a little extra
853 information so you won't be surprised later when the additional
854 information is formally introduced.)
855
856 When you read this text, you are not expected to learn everything the
857 first time. Frequently, you need only make, as it were, a ``nodding
858 acquaintance'' with some of the items mentioned. My hope is that I have
859 structured the text and given you enough hints that you will be alert to
860 what is important, and concentrate on it.
861
862 You will need to ``dive into'' some paragraphs; there is no other way
863 to read them. But I have tried to keep down the number of such
864 paragraphs. This book is intended as an approachable hill, rather than
865 as a daunting mountain.
866
867 This introduction to @cite{Programming in Emacs Lisp} has a companion
868 document,
869 @iftex
870 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
871 @end iftex
872 @ifnottex
873 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
874 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
875 @end ifnottex
876 The reference manual has more detail than this introduction. In the
877 reference manual, all the information about one topic is concentrated
878 in one place. You should turn to it if you are like the programmer
879 quoted above. And, of course, after you have read this
880 @cite{Introduction}, you will find the @cite{Reference Manual} useful
881 when you are writing your own programs.
882
883 @node Lisp History
884 @unnumberedsec Lisp History
885 @cindex Lisp history
886
887 Lisp was first developed in the late 1950s at the Massachusetts
888 Institute of Technology for research in artificial intelligence. The
889 great power of the Lisp language makes it superior for other purposes as
890 well, such as writing editor commands and integrated environments.
891
892 @cindex Maclisp
893 @cindex Common Lisp
894 GNU Emacs Lisp is largely inspired by Maclisp, which was written at MIT
895 in the 1960s. It is somewhat inspired by Common Lisp, which became a
896 standard in the 1980s. However, Emacs Lisp is much simpler than Common
897 Lisp. (The standard Emacs distribution contains an optional extensions
898 file, @file{cl.el}, that adds many Common Lisp features to Emacs Lisp.)
899
900 @node Note for Novices
901 @unnumberedsec A Note for Novices
902
903 If you don't know GNU Emacs, you can still read this document
904 profitably. However, I recommend you learn Emacs, if only to learn to
905 move around your computer screen. You can teach yourself how to use
906 Emacs with the built-in tutorial. To use it, type @kbd{C-h t}. (This
907 means you press and release the @key{CTRL} key and the @kbd{h} at the
908 same time, and then press and release @kbd{t}.)
909
910 Also, I often refer to one of Emacs's standard commands by listing the
911 keys which you press to invoke the command and then giving the name of
912 the command in parentheses, like this: @kbd{M-C-\}
913 (@code{indent-region}). What this means is that the
914 @code{indent-region} command is customarily invoked by typing
915 @kbd{M-C-\}. (You can, if you wish, change the keys that are typed to
916 invoke the command; this is called @dfn{rebinding}. @xref{Keymaps, ,
917 Keymaps}.) The abbreviation @kbd{M-C-\} means that you type your
918 @key{META} key, @key{CTRL} key and @key{\} key all at the same time.
919 (On many modern keyboards the @key{META} key is labeled
920 @key{ALT}.)
921 Sometimes a combination like this is called a keychord, since it is
922 similar to the way you play a chord on a piano. If your keyboard does
923 not have a @key{META} key, the @key{ESC} key prefix is used in place
924 of it. In this case, @kbd{M-C-\} means that you press and release your
925 @key{ESC} key and then type the @key{CTRL} key and the @key{\} key at
926 the same time. But usually @kbd{M-C-\} means press the @key{CTRL} key
927 along with the key that is labeled @key{ALT} and, at the same time,
928 press the @key{\} key.
929
930 In addition to typing a lone keychord, you can prefix what you type
931 with @kbd{C-u}, which is called the ``universal argument''. The
932 @kbd{C-u} keychord passes an argument to the subsequent command.
933 Thus, to indent a region of plain text by 6 spaces, mark the region,
934 and then type @w{@kbd{C-u 6 M-C-\}}. (If you do not specify a number,
935 Emacs either passes the number 4 to the command or otherwise runs the
936 command differently than it would otherwise.) @xref{Arguments, ,
937 Numeric Arguments, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
938
939 If you are reading this in Info using GNU Emacs, you can read through
940 this whole document just by pressing the space bar, @key{SPC}.
941 (To learn about Info, type @kbd{C-h i} and then select Info.)
942
943 A note on terminology: when I use the word Lisp alone, I often am
944 referring to the various dialects of Lisp in general, but when I speak
945 of Emacs Lisp, I am referring to GNU Emacs Lisp in particular.
946
947 @node Thank You
948 @unnumberedsec Thank You
949
950 My thanks to all who helped me with this book. My especial thanks to
951 @r{Jim Blandy}, @r{Noah Friedman}, @w{Jim Kingdon}, @r{Roland
952 McGrath}, @w{Frank Ritter}, @w{Randy Smith}, @w{Richard M.
953 Stallman}, and @w{Melissa Weisshaus}. My thanks also go to both
954 @w{Philip Johnson} and @w{David Stampe} for their patient
955 encouragement. My mistakes are my own.
956
957 @flushright
958 Robert J. Chassell
959 @ifnothtml
960 @email{bob@@gnu.org}
961 @end ifnothtml
962 @ifhtml
963 bob@@gnu.org
964 @end ifhtml
965 @end flushright
966
967 @c ================ Beginning of main text ================
968
969 @c Start main text on right-hand (verso) page
970
971 @tex
972 \par\vfill\supereject
973 \headings off
974 \ifodd\pageno
975 \par\vfill\supereject
976 \else
977 \par\vfill\supereject
978 \page\hbox{}\page
979 \par\vfill\supereject
980 \fi
981 @end tex
982
983 @c Note: this resetting of the page number back to 1 causes TeX to gripe
984 @c about already having seen page numbers 1-4 before (in the preface):
985 @c pdfTeX warning (ext4): destination with the same identifier (name{1})
986 @c has been already used, duplicate ignored
987 @c I guess that is harmless (what happens if a later part of the text
988 @c makes a link to something in the first 4 pages though?).
989 @c E.g., note that the Emacs manual has a preface, but does not bother
990 @c resetting the page numbers back to 1 after that.
991 @iftex
992 @headings off
993 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
994 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
995 @global@pageno = 1
996 @end iftex
997
998 @node List Processing
999 @chapter List Processing
1000
1001 To the untutored eye, Lisp is a strange programming language. In Lisp
1002 code there are parentheses everywhere. Some people even claim that
1003 the name stands for ``Lots of Isolated Silly Parentheses''. But the
1004 claim is unwarranted. Lisp stands for LISt Processing, and the
1005 programming language handles @emph{lists} (and lists of lists) by
1006 putting them between parentheses. The parentheses mark the boundaries
1007 of the list. Sometimes a list is preceded by a single apostrophe or
1008 quotation mark, @samp{'}@footnote{The single apostrophe or quotation
1009 mark is an abbreviation for the function @code{quote}; you need not
1010 think about functions now; functions are defined in @ref{Making
1011 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}.} Lists are the basis of Lisp.
1012
1013 @menu
1014 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
1015 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
1016 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
1017 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
1018 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
1019 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
1020 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
1021 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
1022 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
1023 * Summary:: The major points.
1024 * Error Message Exercises::
1025 @end menu
1026
1027 @node Lisp Lists
1028 @section Lisp Lists
1029 @cindex Lisp Lists
1030
1031 In Lisp, a list looks like this: @code{'(rose violet daisy buttercup)}.
1032 This list is preceded by a single apostrophe. It could just as well be
1033 written as follows, which looks more like the kind of list you are likely
1034 to be familiar with:
1035
1036 @smallexample
1037 @group
1038 '(rose
1039 violet
1040 daisy
1041 buttercup)
1042 @end group
1043 @end smallexample
1044
1045 @noindent
1046 The elements of this list are the names of the four different flowers,
1047 separated from each other by whitespace and surrounded by parentheses,
1048 like flowers in a field with a stone wall around them.
1049 @cindex Flowers in a field
1050
1051 @menu
1052 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
1053 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
1054 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
1055 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
1056 @end menu
1057
1058 @ifnottex
1059 @node Numbers Lists
1060 @unnumberedsubsec Numbers, Lists inside of Lists
1061 @end ifnottex
1062
1063 Lists can also have numbers in them, as in this list: @code{(+ 2 2)}.
1064 This list has a plus-sign, @samp{+}, followed by two @samp{2}s, each
1065 separated by whitespace.
1066
1067 In Lisp, both data and programs are represented the same way; that is,
1068 they are both lists of words, numbers, or other lists, separated by
1069 whitespace and surrounded by parentheses. (Since a program looks like
1070 data, one program may easily serve as data for another; this is a very
1071 powerful feature of Lisp.) (Incidentally, these two parenthetical
1072 remarks are @emph{not} Lisp lists, because they contain @samp{;} and
1073 @samp{.} as punctuation marks.)
1074
1075 @need 1200
1076 Here is another list, this time with a list inside of it:
1077
1078 @smallexample
1079 '(this list has (a list inside of it))
1080 @end smallexample
1081
1082 The components of this list are the words @samp{this}, @samp{list},
1083 @samp{has}, and the list @samp{(a list inside of it)}. The interior
1084 list is made up of the words @samp{a}, @samp{list}, @samp{inside},
1085 @samp{of}, @samp{it}.
1086
1087 @node Lisp Atoms
1088 @subsection Lisp Atoms
1089 @cindex Lisp Atoms
1090
1091 In Lisp, what we have been calling words are called @dfn{atoms}. This
1092 term comes from the historical meaning of the word atom, which means
1093 ``indivisible''. As far as Lisp is concerned, the words we have been
1094 using in the lists cannot be divided into any smaller parts and still
1095 mean the same thing as part of a program; likewise with numbers and
1096 single character symbols like @samp{+}. On the other hand, unlike an
1097 ancient atom, a list can be split into parts. (@xref{car cdr & cons,
1098 , @code{car} @code{cdr} & @code{cons} Fundamental Functions}.)
1099
1100 In a list, atoms are separated from each other by whitespace. They can be
1101 right next to a parenthesis.
1102
1103 @cindex @samp{empty list} defined
1104 Technically speaking, a list in Lisp consists of parentheses surrounding
1105 atoms separated by whitespace or surrounding other lists or surrounding
1106 both atoms and other lists. A list can have just one atom in it or
1107 have nothing in it at all. A list with nothing in it looks like this:
1108 @code{()}, and is called the @dfn{empty list}. Unlike anything else, an
1109 empty list is considered both an atom and a list at the same time.
1110
1111 @cindex Symbolic expressions, introduced
1112 @cindex @samp{expression} defined
1113 @cindex @samp{form} defined
1114 The printed representation of both atoms and lists are called
1115 @dfn{symbolic expressions} or, more concisely, @dfn{s-expressions}.
1116 The word @dfn{expression} by itself can refer to either the printed
1117 representation, or to the atom or list as it is held internally in the
1118 computer. Often, people use the term @dfn{expression}
1119 indiscriminately. (Also, in many texts, the word @dfn{form} is used
1120 as a synonym for expression.)
1121
1122 Incidentally, the atoms that make up our universe were named such when
1123 they were thought to be indivisible; but it has been found that physical
1124 atoms are not indivisible. Parts can split off an atom or it can
1125 fission into two parts of roughly equal size. Physical atoms were named
1126 prematurely, before their truer nature was found. In Lisp, certain
1127 kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated into parts; but the
1128 mechanism for doing this is different from the mechanism for splitting a
1129 list. As far as list operations are concerned, the atoms of a list are
1130 unsplittable.
1131
1132 As in English, the meanings of the component letters of a Lisp atom
1133 are different from the meaning the letters make as a word. For
1134 example, the word for the South American sloth, the @samp{ai}, is
1135 completely different from the two words, @samp{a}, and @samp{i}.
1136
1137 There are many kinds of atom in nature but only a few in Lisp: for
1138 example, @dfn{numbers}, such as 37, 511, or 1729, and @dfn{symbols}, such
1139 as @samp{+}, @samp{foo}, or @samp{forward-line}. The words we have
1140 listed in the examples above are all symbols. In everyday Lisp
1141 conversation, the word ``atom'' is not often used, because programmers
1142 usually try to be more specific about what kind of atom they are dealing
1143 with. Lisp programming is mostly about symbols (and sometimes numbers)
1144 within lists. (Incidentally, the preceding three word parenthetical
1145 remark is a proper list in Lisp, since it consists of atoms, which in
1146 this case are symbols, separated by whitespace and enclosed by
1147 parentheses, without any non-Lisp punctuation.)
1148
1149 @need 1250
1150 Text between double quotation marks---even sentences or
1151 paragraphs---is also an atom. Here is an example:
1152 @cindex Text between double quotation marks
1153
1154 @smallexample
1155 '(this list includes "text between quotation marks.")
1156 @end smallexample
1157
1158 @cindex @samp{string} defined
1159 @noindent
1160 In Lisp, all of the quoted text including the punctuation mark and the
1161 blank spaces is a single atom. This kind of atom is called a
1162 @dfn{string} (for ``string of characters'') and is the sort of thing that
1163 is used for messages that a computer can print for a human to read.
1164 Strings are a different kind of atom than numbers or symbols and are
1165 used differently.
1166
1167 @node Whitespace in Lists
1168 @subsection Whitespace in Lists
1169 @cindex Whitespace in lists
1170
1171 @need 1200
1172 The amount of whitespace in a list does not matter. From the point of view
1173 of the Lisp language,
1174
1175 @smallexample
1176 @group
1177 '(this list
1178 looks like this)
1179 @end group
1180 @end smallexample
1181
1182 @need 800
1183 @noindent
1184 is exactly the same as this:
1185
1186 @smallexample
1187 '(this list looks like this)
1188 @end smallexample
1189
1190 Both examples show what to Lisp is the same list, the list made up of
1191 the symbols @samp{this}, @samp{list}, @samp{looks}, @samp{like}, and
1192 @samp{this} in that order.
1193
1194 Extra whitespace and newlines are designed to make a list more readable
1195 by humans. When Lisp reads the expression, it gets rid of all the extra
1196 whitespace (but it needs to have at least one space between atoms in
1197 order to tell them apart.)
1198
1199 Odd as it seems, the examples we have seen cover almost all of what Lisp
1200 lists look like! Every other list in Lisp looks more or less like one
1201 of these examples, except that the list may be longer and more complex.
1202 In brief, a list is between parentheses, a string is between quotation
1203 marks, a symbol looks like a word, and a number looks like a number.
1204 (For certain situations, square brackets, dots and a few other special
1205 characters may be used; however, we will go quite far without them.)
1206
1207 @node Typing Lists
1208 @subsection GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists
1209 @cindex Help typing lists
1210 @cindex Formatting help
1211
1212 When you type a Lisp expression in GNU Emacs using either Lisp
1213 Interaction mode or Emacs Lisp mode, you have available to you several
1214 commands to format the Lisp expression so it is easy to read. For
1215 example, pressing the @key{TAB} key automatically indents the line the
1216 cursor is on by the right amount. A command to properly indent the
1217 code in a region is customarily bound to @kbd{M-C-\}. Indentation is
1218 designed so that you can see which elements of a list belong to which
1219 list---elements of a sub-list are indented more than the elements of
1220 the enclosing list.
1221
1222 In addition, when you type a closing parenthesis, Emacs momentarily
1223 jumps the cursor back to the matching opening parenthesis, so you can
1224 see which one it is. This is very useful, since every list you type
1225 in Lisp must have its closing parenthesis match its opening
1226 parenthesis. (@xref{Major Modes, , Major Modes, emacs, The GNU Emacs
1227 Manual}, for more information about Emacs's modes.)
1228
1229 @node Run a Program
1230 @section Run a Program
1231 @cindex Run a program
1232 @cindex Program, running one
1233
1234 @cindex @samp{evaluate} defined
1235 A list in Lisp---any list---is a program ready to run. If you run it
1236 (for which the Lisp jargon is @dfn{evaluate}), the computer will do one
1237 of three things: do nothing except return to you the list itself; send
1238 you an error message; or, treat the first symbol in the list as a
1239 command to do something. (Usually, of course, it is the last of these
1240 three things that you really want!)
1241
1242 @c use code for the single apostrophe, not samp.
1243 @findex quote
1244 @cindex @code{'} for quoting
1245 @cindex quoting using apostrophe
1246 @cindex apostrophe for quoting
1247 The single apostrophe, @code{'}, that I put in front of some of the
1248 example lists in preceding sections is called a @dfn{quote}; when it
1249 precedes a list, it tells Lisp to do nothing with the list, other than
1250 take it as it is written. But if there is no quote preceding a list,
1251 the first item of the list is special: it is a command for the computer
1252 to obey. (In Lisp, these commands are called @emph{functions}.) The list
1253 @code{(+ 2 2)} shown above did not have a quote in front of it, so Lisp
1254 understands that the @code{+} is an instruction to do something with the
1255 rest of the list: add the numbers that follow.
1256
1257 @need 1250
1258 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs in Info, here is how you can
1259 evaluate such a list: place your cursor immediately after the right
1260 hand parenthesis of the following list and then type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1261
1262 @smallexample
1263 (+ 2 2)
1264 @end smallexample
1265
1266 @c use code for the number four, not samp.
1267 @noindent
1268 You will see the number @code{4} appear in the echo area. (In the
1269 jargon, what you have just done is ``evaluate the list.'' The echo area
1270 is the line at the bottom of the screen that displays or ``echoes''
1271 text.) Now try the same thing with a quoted list: place the cursor
1272 right after the following list and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1273
1274 @smallexample
1275 '(this is a quoted list)
1276 @end smallexample
1277
1278 @noindent
1279 You will see @code{(this is a quoted list)} appear in the echo area.
1280
1281 @cindex Lisp interpreter, explained
1282 @cindex Interpreter, Lisp, explained
1283 In both cases, what you are doing is giving a command to the program
1284 inside of GNU Emacs called the @dfn{Lisp interpreter}---giving the
1285 interpreter a command to evaluate the expression. The name of the Lisp
1286 interpreter comes from the word for the task done by a human who comes
1287 up with the meaning of an expression---who ``interprets'' it.
1288
1289 You can also evaluate an atom that is not part of a list---one that is
1290 not surrounded by parentheses; again, the Lisp interpreter translates
1291 from the humanly readable expression to the language of the computer.
1292 But before discussing this (@pxref{Variables}), we will discuss what the
1293 Lisp interpreter does when you make an error.
1294
1295 @node Making Errors
1296 @section Generate an Error Message
1297 @cindex Generate an error message
1298 @cindex Error message generation
1299
1300 Partly so you won't worry if you do it accidentally, we will now give
1301 a command to the Lisp interpreter that generates an error message.
1302 This is a harmless activity; and indeed, we will often try to generate
1303 error messages intentionally. Once you understand the jargon, error
1304 messages can be informative. Instead of being called ``error''
1305 messages, they should be called ``help'' messages. They are like
1306 signposts to a traveler in a strange country; deciphering them can be
1307 hard, but once understood, they can point the way.
1308
1309 The error message is generated by a built-in GNU Emacs debugger. We
1310 will ``enter the debugger''. You get out of the debugger by typing @code{q}.
1311
1312 What we will do is evaluate a list that is not quoted and does not
1313 have a meaningful command as its first element. Here is a list almost
1314 exactly the same as the one we just used, but without the single-quote
1315 in front of it. Position the cursor right after it and type @kbd{C-x
1316 C-e}:
1317
1318 @smallexample
1319 (this is an unquoted list)
1320 @end smallexample
1321
1322 @ignore
1323 @noindent
1324 What you see depends on which version of Emacs you are running. GNU
1325 Emacs version 22 provides more information than version 20 and before.
1326 First, the more recent result of generating an error; then the
1327 earlier, version 20 result.
1328
1329 @need 1250
1330 @noindent
1331 In GNU Emacs version 22, a @file{*Backtrace*} window will open up and
1332 you will see the following in it:
1333 @end ignore
1334
1335 A @file{*Backtrace*} window will open up and you should see the
1336 following in it:
1337
1338 @smallexample
1339 @group
1340 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1341 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1342 (this is an unquoted list)
1343 eval((this is an unquoted list))
1344 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1345 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1346 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1347 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1348 @end group
1349 @end smallexample
1350
1351 @need 1200
1352 @noindent
1353 Your cursor will be in this window (you may have to wait a few seconds
1354 before it becomes visible). To quit the debugger and make the
1355 debugger window go away, type:
1356
1357 @smallexample
1358 q
1359 @end smallexample
1360
1361 @noindent
1362 Please type @kbd{q} right now, so you become confident that you can
1363 get out of the debugger. Then, type @kbd{C-x C-e} again to re-enter
1364 it.
1365
1366 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1367 Based on what we already know, we can almost read this error message.
1368
1369 You read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells
1370 you what Emacs did. When you typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, you made an
1371 interactive call to the command @code{eval-last-sexp}. @code{eval} is
1372 an abbreviation for ``evaluate'' and @code{sexp} is an abbreviation for
1373 ``symbolic expression''. The command means ``evaluate last symbolic
1374 expression'', which is the expression just before your cursor.
1375
1376 Each line above tells you what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
1377 The most recent action is at the top. The buffer is called the
1378 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer because it enables you to track Emacs
1379 backwards.
1380
1381 @need 800
1382 At the top of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, you see the line:
1383
1384 @smallexample
1385 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1386 @end smallexample
1387
1388 @noindent
1389 The Lisp interpreter tried to evaluate the first atom of the list, the
1390 word @samp{this}. It is this action that generated the error message
1391 @samp{void-function this}.
1392
1393 The message contains the words @samp{void-function} and @samp{this}.
1394
1395 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1396 The word @samp{function} was mentioned once before. It is a very
1397 important word. For our purposes, we can define it by saying that a
1398 @dfn{function} is a set of instructions to the computer that tell the
1399 computer to do something.
1400
1401 Now we can begin to understand the error message: @samp{void-function
1402 this}. The function (that is, the word @samp{this}) does not have a
1403 definition of any set of instructions for the computer to carry out.
1404
1405 The slightly odd word, @samp{void-function}, is designed to cover the
1406 way Emacs Lisp is implemented, which is that when a symbol does not
1407 have a function definition attached to it, the place that should
1408 contain the instructions is ``void''.
1409
1410 On the other hand, since we were able to add 2 plus 2 successfully, by
1411 evaluating @code{(+ 2 2)}, we can infer that the symbol @code{+} must
1412 have a set of instructions for the computer to obey and those
1413 instructions must be to add the numbers that follow the @code{+}.
1414
1415 It is possible to prevent Emacs entering the debugger in cases like
1416 this. We do not explain how to do that here, but we will mention what
1417 the result looks like, because you may encounter a similar situation
1418 if there is a bug in some Emacs code that you are using. In such
1419 cases, you will see only one line of error message; it will appear in
1420 the echo area and look like this:
1421
1422 @smallexample
1423 Symbol's function definition is void:@: this
1424 @end smallexample
1425
1426 @noindent
1427 @ignore
1428 (Also, your terminal may beep at you---some do, some don't; and others
1429 blink. This is just a device to get your attention.)
1430 @end ignore
1431 The message goes away as soon as you type a key, even just to
1432 move the cursor.
1433
1434 We know the meaning of the word @samp{Symbol}. It refers to the first
1435 atom of the list, the word @samp{this}. The word @samp{function}
1436 refers to the instructions that tell the computer what to do.
1437 (Technically, the symbol tells the computer where to find the
1438 instructions, but this is a complication we can ignore for the
1439 moment.)
1440
1441 The error message can be understood: @samp{Symbol's function
1442 definition is void:@: this}. The symbol (that is, the word
1443 @samp{this}) lacks instructions for the computer to carry out.
1444
1445 @node Names & Definitions
1446 @section Symbol Names and Function Definitions
1447 @cindex Symbol names
1448
1449 We can articulate another characteristic of Lisp based on what we have
1450 discussed so far---an important characteristic: a symbol, like
1451 @code{+}, is not itself the set of instructions for the computer to
1452 carry out. Instead, the symbol is used, perhaps temporarily, as a way
1453 of locating the definition or set of instructions. What we see is the
1454 name through which the instructions can be found. Names of people
1455 work the same way. I can be referred to as @samp{Bob}; however, I am
1456 not the letters @samp{B}, @samp{o}, @samp{b} but am, or was, the
1457 consciousness consistently associated with a particular life-form.
1458 The name is not me, but it can be used to refer to me.
1459
1460 In Lisp, one set of instructions can be attached to several names.
1461 For example, the computer instructions for adding numbers can be
1462 linked to the symbol @code{plus} as well as to the symbol @code{+}
1463 (and are in some dialects of Lisp). Among humans, I can be referred
1464 to as @samp{Robert} as well as @samp{Bob} and by other words as well.
1465
1466 On the other hand, a symbol can have only one function definition
1467 attached to it at a time. Otherwise, the computer would be confused as
1468 to which definition to use. If this were the case among people, only
1469 one person in the world could be named @samp{Bob}. However, the function
1470 definition to which the name refers can be changed readily.
1471 (@xref{Install, , Install a Function Definition}.)
1472
1473 Since Emacs Lisp is large, it is customary to name symbols in a way
1474 that identifies the part of Emacs to which the function belongs.
1475 Thus, all the names for functions that deal with Texinfo start with
1476 @samp{texinfo-} and those for functions that deal with reading mail
1477 start with @samp{rmail-}.
1478
1479 @node Lisp Interpreter
1480 @section The Lisp Interpreter
1481 @cindex Lisp interpreter, what it does
1482 @cindex Interpreter, what it does
1483
1484 Based on what we have seen, we can now start to figure out what the
1485 Lisp interpreter does when we command it to evaluate a list.
1486 First, it looks to see whether there is a quote before the list; if
1487 there is, the interpreter just gives us the list. On the other
1488 hand, if there is no quote, the interpreter looks at the first element
1489 in the list and sees whether it has a function definition. If it does,
1490 the interpreter carries out the instructions in the function definition.
1491 Otherwise, the interpreter prints an error message.
1492
1493 This is how Lisp works. Simple. There are added complications which we
1494 will get to in a minute, but these are the fundamentals. Of course, to
1495 write Lisp programs, you need to know how to write function definitions
1496 and attach them to names, and how to do this without confusing either
1497 yourself or the computer.
1498
1499 @menu
1500 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
1501 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
1502 @end menu
1503
1504 @ifnottex
1505 @node Complications
1506 @unnumberedsubsec Complications
1507 @end ifnottex
1508
1509 Now, for the first complication. In addition to lists, the Lisp
1510 interpreter can evaluate a symbol that is not quoted and does not have
1511 parentheses around it. The Lisp interpreter will attempt to determine
1512 the symbol's value as a @dfn{variable}. This situation is described
1513 in the section on variables. (@xref{Variables}.)
1514
1515 @cindex Special form
1516 The second complication occurs because some functions are unusual and
1517 do not work in the usual manner. Those that don't are called
1518 @dfn{special forms}. They are used for special jobs, like defining a
1519 function, and there are not many of them. In the next few chapters,
1520 you will be introduced to several of the more important special forms.
1521
1522 As well as special forms, there are also @dfn{macros}. A macro
1523 is a construct defined in Lisp, which differs from a function in that it
1524 translates a Lisp expression into another expression that is to be
1525 evaluated in place of the original expression. (@xref{Lisp macro}.)
1526
1527 For the purposes of this introduction, you do not need to worry too much
1528 about whether something is a special form, macro, or ordinary function.
1529 For example, @code{if} is a special form (@pxref{if}), but @code{when}
1530 is a macro (@pxref{Lisp macro}). In earlier versions of Emacs,
1531 @code{defun} was a special form, but now it is a macro (@pxref{defun}).
1532 It still behaves in the same way.
1533
1534 The final complication is this: if the function that the
1535 Lisp interpreter is looking at is not a special form, and if it is part
1536 of a list, the Lisp interpreter looks to see whether the list has a list
1537 inside of it. If there is an inner list, the Lisp interpreter first
1538 figures out what it should do with the inside list, and then it works on
1539 the outside list. If there is yet another list embedded inside the
1540 inner list, it works on that one first, and so on. It always works on
1541 the innermost list first. The interpreter works on the innermost list
1542 first, to evaluate the result of that list. The result may be
1543 used by the enclosing expression.
1544
1545 Otherwise, the interpreter works left to right, from one expression to
1546 the next.
1547
1548 @node Byte Compiling
1549 @subsection Byte Compiling
1550 @cindex Byte compiling
1551
1552 One other aspect of interpreting: the Lisp interpreter is able to
1553 interpret two kinds of entity: humanly readable code, on which we will
1554 focus exclusively, and specially processed code, called @dfn{byte
1555 compiled} code, which is not humanly readable. Byte compiled code
1556 runs faster than humanly readable code.
1557
1558 You can transform humanly readable code into byte compiled code by
1559 running one of the compile commands such as @code{byte-compile-file}.
1560 Byte compiled code is usually stored in a file that ends with a
1561 @file{.elc} extension rather than a @file{.el} extension. You will
1562 see both kinds of file in the @file{emacs/lisp} directory; the files
1563 to read are those with @file{.el} extensions.
1564
1565 As a practical matter, for most things you might do to customize or
1566 extend Emacs, you do not need to byte compile; and I will not discuss
1567 the topic here. @xref{Byte Compilation, , Byte Compilation, elisp,
1568 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a full description of byte
1569 compilation.
1570
1571 @node Evaluation
1572 @section Evaluation
1573 @cindex Evaluation
1574
1575 When the Lisp interpreter works on an expression, the term for the
1576 activity is called @dfn{evaluation}. We say that the interpreter
1577 ``evaluates the expression''. I've used this term several times before.
1578 The word comes from its use in everyday language, ``to ascertain the
1579 value or amount of; to appraise'', according to @cite{Webster's New
1580 Collegiate Dictionary}.
1581
1582 @menu
1583 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
1584 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
1585 @end menu
1586
1587 @ifnottex
1588 @node How the Interpreter Acts
1589 @unnumberedsubsec How the Lisp Interpreter Acts
1590 @end ifnottex
1591
1592 @cindex @samp{returned value} explained
1593 After evaluating an expression, the Lisp interpreter will most likely
1594 @dfn{return} the value that the computer produces by carrying out the
1595 instructions it found in the function definition, or perhaps it will
1596 give up on that function and produce an error message. (The interpreter
1597 may also find itself tossed, so to speak, to a different function or it
1598 may attempt to repeat continually what it is doing for ever and ever in
1599 what is called an ``infinite loop''. These actions are less common; and
1600 we can ignore them.) Most frequently, the interpreter returns a value.
1601
1602 @cindex @samp{side effect} defined
1603 At the same time the interpreter returns a value, it may do something
1604 else as well, such as move a cursor or copy a file; this other kind of
1605 action is called a @dfn{side effect}. Actions that we humans think are
1606 important, such as printing results, are often ``side effects'' to the
1607 Lisp interpreter. The jargon can sound peculiar, but it turns out that
1608 it is fairly easy to learn to use side effects.
1609
1610 In summary, evaluating a symbolic expression most commonly causes the
1611 Lisp interpreter to return a value and perhaps carry out a side effect;
1612 or else produce an error.
1613
1614 @node Evaluating Inner Lists
1615 @subsection Evaluating Inner Lists
1616 @cindex Inner list evaluation
1617 @cindex Evaluating inner lists
1618
1619 If evaluation applies to a list that is inside another list, the outer
1620 list may use the value returned by the first evaluation as information
1621 when the outer list is evaluated. This explains why inner expressions
1622 are evaluated first: the values they return are used by the outer
1623 expressions.
1624
1625 @need 1250
1626 We can investigate this process by evaluating another addition example.
1627 Place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1628
1629 @smallexample
1630 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1631 @end smallexample
1632
1633 @noindent
1634 The number 8 will appear in the echo area.
1635
1636 What happens is that the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the inner
1637 expression, @code{(+ 3 3)}, for which the value 6 is returned; then it
1638 evaluates the outer expression as if it were written @code{(+ 2 6)}, which
1639 returns the value 8. Since there are no more enclosing expressions to
1640 evaluate, the interpreter prints that value in the echo area.
1641
1642 Now it is easy to understand the name of the command invoked by the
1643 keystrokes @kbd{C-x C-e}: the name is @code{eval-last-sexp}. The
1644 letters @code{sexp} are an abbreviation for ``symbolic expression'', and
1645 @code{eval} is an abbreviation for ``evaluate''. The command means
1646 ``evaluate last symbolic expression''.
1647
1648 As an experiment, you can try evaluating the expression by putting the
1649 cursor at the beginning of the next line immediately following the
1650 expression, or inside the expression.
1651
1652 @need 800
1653 Here is another copy of the expression:
1654
1655 @smallexample
1656 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1657 @end smallexample
1658
1659 @noindent
1660 If you place the cursor at the beginning of the blank line that
1661 immediately follows the expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}, you will
1662 still get the value 8 printed in the echo area. Now try putting the
1663 cursor inside the expression. If you put it right after the next to
1664 last parenthesis (so it appears to sit on top of the last parenthesis),
1665 you will get a 6 printed in the echo area! This is because the command
1666 evaluates the expression @code{(+ 3 3)}.
1667
1668 Now put the cursor immediately after a number. Type @kbd{C-x C-e} and
1669 you will get the number itself. In Lisp, if you evaluate a number, you
1670 get the number itself---this is how numbers differ from symbols. If you
1671 evaluate a list starting with a symbol like @code{+}, you will get a
1672 value returned that is the result of the computer carrying out the
1673 instructions in the function definition attached to that name. If a
1674 symbol by itself is evaluated, something different happens, as we will
1675 see in the next section.
1676
1677 @node Variables
1678 @section Variables
1679 @cindex Variables
1680
1681 In Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have a value attached to it just as it can
1682 have a function definition attached to it. The two are different.
1683 The function definition is a set of instructions that a computer will
1684 obey. A value, on the other hand, is something, such as number or a
1685 name, that can vary (which is why such a symbol is called a variable).
1686 The value of a symbol can be any expression in Lisp, such as a symbol,
1687 number, list, or string. A symbol that has a value is often called a
1688 @dfn{variable}.
1689
1690 A symbol can have both a function definition and a value attached to
1691 it at the same time. Or it can have just one or the other.
1692 The two are separate. This is somewhat similar
1693 to the way the name Cambridge can refer to the city in Massachusetts
1694 and have some information attached to the name as well, such as
1695 ``great programming center''.
1696
1697 @ignore
1698 (Incidentally, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have two
1699 other things attached to it, too: a property list and a documentation
1700 string; these are discussed later.)
1701 @end ignore
1702
1703 Another way to think about this is to imagine a symbol as being a chest
1704 of drawers. The function definition is put in one drawer, the value in
1705 another, and so on. What is put in the drawer holding the value can be
1706 changed without affecting the contents of the drawer holding the
1707 function definition, and vice versa.
1708
1709 @menu
1710 * fill-column Example::
1711 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
1712 without a function.
1713 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
1714 @end menu
1715
1716 @ifnottex
1717 @node fill-column Example
1718 @unnumberedsubsec @code{fill-column}, an Example Variable
1719 @end ifnottex
1720
1721 @findex fill-column, @r{an example variable}
1722 @cindex Example variable, @code{fill-column}
1723 @cindex Variable, example of, @code{fill-column}
1724 The variable @code{fill-column} illustrates a symbol with a value
1725 attached to it: in every GNU Emacs buffer, this symbol is set to some
1726 value, usually 72 or 70, but sometimes to some other value. To find the
1727 value of this symbol, evaluate it by itself. If you are reading this in
1728 Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can do this by putting the cursor after
1729 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1730
1731 @smallexample
1732 fill-column
1733 @end smallexample
1734
1735 @noindent
1736 After I typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, Emacs printed the number 72 in my echo
1737 area. This is the value for which @code{fill-column} is set for me as I
1738 write this. It may be different for you in your Info buffer. Notice
1739 that the value returned as a variable is printed in exactly the same way
1740 as the value returned by a function carrying out its instructions. From
1741 the point of view of the Lisp interpreter, a value returned is a value
1742 returned. What kind of expression it came from ceases to matter once
1743 the value is known.
1744
1745 A symbol can have any value attached to it or, to use the jargon, we can
1746 @dfn{bind} the variable to a value: to a number, such as 72; to a
1747 string, @code{"such as this"}; to a list, such as @code{(spruce pine
1748 oak)}; we can even bind a variable to a function definition.
1749
1750 A symbol can be bound to a value in several ways. @xref{set & setq, ,
1751 Setting the Value of a Variable}, for information about one way to do
1752 this.
1753
1754 @node Void Function
1755 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Function
1756 @cindex Symbol without function error
1757 @cindex Error for symbol without function
1758
1759 When we evaluated @code{fill-column} to find its value as a variable,
1760 we did not place parentheses around the word. This is because we did
1761 not intend to use it as a function name.
1762
1763 If @code{fill-column} were the first or only element of a list, the
1764 Lisp interpreter would attempt to find the function definition
1765 attached to it. But @code{fill-column} has no function definition.
1766 Try evaluating this:
1767
1768 @smallexample
1769 (fill-column)
1770 @end smallexample
1771
1772 @need 1250
1773 @noindent
1774 You will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that says:
1775
1776 @smallexample
1777 @group
1778 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1779 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function fill-column)
1780 (fill-column)
1781 eval((fill-column))
1782 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1783 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1784 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1785 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1786 @end group
1787 @end smallexample
1788
1789 @noindent
1790 (Remember, to quit the debugger and make the debugger window go away,
1791 type @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1792
1793 @ignore
1794 @need 800
1795 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will produce an error message that says:
1796
1797 @smallexample
1798 Symbol's function definition is void:@: fill-column
1799 @end smallexample
1800
1801 @noindent
1802 (The message will go away as soon as you move the cursor or type
1803 another key.)
1804 @end ignore
1805
1806 @node Void Variable
1807 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Value
1808 @cindex Symbol without value error
1809 @cindex Error for symbol without value
1810
1811 If you attempt to evaluate a symbol that does not have a value bound to
1812 it, you will receive an error message. You can see this by
1813 experimenting with our 2 plus 2 addition. In the following expression,
1814 put your cursor right after the @code{+}, before the first number 2,
1815 type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1816
1817 @smallexample
1818 (+ 2 2)
1819 @end smallexample
1820
1821 @need 1500
1822 @noindent
1823 In GNU Emacs 22, you will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that
1824 says:
1825
1826 @smallexample
1827 @group
1828 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1829 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-variable +)
1830 eval(+)
1831 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1832 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1833 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1834 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1835 @end group
1836 @end smallexample
1837
1838 @noindent
1839 (Again, you can quit the debugger by
1840 typing @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1841
1842 This backtrace is different from the very first error message we saw,
1843 which said, @samp{Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)}.
1844 In this case, the function does not have a value as a variable; while
1845 in the other error message, the function (the word @samp{this}) did not
1846 have a definition.
1847
1848 In this experiment with the @code{+}, what we did was cause the Lisp
1849 interpreter to evaluate the @code{+} and look for the value of the
1850 variable instead of the function definition. We did this by placing the
1851 cursor right after the symbol rather than after the parenthesis of the
1852 enclosing list as we did before. As a consequence, the Lisp interpreter
1853 evaluated the preceding s-expression, which in this case was
1854 @code{+} by itself.
1855
1856 Since @code{+} does not have a value bound to it, just the function
1857 definition, the error message reported that the symbol's value as a
1858 variable was void.
1859
1860 @ignore
1861 @need 800
1862 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, your error message will say:
1863
1864 @example
1865 Symbol's value as variable is void:@: +
1866 @end example
1867
1868 @noindent
1869 The meaning is the same as in GNU Emacs 22.
1870 @end ignore
1871
1872 @node Arguments
1873 @section Arguments
1874 @cindex Arguments
1875 @cindex Passing information to functions
1876
1877 To see how information is passed to functions, let's look again at
1878 our old standby, the addition of two plus two. In Lisp, this is written
1879 as follows:
1880
1881 @smallexample
1882 (+ 2 2)
1883 @end smallexample
1884
1885 If you evaluate this expression, the number 4 will appear in your echo
1886 area. What the Lisp interpreter does is add the numbers that follow
1887 the @code{+}.
1888
1889 @cindex @samp{argument} defined
1890 The numbers added by @code{+} are called the @dfn{arguments} of the
1891 function @code{+}. These numbers are the information that is given to
1892 or @dfn{passed} to the function.
1893
1894 The word ``argument'' comes from the way it is used in mathematics and
1895 does not refer to a disputation between two people; instead it refers to
1896 the information presented to the function, in this case, to the
1897 @code{+}. In Lisp, the arguments to a function are the atoms or lists
1898 that follow the function. The values returned by the evaluation of
1899 these atoms or lists are passed to the function. Different functions
1900 require different numbers of arguments; some functions require none at
1901 all.@footnote{It is curious to track the path by which the word ``argument''
1902 came to have two different meanings, one in mathematics and the other in
1903 everyday English. According to the @cite{Oxford English Dictionary},
1904 the word derives from the Latin for @samp{to make clear, prove}; thus it
1905 came to mean, by one thread of derivation, ``the evidence offered as
1906 proof'', which is to say, ``the information offered'', which led to its
1907 meaning in Lisp. But in the other thread of derivation, it came to mean
1908 ``to assert in a manner against which others may make counter
1909 assertions'', which led to the meaning of the word as a disputation.
1910 (Note here that the English word has two different definitions attached
1911 to it at the same time. By contrast, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol cannot
1912 have two different function definitions at the same time.)}
1913
1914 @menu
1915 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
1916 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
1917 of a variable or list.
1918 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
1919 variable number of arguments.
1920 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
1921 to a function.
1922 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
1923 @end menu
1924
1925 @node Data types
1926 @subsection Arguments' Data Types
1927 @cindex Data types
1928 @cindex Types of data
1929 @cindex Arguments' data types
1930
1931 The type of data that should be passed to a function depends on what
1932 kind of information it uses. The arguments to a function such as
1933 @code{+} must have values that are numbers, since @code{+} adds numbers.
1934 Other functions use different kinds of data for their arguments.
1935
1936 @need 1250
1937 @findex concat
1938 For example, the @code{concat} function links together or unites two or
1939 more strings of text to produce a string. The arguments are strings.
1940 Concatenating the two character strings @code{abc}, @code{def} produces
1941 the single string @code{abcdef}. This can be seen by evaluating the
1942 following:
1943
1944 @smallexample
1945 (concat "abc" "def")
1946 @end smallexample
1947
1948 @noindent
1949 The value produced by evaluating this expression is @code{"abcdef"}.
1950
1951 A function such as @code{substring} uses both a string and numbers as
1952 arguments. The function returns a part of the string, a substring of
1953 the first argument. This function takes three arguments. Its first
1954 argument is the string of characters, the second and third arguments
1955 are numbers that indicate the beginning (inclusive) and end
1956 (exclusive) of the substring. The numbers are a count of the number
1957 of characters (including spaces and punctuation) from the beginning of
1958 the string. Note that the characters in a string are numbered from
1959 zero, not one.
1960
1961 @need 800
1962 For example, if you evaluate the following:
1963
1964 @smallexample
1965 (substring "The quick brown fox jumped." 16 19)
1966 @end smallexample
1967
1968 @noindent
1969 you will see @code{"fox"} appear in the echo area. The arguments are the
1970 string and the two numbers.
1971
1972 Note that the string passed to @code{substring} is a single atom even
1973 though it is made up of several words separated by spaces. Lisp counts
1974 everything between the two quotation marks as part of the string,
1975 including the spaces. You can think of the @code{substring} function as
1976 a kind of ``atom smasher'' since it takes an otherwise indivisible atom
1977 and extracts a part. However, @code{substring} is only able to extract
1978 a substring from an argument that is a string, not from another type of
1979 atom such as a number or symbol.
1980
1981 @node Args as Variable or List
1982 @subsection An Argument as the Value of a Variable or List
1983
1984 An argument can be a symbol that returns a value when it is evaluated.
1985 For example, when the symbol @code{fill-column} by itself is evaluated,
1986 it returns a number. This number can be used in an addition.
1987
1988 @need 1250
1989 Position the cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
1990 C-e}:
1991
1992 @smallexample
1993 (+ 2 fill-column)
1994 @end smallexample
1995
1996 @noindent
1997 The value will be a number two more than what you get by evaluating
1998 @code{fill-column} alone. For me, this is 74, because my value of
1999 @code{fill-column} is 72.
2000
2001 As we have just seen, an argument can be a symbol that returns a value
2002 when evaluated. In addition, an argument can be a list that returns a
2003 value when it is evaluated. For example, in the following expression,
2004 the arguments to the function @code{concat} are the strings
2005 @w{@code{"The "}} and @w{@code{" red foxes."}} and the list
2006 @code{(number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column))}.
2007
2008 @c For GNU Emacs 22, need number-to-string
2009 @smallexample
2010 (concat "The " (number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column)) " red foxes.")
2011 @end smallexample
2012
2013 @noindent
2014 If you evaluate this expression---and if, as with my Emacs,
2015 @code{fill-column} evaluates to 72---@code{"The 74 red foxes."} will
2016 appear in the echo area. (Note that you must put spaces after the
2017 word @samp{The} and before the word @samp{red} so they will appear in
2018 the final string. The function @code{number-to-string} converts the
2019 integer that the addition function returns to a string.
2020 @code{number-to-string} is also known as @code{int-to-string}.)
2021
2022 @node Variable Number of Arguments
2023 @subsection Variable Number of Arguments
2024 @cindex Variable number of arguments
2025 @cindex Arguments, variable number of
2026
2027 Some functions, such as @code{concat}, @code{+} or @code{*}, take any
2028 number of arguments. (The @code{*} is the symbol for multiplication.)
2029 This can be seen by evaluating each of the following expressions in
2030 the usual way. What you will see in the echo area is printed in this
2031 text after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as ``evaluates to''.
2032
2033 @need 1250
2034 In the first set, the functions have no arguments:
2035
2036 @smallexample
2037 @group
2038 (+) @result{} 0
2039
2040 (*) @result{} 1
2041 @end group
2042 @end smallexample
2043
2044 @need 1250
2045 In this set, the functions have one argument each:
2046
2047 @smallexample
2048 @group
2049 (+ 3) @result{} 3
2050
2051 (* 3) @result{} 3
2052 @end group
2053 @end smallexample
2054
2055 @need 1250
2056 In this set, the functions have three arguments each:
2057
2058 @smallexample
2059 @group
2060 (+ 3 4 5) @result{} 12
2061
2062 (* 3 4 5) @result{} 60
2063 @end group
2064 @end smallexample
2065
2066 @node Wrong Type of Argument
2067 @subsection Using the Wrong Type Object as an Argument
2068 @cindex Wrong type of argument
2069 @cindex Argument, wrong type of
2070
2071 When a function is passed an argument of the wrong type, the Lisp
2072 interpreter produces an error message. For example, the @code{+}
2073 function expects the values of its arguments to be numbers. As an
2074 experiment we can pass it the quoted symbol @code{hello} instead of a
2075 number. Position the cursor after the following expression and type
2076 @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2077
2078 @smallexample
2079 (+ 2 'hello)
2080 @end smallexample
2081
2082 @noindent
2083 When you do this you will generate an error message. What has happened
2084 is that @code{+} has tried to add the 2 to the value returned by
2085 @code{'hello}, but the value returned by @code{'hello} is the symbol
2086 @code{hello}, not a number. Only numbers can be added. So @code{+}
2087 could not carry out its addition.
2088
2089 @need 1250
2090 You will create and enter a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that says:
2091
2092 @noindent
2093 @smallexample
2094 @group
2095 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2096 Debugger entered--Lisp error:
2097 (wrong-type-argument number-or-marker-p hello)
2098 +(2 hello)
2099 eval((+ 2 (quote hello)))
2100 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
2101 eval-last-sexp(nil)
2102 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
2103 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2104 @end group
2105 @end smallexample
2106
2107 @need 1250
2108 As usual, the error message tries to be helpful and makes sense after you
2109 learn how to read it.@footnote{@code{(quote hello)} is an expansion of
2110 the abbreviation @code{'hello}.}
2111
2112 The first part of the error message is straightforward; it says
2113 @samp{wrong type argument}. Next comes the mysterious jargon word
2114 @w{@samp{number-or-marker-p}}. This word is trying to tell you what
2115 kind of argument the @code{+} expected.
2116
2117 The symbol @code{number-or-marker-p} says that the Lisp interpreter is
2118 trying to determine whether the information presented it (the value of
2119 the argument) is a number or a marker (a special object representing a
2120 buffer position). What it does is test to see whether the @code{+} is
2121 being given numbers to add. It also tests to see whether the
2122 argument is something called a marker, which is a specific feature of
2123 Emacs Lisp. (In Emacs, locations in a buffer are recorded as markers.
2124 When the mark is set with the @kbd{C-@@} or @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} command,
2125 its position is kept as a marker. The mark can be considered a
2126 number---the number of characters the location is from the beginning
2127 of the buffer.) In Emacs Lisp, @code{+} can be used to add the
2128 numeric value of marker positions as numbers.
2129
2130 The @samp{p} of @code{number-or-marker-p} is the embodiment of a
2131 practice started in the early days of Lisp programming. The @samp{p}
2132 stands for ``predicate''. In the jargon used by the early Lisp
2133 researchers, a predicate refers to a function to determine whether some
2134 property is true or false. So the @samp{p} tells us that
2135 @code{number-or-marker-p} is the name of a function that determines
2136 whether it is true or false that the argument supplied is a number or
2137 a marker. Other Lisp symbols that end in @samp{p} include @code{zerop},
2138 a function that tests whether its argument has the value of zero, and
2139 @code{listp}, a function that tests whether its argument is a list.
2140
2141 Finally, the last part of the error message is the symbol @code{hello}.
2142 This is the value of the argument that was passed to @code{+}. If the
2143 addition had been passed the correct type of object, the value passed
2144 would have been a number, such as 37, rather than a symbol like
2145 @code{hello}. But then you would not have got the error message.
2146
2147 @ignore
2148 @need 1250
2149 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, the echo area displays an error
2150 message that says:
2151
2152 @smallexample
2153 Wrong type argument:@: number-or-marker-p, hello
2154 @end smallexample
2155
2156 This says, in different words, the same as the top line of the
2157 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.
2158 @end ignore
2159
2160 @node message
2161 @subsection The @code{message} Function
2162 @findex message
2163
2164 Like @code{+}, the @code{message} function takes a variable number of
2165 arguments. It is used to send messages to the user and is so useful
2166 that we will describe it here.
2167
2168 @need 1250
2169 A message is printed in the echo area. For example, you can print a
2170 message in your echo area by evaluating the following list:
2171
2172 @smallexample
2173 (message "This message appears in the echo area!")
2174 @end smallexample
2175
2176 The whole string between double quotation marks is a single argument
2177 and is printed @i{in toto}. (Note that in this example, the message
2178 itself will appear in the echo area within double quotes; that is
2179 because you see the value returned by the @code{message} function. In
2180 most uses of @code{message} in programs that you write, the text will
2181 be printed in the echo area as a side-effect, without the quotes.
2182 @xref{multiply-by-seven in detail, , @code{multiply-by-seven} in
2183 detail}, for an example of this.)
2184
2185 However, if there is a @samp{%s} in the quoted string of characters, the
2186 @code{message} function does not print the @samp{%s} as such, but looks
2187 to the argument that follows the string. It evaluates the second
2188 argument and prints the value at the location in the string where the
2189 @samp{%s} is.
2190
2191 @need 1250
2192 You can see this by positioning the cursor after the following
2193 expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2194
2195 @smallexample
2196 (message "The name of this buffer is: %s." (buffer-name))
2197 @end smallexample
2198
2199 @noindent
2200 In Info, @code{"The name of this buffer is: *info*."} will appear in the
2201 echo area. The function @code{buffer-name} returns the name of the
2202 buffer as a string, which the @code{message} function inserts in place
2203 of @code{%s}.
2204
2205 To print a value as an integer, use @samp{%d} in the same way as
2206 @samp{%s}. For example, to print a message in the echo area that
2207 states the value of the @code{fill-column}, evaluate the following:
2208
2209 @smallexample
2210 (message "The value of fill-column is %d." fill-column)
2211 @end smallexample
2212
2213 @noindent
2214 On my system, when I evaluate this list, @code{"The value of
2215 fill-column is 72."} appears in my echo area@footnote{Actually, you
2216 can use @code{%s} to print a number. It is non-specific. @code{%d}
2217 prints only the part of a number left of a decimal point, and not
2218 anything that is not a number.}.
2219
2220 If there is more than one @samp{%s} in the quoted string, the value of
2221 the first argument following the quoted string is printed at the
2222 location of the first @samp{%s} and the value of the second argument is
2223 printed at the location of the second @samp{%s}, and so on.
2224
2225 @need 1250
2226 For example, if you evaluate the following,
2227
2228 @smallexample
2229 @group
2230 (message "There are %d %s in the office!"
2231 (- fill-column 14) "pink elephants")
2232 @end group
2233 @end smallexample
2234
2235 @noindent
2236 a rather whimsical message will appear in your echo area. On my system
2237 it says, @code{"There are 58 pink elephants in the office!"}.
2238
2239 The expression @code{(- fill-column 14)} is evaluated and the resulting
2240 number is inserted in place of the @samp{%d}; and the string in double
2241 quotes, @code{"pink elephants"}, is treated as a single argument and
2242 inserted in place of the @samp{%s}. (That is to say, a string between
2243 double quotes evaluates to itself, like a number.)
2244
2245 Finally, here is a somewhat complex example that not only illustrates
2246 the computation of a number, but also shows how you can use an
2247 expression within an expression to generate the text that is substituted
2248 for @samp{%s}:
2249
2250 @smallexample
2251 @group
2252 (message "He saw %d %s"
2253 (- fill-column 32)
2254 (concat "red "
2255 (substring
2256 "The quick brown foxes jumped." 16 21)
2257 " leaping."))
2258 @end group
2259 @end smallexample
2260
2261 In this example, @code{message} has three arguments: the string,
2262 @code{"He saw %d %s"}, the expression, @code{(- fill-column 32)}, and
2263 the expression beginning with the function @code{concat}. The value
2264 resulting from the evaluation of @code{(- fill-column 32)} is inserted
2265 in place of the @samp{%d}; and the value returned by the expression
2266 beginning with @code{concat} is inserted in place of the @samp{%s}.
2267
2268 When your fill column is 70 and you evaluate the expression, the
2269 message @code{"He saw 38 red foxes leaping."} appears in your echo
2270 area.
2271
2272 @node set & setq
2273 @section Setting the Value of a Variable
2274 @cindex Variable, setting value
2275 @cindex Setting value of variable
2276
2277 @cindex @samp{bind} defined
2278 There are several ways by which a variable can be given a value. One of
2279 the ways is to use either the function @code{set} or the function
2280 @code{setq}. Another way is to use @code{let} (@pxref{let}). (The
2281 jargon for this process is to @dfn{bind} a variable to a value.)
2282
2283 The following sections not only describe how @code{set} and @code{setq}
2284 work but also illustrate how arguments are passed.
2285
2286 @menu
2287 * Using set:: Setting values.
2288 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
2289 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
2290 @end menu
2291
2292 @node Using set
2293 @subsection Using @code{set}
2294 @findex set
2295
2296 To set the value of the symbol @code{flowers} to the list @code{'(rose
2297 violet daisy buttercup)}, evaluate the following expression by
2298 positioning the cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2299
2300 @smallexample
2301 (set 'flowers '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
2302 @end smallexample
2303
2304 @noindent
2305 The list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in the echo
2306 area. This is what is @emph{returned} by the @code{set} function. As a
2307 side effect, the symbol @code{flowers} is bound to the list; that is,
2308 the symbol @code{flowers}, which can be viewed as a variable, is given
2309 the list as its value. (This process, by the way, illustrates how a
2310 side effect to the Lisp interpreter, setting the value, can be the
2311 primary effect that we humans are interested in. This is because every
2312 Lisp function must return a value if it does not get an error, but it
2313 will only have a side effect if it is designed to have one.)
2314
2315 After evaluating the @code{set} expression, you can evaluate the symbol
2316 @code{flowers} and it will return the value you just set. Here is the
2317 symbol. Place your cursor after it and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2318
2319 @smallexample
2320 flowers
2321 @end smallexample
2322
2323 @noindent
2324 When you evaluate @code{flowers}, the list
2325 @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} appears in the echo area.
2326
2327 Incidentally, if you evaluate @code{'flowers}, the variable with a quote
2328 in front of it, what you will see in the echo area is the symbol itself,
2329 @code{flowers}. Here is the quoted symbol, so you can try this:
2330
2331 @smallexample
2332 'flowers
2333 @end smallexample
2334
2335 Note also, that when you use @code{set}, you need to quote both
2336 arguments to @code{set}, unless you want them evaluated. Since we do
2337 not want either argument evaluated, neither the variable
2338 @code{flowers} nor the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)}, both
2339 are quoted. (When you use @code{set} without quoting its first
2340 argument, the first argument is evaluated before anything else is
2341 done. If you did this and @code{flowers} did not have a value
2342 already, you would get an error message that the @samp{Symbol's value
2343 as variable is void}; on the other hand, if @code{flowers} did return
2344 a value after it was evaluated, the @code{set} would attempt to set
2345 the value that was returned. There are situations where this is the
2346 right thing for the function to do; but such situations are rare.)
2347
2348 @node Using setq
2349 @subsection Using @code{setq}
2350 @findex setq
2351
2352 As a practical matter, you almost always quote the first argument to
2353 @code{set}. The combination of @code{set} and a quoted first argument
2354 is so common that it has its own name: the special form @code{setq}.
2355 This special form is just like @code{set} except that the first argument
2356 is quoted automatically, so you don't need to type the quote mark
2357 yourself. Also, as an added convenience, @code{setq} permits you to set
2358 several different variables to different values, all in one expression.
2359
2360 To set the value of the variable @code{carnivores} to the list
2361 @code{'(lion tiger leopard)} using @code{setq}, the following expression
2362 is used:
2363
2364 @smallexample
2365 (setq carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2366 @end smallexample
2367
2368 @noindent
2369 This is exactly the same as using @code{set} except the first argument
2370 is automatically quoted by @code{setq}. (The @samp{q} in @code{setq}
2371 means @code{quote}.)
2372
2373 @need 1250
2374 With @code{set}, the expression would look like this:
2375
2376 @smallexample
2377 (set 'carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2378 @end smallexample
2379
2380 Also, @code{setq} can be used to assign different values to
2381 different variables. The first argument is bound to the value
2382 of the second argument, the third argument is bound to the value of the
2383 fourth argument, and so on. For example, you could use the following to
2384 assign a list of trees to the symbol @code{trees} and a list of herbivores
2385 to the symbol @code{herbivores}:
2386
2387 @smallexample
2388 @group
2389 (setq trees '(pine fir oak maple)
2390 herbivores '(gazelle antelope zebra))
2391 @end group
2392 @end smallexample
2393
2394 @noindent
2395 (The expression could just as well have been on one line, but it might
2396 not have fit on a page; and humans find it easier to read nicely
2397 formatted lists.)
2398
2399 Although I have been using the term ``assign'', there is another way of
2400 thinking about the workings of @code{set} and @code{setq}; and that is to
2401 say that @code{set} and @code{setq} make the symbol @emph{point} to the
2402 list. This latter way of thinking is very common and in forthcoming
2403 chapters we shall come upon at least one symbol that has ``pointer'' as
2404 part of its name. The name is chosen because the symbol has a value,
2405 specifically a list, attached to it; or, expressed another way,
2406 the symbol is set to ``point'' to the list.
2407
2408 @node Counting
2409 @subsection Counting
2410 @cindex Counting
2411
2412 Here is an example that shows how to use @code{setq} in a counter. You
2413 might use this to count how many times a part of your program repeats
2414 itself. First set a variable to zero; then add one to the number each
2415 time the program repeats itself. To do this, you need a variable that
2416 serves as a counter, and two expressions: an initial @code{setq}
2417 expression that sets the counter variable to zero; and a second
2418 @code{setq} expression that increments the counter each time it is
2419 evaluated.
2420
2421 @smallexample
2422 @group
2423 (setq counter 0) ; @r{Let's call this the initializer.}
2424
2425 (setq counter (+ counter 1)) ; @r{This is the incrementer.}
2426
2427 counter ; @r{This is the counter.}
2428 @end group
2429 @end smallexample
2430
2431 @noindent
2432 (The text following the @samp{;} are comments. @xref{Change a
2433 defun, , Change a Function Definition}.)
2434
2435 If you evaluate the first of these expressions, the initializer,
2436 @code{(setq counter 0)}, and then evaluate the third expression,
2437 @code{counter}, the number @code{0} will appear in the echo area. If
2438 you then evaluate the second expression, the incrementer, @code{(setq
2439 counter (+ counter 1))}, the counter will get the value 1. So if you
2440 again evaluate @code{counter}, the number @code{1} will appear in the
2441 echo area. Each time you evaluate the second expression, the value of
2442 the counter will be incremented.
2443
2444 When you evaluate the incrementer, @code{(setq counter (+ counter 1))},
2445 the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the innermost list; this is the
2446 addition. In order to evaluate this list, it must evaluate the variable
2447 @code{counter} and the number @code{1}. When it evaluates the variable
2448 @code{counter}, it receives its current value. It passes this value and
2449 the number @code{1} to the @code{+} which adds them together. The sum
2450 is then returned as the value of the inner list and passed to the
2451 @code{setq} which sets the variable @code{counter} to this new value.
2452 Thus, the value of the variable, @code{counter}, is changed.
2453
2454 @node Summary
2455 @section Summary
2456
2457 Learning Lisp is like climbing a hill in which the first part is the
2458 steepest. You have now climbed the most difficult part; what remains
2459 becomes easier as you progress onwards.
2460
2461 @need 1000
2462 In summary,
2463
2464 @itemize @bullet
2465
2466 @item
2467 Lisp programs are made up of expressions, which are lists or single atoms.
2468
2469 @item
2470 Lists are made up of zero or more atoms or inner lists, separated by whitespace and
2471 surrounded by parentheses. A list can be empty.
2472
2473 @item
2474 Atoms are multi-character symbols, like @code{forward-paragraph}, single
2475 character symbols like @code{+}, strings of characters between double
2476 quotation marks, or numbers.
2477
2478 @item
2479 A number evaluates to itself.
2480
2481 @item
2482 A string between double quotes also evaluates to itself.
2483
2484 @item
2485 When you evaluate a symbol by itself, its value is returned.
2486
2487 @item
2488 When you evaluate a list, the Lisp interpreter looks at the first symbol
2489 in the list and then at the function definition bound to that symbol.
2490 Then the instructions in the function definition are carried out.
2491
2492 @item
2493 A single quotation mark,
2494 @ifinfo
2495 '
2496 @end ifinfo
2497 @ifnotinfo
2498 @code{'}
2499 @end ifnotinfo
2500 , tells the Lisp interpreter that it should
2501 return the following expression as written, and not evaluate it as it
2502 would if the quote were not there.
2503
2504 @item
2505 Arguments are the information passed to a function. The arguments to a
2506 function are computed by evaluating the rest of the elements of the list
2507 of which the function is the first element.
2508
2509 @item
2510 A function always returns a value when it is evaluated (unless it gets
2511 an error); in addition, it may also carry out some action called a
2512 ``side effect''. In many cases, a function's primary purpose is to
2513 create a side effect.
2514 @end itemize
2515
2516 @node Error Message Exercises
2517 @section Exercises
2518
2519 A few simple exercises:
2520
2521 @itemize @bullet
2522 @item
2523 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2524 not within parentheses.
2525
2526 @item
2527 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2528 between parentheses.
2529
2530 @item
2531 Create a counter that increments by two rather than one.
2532
2533 @item
2534 Write an expression that prints a message in the echo area when
2535 evaluated.
2536 @end itemize
2537
2538 @node Practicing Evaluation
2539 @chapter Practicing Evaluation
2540 @cindex Practicing evaluation
2541 @cindex Evaluation practice
2542
2543 Before learning how to write a function definition in Emacs Lisp, it is
2544 useful to spend a little time evaluating various expressions that have
2545 already been written. These expressions will be lists with the
2546 functions as their first (and often only) element. Since some of the
2547 functions associated with buffers are both simple and interesting, we
2548 will start with those. In this section, we will evaluate a few of
2549 these. In another section, we will study the code of several other
2550 buffer-related functions, to see how they were written.
2551
2552 @menu
2553 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
2554 causes evaluation.
2555 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
2556 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
2557 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
2558 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
2559 the buffer.
2560 * Evaluation Exercise::
2561 @end menu
2562
2563 @ifnottex
2564 @node How to Evaluate
2565 @unnumberedsec How to Evaluate
2566 @end ifnottex
2567
2568 @i{Whenever you give an editing command} to Emacs Lisp, such as the
2569 command to move the cursor or to scroll the screen, @i{you are evaluating
2570 an expression,} the first element of which is a function. @i{This is
2571 how Emacs works.}
2572
2573 @cindex @samp{interactive function} defined
2574 @cindex @samp{command} defined
2575 When you type keys, you cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate an
2576 expression and that is how you get your results. Even typing plain text
2577 involves evaluating an Emacs Lisp function, in this case, one that uses
2578 @code{self-insert-command}, which simply inserts the character you
2579 typed. The functions you evaluate by typing keystrokes are called
2580 @dfn{interactive} functions, or @dfn{commands}; how you make a function
2581 interactive will be illustrated in the chapter on how to write function
2582 definitions. @xref{Interactive, , Making a Function Interactive}.
2583
2584 In addition to typing keyboard commands, we have seen a second way to
2585 evaluate an expression: by positioning the cursor after a list and
2586 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. This is what we will do in the rest of this
2587 section. There are other ways to evaluate an expression as well; these
2588 will be described as we come to them.
2589
2590 Besides being used for practicing evaluation, the functions shown in the
2591 next few sections are important in their own right. A study of these
2592 functions makes clear the distinction between buffers and files, how to
2593 switch to a buffer, and how to determine a location within it.
2594
2595 @node Buffer Names
2596 @section Buffer Names
2597 @findex buffer-name
2598 @findex buffer-file-name
2599
2600 The two functions, @code{buffer-name} and @code{buffer-file-name}, show
2601 the difference between a file and a buffer. When you evaluate the
2602 following expression, @code{(buffer-name)}, the name of the buffer
2603 appears in the echo area. When you evaluate @code{(buffer-file-name)},
2604 the name of the file to which the buffer refers appears in the echo
2605 area. Usually, the name returned by @code{(buffer-name)} is the same as
2606 the name of the file to which it refers, and the name returned by
2607 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is the full path-name of the file.
2608
2609 A file and a buffer are two different entities. A file is information
2610 recorded permanently in the computer (unless you delete it). A buffer,
2611 on the other hand, is information inside of Emacs that will vanish at
2612 the end of the editing session (or when you kill the buffer). Usually,
2613 a buffer contains information that you have copied from a file; we say
2614 the buffer is @dfn{visiting} that file. This copy is what you work on
2615 and modify. Changes to the buffer do not change the file, until you
2616 save the buffer. When you save the buffer, the buffer is copied to the file
2617 and is thus saved permanently.
2618
2619 @need 1250
2620 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
2621 each of the following expressions by positioning the cursor after it and
2622 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2623
2624 @example
2625 @group
2626 (buffer-name)
2627
2628 (buffer-file-name)
2629 @end group
2630 @end example
2631
2632 @noindent
2633 When I do this in Info, the value returned by evaluating
2634 @code{(buffer-name)} is @file{"*info*"}, and the value returned by
2635 evaluating @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}.
2636
2637 On the other hand, while I am writing this document, the value
2638 returned by evaluating @code{(buffer-name)} is
2639 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}, and the value returned by evaluating
2640 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is
2641 @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2642
2643 @cindex @code{nil}, history of word
2644 The former is the name of the buffer and the latter is the name of the
2645 file. In Info, the buffer name is @file{"*info*"}. Info does not
2646 point to any file, so the result of evaluating
2647 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}. The symbol @code{nil} is
2648 from the Latin word for ``nothing''; in this case, it means that the
2649 buffer is not associated with any file. (In Lisp, @code{nil} is also
2650 used to mean ``false'' and is a synonym for the empty list, @code{()}.)
2651
2652 When I am writing, the name of my buffer is
2653 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}. The name of the file to which it
2654 points is @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2655
2656 (In the expressions, the parentheses tell the Lisp interpreter to
2657 treat @w{@code{buffer-name}} and @w{@code{buffer-file-name}} as
2658 functions; without the parentheses, the interpreter would attempt to
2659 evaluate the symbols as variables. @xref{Variables}.)
2660
2661 In spite of the distinction between files and buffers, you will often
2662 find that people refer to a file when they mean a buffer and vice versa.
2663 Indeed, most people say, ``I am editing a file,'' rather than saying,
2664 ``I am editing a buffer which I will soon save to a file.'' It is
2665 almost always clear from context what people mean. When dealing with
2666 computer programs, however, it is important to keep the distinction in mind,
2667 since the computer is not as smart as a person.
2668
2669 @cindex Buffer, history of word
2670 The word ``buffer'', by the way, comes from the meaning of the word as a
2671 cushion that deadens the force of a collision. In early computers, a
2672 buffer cushioned the interaction between files and the computer's
2673 central processing unit. The drums or tapes that held a file and the
2674 central processing unit were pieces of equipment that were very
2675 different from each other, working at their own speeds, in spurts. The
2676 buffer made it possible for them to work together effectively.
2677 Eventually, the buffer grew from being an intermediary, a temporary
2678 holding place, to being the place where work is done. This
2679 transformation is rather like that of a small seaport that grew into a
2680 great city: once it was merely the place where cargo was warehoused
2681 temporarily before being loaded onto ships; then it became a business
2682 and cultural center in its own right.
2683
2684 Not all buffers are associated with files. For example, a
2685 @file{*scratch*} buffer does not visit any file. Similarly, a
2686 @file{*Help*} buffer is not associated with any file.
2687
2688 In the old days, when you lacked a @file{~/.emacs} file and started an
2689 Emacs session by typing the command @code{emacs} alone, without naming
2690 any files, Emacs started with the @file{*scratch*} buffer visible.
2691 Nowadays, you will see a splash screen. You can follow one of the
2692 commands suggested on the splash screen, visit a file, or press the
2693 spacebar to reach the @file{*scratch*} buffer.
2694
2695 If you switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer, type
2696 @code{(buffer-name)}, position the cursor after it, and then type
2697 @kbd{C-x C-e} to evaluate the expression. The name @code{"*scratch*"}
2698 will be returned and will appear in the echo area. @code{"*scratch*"}
2699 is the name of the buffer. When you type @code{(buffer-file-name)} in
2700 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate that, @code{nil} will appear
2701 in the echo area, just as it does when you evaluate
2702 @code{(buffer-file-name)} in Info.
2703
2704 Incidentally, if you are in the @file{*scratch*} buffer and want the
2705 value returned by an expression to appear in the @file{*scratch*}
2706 buffer itself rather than in the echo area, type @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
2707 instead of @kbd{C-x C-e}. This causes the value returned to appear
2708 after the expression. The buffer will look like this:
2709
2710 @smallexample
2711 (buffer-name)"*scratch*"
2712 @end smallexample
2713
2714 @noindent
2715 You cannot do this in Info since Info is read-only and it will not allow
2716 you to change the contents of the buffer. But you can do this in any
2717 buffer you can edit; and when you write code or documentation (such as
2718 this book), this feature is very useful.
2719
2720 @node Getting Buffers
2721 @section Getting Buffers
2722 @findex current-buffer
2723 @findex other-buffer
2724 @cindex Getting a buffer
2725
2726 The @code{buffer-name} function returns the @emph{name} of the buffer;
2727 to get the buffer @emph{itself}, a different function is needed: the
2728 @code{current-buffer} function. If you use this function in code, what
2729 you get is the buffer itself.
2730
2731 A name and the object or entity to which the name refers are different
2732 from each other. You are not your name. You are a person to whom
2733 others refer by name. If you ask to speak to George and someone hands you
2734 a card with the letters @samp{G}, @samp{e}, @samp{o}, @samp{r},
2735 @samp{g}, and @samp{e} written on it, you might be amused, but you would
2736 not be satisfied. You do not want to speak to the name, but to the
2737 person to whom the name refers. A buffer is similar: the name of the
2738 scratch buffer is @file{*scratch*}, but the name is not the buffer. To
2739 get a buffer itself, you need to use a function such as
2740 @code{current-buffer}.
2741
2742 However, there is a slight complication: if you evaluate
2743 @code{current-buffer} in an expression on its own, as we will do here,
2744 what you see is a printed representation of the name of the buffer
2745 without the contents of the buffer. Emacs works this way for two
2746 reasons: the buffer may be thousands of lines long---too long to be
2747 conveniently displayed; and, another buffer may have the same contents
2748 but a different name, and it is important to distinguish between them.
2749
2750 @need 800
2751 Here is an expression containing the function:
2752
2753 @smallexample
2754 (current-buffer)
2755 @end smallexample
2756
2757 @noindent
2758 If you evaluate this expression in Info in Emacs in the usual way,
2759 @file{#<buffer *info*>} will appear in the echo area. The special
2760 format indicates that the buffer itself is being returned, rather than
2761 just its name.
2762
2763 Incidentally, while you can type a number or symbol into a program, you
2764 cannot do that with the printed representation of a buffer: the only way
2765 to get a buffer itself is with a function such as @code{current-buffer}.
2766
2767 A related function is @code{other-buffer}. This returns the most
2768 recently selected buffer other than the one you are in currently, not
2769 a printed representation of its name. If you have recently switched
2770 back and forth from the @file{*scratch*} buffer, @code{other-buffer}
2771 will return that buffer.
2772
2773 @need 800
2774 You can see this by evaluating the expression:
2775
2776 @smallexample
2777 (other-buffer)
2778 @end smallexample
2779
2780 @noindent
2781 You should see @file{#<buffer *scratch*>} appear in the echo area, or
2782 the name of whatever other buffer you switched back from most
2783 recently@footnote{Actually, by default, if the buffer from which you
2784 just switched is visible to you in another window, @code{other-buffer}
2785 will choose the most recent buffer that you cannot see; this is a
2786 subtlety that I often forget.}.
2787
2788 @node Switching Buffers
2789 @section Switching Buffers
2790 @findex switch-to-buffer
2791 @findex set-buffer
2792 @cindex Switching to a buffer
2793
2794 The @code{other-buffer} function actually provides a buffer when it is
2795 used as an argument to a function that requires one. We can see this
2796 by using @code{other-buffer} and @code{switch-to-buffer} to switch to a
2797 different buffer.
2798
2799 But first, a brief introduction to the @code{switch-to-buffer}
2800 function. When you switched back and forth from Info to the
2801 @file{*scratch*} buffer to evaluate @code{(buffer-name)}, you most
2802 likely typed @kbd{C-x b} and then typed @file{*scratch*}@footnote{Or
2803 rather, to save typing, you probably only typed @kbd{RET} if the
2804 default buffer was @file{*scratch*}, or if it was different, then you
2805 typed just part of the name, such as @code{*sc}, pressed your
2806 @kbd{TAB} key to cause it to expand to the full name, and then typed
2807 @kbd{RET}.} when prompted in the minibuffer for the name of
2808 the buffer to which you wanted to switch. The keystrokes, @kbd{C-x
2809 b}, cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate the interactive function
2810 @code{switch-to-buffer}. As we said before, this is how Emacs works:
2811 different keystrokes call or run different functions. For example,
2812 @kbd{C-f} calls @code{forward-char}, @kbd{M-e} calls
2813 @code{forward-sentence}, and so on.
2814
2815 By writing @code{switch-to-buffer} in an expression, and giving it a
2816 buffer to switch to, we can switch buffers just the way @kbd{C-x b}
2817 does:
2818
2819 @smallexample
2820 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer))
2821 @end smallexample
2822
2823 @noindent
2824 The symbol @code{switch-to-buffer} is the first element of the list,
2825 so the Lisp interpreter will treat it as a function and carry out the
2826 instructions that are attached to it. But before doing that, the
2827 interpreter will note that @code{other-buffer} is inside parentheses
2828 and work on that symbol first. @code{other-buffer} is the first (and
2829 in this case, the only) element of this list, so the Lisp interpreter
2830 calls or runs the function. It returns another buffer. Next, the
2831 interpreter runs @code{switch-to-buffer}, passing to it, as an
2832 argument, the other buffer, which is what Emacs will switch to. If
2833 you are reading this in Info, try this now. Evaluate the expression.
2834 (To get back, type @kbd{C-x b @key{RET}}.)@footnote{Remember, this
2835 expression will move you to your most recent other buffer that you
2836 cannot see. If you really want to go to your most recently selected
2837 buffer, even if you can still see it, you need to evaluate the
2838 following more complex expression:
2839
2840 @smallexample
2841 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
2842 @end smallexample
2843
2844 @c noindent
2845 In this case, the first argument to @code{other-buffer} tells it which
2846 buffer to skip---the current one---and the second argument tells
2847 @code{other-buffer} it is OK to switch to a visible buffer. In
2848 regular use, @code{switch-to-buffer} takes you to a buffer not visible
2849 in windows since you would most likely use @kbd{C-x o}
2850 (@code{other-window}) to go to another visible buffer.}
2851
2852 In the programming examples in later sections of this document, you will
2853 see the function @code{set-buffer} more often than
2854 @code{switch-to-buffer}. This is because of a difference between
2855 computer programs and humans: humans have eyes and expect to see the
2856 buffer on which they are working on their computer terminals. This is
2857 so obvious, it almost goes without saying. However, programs do not
2858 have eyes. When a computer program works on a buffer, that buffer does
2859 not need to be visible on the screen.
2860
2861 @code{switch-to-buffer} is designed for humans and does two different
2862 things: it switches the buffer to which Emacs's attention is directed; and
2863 it switches the buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer.
2864 @code{set-buffer}, on the other hand, does only one thing: it switches
2865 the attention of the computer program to a different buffer. The buffer
2866 on the screen remains unchanged (of course, normally nothing happens
2867 there until the command finishes running).
2868
2869 @cindex @samp{call} defined
2870 Also, we have just introduced another jargon term, the word @dfn{call}.
2871 When you evaluate a list in which the first symbol is a function, you
2872 are calling that function. The use of the term comes from the notion of
2873 the function as an entity that can do something for you if you ``call''
2874 it---just as a plumber is an entity who can fix a leak if you call him
2875 or her.
2876
2877 @node Buffer Size & Locations
2878 @section Buffer Size and the Location of Point
2879 @cindex Size of buffer
2880 @cindex Buffer size
2881 @cindex Point location
2882 @cindex Location of point
2883
2884 Finally, let's look at several rather simple functions,
2885 @code{buffer-size}, @code{point}, @code{point-min}, and
2886 @code{point-max}. These give information about the size of a buffer and
2887 the location of point within it.
2888
2889 The function @code{buffer-size} tells you the size of the current
2890 buffer; that is, the function returns a count of the number of
2891 characters in the buffer.
2892
2893 @smallexample
2894 (buffer-size)
2895 @end smallexample
2896
2897 @noindent
2898 You can evaluate this in the usual way, by positioning the
2899 cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2900
2901 @cindex @samp{point} defined
2902 In Emacs, the current position of the cursor is called @dfn{point}.
2903 The expression @code{(point)} returns a number that tells you where the
2904 cursor is located as a count of the number of characters from the
2905 beginning of the buffer up to point.
2906
2907 @need 1250
2908 You can see the character count for point in this buffer by evaluating
2909 the following expression in the usual way:
2910
2911 @smallexample
2912 (point)
2913 @end smallexample
2914
2915 @noindent
2916 As I write this, the value of point is 65724. The @code{point}
2917 function is frequently used in some of the examples later in this
2918 book.
2919
2920 @need 1250
2921 The value of point depends, of course, on its location within the
2922 buffer. If you evaluate point in this spot, the number will be larger:
2923
2924 @smallexample
2925 (point)
2926 @end smallexample
2927
2928 @noindent
2929 For me, the value of point in this location is 66043, which means that
2930 there are 319 characters (including spaces) between the two
2931 expressions. (Doubtless, you will see different numbers, since I will
2932 have edited this since I first evaluated point.)
2933
2934 @cindex @samp{narrowing} defined
2935 The function @code{point-min} is somewhat similar to @code{point}, but
2936 it returns the value of the minimum permissible value of point in the
2937 current buffer. This is the number 1 unless @dfn{narrowing} is in
2938 effect. (Narrowing is a mechanism whereby you can restrict yourself,
2939 or a program, to operations on just a part of a buffer.
2940 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}.) Likewise, the
2941 function @code{point-max} returns the value of the maximum permissible
2942 value of point in the current buffer.
2943
2944 @node Evaluation Exercise
2945 @section Exercise
2946
2947 Find a file with which you are working and move towards its middle.
2948 Find its buffer name, file name, length, and your position in the file.
2949
2950 @node Writing Defuns
2951 @chapter How To Write Function Definitions
2952 @cindex Definition writing
2953 @cindex Function definition writing
2954 @cindex Writing a function definition
2955
2956 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates a list, it looks to see whether the
2957 first symbol on the list has a function definition attached to it; or,
2958 put another way, whether the symbol points to a function definition. If
2959 it does, the computer carries out the instructions in the definition. A
2960 symbol that has a function definition is called, simply, a function
2961 (although, properly speaking, the definition is the function and the
2962 symbol refers to it.)
2963
2964 @menu
2965 * Primitive Functions::
2966 * defun:: The @code{defun} macro.
2967 * Install:: Install a function definition.
2968 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
2969 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
2970 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
2971 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
2972 * if:: What if?
2973 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
2974 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
2975 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point and buffer.
2976 * Review::
2977 * defun Exercises::
2978 @end menu
2979
2980 @ifnottex
2981 @node Primitive Functions
2982 @unnumberedsec An Aside about Primitive Functions
2983 @end ifnottex
2984 @cindex Primitive functions
2985 @cindex Functions, primitive
2986
2987 @cindex C language primitives
2988 @cindex Primitives written in C
2989 All functions are defined in terms of other functions, except for a few
2990 @dfn{primitive} functions that are written in the C programming
2991 language. When you write functions' definitions, you will write them in
2992 Emacs Lisp and use other functions as your building blocks. Some of the
2993 functions you will use will themselves be written in Emacs Lisp (perhaps
2994 by you) and some will be primitives written in C@. The primitive
2995 functions are used exactly like those written in Emacs Lisp and behave
2996 like them. They are written in C so we can easily run GNU Emacs on any
2997 computer that has sufficient power and can run C.
2998
2999 Let me re-emphasize this: when you write code in Emacs Lisp, you do not
3000 distinguish between the use of functions written in C and the use of
3001 functions written in Emacs Lisp. The difference is irrelevant. I
3002 mention the distinction only because it is interesting to know. Indeed,
3003 unless you investigate, you won't know whether an already-written
3004 function is written in Emacs Lisp or C.
3005
3006 @node defun
3007 @section The @code{defun} Macro
3008 @findex defun
3009
3010 @cindex @samp{function definition} defined
3011 In Lisp, a symbol such as @code{mark-whole-buffer} has code attached to
3012 it that tells the computer what to do when the function is called.
3013 This code is called the @dfn{function definition} and is created by
3014 evaluating a Lisp expression that starts with the symbol @code{defun}
3015 (which is an abbreviation for @emph{define function}).
3016
3017 In subsequent sections, we will look at function definitions from the
3018 Emacs source code, such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}. In this section,
3019 we will describe a simple function definition so you can see how it
3020 looks. This function definition uses arithmetic because it makes for a
3021 simple example. Some people dislike examples using arithmetic; however,
3022 if you are such a person, do not despair. Hardly any of the code we
3023 will study in the remainder of this introduction involves arithmetic or
3024 mathematics. The examples mostly involve text in one way or another.
3025
3026 A function definition has up to five parts following the word
3027 @code{defun}:
3028
3029 @enumerate
3030 @item
3031 The name of the symbol to which the function definition should be
3032 attached.
3033
3034 @item
3035 A list of the arguments that will be passed to the function. If no
3036 arguments will be passed to the function, this is an empty list,
3037 @code{()}.
3038
3039 @item
3040 Documentation describing the function. (Technically optional, but
3041 strongly recommended.)
3042
3043 @item
3044 Optionally, an expression to make the function interactive so you can
3045 use it by typing @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by
3046 typing an appropriate key or keychord.
3047
3048 @cindex @samp{body} defined
3049 @item
3050 The code that instructs the computer what to do: the @dfn{body} of the
3051 function definition.
3052 @end enumerate
3053
3054 It is helpful to think of the five parts of a function definition as
3055 being organized in a template, with slots for each part:
3056
3057 @smallexample
3058 @group
3059 (defun @var{function-name} (@var{arguments}@dots{})
3060 "@var{optional-documentation}@dots{}"
3061 (interactive @var{argument-passing-info}) ; @r{optional}
3062 @var{body}@dots{})
3063 @end group
3064 @end smallexample
3065
3066 As an example, here is the code for a function that multiplies its
3067 argument by 7. (This example is not interactive. @xref{Interactive,
3068 , Making a Function Interactive}, for that information.)
3069
3070 @smallexample
3071 @group
3072 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3073 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3074 (* 7 number))
3075 @end group
3076 @end smallexample
3077
3078 This definition begins with a parenthesis and the symbol @code{defun},
3079 followed by the name of the function.
3080
3081 @cindex @samp{argument list} defined
3082 The name of the function is followed by a list that contains the
3083 arguments that will be passed to the function. This list is called
3084 the @dfn{argument list}. In this example, the list has only one
3085 element, the symbol, @code{number}. When the function is used, the
3086 symbol will be bound to the value that is used as the argument to the
3087 function.
3088
3089 Instead of choosing the word @code{number} for the name of the argument,
3090 I could have picked any other name. For example, I could have chosen
3091 the word @code{multiplicand}. I picked the word ``number'' because it
3092 tells what kind of value is intended for this slot; but I could just as
3093 well have chosen the word ``multiplicand'' to indicate the role that the
3094 value placed in this slot will play in the workings of the function. I
3095 could have called it @code{foogle}, but that would have been a bad
3096 choice because it would not tell humans what it means. The choice of
3097 name is up to the programmer and should be chosen to make the meaning of
3098 the function clear.
3099
3100 Indeed, you can choose any name you wish for a symbol in an argument
3101 list, even the name of a symbol used in some other function: the name
3102 you use in an argument list is private to that particular definition.
3103 In that definition, the name refers to a different entity than any use
3104 of the same name outside the function definition. Suppose you have a
3105 nick-name ``Shorty'' in your family; when your family members refer to
3106 ``Shorty'', they mean you. But outside your family, in a movie, for
3107 example, the name ``Shorty'' refers to someone else. Because a name in an
3108 argument list is private to the function definition, you can change the
3109 value of such a symbol inside the body of a function without changing
3110 its value outside the function. The effect is similar to that produced
3111 by a @code{let} expression. (@xref{let, , @code{let}}.)
3112
3113 @ignore
3114 Note also that we discuss the word ``number'' in two different ways: as a
3115 symbol that appears in the code, and as the name of something that will
3116 be replaced by a something else during the evaluation of the function.
3117 In the first case, @code{number} is a symbol, not a number; it happens
3118 that within the function, it is a variable who value is the number in
3119 question, but our primary interest in it is as a symbol. On the other
3120 hand, when we are talking about the function, our interest is that we
3121 will substitute a number for the word @var{number}. To keep this
3122 distinction clear, we use different typography for the two
3123 circumstances. When we talk about this function, or about how it works,
3124 we refer to this number by writing @var{number}. In the function
3125 itself, we refer to it by writing @code{number}.
3126 @end ignore
3127
3128 The argument list is followed by the documentation string that
3129 describes the function. This is what you see when you type
3130 @w{@kbd{C-h f}} and the name of a function. Incidentally, when you
3131 write a documentation string like this, you should make the first line
3132 a complete sentence since some commands, such as @code{apropos}, print
3133 only the first line of a multi-line documentation string. Also, you
3134 should not indent the second line of a documentation string, if you
3135 have one, because that looks odd when you use @kbd{C-h f}
3136 (@code{describe-function}). The documentation string is optional, but
3137 it is so useful, it should be included in almost every function you
3138 write.
3139
3140 @findex * @r{(multiplication)}
3141 The third line of the example consists of the body of the function
3142 definition. (Most functions' definitions, of course, are longer than
3143 this.) In this function, the body is the list, @code{(* 7 number)}, which
3144 says to multiply the value of @var{number} by 7. (In Emacs Lisp,
3145 @code{*} is the function for multiplication, just as @code{+} is the
3146 function for addition.)
3147
3148 When you use the @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the argument
3149 @code{number} evaluates to the actual number you want used. Here is an
3150 example that shows how @code{multiply-by-seven} is used; but don't try
3151 to evaluate this yet!
3152
3153 @smallexample
3154 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3155 @end smallexample
3156
3157 @noindent
3158 The symbol @code{number}, specified in the function definition in the
3159 next section, is given or ``bound to'' the value 3 in the actual use of
3160 the function. Note that although @code{number} was inside parentheses
3161 in the function definition, the argument passed to the
3162 @code{multiply-by-seven} function is not in parentheses. The
3163 parentheses are written in the function definition so the computer can
3164 figure out where the argument list ends and the rest of the function
3165 definition begins.
3166
3167 If you evaluate this example, you are likely to get an error message.
3168 (Go ahead, try it!) This is because we have written the function
3169 definition, but not yet told the computer about the definition---we have
3170 not yet installed (or ``loaded'') the function definition in Emacs.
3171 Installing a function is the process that tells the Lisp interpreter the
3172 definition of the function. Installation is described in the next
3173 section.
3174
3175 @node Install
3176 @section Install a Function Definition
3177 @cindex Install a Function Definition
3178 @cindex Definition installation
3179 @cindex Function definition installation
3180
3181 If you are reading this inside of Info in Emacs, you can try out the
3182 @code{multiply-by-seven} function by first evaluating the function
3183 definition and then evaluating @code{(multiply-by-seven 3)}. A copy of
3184 the function definition follows. Place the cursor after the last
3185 parenthesis of the function definition and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you
3186 do this, @code{multiply-by-seven} will appear in the echo area. (What
3187 this means is that when a function definition is evaluated, the value it
3188 returns is the name of the defined function.) At the same time, this
3189 action installs the function definition.
3190
3191 @smallexample
3192 @group
3193 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3194 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3195 (* 7 number))
3196 @end group
3197 @end smallexample
3198
3199 @noindent
3200 By evaluating this @code{defun}, you have just installed
3201 @code{multiply-by-seven} in Emacs. The function is now just as much a
3202 part of Emacs as @code{forward-word} or any other editing function you
3203 use. (@code{multiply-by-seven} will stay installed until you quit
3204 Emacs. To reload code automatically whenever you start Emacs, see
3205 @ref{Permanent Installation, , Installing Code Permanently}.)
3206
3207 @menu
3208 * Effect of installation::
3209 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
3210 @end menu
3211
3212 @ifnottex
3213 @node Effect of installation
3214 @unnumberedsubsec The effect of installation
3215 @end ifnottex
3216
3217 You can see the effect of installing @code{multiply-by-seven} by
3218 evaluating the following sample. Place the cursor after the following
3219 expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. The number 21 will appear in the
3220 echo area.
3221
3222 @smallexample
3223 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3224 @end smallexample
3225
3226 If you wish, you can read the documentation for the function by typing
3227 @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and then the name of the
3228 function, @code{multiply-by-seven}. When you do this, a
3229 @file{*Help*} window will appear on your screen that says:
3230
3231 @smallexample
3232 @group
3233 multiply-by-seven is a Lisp function.
3234
3235 (multiply-by-seven NUMBER)
3236
3237 Multiply NUMBER by seven.
3238 @end group
3239 @end smallexample
3240
3241 @noindent
3242 (To return to a single window on your screen, type @kbd{C-x 1}.)
3243
3244 @node Change a defun
3245 @subsection Change a Function Definition
3246 @cindex Changing a function definition
3247 @cindex Function definition, how to change
3248 @cindex Definition, how to change
3249
3250 If you want to change the code in @code{multiply-by-seven}, just rewrite
3251 it. To install the new version in place of the old one, evaluate the
3252 function definition again. This is how you modify code in Emacs. It is
3253 very simple.
3254
3255 As an example, you can change the @code{multiply-by-seven} function to
3256 add the number to itself seven times instead of multiplying the number
3257 by seven. It produces the same answer, but by a different path. At
3258 the same time, we will add a comment to the code; a comment is text
3259 that the Lisp interpreter ignores, but that a human reader may find
3260 useful or enlightening. The comment is that this is the ``second
3261 version''.
3262
3263 @smallexample
3264 @group
3265 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Second version.}
3266 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3267 (+ number number number number number number number))
3268 @end group
3269 @end smallexample
3270
3271 @cindex Comments in Lisp code
3272 The comment follows a semicolon, @samp{;}. In Lisp, everything on a
3273 line that follows a semicolon is a comment. The end of the line is the
3274 end of the comment. To stretch a comment over two or more lines, begin
3275 each line with a semicolon.
3276
3277 @xref{Beginning init File, , Beginning a @file{.emacs}
3278 File}, and @ref{Comments, , Comments, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
3279 Reference Manual}, for more about comments.
3280
3281 You can install this version of the @code{multiply-by-seven} function by
3282 evaluating it in the same way you evaluated the first function: place
3283 the cursor after the last parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
3284
3285 In summary, this is how you write code in Emacs Lisp: you write a
3286 function; install it; test it; and then make fixes or enhancements and
3287 install it again.
3288
3289 @node Interactive
3290 @section Make a Function Interactive
3291 @cindex Interactive functions
3292 @findex interactive
3293
3294 You make a function interactive by placing a list that begins with
3295 the special form @code{interactive} immediately after the
3296 documentation. A user can invoke an interactive function by typing
3297 @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by typing the keys to
3298 which it is bound, for example, by typing @kbd{C-n} for
3299 @code{next-line} or @kbd{C-x h} for @code{mark-whole-buffer}.
3300
3301 Interestingly, when you call an interactive function interactively,
3302 the value returned is not automatically displayed in the echo area.
3303 This is because you often call an interactive function for its side
3304 effects, such as moving forward by a word or line, and not for the
3305 value returned. If the returned value were displayed in the echo area
3306 each time you typed a key, it would be very distracting.
3307
3308 @menu
3309 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
3310 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
3311 @end menu
3312
3313 @ifnottex
3314 @node Interactive multiply-by-seven
3315 @unnumberedsubsec An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}, An Overview
3316 @end ifnottex
3317
3318 Both the use of the special form @code{interactive} and one way to
3319 display a value in the echo area can be illustrated by creating an
3320 interactive version of @code{multiply-by-seven}.
3321
3322 @need 1250
3323 Here is the code:
3324
3325 @smallexample
3326 @group
3327 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3328 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3329 (interactive "p")
3330 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3331 @end group
3332 @end smallexample
3333
3334 @noindent
3335 You can install this code by placing your cursor after it and typing
3336 @kbd{C-x C-e}. The name of the function will appear in your echo area.
3337 Then, you can use this code by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number and then
3338 typing @kbd{M-x multiply-by-seven} and pressing @key{RET}. The phrase
3339 @samp{The result is @dots{}} followed by the product will appear in the
3340 echo area.
3341
3342 Speaking more generally, you invoke a function like this in either of two
3343 ways:
3344
3345 @enumerate
3346 @item
3347 By typing a prefix argument that contains the number to be passed, and
3348 then typing @kbd{M-x} and the name of the function, as with
3349 @kbd{C-u 3 M-x forward-sentence}; or,
3350
3351 @item
3352 By typing whatever key or keychord the function is bound to, as with
3353 @kbd{C-u 3 M-e}.
3354 @end enumerate
3355
3356 @noindent
3357 Both the examples just mentioned work identically to move point forward
3358 three sentences. (Since @code{multiply-by-seven} is not bound to a key,
3359 it could not be used as an example of key binding.)
3360
3361 (@xref{Keybindings, , Some Keybindings}, to learn how to bind a command
3362 to a key.)
3363
3364 A prefix argument is passed to an interactive function by typing the
3365 @key{META} key followed by a number, for example, @kbd{M-3 M-e}, or by
3366 typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number, for example, @kbd{C-u 3 M-e} (if you
3367 type @kbd{C-u} without a number, it defaults to 4).
3368
3369 @node multiply-by-seven in detail
3370 @subsection An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}
3371
3372 Let's look at the use of the special form @code{interactive} and then at
3373 the function @code{message} in the interactive version of
3374 @code{multiply-by-seven}. You will recall that the function definition
3375 looks like this:
3376
3377 @smallexample
3378 @group
3379 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3380 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3381 (interactive "p")
3382 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3383 @end group
3384 @end smallexample
3385
3386 In this function, the expression, @code{(interactive "p")}, is a list of
3387 two elements. The @code{"p"} tells Emacs to pass the prefix argument to
3388 the function and use its value for the argument of the function.
3389
3390 @need 1000
3391 The argument will be a number. This means that the symbol
3392 @code{number} will be bound to a number in the line:
3393
3394 @smallexample
3395 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number))
3396 @end smallexample
3397
3398 @need 1250
3399 @noindent
3400 For example, if your prefix argument is 5, the Lisp interpreter will
3401 evaluate the line as if it were:
3402
3403 @smallexample
3404 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 5))
3405 @end smallexample
3406
3407 @noindent
3408 (If you are reading this in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate this expression
3409 yourself.) First, the interpreter will evaluate the inner list, which
3410 is @code{(* 7 5)}. This returns a value of 35. Next, it
3411 will evaluate the outer list, passing the values of the second and
3412 subsequent elements of the list to the function @code{message}.
3413
3414 As we have seen, @code{message} is an Emacs Lisp function especially
3415 designed for sending a one line message to a user. (@xref{message, ,
3416 The @code{message} function}.) In summary, the @code{message}
3417 function prints its first argument in the echo area as is, except for
3418 occurrences of @samp{%d} or @samp{%s} (and various other %-sequences
3419 which we have not mentioned). When it sees a control sequence, the
3420 function looks to the second or subsequent arguments and prints the
3421 value of the argument in the location in the string where the control
3422 sequence is located.
3423
3424 In the interactive @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the control string
3425 is @samp{%d}, which requires a number, and the value returned by
3426 evaluating @code{(* 7 5)} is the number 35. Consequently, the number 35
3427 is printed in place of the @samp{%d} and the message is @samp{The result
3428 is 35}.
3429
3430 (Note that when you call the function @code{multiply-by-seven}, the
3431 message is printed without quotes, but when you call @code{message}, the
3432 text is printed in double quotes. This is because the value returned by
3433 @code{message} is what appears in the echo area when you evaluate an
3434 expression whose first element is @code{message}; but when embedded in a
3435 function, @code{message} prints the text as a side effect without
3436 quotes.)
3437
3438 @node Interactive Options
3439 @section Different Options for @code{interactive}
3440 @cindex Options for @code{interactive}
3441 @cindex Interactive options
3442
3443 In the example, @code{multiply-by-seven} used @code{"p"} as the
3444 argument to @code{interactive}. This argument told Emacs to interpret
3445 your typing either @kbd{C-u} followed by a number or @key{META}
3446 followed by a number as a command to pass that number to the function
3447 as its argument. Emacs has more than twenty characters predefined for
3448 use with @code{interactive}. In almost every case, one of these
3449 options will enable you to pass the right information interactively to
3450 a function. (@xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for
3451 @code{interactive}, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
3452
3453 @need 1250
3454 Consider the function @code{zap-to-char}. Its interactive expression
3455 is
3456
3457 @smallexample
3458 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3459 @end smallexample
3460
3461 The first part of the argument to @code{interactive} is @samp{p}, with
3462 which you are already familiar. This argument tells Emacs to
3463 interpret a ``prefix'', as a number to be passed to the function. You
3464 can specify a prefix either by typing @kbd{C-u} followed by a number
3465 or by typing @key{META} followed by a number. The prefix is the
3466 number of specified characters. Thus, if your prefix is three and the
3467 specified character is @samp{x}, then you will delete all the text up
3468 to and including the third next @samp{x}. If you do not set a prefix,
3469 then you delete all the text up to and including the specified
3470 character, but no more.
3471
3472 The @samp{c} tells the function the name of the character to which to delete.
3473
3474 More formally, a function with two or more arguments can have
3475 information passed to each argument by adding parts to the string that
3476 follows @code{interactive}. When you do this, the information is
3477 passed to each argument in the same order it is specified in the
3478 @code{interactive} list. In the string, each part is separated from
3479 the next part by a @samp{\n}, which is a newline. For example, you
3480 can follow @samp{p} with a @samp{\n} and an @samp{cZap to char:@: }.
3481 This causes Emacs to pass the value of the prefix argument (if there
3482 is one) and the character.
3483
3484 In this case, the function definition looks like the following, where
3485 @code{arg} and @code{char} are the symbols to which @code{interactive}
3486 binds the prefix argument and the specified character:
3487
3488 @smallexample
3489 @group
3490 (defun @var{name-of-function} (arg char)
3491 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
3492 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3493 @var{body-of-function}@dots{})
3494 @end group
3495 @end smallexample
3496
3497 @noindent
3498 (The space after the colon in the prompt makes it look better when you
3499 are prompted. @xref{copy-to-buffer, , The Definition of
3500 @code{copy-to-buffer}}, for an example.)
3501
3502 When a function does not take arguments, @code{interactive} does not
3503 require any. Such a function contains the simple expression
3504 @code{(interactive)}. The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is like
3505 this.
3506
3507 Alternatively, if the special letter-codes are not right for your
3508 application, you can pass your own arguments to @code{interactive} as
3509 a list.
3510
3511 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}},
3512 for an example. @xref{Using Interactive, , Using @code{Interactive},
3513 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a more complete
3514 explanation about this technique.
3515
3516 @node Permanent Installation
3517 @section Install Code Permanently
3518 @cindex Install code permanently
3519 @cindex Permanent code installation
3520 @cindex Code installation
3521
3522 When you install a function definition by evaluating it, it will stay
3523 installed until you quit Emacs. The next time you start a new session
3524 of Emacs, the function will not be installed unless you evaluate the
3525 function definition again.
3526
3527 At some point, you may want to have code installed automatically
3528 whenever you start a new session of Emacs. There are several ways of
3529 doing this:
3530
3531 @itemize @bullet
3532 @item
3533 If you have code that is just for yourself, you can put the code for the
3534 function definition in your @file{.emacs} initialization file. When you
3535 start Emacs, your @file{.emacs} file is automatically evaluated and all
3536 the function definitions within it are installed.
3537 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
3538
3539 @item
3540 Alternatively, you can put the function definitions that you want
3541 installed in one or more files of their own and use the @code{load}
3542 function to cause Emacs to evaluate and thereby install each of the
3543 functions in the files.
3544 @xref{Loading Files, , Loading Files}.
3545
3546 @item
3547 Thirdly, if you have code that your whole site will use, it is usual
3548 to put it in a file called @file{site-init.el} that is loaded when
3549 Emacs is built. This makes the code available to everyone who uses
3550 your machine. (See the @file{INSTALL} file that is part of the Emacs
3551 distribution.)
3552 @end itemize
3553
3554 Finally, if you have code that everyone who uses Emacs may want, you
3555 can post it on a computer network or send a copy to the Free Software
3556 Foundation. (When you do this, please license the code and its
3557 documentation under a license that permits other people to run, copy,
3558 study, modify, and redistribute the code and which protects you from
3559 having your work taken from you.) If you send a copy of your code to
3560 the Free Software Foundation, and properly protect yourself and
3561 others, it may be included in the next release of Emacs. In large
3562 part, this is how Emacs has grown over the past years, by donations.
3563
3564 @node let
3565 @section @code{let}
3566 @findex let
3567
3568 The @code{let} expression is a special form in Lisp that you will need
3569 to use in most function definitions.
3570
3571 @code{let} is used to attach or bind a symbol to a value in such a way
3572 that the Lisp interpreter will not confuse the variable with a
3573 variable of the same name that is not part of the function.
3574
3575 To understand why the @code{let} special form is necessary, consider
3576 the situation in which you own a home that you generally refer to as
3577 ``the house'', as in the sentence, ``The house needs painting.'' If you
3578 are visiting a friend and your host refers to ``the house'', he is
3579 likely to be referring to @emph{his} house, not yours, that is, to a
3580 different house.
3581
3582 If your friend is referring to his house and you think he is referring
3583 to your house, you may be in for some confusion. The same thing could
3584 happen in Lisp if a variable that is used inside of one function has
3585 the same name as a variable that is used inside of another function,
3586 and the two are not intended to refer to the same value. The
3587 @code{let} special form prevents this kind of confusion.
3588
3589 @menu
3590 * Prevent confusion::
3591 * Parts of let Expression::
3592 * Sample let Expression::
3593 * Uninitialized let Variables::
3594 @end menu
3595
3596 @ifnottex
3597 @node Prevent confusion
3598 @unnumberedsubsec @code{let} Prevents Confusion
3599 @end ifnottex
3600
3601 @cindex @samp{local variable} defined
3602 @cindex @samp{variable, local}, defined
3603 The @code{let} special form prevents confusion. @code{let} creates a
3604 name for a @dfn{local variable} that overshadows any use of the same
3605 name outside the @code{let} expression. This is like understanding
3606 that whenever your host refers to ``the house'', he means his house, not
3607 yours. (Symbols used in argument lists work the same way.
3608 @xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Macro}.)
3609
3610 Local variables created by a @code{let} expression retain their value
3611 @emph{only} within the @code{let} expression itself (and within
3612 expressions called within the @code{let} expression); the local
3613 variables have no effect outside the @code{let} expression.
3614
3615 Another way to think about @code{let} is that it is like a @code{setq}
3616 that is temporary and local. The values set by @code{let} are
3617 automatically undone when the @code{let} is finished. The setting
3618 only affects expressions that are inside the bounds of the @code{let}
3619 expression. In computer science jargon, we would say ``the binding of
3620 a symbol is visible only in functions called in the @code{let} form;
3621 in Emacs Lisp, scoping is dynamic, not lexical.''
3622
3623 @code{let} can create more than one variable at once. Also,
3624 @code{let} gives each variable it creates an initial value, either a
3625 value specified by you, or @code{nil}. (In the jargon, this is called
3626 ``binding the variable to the value''.) After @code{let} has created
3627 and bound the variables, it executes the code in the body of the
3628 @code{let}, and returns the value of the last expression in the body,
3629 as the value of the whole @code{let} expression. (``Execute'' is a jargon
3630 term that means to evaluate a list; it comes from the use of the word
3631 meaning ``to give practical effect to'' (@cite{Oxford English
3632 Dictionary}). Since you evaluate an expression to perform an action,
3633 ``execute'' has evolved as a synonym to ``evaluate''.)
3634
3635 @node Parts of let Expression
3636 @subsection The Parts of a @code{let} Expression
3637 @cindex @code{let} expression, parts of
3638 @cindex Parts of @code{let} expression
3639
3640 @cindex @samp{varlist} defined
3641 A @code{let} expression is a list of three parts. The first part is
3642 the symbol @code{let}. The second part is a list, called a
3643 @dfn{varlist}, each element of which is either a symbol by itself or a
3644 two-element list, the first element of which is a symbol. The third
3645 part of the @code{let} expression is the body of the @code{let}. The
3646 body usually consists of one or more lists.
3647
3648 @need 800
3649 A template for a @code{let} expression looks like this:
3650
3651 @smallexample
3652 (let @var{varlist} @var{body}@dots{})
3653 @end smallexample
3654
3655 @noindent
3656 The symbols in the varlist are the variables that are given initial
3657 values by the @code{let} special form. Symbols by themselves are given
3658 the initial value of @code{nil}; and each symbol that is the first
3659 element of a two-element list is bound to the value that is returned
3660 when the Lisp interpreter evaluates the second element.
3661
3662 Thus, a varlist might look like this: @code{(thread (needles 3))}. In
3663 this case, in a @code{let} expression, Emacs binds the symbol
3664 @code{thread} to an initial value of @code{nil}, and binds the symbol
3665 @code{needles} to an initial value of 3.
3666
3667 When you write a @code{let} expression, what you do is put the
3668 appropriate expressions in the slots of the @code{let} expression
3669 template.
3670
3671 If the varlist is composed of two-element lists, as is often the case,
3672 the template for the @code{let} expression looks like this:
3673
3674 @smallexample
3675 @group
3676 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value})
3677 (@var{variable} @var{value})
3678 @dots{})
3679 @var{body}@dots{})
3680 @end group
3681 @end smallexample
3682
3683 @node Sample let Expression
3684 @subsection Sample @code{let} Expression
3685 @cindex Sample @code{let} expression
3686 @cindex @code{let} expression sample
3687
3688 The following expression creates and gives initial values
3689 to the two variables @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. The body of the
3690 @code{let} expression is a list which calls the @code{message} function.
3691
3692 @smallexample
3693 @group
3694 (let ((zebra "stripes")
3695 (tiger "fierce"))
3696 (message "One kind of animal has %s and another is %s."
3697 zebra tiger))
3698 @end group
3699 @end smallexample
3700
3701 Here, the varlist is @code{((zebra "stripes") (tiger "fierce"))}.
3702
3703 The two variables are @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. Each variable is
3704 the first element of a two-element list and each value is the second
3705 element of its two-element list. In the varlist, Emacs binds the
3706 variable @code{zebra} to the value @code{"stripes"}@footnote{According
3707 to Jared Diamond in @cite{Guns, Germs, and Steel}, ``@dots{} zebras
3708 become impossibly dangerous as they grow older'' but the claim here is
3709 that they do not become fierce like a tiger. (1997, W. W. Norton and
3710 Co., ISBN 0-393-03894-2, page 171)}, and binds the
3711 variable @code{tiger} to the value @code{"fierce"}. In this example,
3712 both values are strings. The values could just as well have been
3713 another list or a symbol. The body of the @code{let}
3714 follows after the list holding the variables. In this example, the
3715 body is a list that uses the @code{message} function to print a string
3716 in the echo area.
3717
3718 @need 1500
3719 You may evaluate the example in the usual fashion, by placing the
3720 cursor after the last parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you do
3721 this, the following will appear in the echo area:
3722
3723 @smallexample
3724 "One kind of animal has stripes and another is fierce."
3725 @end smallexample
3726
3727 As we have seen before, the @code{message} function prints its first
3728 argument, except for @samp{%s}. In this example, the value of the variable
3729 @code{zebra} is printed at the location of the first @samp{%s} and the
3730 value of the variable @code{tiger} is printed at the location of the
3731 second @samp{%s}.
3732
3733 @node Uninitialized let Variables
3734 @subsection Uninitialized Variables in a @code{let} Statement
3735 @cindex Uninitialized @code{let} variables
3736 @cindex @code{let} variables uninitialized
3737
3738 If you do not bind the variables in a @code{let} statement to specific
3739 initial values, they will automatically be bound to an initial value of
3740 @code{nil}, as in the following expression:
3741
3742 @smallexample
3743 @group
3744 (let ((birch 3)
3745 pine
3746 fir
3747 (oak 'some))
3748 (message
3749 "Here are %d variables with %s, %s, and %s value."
3750 birch pine fir oak))
3751 @end group
3752 @end smallexample
3753
3754 @noindent
3755 Here, the varlist is @code{((birch 3) pine fir (oak 'some))}.
3756
3757 @need 1250
3758 If you evaluate this expression in the usual way, the following will
3759 appear in your echo area:
3760
3761 @smallexample
3762 "Here are 3 variables with nil, nil, and some value."
3763 @end smallexample
3764
3765 @noindent
3766 In this example, Emacs binds the symbol @code{birch} to the number 3,
3767 binds the symbols @code{pine} and @code{fir} to @code{nil}, and binds
3768 the symbol @code{oak} to the value @code{some}.
3769
3770 Note that in the first part of the @code{let}, the variables @code{pine}
3771 and @code{fir} stand alone as atoms that are not surrounded by
3772 parentheses; this is because they are being bound to @code{nil}, the
3773 empty list. But @code{oak} is bound to @code{some} and so is a part of
3774 the list @code{(oak 'some)}. Similarly, @code{birch} is bound to the
3775 number 3 and so is in a list with that number. (Since a number
3776 evaluates to itself, the number does not need to be quoted. Also, the
3777 number is printed in the message using a @samp{%d} rather than a
3778 @samp{%s}.) The four variables as a group are put into a list to
3779 delimit them from the body of the @code{let}.
3780
3781 @node if
3782 @section The @code{if} Special Form
3783 @findex if
3784 @cindex Conditional with @code{if}
3785
3786 A third special form, in addition to @code{defun} and @code{let}, is the
3787 conditional @code{if}. This form is used to instruct the computer to
3788 make decisions. You can write function definitions without using
3789 @code{if}, but it is used often enough, and is important enough, to be
3790 included here. It is used, for example, in the code for the
3791 function @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
3792
3793 The basic idea behind an @code{if}, is that ``@emph{if} a test is true,
3794 @emph{then} an expression is evaluated.'' If the test is not true, the
3795 expression is not evaluated. For example, you might make a decision
3796 such as, ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to the beach!''
3797
3798 @menu
3799 * if in more detail::
3800 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
3801 @end menu
3802
3803 @ifnottex
3804 @node if in more detail
3805 @unnumberedsubsec @code{if} in more detail
3806 @end ifnottex
3807
3808 @cindex @samp{if-part} defined
3809 @cindex @samp{then-part} defined
3810 An @code{if} expression written in Lisp does not use the word ``then'';
3811 the test and the action are the second and third elements of the list
3812 whose first element is @code{if}. Nonetheless, the test part of an
3813 @code{if} expression is often called the @dfn{if-part} and the second
3814 argument is often called the @dfn{then-part}.
3815
3816 Also, when an @code{if} expression is written, the true-or-false-test
3817 is usually written on the same line as the symbol @code{if}, but the
3818 action to carry out if the test is true, the ``then-part'', is written
3819 on the second and subsequent lines. This makes the @code{if}
3820 expression easier to read.
3821
3822 @smallexample
3823 @group
3824 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3825 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-test-is-true})
3826 @end group
3827 @end smallexample
3828
3829 @noindent
3830 The true-or-false-test will be an expression that
3831 is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter.
3832
3833 Here is an example that you can evaluate in the usual manner. The test
3834 is whether the number 5 is greater than the number 4. Since it is, the
3835 message @samp{5 is greater than 4!} will be printed.
3836
3837 @smallexample
3838 @group
3839 (if (> 5 4) ; @r{if-part}
3840 (message "5 is greater than 4!")) ; @r{then-part}
3841 @end group
3842 @end smallexample
3843
3844 @noindent
3845 (The function @code{>} tests whether its first argument is greater than
3846 its second argument and returns true if it is.)
3847 @findex > (greater than)
3848
3849 Of course, in actual use, the test in an @code{if} expression will not
3850 be fixed for all time as it is by the expression @code{(> 5 4)}.
3851 Instead, at least one of the variables used in the test will be bound to
3852 a value that is not known ahead of time. (If the value were known ahead
3853 of time, we would not need to run the test!)
3854
3855 For example, the value may be bound to an argument of a function
3856 definition. In the following function definition, the character of the
3857 animal is a value that is passed to the function. If the value bound to
3858 @code{characteristic} is @code{"fierce"}, then the message, @samp{It is a
3859 tiger!} will be printed; otherwise, @code{nil} will be returned.
3860
3861 @smallexample
3862 @group
3863 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
3864 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
3865 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the string \"fierce\",
3866 then warn of a tiger."
3867 (if (equal characteristic "fierce")
3868 (message "It is a tiger!")))
3869 @end group
3870 @end smallexample
3871
3872 @need 1500
3873 @noindent
3874 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate the
3875 function definition in the usual way to install it in Emacs, and then you
3876 can evaluate the following two expressions to see the results:
3877
3878 @smallexample
3879 @group
3880 (type-of-animal "fierce")
3881
3882 (type-of-animal "striped")
3883
3884 @end group
3885 @end smallexample
3886
3887 @c Following sentences rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
3888 @noindent
3889 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal "fierce")}, you will see the
3890 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It is a tiger!"}; and
3891 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal "striped")} you will see @code{nil}
3892 printed in the echo area.
3893
3894 @node type-of-animal in detail
3895 @subsection The @code{type-of-animal} Function in Detail
3896
3897 Let's look at the @code{type-of-animal} function in detail.
3898
3899 The function definition for @code{type-of-animal} was written by filling
3900 the slots of two templates, one for a function definition as a whole, and
3901 a second for an @code{if} expression.
3902
3903 @need 1250
3904 The template for every function that is not interactive is:
3905
3906 @smallexample
3907 @group
3908 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
3909 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
3910 @var{body}@dots{})
3911 @end group
3912 @end smallexample
3913
3914 @need 800
3915 The parts of the function that match this template look like this:
3916
3917 @smallexample
3918 @group
3919 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
3920 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
3921 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the string \"fierce\",
3922 then warn of a tiger."
3923 @var{body: the} @code{if} @var{expression})
3924 @end group
3925 @end smallexample
3926
3927 The name of function is @code{type-of-animal}; it is passed the value
3928 of one argument. The argument list is followed by a multi-line
3929 documentation string. The documentation string is included in the
3930 example because it is a good habit to write documentation string for
3931 every function definition. The body of the function definition
3932 consists of the @code{if} expression.
3933
3934 @need 800
3935 The template for an @code{if} expression looks like this:
3936
3937 @smallexample
3938 @group
3939 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3940 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true})
3941 @end group
3942 @end smallexample
3943
3944 @need 1250
3945 In the @code{type-of-animal} function, the code for the @code{if}
3946 looks like this:
3947
3948 @smallexample
3949 @group
3950 (if (equal characteristic "fierce")
3951 (message "It is a tiger!")))
3952 @end group
3953 @end smallexample
3954
3955 @need 800
3956 Here, the true-or-false-test is the expression:
3957
3958 @smallexample
3959 (equal characteristic "fierce")
3960 @end smallexample
3961
3962 @noindent
3963 In Lisp, @code{equal} is a function that determines whether its first
3964 argument is equal to its second argument. The second argument is the
3965 string @code{"fierce"} and the first argument is the value of the
3966 symbol @code{characteristic}---in other words, the argument passed to
3967 this function.
3968
3969 In the first exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the argument
3970 @code{"fierce"} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. Since @code{"fierce"}
3971 is equal to @code{"fierce"}, the expression, @code{(equal characteristic
3972 "fierce")}, returns a value of true. When this happens, the @code{if}
3973 evaluates the second argument or then-part of the @code{if}:
3974 @code{(message "It is a tiger!")}.
3975
3976 On the other hand, in the second exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the
3977 argument @code{"striped"} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. @code{"striped"}
3978 is not equal to @code{"fierce"}, so the then-part is not evaluated and
3979 @code{nil} is returned by the @code{if} expression.
3980
3981 @node else
3982 @section If--then--else Expressions
3983 @cindex Else
3984
3985 An @code{if} expression may have an optional third argument, called
3986 the @dfn{else-part}, for the case when the true-or-false-test returns
3987 false. When this happens, the second argument or then-part of the
3988 overall @code{if} expression is @emph{not} evaluated, but the third or
3989 else-part @emph{is} evaluated. You might think of this as the cloudy
3990 day alternative for the decision ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to
3991 the beach, else read a book!''.
3992
3993 The word ``else'' is not written in the Lisp code; the else-part of an
3994 @code{if} expression comes after the then-part. In the written Lisp, the
3995 else-part is usually written to start on a line of its own and is
3996 indented less than the then-part:
3997
3998 @smallexample
3999 @group
4000 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
4001 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true}
4002 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-false})
4003 @end group
4004 @end smallexample
4005
4006 For example, the following @code{if} expression prints the message @samp{4
4007 is not greater than 5!} when you evaluate it in the usual way:
4008
4009 @smallexample
4010 @group
4011 (if (> 4 5) ; @r{if-part}
4012 (message "4 falsely greater than 5!") ; @r{then-part}
4013 (message "4 is not greater than 5!")) ; @r{else-part}
4014 @end group
4015 @end smallexample
4016
4017 @noindent
4018 Note that the different levels of indentation make it easy to
4019 distinguish the then-part from the else-part. (GNU Emacs has several
4020 commands that automatically indent @code{if} expressions correctly.
4021 @xref{Typing Lists, , GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists}.)
4022
4023 We can extend the @code{type-of-animal} function to include an
4024 else-part by simply incorporating an additional part to the @code{if}
4025 expression.
4026
4027 @need 1500
4028 You can see the consequences of doing this if you evaluate the following
4029 version of the @code{type-of-animal} function definition to install it
4030 and then evaluate the two subsequent expressions to pass different
4031 arguments to the function.
4032
4033 @smallexample
4034 @group
4035 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic) ; @r{Second version.}
4036 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
4037 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the string \"fierce\",
4038 then warn of a tiger; else say it is not fierce."
4039 (if (equal characteristic "fierce")
4040 (message "It is a tiger!")
4041 (message "It is not fierce!")))
4042 @end group
4043 @end smallexample
4044 @sp 1
4045
4046 @smallexample
4047 @group
4048 (type-of-animal "fierce")
4049
4050 (type-of-animal "striped")
4051
4052 @end group
4053 @end smallexample
4054
4055 @c Following sentence rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
4056 @noindent
4057 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal "fierce")}, you will see the
4058 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It is a tiger!"}; but
4059 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal "striped")}, you will see
4060 @code{"It is not fierce!"}.
4061
4062 (Of course, if the @var{characteristic} were @code{"ferocious"}, the
4063 message @code{"It is not fierce!"} would be printed; and it would be
4064 misleading! When you write code, you need to take into account the
4065 possibility that some such argument will be tested by the @code{if}
4066 and write your program accordingly.)
4067
4068 @node Truth & Falsehood
4069 @section Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4070 @cindex Truth and falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4071 @cindex Falsehood and truth in Emacs Lisp
4072 @findex nil
4073
4074 There is an important aspect to the truth test in an @code{if}
4075 expression. So far, we have spoken of ``true'' and ``false'' as values of
4076 predicates as if they were new kinds of Emacs Lisp objects. In fact,
4077 ``false'' is just our old friend @code{nil}. Anything else---anything
4078 at all---is ``true''.
4079
4080 The expression that tests for truth is interpreted as @dfn{true}
4081 if the result of evaluating it is a value that is not @code{nil}. In
4082 other words, the result of the test is considered true if the value
4083 returned is a number such as 47, a string such as @code{"hello"}, or a
4084 symbol (other than @code{nil}) such as @code{flowers}, or a list (so
4085 long as it is not empty), or even a buffer!
4086
4087 @menu
4088 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
4089 @end menu
4090
4091 @ifnottex
4092 @node nil explained
4093 @unnumberedsubsec An explanation of @code{nil}
4094 @end ifnottex
4095
4096 Before illustrating a test for truth, we need an explanation of @code{nil}.
4097
4098 In Emacs Lisp, the symbol @code{nil} has two meanings. First, it means the
4099 empty list. Second, it means false and is the value returned when a
4100 true-or-false-test tests false. @code{nil} can be written as an empty
4101 list, @code{()}, or as @code{nil}. As far as the Lisp interpreter is
4102 concerned, @code{()} and @code{nil} are the same. Humans, however, tend
4103 to use @code{nil} for false and @code{()} for the empty list.
4104
4105 In Emacs Lisp, any value that is not @code{nil}---is not the empty
4106 list---is considered true. This means that if an evaluation returns
4107 something that is not an empty list, an @code{if} expression will test
4108 true. For example, if a number is put in the slot for the test, it
4109 will be evaluated and will return itself, since that is what numbers
4110 do when evaluated. In this conditional, the @code{if} expression will
4111 test true. The expression tests false only when @code{nil}, an empty
4112 list, is returned by evaluating the expression.
4113
4114 You can see this by evaluating the two expressions in the following examples.
4115
4116 In the first example, the number 4 is evaluated as the test in the
4117 @code{if} expression and returns itself; consequently, the then-part
4118 of the expression is evaluated and returned: @samp{true} appears in
4119 the echo area. In the second example, the @code{nil} indicates false;
4120 consequently, the else-part of the expression is evaluated and
4121 returned: @samp{false} appears in the echo area.
4122
4123 @smallexample
4124 @group
4125 (if 4
4126 'true
4127 'false)
4128 @end group
4129
4130 @group
4131 (if nil
4132 'true
4133 'false)
4134 @end group
4135 @end smallexample
4136
4137 @need 1250
4138 Incidentally, if some other useful value is not available for a test that
4139 returns true, then the Lisp interpreter will return the symbol @code{t}
4140 for true. For example, the expression @code{(> 5 4)} returns @code{t}
4141 when evaluated, as you can see by evaluating it in the usual way:
4142
4143 @smallexample
4144 (> 5 4)
4145 @end smallexample
4146
4147 @need 1250
4148 @noindent
4149 On the other hand, this function returns @code{nil} if the test is false.
4150
4151 @smallexample
4152 (> 4 5)
4153 @end smallexample
4154
4155 @node save-excursion
4156 @section @code{save-excursion}
4157 @findex save-excursion
4158 @cindex Region, what it is
4159 @cindex Preserving point and buffer
4160 @cindex Point and buffer preservation
4161 @findex point
4162 @findex mark
4163
4164 The @code{save-excursion} function is the third and final special form
4165 that we will discuss in this chapter.
4166
4167 In Emacs Lisp programs used for editing, the @code{save-excursion}
4168 function is very common. It saves the location of point,
4169 executes the body of the function, and then restores point to
4170 its previous position if its location was changed. Its primary
4171 purpose is to keep the user from being surprised and disturbed by
4172 unexpected movement of point.
4173
4174 @menu
4175 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
4176 * Template for save-excursion::
4177 @end menu
4178
4179 @ifnottex
4180 @node Point and mark
4181 @unnumberedsubsec Point and Mark
4182 @end ifnottex
4183
4184 Before discussing @code{save-excursion}, however, it may be useful
4185 first to review what point and mark are in GNU Emacs. @dfn{Point} is
4186 the current location of the cursor. Wherever the cursor
4187 is, that is point. More precisely, on terminals where the cursor
4188 appears to be on top of a character, point is immediately before the
4189 character. In Emacs Lisp, point is an integer. The first character in
4190 a buffer is number one, the second is number two, and so on. The
4191 function @code{point} returns the current position of the cursor as a
4192 number. Each buffer has its own value for point.
4193
4194 The @dfn{mark} is another position in the buffer; its value can be set
4195 with a command such as @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}). If
4196 a mark has been set, you can use the command @kbd{C-x C-x}
4197 (@code{exchange-point-and-mark}) to cause the cursor to jump to the mark
4198 and set the mark to be the previous position of point. In addition, if
4199 you set another mark, the position of the previous mark is saved in the
4200 mark ring. Many mark positions can be saved this way. You can jump the
4201 cursor to a saved mark by typing @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}} one or more
4202 times.
4203
4204 The part of the buffer between point and mark is called @dfn{the
4205 region}. Numerous commands work on the region, including
4206 @code{center-region}, @code{count-lines-region}, @code{kill-region}, and
4207 @code{print-region}.
4208
4209 The @code{save-excursion} special form saves the location of point and
4210 restores this position after the code within the body of the
4211 special form is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter. Thus, if point were
4212 in the beginning of a piece of text and some code moved point to the end
4213 of the buffer, the @code{save-excursion} would put point back to where
4214 it was before, after the expressions in the body of the function were
4215 evaluated.
4216
4217 In Emacs, a function frequently moves point as part of its internal
4218 workings even though a user would not expect this. For example,
4219 @code{count-lines-region} moves point. To prevent the user from being
4220 bothered by jumps that are both unexpected and (from the user's point of
4221 view) unnecessary, @code{save-excursion} is often used to keep point in
4222 the location expected by the user. The use of
4223 @code{save-excursion} is good housekeeping.
4224
4225 To make sure the house stays clean, @code{save-excursion} restores the
4226 value of point even if something goes wrong in the code inside
4227 of it (or, to be more precise and to use the proper jargon, ``in case of
4228 abnormal exit''). This feature is very helpful.
4229
4230 In addition to recording the value of point,
4231 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the current buffer, and restores
4232 it, too. This means you can write code that will change the buffer and
4233 have @code{save-excursion} switch you back to the original buffer.
4234 This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in @code{append-to-buffer}.
4235 (@xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
4236
4237 @node Template for save-excursion
4238 @subsection Template for a @code{save-excursion} Expression
4239
4240 @need 800
4241 The template for code using @code{save-excursion} is simple:
4242
4243 @smallexample
4244 @group
4245 (save-excursion
4246 @var{body}@dots{})
4247 @end group
4248 @end smallexample
4249
4250 @noindent
4251 The body of the function is one or more expressions that will be
4252 evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter. If there is more than
4253 one expression in the body, the value of the last one will be returned
4254 as the value of the @code{save-excursion} function. The other
4255 expressions in the body are evaluated only for their side effects; and
4256 @code{save-excursion} itself is used only for its side effect (which
4257 is restoring the position of point).
4258
4259 @need 1250
4260 In more detail, the template for a @code{save-excursion} expression
4261 looks like this:
4262
4263 @smallexample
4264 @group
4265 (save-excursion
4266 @var{first-expression-in-body}
4267 @var{second-expression-in-body}
4268 @var{third-expression-in-body}
4269 @dots{}
4270 @var{last-expression-in-body})
4271 @end group
4272 @end smallexample
4273
4274 @noindent
4275 An expression, of course, may be a symbol on its own or a list.
4276
4277 In Emacs Lisp code, a @code{save-excursion} expression often occurs
4278 within the body of a @code{let} expression. It looks like this:
4279
4280 @smallexample
4281 @group
4282 (let @var{varlist}
4283 (save-excursion
4284 @var{body}@dots{}))
4285 @end group
4286 @end smallexample
4287
4288 @node Review
4289 @section Review
4290
4291 In the last few chapters we have introduced a macro and a fair number
4292 of functions and special forms. Here they are described in brief,
4293 along with a few similar functions that have not been mentioned yet.
4294
4295 @table @code
4296 @item eval-last-sexp
4297 Evaluate the last symbolic expression before the current location of
4298 point. The value is printed in the echo area unless the function is
4299 invoked with an argument; in that case, the output is printed in the
4300 current buffer. This command is normally bound to @kbd{C-x C-e}.
4301
4302 @item defun
4303 Define function. This macro has up to five parts: the name, a
4304 template for the arguments that will be passed to the function,
4305 documentation, an optional interactive declaration, and the body of
4306 the definition.
4307
4308 @need 1250
4309 For example, in an early version of Emacs, the function definition was
4310 as follows. (It is slightly more complex now that it seeks the first
4311 non-whitespace character rather than the first visible character.)
4312
4313 @smallexample
4314 @group
4315 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4316 "Move point to first visible character on line."
4317 (interactive)
4318 (beginning-of-line 1)
4319 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4320 @end group
4321 @end smallexample
4322
4323 @ignore
4324 In GNU Emacs 22,
4325
4326 (defun backward-to-indentation (&optional arg)
4327 "Move backward ARG lines and position at first nonblank character."
4328 (interactive "p")
4329 (forward-line (- (or arg 1)))
4330 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4331
4332 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4333 "Move point to the first non-whitespace character on this line."
4334 (interactive)
4335 (beginning-of-line 1)
4336 (skip-syntax-forward " " (line-end-position))
4337 ;; Move back over chars that have whitespace syntax but have the p flag.
4338 (backward-prefix-chars))
4339 @end ignore
4340
4341 @item interactive
4342 Declare to the interpreter that the function can be used
4343 interactively. This special form may be followed by a string with one
4344 or more parts that pass the information to the arguments of the
4345 function, in sequence. These parts may also tell the interpreter to
4346 prompt for information. Parts of the string are separated by
4347 newlines, @samp{\n}.
4348
4349 @need 1000
4350 Common code characters are:
4351
4352 @table @code
4353 @item b
4354 The name of an existing buffer.
4355
4356 @item f
4357 The name of an existing file.
4358
4359 @item p
4360 The numeric prefix argument. (Note that this @code{p} is lower case.)
4361
4362 @item r
4363 Point and the mark, as two numeric arguments, smallest first. This
4364 is the only code letter that specifies two successive arguments
4365 rather than one.
4366 @end table
4367
4368 @xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for @samp{interactive},
4369 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a complete list of
4370 code characters.
4371
4372 @item let
4373 Declare that a list of variables is for use within the body of the
4374 @code{let} and give them an initial value, either @code{nil} or a
4375 specified value; then evaluate the rest of the expressions in the body
4376 of the @code{let} and return the value of the last one. Inside the
4377 body of the @code{let}, the Lisp interpreter does not see the values of
4378 the variables of the same names that are bound outside of the
4379 @code{let}.
4380
4381 @need 1250
4382 For example,
4383
4384 @smallexample
4385 @group
4386 (let ((foo (buffer-name))
4387 (bar (buffer-size)))
4388 (message
4389 "This buffer is %s and has %d characters."
4390 foo bar))
4391 @end group
4392 @end smallexample
4393
4394 @item save-excursion
4395 Record the values of point and the current buffer before
4396 evaluating the body of this special form. Restore the value of point and
4397 buffer afterward.
4398
4399 @need 1250
4400 For example,
4401
4402 @smallexample
4403 @group
4404 (message "We are %d characters into this buffer."
4405 (- (point)
4406 (save-excursion
4407 (goto-char (point-min)) (point))))
4408 @end group
4409 @end smallexample
4410
4411 @item if
4412 Evaluate the first argument to the function; if it is true, evaluate
4413 the second argument; else evaluate the third argument, if there is one.
4414
4415 The @code{if} special form is called a @dfn{conditional}. There are
4416 other conditionals in Emacs Lisp, but @code{if} is perhaps the most
4417 commonly used.
4418
4419 @need 1250
4420 For example,
4421
4422 @smallexample
4423 @group
4424 (if (= 22 emacs-major-version)
4425 (message "This is version 22 Emacs")
4426 (message "This is not version 22 Emacs"))
4427 @end group
4428 @end smallexample
4429
4430 @need 1250
4431 @item <
4432 @itemx >
4433 @itemx <=
4434 @itemx >=
4435 The @code{<} function tests whether its first argument is smaller than
4436 its second argument. A corresponding function, @code{>}, tests whether
4437 the first argument is greater than the second. Likewise, @code{<=}
4438 tests whether the first argument is less than or equal to the second and
4439 @code{>=} tests whether the first argument is greater than or equal to
4440 the second. In all cases, both arguments must be numbers or markers
4441 (markers indicate positions in buffers).
4442
4443 @need 800
4444 @item =
4445 The @code{=} function tests whether two arguments, both numbers or
4446 markers, are equal.
4447
4448 @need 1250
4449 @item equal
4450 @itemx eq
4451 Test whether two objects are the same. @code{equal} uses one meaning
4452 of the word ``same'' and @code{eq} uses another: @code{equal} returns
4453 true if the two objects have a similar structure and contents, such as
4454 two copies of the same book. On the other hand, @code{eq}, returns
4455 true if both arguments are actually the same object.
4456 @findex equal
4457 @findex eq
4458
4459 @need 1250
4460 @item string<
4461 @itemx string-lessp
4462 @itemx string=
4463 @itemx string-equal
4464 The @code{string-lessp} function tests whether its first argument is
4465 smaller than the second argument. A shorter, alternative name for the
4466 same function (a @code{defalias}) is @code{string<}.
4467
4468 The arguments to @code{string-lessp} must be strings or symbols; the
4469 ordering is lexicographic, so case is significant. The print names of
4470 symbols are used instead of the symbols themselves.
4471
4472 @cindex @samp{empty string} defined
4473 An empty string, @samp{""}, a string with no characters in it, is
4474 smaller than any string of characters.
4475
4476 @code{string-equal} provides the corresponding test for equality. Its
4477 shorter, alternative name is @code{string=}. There are no string test
4478 functions that correspond to @var{>}, @code{>=}, or @code{<=}.
4479
4480 @item message
4481 Print a message in the echo area. The first argument is a string that
4482 can contain @samp{%s}, @samp{%d}, or @samp{%c} to print the value of
4483 arguments that follow the string. The argument used by @samp{%s} must
4484 be a string or a symbol; the argument used by @samp{%d} must be a
4485 number. The argument used by @samp{%c} must be an @sc{ascii} code
4486 number; it will be printed as the character with that @sc{ascii} code.
4487 (Various other %-sequences have not been mentioned.)
4488
4489 @item setq
4490 @itemx set
4491 The @code{setq} function sets the value of its first argument to the
4492 value of the second argument. The first argument is automatically
4493 quoted by @code{setq}. It does the same for succeeding pairs of
4494 arguments. Another function, @code{set}, takes only two arguments and
4495 evaluates both of them before setting the value returned by its first
4496 argument to the value returned by its second argument.
4497
4498 @item buffer-name
4499 Without an argument, return the name of the buffer, as a string.
4500
4501 @item buffer-file-name
4502 Without an argument, return the name of the file the buffer is
4503 visiting.
4504
4505 @item current-buffer
4506 Return the buffer in which Emacs is active; it may not be
4507 the buffer that is visible on the screen.
4508
4509 @item other-buffer
4510 Return the most recently selected buffer (other than the buffer passed
4511 to @code{other-buffer} as an argument and other than the current
4512 buffer).
4513
4514 @item switch-to-buffer
4515 Select a buffer for Emacs to be active in and display it in the current
4516 window so users can look at it. Usually bound to @kbd{C-x b}.
4517
4518 @item set-buffer
4519 Switch Emacs's attention to a buffer on which programs will run. Don't
4520 alter what the window is showing.
4521
4522 @item buffer-size
4523 Return the number of characters in the current buffer.
4524
4525 @item point
4526 Return the value of the current position of the cursor, as an
4527 integer counting the number of characters from the beginning of the
4528 buffer.
4529
4530 @item point-min
4531 Return the minimum permissible value of point in
4532 the current buffer. This is 1, unless narrowing is in effect.
4533
4534 @item point-max
4535 Return the value of the maximum permissible value of point in the
4536 current buffer. This is the end of the buffer, unless narrowing is in
4537 effect.
4538 @end table
4539
4540 @need 1500
4541 @node defun Exercises
4542 @section Exercises
4543
4544 @itemize @bullet
4545 @item
4546 Write a non-interactive function that doubles the value of its
4547 argument, a number. Make that function interactive.
4548
4549 @item
4550 Write a function that tests whether the current value of
4551 @code{fill-column} is greater than the argument passed to the function,
4552 and if so, prints an appropriate message.
4553 @end itemize
4554
4555 @node Buffer Walk Through
4556 @chapter A Few Buffer-Related Functions
4557
4558 In this chapter we study in detail several of the functions used in GNU
4559 Emacs. This is called a ``walk-through''. These functions are used as
4560 examples of Lisp code, but are not imaginary examples; with the
4561 exception of the first, simplified function definition, these functions
4562 show the actual code used in GNU Emacs. You can learn a great deal from
4563 these definitions. The functions described here are all related to
4564 buffers. Later, we will study other functions.
4565
4566 @menu
4567 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
4568 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
4569 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
4570 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
4571 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
4572 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
4573 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
4574 * Buffer Exercises::
4575 @end menu
4576
4577 @node Finding More
4578 @section Finding More Information
4579
4580 @findex describe-function, @r{introduced}
4581 @cindex Find function documentation
4582 In this walk-through, I will describe each new function as we come to
4583 it, sometimes in detail and sometimes briefly. If you are interested,
4584 you can get the full documentation of any Emacs Lisp function at any
4585 time by typing @kbd{C-h f} and then the name of the function (and then
4586 @key{RET}). Similarly, you can get the full documentation for a
4587 variable by typing @kbd{C-h v} and then the name of the variable (and
4588 then @key{RET}).
4589
4590 @cindex Find source of function
4591 @c In version 22, tells location both of C and of Emacs Lisp
4592 Also, @code{describe-function} will tell you the location of the
4593 function definition.
4594
4595 Put point into the name of the file that contains the function and
4596 press the @key{RET} key. In this case, @key{RET} means
4597 @code{push-button} rather than ``return'' or ``enter''. Emacs will take
4598 you directly to the function definition.
4599
4600 @ignore
4601 Not In version 22
4602
4603 If you move point over the file name and press
4604 the @key{RET} key, which in this case means @code{help-follow} rather
4605 than ``return'' or ``enter'', Emacs will take you directly to the function
4606 definition.
4607 @end ignore
4608
4609 More generally, if you want to see a function in its original source
4610 file, you can use the @code{find-tag} function to jump to it.
4611 @code{find-tag} works with a wide variety of languages, not just
4612 Lisp, and C, and it works with non-programming text as well. For
4613 example, @code{find-tag} will jump to the various nodes in the
4614 Texinfo source file of this document.
4615 The @code{find-tag} function depends on ``tags tables'' that record
4616 the locations of the functions, variables, and other items to which
4617 @code{find-tag} jumps.
4618
4619 To use the @code{find-tag} command, type @kbd{M-.} (i.e., press the
4620 period key while holding down the @key{META} key, or else type the
4621 @key{ESC} key and then type the period key), and then, at the prompt,
4622 type in the name of the function whose source code you want to see,
4623 such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}, and then type @key{RET}. Emacs will
4624 switch buffers and display the source code for the function on your
4625 screen. To switch back to your current buffer, type @kbd{C-x b
4626 @key{RET}}. (On some keyboards, the @key{META} key is labeled
4627 @key{ALT}.)
4628
4629 @c !!! 22.1.1 tags table location in this paragraph
4630 @cindex TAGS table, specifying
4631 @findex find-tag
4632 Depending on how the initial default values of your copy of Emacs are
4633 set, you may also need to specify the location of your ``tags table'',
4634 which is a file called @file{TAGS}. For example, if you are
4635 interested in Emacs sources, the tags table you will most likely want,
4636 if it has already been created for you, will be in a subdirectory of
4637 the @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/} directory; thus you would use the
4638 @code{M-x visit-tags-table} command and specify a pathname such as
4639 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/TAGS}. If the tags table
4640 has not already been created, you will have to create it yourself. It
4641 will be in a file such as @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}.
4642
4643 @need 1250
4644 To create a @file{TAGS} file in a specific directory, switch to that
4645 directory in Emacs using @kbd{M-x cd} command, or list the directory
4646 with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the compile command, with
4647 @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute:
4648
4649 @smallexample
4650 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
4651 @end smallexample
4652
4653 For more information, see @ref{etags, , Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File}.
4654
4655 After you become more familiar with Emacs Lisp, you will find that you will
4656 frequently use @code{find-tag} to navigate your way around source code;
4657 and you will create your own @file{TAGS} tables.
4658
4659 @cindex Library, as term for ``file''
4660 Incidentally, the files that contain Lisp code are conventionally
4661 called @dfn{libraries}. The metaphor is derived from that of a
4662 specialized library, such as a law library or an engineering library,
4663 rather than a general library. Each library, or file, contains
4664 functions that relate to a particular topic or activity, such as
4665 @file{abbrev.el} for handling abbreviations and other typing
4666 shortcuts, and @file{help.el} for help. (Sometimes several
4667 libraries provide code for a single activity, as the various
4668 @file{rmail@dots{}} files provide code for reading electronic mail.)
4669 In @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}, you will see sentences such as ``The
4670 @kbd{C-h p} command lets you search the standard Emacs Lisp libraries
4671 by topic keywords.''
4672
4673 @node simplified-beginning-of-buffer
4674 @section A Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition
4675 @findex simplified-beginning-of-buffer
4676
4677 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} command is a good function to start with
4678 since you are likely to be familiar with it and it is easy to
4679 understand. Used as an interactive command, @code{beginning-of-buffer}
4680 moves the cursor to the beginning of the buffer, leaving the mark at the
4681 previous position. It is generally bound to @kbd{M-<}.
4682
4683 In this section, we will discuss a shortened version of the function
4684 that shows how it is most frequently used. This shortened function
4685 works as written, but it does not contain the code for a complex option.
4686 In another section, we will describe the entire function.
4687 (@xref{beginning-of-buffer, , Complete Definition of
4688 @code{beginning-of-buffer}}.)
4689
4690 Before looking at the code, let's consider what the function
4691 definition has to contain: it must include an expression that makes
4692 the function interactive so it can be called by typing @kbd{M-x
4693 beginning-of-buffer} or by typing a keychord such as @kbd{M-<}; it
4694 must include code to leave a mark at the original position in the
4695 buffer; and it must include code to move the cursor to the beginning
4696 of the buffer.
4697
4698 @need 1250
4699 Here is the complete text of the shortened version of the function:
4700
4701 @smallexample
4702 @group
4703 (defun simplified-beginning-of-buffer ()
4704 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
4705 leave mark at previous position."
4706 (interactive)
4707 (push-mark)
4708 (goto-char (point-min)))
4709 @end group
4710 @end smallexample
4711
4712 Like all function definitions, this definition has five parts following
4713 the macro @code{defun}:
4714
4715 @enumerate
4716 @item
4717 The name: in this example, @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}.
4718
4719 @item
4720 A list of the arguments: in this example, an empty list, @code{()},
4721
4722 @item
4723 The documentation string.
4724
4725 @item
4726 The interactive expression.
4727
4728 @item
4729 The body.
4730 @end enumerate
4731
4732 @noindent
4733 In this function definition, the argument list is empty; this means that
4734 this function does not require any arguments. (When we look at the
4735 definition for the complete function, we will see that it may be passed
4736 an optional argument.)
4737
4738 The interactive expression tells Emacs that the function is intended to
4739 be used interactively. In this example, @code{interactive} does not have
4740 an argument because @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} does not
4741 require one.
4742
4743 @need 800
4744 The body of the function consists of the two lines:
4745
4746 @smallexample
4747 @group
4748 (push-mark)
4749 (goto-char (point-min))
4750 @end group
4751 @end smallexample
4752
4753 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark)}. When
4754 this expression is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter, it sets a mark at
4755 the current position of the cursor, wherever that may be. The position
4756 of this mark is saved in the mark ring.
4757
4758 The next line is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}. This expression
4759 jumps the cursor to the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the
4760 beginning of the buffer (or to the beginning of the accessible portion
4761 of the buffer if it is narrowed. @xref{Narrowing & Widening, ,
4762 Narrowing and Widening}.)
4763
4764 The @code{push-mark} command sets a mark at the place where the cursor
4765 was located before it was moved to the beginning of the buffer by the
4766 @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression. Consequently, you can, if
4767 you wish, go back to where you were originally by typing @kbd{C-x C-x}.
4768
4769 That is all there is to the function definition!
4770
4771 @findex describe-function
4772 When you are reading code such as this and come upon an unfamiliar
4773 function, such as @code{goto-char}, you can find out what it does by
4774 using the @code{describe-function} command. To use this command, type
4775 @kbd{C-h f} and then type in the name of the function and press
4776 @key{RET}. The @code{describe-function} command will print the
4777 function's documentation string in a @file{*Help*} window. For
4778 example, the documentation for @code{goto-char} is:
4779
4780 @smallexample
4781 @group
4782 Set point to POSITION, a number or marker.
4783 Beginning of buffer is position (point-min), end is (point-max).
4784 @end group
4785 @end smallexample
4786
4787 @noindent
4788 The function's one argument is the desired position.
4789
4790 @noindent
4791 (The prompt for @code{describe-function} will offer you the symbol
4792 under or preceding the cursor, so you can save typing by positioning
4793 the cursor right over or after the function and then typing @kbd{C-h f
4794 @key{RET}}.)
4795
4796 The @code{end-of-buffer} function definition is written in the same way as
4797 the @code{beginning-of-buffer} definition except that the body of the
4798 function contains the expression @code{(goto-char (point-max))} in place
4799 of @code{(goto-char (point-min))}.
4800
4801 @node mark-whole-buffer
4802 @section The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4803 @findex mark-whole-buffer
4804
4805 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is no harder to understand than the
4806 @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function. In this case, however,
4807 we will look at the complete function, not a shortened version.
4808
4809 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is not as commonly used as the
4810 @code{beginning-of-buffer} function, but is useful nonetheless: it
4811 marks a whole buffer as a region by putting point at the beginning and
4812 a mark at the end of the buffer. It is generally bound to @kbd{C-x
4813 h}.
4814
4815 @menu
4816 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
4817 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
4818 @end menu
4819
4820 @ifnottex
4821 @node mark-whole-buffer overview
4822 @unnumberedsubsec An overview of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4823 @end ifnottex
4824
4825 @need 1250
4826 In GNU Emacs 22, the code for the complete function looks like this:
4827
4828 @smallexample
4829 @group
4830 (defun mark-whole-buffer ()
4831 "Put point at beginning and mark at end of buffer.
4832 You probably should not use this function in Lisp programs;
4833 it is usually a mistake for a Lisp function to use any subroutine
4834 that uses or sets the mark."
4835 (interactive)
4836 (push-mark (point))
4837 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4838 (goto-char (point-min)))
4839 @end group
4840 @end smallexample
4841
4842 @need 1250
4843 Like all other functions, the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function fits
4844 into the template for a function definition. The template looks like
4845 this:
4846
4847 @smallexample
4848 @group
4849 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
4850 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
4851 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
4852 @var{body}@dots{})
4853 @end group
4854 @end smallexample
4855
4856 Here is how the function works: the name of the function is
4857 @code{mark-whole-buffer}; it is followed by an empty argument list,
4858 @samp{()}, which means that the function does not require arguments.
4859 The documentation comes next.
4860
4861 The next line is an @code{(interactive)} expression that tells Emacs
4862 that the function will be used interactively. These details are similar
4863 to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function described in the
4864 previous section.
4865
4866 @need 1250
4867 @node Body of mark-whole-buffer
4868 @subsection Body of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4869
4870 The body of the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function consists of three
4871 lines of code:
4872
4873 @c GNU Emacs 22
4874 @smallexample
4875 @group
4876 (push-mark (point))
4877 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4878 (goto-char (point-min))
4879 @end group
4880 @end smallexample
4881
4882 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark (point))}.
4883
4884 This line does exactly the same job as the first line of the body of
4885 the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function, which is written
4886 @code{(push-mark)}. In both cases, the Lisp interpreter sets a mark
4887 at the current position of the cursor.
4888
4889 I don't know why the expression in @code{mark-whole-buffer} is written
4890 @code{(push-mark (point))} and the expression in
4891 @code{beginning-of-buffer} is written @code{(push-mark)}. Perhaps
4892 whoever wrote the code did not know that the arguments for
4893 @code{push-mark} are optional and that if @code{push-mark} is not
4894 passed an argument, the function automatically sets mark at the
4895 location of point by default. Or perhaps the expression was written
4896 so as to parallel the structure of the next line. In any case, the
4897 line causes Emacs to determine the position of point and set a mark
4898 there.
4899
4900 In earlier versions of GNU Emacs, the next line of
4901 @code{mark-whole-buffer} was @code{(push-mark (point-max))}. This
4902 expression sets a mark at the point in the buffer that has the highest
4903 number. This will be the end of the buffer (or, if the buffer is
4904 narrowed, the end of the accessible portion of the buffer.
4905 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more about
4906 narrowing.) After this mark has been set, the previous mark, the one
4907 set at point, is no longer set, but Emacs remembers its position, just
4908 as all other recent marks are always remembered. This means that you
4909 can, if you wish, go back to that position by typing @kbd{C-u
4910 C-@key{SPC}} twice.
4911
4912 @need 1250
4913 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{(point-max)} is slightly more complicated.
4914 The line reads
4915
4916 @smallexample
4917 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4918 @end smallexample
4919
4920 @noindent
4921 The expression works nearly the same as before. It sets a mark at the
4922 highest numbered place in the buffer that it can. However, in this
4923 version, @code{push-mark} has two additional arguments. The second
4924 argument to @code{push-mark} is @code{nil}. This tells the function
4925 it @emph{should} display a message that says ``Mark set'' when it pushes
4926 the mark. The third argument is @code{t}. This tells
4927 @code{push-mark} to activate the mark when Transient Mark mode is
4928 turned on. Transient Mark mode highlights the currently active
4929 region. It is often turned off.
4930
4931 Finally, the last line of the function is @code{(goto-char
4932 (point-min)))}. This is written exactly the same way as it is written
4933 in @code{beginning-of-buffer}. The expression moves the cursor to
4934 the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the beginning of the buffer
4935 (or to the beginning of the accessible portion of the buffer). As a
4936 result of this, point is placed at the beginning of the buffer and mark
4937 is set at the end of the buffer. The whole buffer is, therefore, the
4938 region.
4939
4940 @c FIXME: the definition of append-to-buffer has been changed (in
4941 @c 2010-03-30).
4942 @node append-to-buffer
4943 @section The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
4944 @findex append-to-buffer
4945
4946 The @code{append-to-buffer} command is more complex than the
4947 @code{mark-whole-buffer} command. What it does is copy the region
4948 (that is, the part of the buffer between point and mark) from the
4949 current buffer to a specified buffer.
4950
4951 @menu
4952 * append-to-buffer overview::
4953 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
4954 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
4955 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
4956 @end menu
4957
4958 @ifnottex
4959 @node append-to-buffer overview
4960 @unnumberedsubsec An Overview of @code{append-to-buffer}
4961 @end ifnottex
4962
4963 @findex insert-buffer-substring
4964 The @code{append-to-buffer} command uses the
4965 @code{insert-buffer-substring} function to copy the region.
4966 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is described by its name: it takes a
4967 string of characters from part of a buffer, a ``substring'', and
4968 inserts them into another buffer.
4969
4970 Most of @code{append-to-buffer} is
4971 concerned with setting up the conditions for
4972 @code{insert-buffer-substring} to work: the code must specify both the
4973 buffer to which the text will go, the window it comes from and goes
4974 to, and the region that will be copied.
4975
4976 @need 1250
4977 Here is the complete text of the function:
4978
4979 @smallexample
4980 @group
4981 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
4982 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
4983 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
4984 @end group
4985
4986 @group
4987 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
4988 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
4989 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
4990 (interactive
4991 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer
4992 (current-buffer) t))
4993 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
4994 @end group
4995 @group
4996 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
4997 (save-excursion
4998 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
4999 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5000 point)
5001 (set-buffer append-to)
5002 (setq point (point))
5003 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5004 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5005 (dolist (window windows)
5006 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5007 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5008 @end group
5009 @end smallexample
5010
5011 The function can be understood by looking at it as a series of
5012 filled-in templates.
5013
5014 The outermost template is for the function definition. In this
5015 function, it looks like this (with several slots filled in):
5016
5017 @smallexample
5018 @group
5019 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5020 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5021 (interactive @dots{})
5022 @var{body}@dots{})
5023 @end group
5024 @end smallexample
5025
5026 The first line of the function includes its name and three arguments.
5027 The arguments are the @code{buffer} to which the text will be copied, and
5028 the @code{start} and @code{end} of the region in the current buffer that
5029 will be copied.
5030
5031 The next part of the function is the documentation, which is clear and
5032 complete. As is conventional, the three arguments are written in
5033 upper case so you will notice them easily. Even better, they are
5034 described in the same order as in the argument list.
5035
5036 Note that the documentation distinguishes between a buffer and its
5037 name. (The function can handle either.)
5038
5039 @node append interactive
5040 @subsection The @code{append-to-buffer} Interactive Expression
5041
5042 Since the @code{append-to-buffer} function will be used interactively,
5043 the function must have an @code{interactive} expression. (For a
5044 review of @code{interactive}, see @ref{Interactive, , Making a
5045 Function Interactive}.) The expression reads as follows:
5046
5047 @smallexample
5048 @group
5049 (interactive
5050 (list (read-buffer
5051 "Append to buffer: "
5052 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5053 (region-beginning)
5054 (region-end)))
5055 @end group
5056 @end smallexample
5057
5058 @noindent
5059 This expression is not one with letters standing for parts, as
5060 described earlier. Instead, it starts a list with these parts:
5061
5062 The first part of the list is an expression to read the name of a
5063 buffer and return it as a string. That is @code{read-buffer}. The
5064 function requires a prompt as its first argument, @samp{"Append to
5065 buffer: "}. Its second argument tells the command what value to
5066 provide if you don't specify anything.
5067
5068 In this case that second argument is an expression containing the
5069 function @code{other-buffer}, an exception, and a @samp{t}, standing
5070 for true.
5071
5072 The first argument to @code{other-buffer}, the exception, is yet
5073 another function, @code{current-buffer}. That is not going to be
5074 returned. The second argument is the symbol for true, @code{t}. that
5075 tells @code{other-buffer} that it may show visible buffers (except in
5076 this case, it will not show the current buffer, which makes sense).
5077
5078 @need 1250
5079 The expression looks like this:
5080
5081 @smallexample
5082 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t)
5083 @end smallexample
5084
5085 The second and third arguments to the @code{list} expression are
5086 @code{(region-beginning)} and @code{(region-end)}. These two
5087 functions specify the beginning and end of the text to be appended.
5088
5089 @need 1250
5090 Originally, the command used the letters @samp{B} and @samp{r}.
5091 The whole @code{interactive} expression looked like this:
5092
5093 @smallexample
5094 (interactive "BAppend to buffer:@: \nr")
5095 @end smallexample
5096
5097 @noindent
5098 But when that was done, the default value of the buffer switched to
5099 was invisible. That was not wanted.
5100
5101 (The prompt was separated from the second argument with a newline,
5102 @samp{\n}. It was followed by an @samp{r} that told Emacs to bind the
5103 two arguments that follow the symbol @code{buffer} in the function's
5104 argument list (that is, @code{start} and @code{end}) to the values of
5105 point and mark. That argument worked fine.)
5106
5107 @node append-to-buffer body
5108 @subsection The Body of @code{append-to-buffer}
5109
5110 @ignore
5111 in GNU Emacs 22 in /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
5112
5113 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5114 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
5115 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
5116
5117 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
5118 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
5119 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
5120 (interactive
5121 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5122 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
5123 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5124 (save-excursion
5125 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5126 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5127 point)
5128 (set-buffer append-to)
5129 (setq point (point))
5130 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5131 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5132 (dolist (window windows)
5133 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5134 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5135 @end ignore
5136
5137 The body of the @code{append-to-buffer} function begins with @code{let}.
5138
5139 As we have seen before (@pxref{let, , @code{let}}), the purpose of a
5140 @code{let} expression is to create and give initial values to one or
5141 more variables that will only be used within the body of the
5142 @code{let}. This means that such a variable will not be confused with
5143 any variable of the same name outside the @code{let} expression.
5144
5145 We can see how the @code{let} expression fits into the function as a
5146 whole by showing a template for @code{append-to-buffer} with the
5147 @code{let} expression in outline:
5148
5149 @smallexample
5150 @group
5151 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5152 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5153 (interactive @dots{})
5154 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value}))
5155 @var{body}@dots{})
5156 @end group
5157 @end smallexample
5158
5159 The @code{let} expression has three elements:
5160
5161 @enumerate
5162 @item
5163 The symbol @code{let};
5164
5165 @item
5166 A varlist containing, in this case, a single two-element list,
5167 @code{(@var{variable} @var{value})};
5168
5169 @item
5170 The body of the @code{let} expression.
5171 @end enumerate
5172
5173 @need 800
5174 In the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the varlist looks like this:
5175
5176 @smallexample
5177 (oldbuf (current-buffer))
5178 @end smallexample
5179
5180 @noindent
5181 In this part of the @code{let} expression, the one variable,
5182 @code{oldbuf}, is bound to the value returned by the
5183 @code{(current-buffer)} expression. The variable, @code{oldbuf}, is
5184 used to keep track of the buffer in which you are working and from
5185 which you will copy.
5186
5187 The element or elements of a varlist are surrounded by a set of
5188 parentheses so the Lisp interpreter can distinguish the varlist from
5189 the body of the @code{let}. As a consequence, the two-element list
5190 within the varlist is surrounded by a circumscribing set of parentheses.
5191 The line looks like this:
5192
5193 @smallexample
5194 @group
5195 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5196 @dots{} )
5197 @end group
5198 @end smallexample
5199
5200 @noindent
5201 The two parentheses before @code{oldbuf} might surprise you if you did
5202 not realize that the first parenthesis before @code{oldbuf} marks the
5203 boundary of the varlist and the second parenthesis marks the beginning
5204 of the two-element list, @code{(oldbuf (current-buffer))}.
5205
5206 @node append save-excursion
5207 @subsection @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}
5208
5209 The body of the @code{let} expression in @code{append-to-buffer}
5210 consists of a @code{save-excursion} expression.
5211
5212 The @code{save-excursion} function saves the location of point, and restores it
5213 to that position after the expressions in the
5214 body of the @code{save-excursion} complete execution. In addition,
5215 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the original buffer, and
5216 restores it. This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in
5217 @code{append-to-buffer}.
5218
5219 @need 1500
5220 @cindex Indentation for formatting
5221 @cindex Formatting convention
5222 Incidentally, it is worth noting here that a Lisp function is normally
5223 formatted so that everything that is enclosed in a multi-line spread is
5224 indented more to the right than the first symbol. In this function
5225 definition, the @code{let} is indented more than the @code{defun}, and
5226 the @code{save-excursion} is indented more than the @code{let}, like
5227 this:
5228
5229 @smallexample
5230 @group
5231 (defun @dots{}
5232 @dots{}
5233 @dots{}
5234 (let@dots{}
5235 (save-excursion
5236 @dots{}
5237 @end group
5238 @end smallexample
5239
5240 @need 1500
5241 @noindent
5242 This formatting convention makes it easy to see that the lines in
5243 the body of the @code{save-excursion} are enclosed by the parentheses
5244 associated with @code{save-excursion}, just as the
5245 @code{save-excursion} itself is enclosed by the parentheses associated
5246 with the @code{let}:
5247
5248 @smallexample
5249 @group
5250 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5251 (save-excursion
5252 @dots{}
5253 (set-buffer @dots{})
5254 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5255 @dots{}))
5256 @end group
5257 @end smallexample
5258
5259 @need 1200
5260 The use of the @code{save-excursion} function can be viewed as a process
5261 of filling in the slots of a template:
5262
5263 @smallexample
5264 @group
5265 (save-excursion
5266 @var{first-expression-in-body}
5267 @var{second-expression-in-body}
5268 @dots{}
5269 @var{last-expression-in-body})
5270 @end group
5271 @end smallexample
5272
5273 @need 1200
5274 @noindent
5275 In this function, the body of the @code{save-excursion} contains only
5276 one expression, the @code{let*} expression. You know about a
5277 @code{let} function. The @code{let*} function is different. It has a
5278 @samp{*} in its name. It enables Emacs to set each variable in its
5279 varlist in sequence, one after another.
5280
5281 Its critical feature is that variables later in the varlist can make
5282 use of the values to which Emacs set variables earlier in the varlist.
5283 @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}.
5284
5285 We will skip functions like @code{let*} and focus on two: the
5286 @code{set-buffer} function and the @code{insert-buffer-substring}
5287 function.
5288
5289 @need 1250
5290 In the old days, the @code{set-buffer} expression was simply
5291
5292 @smallexample
5293 (set-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer))
5294 @end smallexample
5295
5296 @need 1250
5297 @noindent
5298 but now it is
5299
5300 @smallexample
5301 (set-buffer append-to)
5302 @end smallexample
5303
5304 @noindent
5305 @code{append-to} is bound to @code{(get-buffer-create buffer)} earlier
5306 on in the @code{let*} expression. That extra binding would not be
5307 necessary except for that @code{append-to} is used later in the
5308 varlist as an argument to @code{get-buffer-window-list}.
5309
5310 @ignore
5311 in GNU Emacs 22
5312
5313 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5314 (save-excursion
5315 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5316 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5317 point)
5318 (set-buffer append-to)
5319 (setq point (point))
5320 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5321 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5322 (dolist (window windows)
5323 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5324 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5325 @end ignore
5326
5327 The @code{append-to-buffer} function definition inserts text from the
5328 buffer in which you are currently to a named buffer. It happens that
5329 @code{insert-buffer-substring} copies text from another buffer to the
5330 current buffer, just the reverse---that is why the
5331 @code{append-to-buffer} definition starts out with a @code{let} that
5332 binds the local symbol @code{oldbuf} to the value returned by
5333 @code{current-buffer}.
5334
5335 @need 1250
5336 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression looks like this:
5337
5338 @smallexample
5339 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5340 @end smallexample
5341
5342 @noindent
5343 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies a string
5344 @emph{from} the buffer specified as its first argument and inserts the
5345 string into the present buffer. In this case, the argument to
5346 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is the value of the variable created
5347 and bound by the @code{let}, namely the value of @code{oldbuf}, which
5348 was the current buffer when you gave the @code{append-to-buffer}
5349 command.
5350
5351 After @code{insert-buffer-substring} has done its work,
5352 @code{save-excursion} will restore the action to the original buffer
5353 and @code{append-to-buffer} will have done its job.
5354
5355 @need 800
5356 Written in skeletal form, the workings of the body look like this:
5357
5358 @smallexample
5359 @group
5360 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5361 (save-excursion ; @r{Keep track of buffer.}
5362 @var{change-buffer}
5363 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})
5364
5365 @var{change-back-to-original-buffer-when-finished}
5366 @var{let-the-local-meaning-of-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-disappear-when-finished}
5367 @end group
5368 @end smallexample
5369
5370 In summary, @code{append-to-buffer} works as follows: it saves the
5371 value of the current buffer in the variable called @code{oldbuf}. It
5372 gets the new buffer (creating one if need be) and switches Emacs's
5373 attention to it. Using the value of @code{oldbuf}, it inserts the
5374 region of text from the old buffer into the new buffer; and then using
5375 @code{save-excursion}, it brings you back to your original buffer.
5376
5377 In looking at @code{append-to-buffer}, you have explored a fairly
5378 complex function. It shows how to use @code{let} and
5379 @code{save-excursion}, and how to change to and come back from another
5380 buffer. Many function definitions use @code{let},
5381 @code{save-excursion}, and @code{set-buffer} this way.
5382
5383 @node Buffer Related Review
5384 @section Review
5385
5386 Here is a brief summary of the various functions discussed in this chapter.
5387
5388 @table @code
5389 @item describe-function
5390 @itemx describe-variable
5391 Print the documentation for a function or variable.
5392 Conventionally bound to @kbd{C-h f} and @kbd{C-h v}.
5393
5394 @item find-tag
5395 Find the file containing the source for a function or variable and
5396 switch buffers to it, positioning point at the beginning of the item.
5397 Conventionally bound to @kbd{M-.} (that's a period following the
5398 @key{META} key).
5399
5400 @item save-excursion
5401 Save the location of point and restore its value after the
5402 arguments to @code{save-excursion} have been evaluated. Also, remember
5403 the current buffer and return to it.
5404
5405 @item push-mark
5406 Set mark at a location and record the value of the previous mark on the
5407 mark ring. The mark is a location in the buffer that will keep its
5408 relative position even if text is added to or removed from the buffer.
5409
5410 @item goto-char
5411 Set point to the location specified by the value of the argument, which
5412 can be a number, a marker, or an expression that returns the number of
5413 a position, such as @code{(point-min)}.
5414
5415 @item insert-buffer-substring
5416 Copy a region of text from a buffer that is passed to the function as
5417 an argument and insert the region into the current buffer.
5418
5419 @item mark-whole-buffer
5420 Mark the whole buffer as a region. Normally bound to @kbd{C-x h}.
5421
5422 @item set-buffer
5423 Switch the attention of Emacs to another buffer, but do not change the
5424 window being displayed. Used when the program rather than a human is
5425 to work on a different buffer.
5426
5427 @item get-buffer-create
5428 @itemx get-buffer
5429 Find a named buffer or create one if a buffer of that name does not
5430 exist. The @code{get-buffer} function returns @code{nil} if the named
5431 buffer does not exist.
5432 @end table
5433
5434 @need 1500
5435 @node Buffer Exercises
5436 @section Exercises
5437
5438 @itemize @bullet
5439 @item
5440 Write your own @code{simplified-end-of-buffer} function definition;
5441 then test it to see whether it works.
5442
5443 @item
5444 Use @code{if} and @code{get-buffer} to write a function that prints a
5445 message telling you whether a buffer exists.
5446
5447 @item
5448 Using @code{find-tag}, find the source for the @code{copy-to-buffer}
5449 function.
5450 @end itemize
5451
5452 @node More Complex
5453 @chapter A Few More Complex Functions
5454
5455 In this chapter, we build on what we have learned in previous chapters
5456 by looking at more complex functions. The @code{copy-to-buffer}
5457 function illustrates use of two @code{save-excursion} expressions in
5458 one definition, while the @code{insert-buffer} function illustrates
5459 use of an asterisk in an @code{interactive} expression, use of
5460 @code{or}, and the important distinction between a name and the object
5461 to which the name refers.
5462
5463 @menu
5464 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
5465 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
5466 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
5467 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
5468 * Second Buffer Related Review::
5469 * optional Exercise::
5470 @end menu
5471
5472 @node copy-to-buffer
5473 @section The Definition of @code{copy-to-buffer}
5474 @findex copy-to-buffer
5475
5476 After understanding how @code{append-to-buffer} works, it is easy to
5477 understand @code{copy-to-buffer}. This function copies text into a
5478 buffer, but instead of adding to the second buffer, it replaces all the
5479 previous text in the second buffer.
5480
5481 @need 800
5482 The body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this,
5483
5484 @smallexample
5485 @group
5486 @dots{}
5487 (interactive "BCopy to buffer: \nr")
5488 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5489 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer)
5490 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5491 (erase-buffer)
5492 (save-excursion
5493 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)))))
5494 @end group
5495 @end smallexample
5496
5497 The @code{copy-to-buffer} function has a simpler @code{interactive}
5498 expression than @code{append-to-buffer}.
5499
5500 @need 800
5501 The definition then says
5502
5503 @smallexample
5504 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer) @dots{}
5505 @end smallexample
5506
5507 First, look at the earliest inner expression; that is evaluated first.
5508 That expression starts with @code{get-buffer-create buffer}. The
5509 function tells the computer to use the buffer with the name specified
5510 as the one to which you are copying, or if such a buffer does not
5511 exist, to create it. Then, the @code{with-current-buffer} function
5512 evaluates its body with that buffer temporarily current.
5513
5514 (This demonstrates another way to shift the computer's attention but
5515 not the user's. The @code{append-to-buffer} function showed how to do
5516 the same with @code{save-excursion} and @code{set-buffer}.
5517 @code{with-current-buffer} is a newer, and arguably easier,
5518 mechanism.)
5519
5520 The @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} function sends you an error
5521 message saying the buffer is read-only if you cannot modify it.
5522
5523 The next line has the @code{erase-buffer} function as its sole
5524 contents. That function erases the buffer.
5525
5526 Finally, the last two lines contain the @code{save-excursion}
5527 expression with @code{insert-buffer-substring} as its body.
5528 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression copies the text from
5529 the buffer you are in (and you have not seen the computer shift its
5530 attention, so you don't know that that buffer is now called
5531 @code{oldbuf}).
5532
5533 Incidentally, this is what is meant by ``replacement''. To replace text,
5534 Emacs erases the previous text and then inserts new text.
5535
5536 @need 1250
5537 In outline, the body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this:
5538
5539 @smallexample
5540 @group
5541 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5542 (@var{with-the-buffer-you-are-copying-to}
5543 (@var{but-do-not-erase-or-copy-to-a-read-only-buffer})
5544 (erase-buffer)
5545 (save-excursion
5546 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})))
5547 @end group
5548 @end smallexample
5549
5550 @node insert-buffer
5551 @section The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
5552 @findex insert-buffer
5553
5554 @code{insert-buffer} is yet another buffer-related function. This
5555 command copies another buffer @emph{into} the current buffer. It is the
5556 reverse of @code{append-to-buffer} or @code{copy-to-buffer}, since they
5557 copy a region of text @emph{from} the current buffer to another buffer.
5558
5559 Here is a discussion based on the original code. The code was
5560 simplified in 2003 and is harder to understand.
5561
5562 (@xref{New insert-buffer, , New Body for @code{insert-buffer}}, to see
5563 a discussion of the new body.)
5564
5565 In addition, this code illustrates the use of @code{interactive} with a
5566 buffer that might be @dfn{read-only} and the important distinction
5567 between the name of an object and the object actually referred to.
5568
5569 @menu
5570 * insert-buffer code::
5571 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
5572 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
5573 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
5574 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
5575 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
5576 * New insert-buffer::
5577 @end menu
5578
5579 @ifnottex
5580 @node insert-buffer code
5581 @unnumberedsubsec The Code for @code{insert-buffer}
5582 @end ifnottex
5583
5584 @need 800
5585 Here is the earlier code:
5586
5587 @smallexample
5588 @group
5589 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5590 "Insert after point the contents of BUFFER.
5591 Puts mark after the inserted text.
5592 BUFFER may be a buffer or a buffer name."
5593 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5594 @end group
5595 @group
5596 (or (bufferp buffer)
5597 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5598 (let (start end newmark)
5599 (save-excursion
5600 (save-excursion
5601 (set-buffer buffer)
5602 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5603 @end group
5604 @group
5605 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5606 (setq newmark (point)))
5607 (push-mark newmark)))
5608 @end group
5609 @end smallexample
5610
5611 @need 1200
5612 As with other function definitions, you can use a template to see an
5613 outline of the function:
5614
5615 @smallexample
5616 @group
5617 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5618 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5619 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5620 @var{body}@dots{})
5621 @end group
5622 @end smallexample
5623
5624 @node insert-buffer interactive
5625 @subsection The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5626 @findex interactive, @r{example use of}
5627
5628 In @code{insert-buffer}, the argument to the @code{interactive}
5629 declaration has two parts, an asterisk, @samp{*}, and @samp{bInsert
5630 buffer:@: }.
5631
5632 @menu
5633 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
5634 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
5635 @end menu
5636
5637 @node Read-only buffer
5638 @unnumberedsubsubsec A Read-only Buffer
5639 @cindex Read-only buffer
5640 @cindex Asterisk for read-only buffer
5641 @findex * @r{for read-only buffer}
5642
5643 The asterisk is for the situation when the current buffer is a
5644 read-only buffer---a buffer that cannot be modified. If
5645 @code{insert-buffer} is called when the current buffer is read-only, a
5646 message to this effect is printed in the echo area and the terminal
5647 may beep or blink at you; you will not be permitted to insert anything
5648 into current buffer. The asterisk does not need to be followed by a
5649 newline to separate it from the next argument.
5650
5651 @node b for interactive
5652 @unnumberedsubsubsec @samp{b} in an Interactive Expression
5653
5654 The next argument in the interactive expression starts with a lower
5655 case @samp{b}. (This is different from the code for
5656 @code{append-to-buffer}, which uses an upper-case @samp{B}.
5657 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
5658 The lower-case @samp{b} tells the Lisp interpreter that the argument
5659 for @code{insert-buffer} should be an existing buffer or else its
5660 name. (The upper-case @samp{B} option provides for the possibility
5661 that the buffer does not exist.) Emacs will prompt you for the name
5662 of the buffer, offering you a default buffer, with name completion
5663 enabled. If the buffer does not exist, you receive a message that
5664 says ``No match''; your terminal may beep at you as well.
5665
5666 The new and simplified code generates a list for @code{interactive}.
5667 It uses the @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} and @code{read-buffer}
5668 functions with which we are already familiar and the @code{progn}
5669 special form with which we are not. (It will be described later.)
5670
5671 @node insert-buffer body
5672 @subsection The Body of the @code{insert-buffer} Function
5673
5674 The body of the @code{insert-buffer} function has two major parts: an
5675 @code{or} expression and a @code{let} expression. The purpose of the
5676 @code{or} expression is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is
5677 bound to a buffer and not just the name of a buffer. The body of the
5678 @code{let} expression contains the code which copies the other buffer
5679 into the current buffer.
5680
5681 @need 1250
5682 In outline, the two expressions fit into the @code{insert-buffer}
5683 function like this:
5684
5685 @smallexample
5686 @group
5687 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5688 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5689 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5690 (or @dots{}
5691 @dots{}
5692 @end group
5693 @group
5694 (let (@var{varlist})
5695 @var{body-of-}@code{let}@dots{} )
5696 @end group
5697 @end smallexample
5698
5699 To understand how the @code{or} expression ensures that the argument
5700 @code{buffer} is bound to a buffer and not to the name of a buffer, it
5701 is first necessary to understand the @code{or} function.
5702
5703 Before doing this, let me rewrite this part of the function using
5704 @code{if} so that you can see what is done in a manner that will be familiar.
5705
5706 @node if & or
5707 @subsection @code{insert-buffer} With an @code{if} Instead of an @code{or}
5708
5709 The job to be done is to make sure the value of @code{buffer} is a
5710 buffer itself and not the name of a buffer. If the value is the name,
5711 then the buffer itself must be got.
5712
5713 You can imagine yourself at a conference where an usher is wandering
5714 around holding a list with your name on it and looking for you: the
5715 usher is ``bound'' to your name, not to you; but when the usher finds
5716 you and takes your arm, the usher becomes ``bound'' to you.
5717
5718 @need 800
5719 In Lisp, you might describe this situation like this:
5720
5721 @smallexample
5722 @group
5723 (if (not (holding-on-to-guest))
5724 (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5725 @end group
5726 @end smallexample
5727
5728 We want to do the same thing with a buffer---if we do not have the
5729 buffer itself, we want to get it.
5730
5731 @need 1200
5732 Using a predicate called @code{bufferp} that tells us whether we have a
5733 buffer (rather than its name), we can write the code like this:
5734
5735 @smallexample
5736 @group
5737 (if (not (bufferp buffer)) ; @r{if-part}
5738 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))) ; @r{then-part}
5739 @end group
5740 @end smallexample
5741
5742 @noindent
5743 Here, the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression is
5744 @w{@code{(not (bufferp buffer))}}; and the then-part is the expression
5745 @w{@code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}}.
5746
5747 In the test, the function @code{bufferp} returns true if its argument is
5748 a buffer---but false if its argument is the name of the buffer. (The
5749 last character of the function name @code{bufferp} is the character
5750 @samp{p}; as we saw earlier, such use of @samp{p} is a convention that
5751 indicates that the function is a predicate, which is a term that means
5752 that the function will determine whether some property is true or false.
5753 @xref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong Type Object as an
5754 Argument}.)
5755
5756 @need 1200
5757 The function @code{not} precedes the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)},
5758 so the true-or-false-test looks like this:
5759
5760 @smallexample
5761 (not (bufferp buffer))
5762 @end smallexample
5763
5764 @noindent
5765 @code{not} is a function that returns true if its argument is false
5766 and false if its argument is true. So if @code{(bufferp buffer)}
5767 returns true, the @code{not} expression returns false and vice versa:
5768 what is ``not true'' is false and what is ``not false'' is true.
5769
5770 Using this test, the @code{if} expression works as follows: when the
5771 value of the variable @code{buffer} is actually a buffer rather than
5772 its name, the true-or-false-test returns false and the @code{if}
5773 expression does not evaluate the then-part. This is fine, since we do
5774 not need to do anything to the variable @code{buffer} if it really is
5775 a buffer.
5776
5777 On the other hand, when the value of @code{buffer} is not a buffer
5778 itself, but the name of a buffer, the true-or-false-test returns true
5779 and the then-part of the expression is evaluated. In this case, the
5780 then-part is @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}. This
5781 expression uses the @code{get-buffer} function to return an actual
5782 buffer itself, given its name. The @code{setq} then sets the variable
5783 @code{buffer} to the value of the buffer itself, replacing its previous
5784 value (which was the name of the buffer).
5785
5786 @node Insert or
5787 @subsection The @code{or} in the Body
5788
5789 The purpose of the @code{or} expression in the @code{insert-buffer}
5790 function is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is bound to a
5791 buffer and not just to the name of a buffer. The previous section shows
5792 how the job could have been done using an @code{if} expression.
5793 However, the @code{insert-buffer} function actually uses @code{or}.
5794 To understand this, it is necessary to understand how @code{or} works.
5795
5796 @findex or
5797 An @code{or} function can have any number of arguments. It evaluates
5798 each argument in turn and returns the value of the first of its
5799 arguments that is not @code{nil}. Also, and this is a crucial feature
5800 of @code{or}, it does not evaluate any subsequent arguments after
5801 returning the first non-@code{nil} value.
5802
5803 @need 800
5804 The @code{or} expression looks like this:
5805
5806 @smallexample
5807 @group
5808 (or (bufferp buffer)
5809 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5810 @end group
5811 @end smallexample
5812
5813 @noindent
5814 The first argument to @code{or} is the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)}.
5815 This expression returns true (a non-@code{nil} value) if the buffer is
5816 actually a buffer, and not just the name of a buffer. In the @code{or}
5817 expression, if this is the case, the @code{or} expression returns this
5818 true value and does not evaluate the next expression---and this is fine
5819 with us, since we do not want to do anything to the value of
5820 @code{buffer} if it really is a buffer.
5821
5822 On the other hand, if the value of @code{(bufferp buffer)} is @code{nil},
5823 which it will be if the value of @code{buffer} is the name of a buffer,
5824 the Lisp interpreter evaluates the next element of the @code{or}
5825 expression. This is the expression @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer
5826 buffer))}. This expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, which
5827 is the value to which it sets the variable @code{buffer}---and this
5828 value is a buffer itself, not the name of a buffer.
5829
5830 The result of all this is that the symbol @code{buffer} is always
5831 bound to a buffer itself rather than to the name of a buffer. All
5832 this is necessary because the @code{set-buffer} function in a
5833 following line only works with a buffer itself, not with the name to a
5834 buffer.
5835
5836 @need 1250
5837 Incidentally, using @code{or}, the situation with the usher would be
5838 written like this:
5839
5840 @smallexample
5841 (or (holding-on-to-guest) (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5842 @end smallexample
5843
5844 @node Insert let
5845 @subsection The @code{let} Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5846
5847 After ensuring that the variable @code{buffer} refers to a buffer itself
5848 and not just to the name of a buffer, the @code{insert-buffer function}
5849 continues with a @code{let} expression. This specifies three local
5850 variables, @code{start}, @code{end}, and @code{newmark} and binds them
5851 to the initial value @code{nil}. These variables are used inside the
5852 remainder of the @code{let} and temporarily hide any other occurrence of
5853 variables of the same name in Emacs until the end of the @code{let}.
5854
5855 @need 1200
5856 The body of the @code{let} contains two @code{save-excursion}
5857 expressions. First, we will look at the inner @code{save-excursion}
5858 expression in detail. The expression looks like this:
5859
5860 @smallexample
5861 @group
5862 (save-excursion
5863 (set-buffer buffer)
5864 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5865 @end group
5866 @end smallexample
5867
5868 @noindent
5869 The expression @code{(set-buffer buffer)} changes Emacs's attention
5870 from the current buffer to the one from which the text will copied.
5871 In that buffer, the variables @code{start} and @code{end} are set to
5872 the beginning and end of the buffer, using the commands
5873 @code{point-min} and @code{point-max}. Note that we have here an
5874 illustration of how @code{setq} is able to set two variables in the
5875 same expression. The first argument of @code{setq} is set to the
5876 value of its second, and its third argument is set to the value of its
5877 fourth.
5878
5879 After the body of the inner @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, the
5880 @code{save-excursion} restores the original buffer, but @code{start} and
5881 @code{end} remain set to the values of the beginning and end of the
5882 buffer from which the text will be copied.
5883
5884 @need 1250
5885 The outer @code{save-excursion} expression looks like this:
5886
5887 @smallexample
5888 @group
5889 (save-excursion
5890 (@var{inner-}@code{save-excursion}@var{-expression}
5891 (@var{go-to-new-buffer-and-set-}@code{start}@var{-and-}@code{end})
5892 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5893 (setq newmark (point)))
5894 @end group
5895 @end smallexample
5896
5897 @noindent
5898 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies the text
5899 @emph{into} the current buffer @emph{from} the region indicated by
5900 @code{start} and @code{end} in @code{buffer}. Since the whole of the
5901 second buffer lies between @code{start} and @code{end}, the whole of
5902 the second buffer is copied into the buffer you are editing. Next,
5903 the value of point, which will be at the end of the inserted text, is
5904 recorded in the variable @code{newmark}.
5905
5906 After the body of the outer @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, point
5907 is relocated to its original place.
5908
5909 However, it is convenient to locate a mark at the end of the newly
5910 inserted text and locate point at its beginning. The @code{newmark}
5911 variable records the end of the inserted text. In the last line of
5912 the @code{let} expression, the @code{(push-mark newmark)} expression
5913 function sets a mark to this location. (The previous location of the
5914 mark is still accessible; it is recorded on the mark ring and you can
5915 go back to it with @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}}.) Meanwhile, point is
5916 located at the beginning of the inserted text, which is where it was
5917 before you called the insert function, the position of which was saved
5918 by the first @code{save-excursion}.
5919
5920 @need 1250
5921 The whole @code{let} expression looks like this:
5922
5923 @smallexample
5924 @group
5925 (let (start end newmark)
5926 (save-excursion
5927 (save-excursion
5928 (set-buffer buffer)
5929 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5930 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5931 (setq newmark (point)))
5932 (push-mark newmark))
5933 @end group
5934 @end smallexample
5935
5936 Like the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the @code{insert-buffer}
5937 function uses @code{let}, @code{save-excursion}, and
5938 @code{set-buffer}. In addition, the function illustrates one way to
5939 use @code{or}. All these functions are building blocks that we will
5940 find and use again and again.
5941
5942 @node New insert-buffer
5943 @subsection New Body for @code{insert-buffer}
5944 @findex insert-buffer, new version body
5945 @findex new version body for insert-buffer
5946
5947 The body in the GNU Emacs 22 version is more confusing than the original.
5948
5949 @need 1250
5950 It consists of two expressions,
5951
5952 @smallexample
5953 @group
5954 (push-mark
5955 (save-excursion
5956 (insert-buffer-substring (get-buffer buffer))
5957 (point)))
5958
5959 nil
5960 @end group
5961 @end smallexample
5962
5963 @noindent
5964 except, and this is what confuses novices, very important work is done
5965 inside the @code{push-mark} expression.
5966
5967 The @code{get-buffer} function returns a buffer with the name
5968 provided. You will note that the function is @emph{not} called
5969 @code{get-buffer-create}; it does not create a buffer if one does not
5970 already exist. The buffer returned by @code{get-buffer}, an existing
5971 buffer, is passed to @code{insert-buffer-substring}, which inserts the
5972 whole of the buffer (since you did not specify anything else).
5973
5974 The location into which the buffer is inserted is recorded by
5975 @code{push-mark}. Then the function returns @code{nil}, the value of
5976 its last command. Put another way, the @code{insert-buffer} function
5977 exists only to produce a side effect, inserting another buffer, not to
5978 return any value.
5979
5980 @node beginning-of-buffer
5981 @section Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
5982 @findex beginning-of-buffer
5983
5984 The basic structure of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function has
5985 already been discussed. (@xref{simplified-beginning-of-buffer, , A
5986 Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition}.)
5987 This section describes the complex part of the definition.
5988
5989 As previously described, when invoked without an argument,
5990 @code{beginning-of-buffer} moves the cursor to the beginning of the
5991 buffer (in truth, the beginning of the accessible portion of the
5992 buffer), leaving the mark at the previous position. However, when the
5993 command is invoked with a number between one and ten, the function
5994 considers that number to be a fraction of the length of the buffer,
5995 measured in tenths, and Emacs moves the cursor that fraction of the
5996 way from the beginning of the buffer. Thus, you can either call this
5997 function with the key command @kbd{M-<}, which will move the cursor to
5998 the beginning of the buffer, or with a key command such as @kbd{C-u 7
5999 M-<} which will move the cursor to a point 70% of the way through the
6000 buffer. If a number bigger than ten is used for the argument, it
6001 moves to the end of the buffer.
6002
6003 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} function can be called with or without an
6004 argument. The use of the argument is optional.
6005
6006 @menu
6007 * Optional Arguments::
6008 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
6009 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
6010 @end menu
6011
6012 @node Optional Arguments
6013 @subsection Optional Arguments
6014
6015 Unless told otherwise, Lisp expects that a function with an argument in
6016 its function definition will be called with a value for that argument.
6017 If that does not happen, you get an error and a message that says
6018 @samp{Wrong number of arguments}.
6019
6020 @cindex Optional arguments
6021 @cindex Keyword
6022 @findex optional
6023 However, optional arguments are a feature of Lisp: a particular
6024 @dfn{keyword} is used to tell the Lisp interpreter that an argument is
6025 optional. The keyword is @code{&optional}. (The @samp{&} in front of
6026 @samp{optional} is part of the keyword.) In a function definition, if
6027 an argument follows the keyword @code{&optional}, no value need be
6028 passed to that argument when the function is called.
6029
6030 @need 1200
6031 The first line of the function definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6032 therefore looks like this:
6033
6034 @smallexample
6035 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6036 @end smallexample
6037
6038 @need 1250
6039 In outline, the whole function looks like this:
6040
6041 @smallexample
6042 @group
6043 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6044 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
6045 (interactive "P")
6046 (or (@var{is-the-argument-a-cons-cell} arg)
6047 (and @var{are-both-transient-mark-mode-and-mark-active-true})
6048 (push-mark))
6049 (let (@var{determine-size-and-set-it})
6050 (goto-char
6051 (@var{if-there-is-an-argument}
6052 @var{figure-out-where-to-go}
6053 @var{else-go-to}
6054 (point-min))))
6055 @var{do-nicety}
6056 @end group
6057 @end smallexample
6058
6059 The function is similar to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}
6060 function except that the @code{interactive} expression has @code{"P"}
6061 as an argument and the @code{goto-char} function is followed by an
6062 if-then-else expression that figures out where to put the cursor if
6063 there is an argument that is not a cons cell.
6064
6065 (Since I do not explain a cons cell for many more chapters, please
6066 consider ignoring the function @code{consp}. @xref{List
6067 Implementation, , How Lists are Implemented}, and @ref{Cons Cell Type,
6068 , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6069 Manual}.)
6070
6071 The @code{"P"} in the @code{interactive} expression tells Emacs to
6072 pass a prefix argument, if there is one, to the function in raw form.
6073 A prefix argument is made by typing the @key{META} key followed by a
6074 number, or by typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number. (If you don't type
6075 a number, @kbd{C-u} defaults to a cons cell with a 4. A lowercase
6076 @code{"p"} in the @code{interactive} expression causes the function to
6077 convert a prefix arg to a number.)
6078
6079 The true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression looks complex, but
6080 it is not: it checks whether @code{arg} has a value that is not
6081 @code{nil} and whether it is a cons cell. (That is what @code{consp}
6082 does; it checks whether its argument is a cons cell.) If @code{arg}
6083 has a value that is not @code{nil} (and is not a cons cell), which
6084 will be the case if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with a
6085 numeric argument, then this true-or-false-test will return true and
6086 the then-part of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. On the
6087 other hand, if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is not called with an
6088 argument, the value of @code{arg} will be @code{nil} and the else-part
6089 of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. The else-part is
6090 simply @code{point-min}, and when this is the outcome, the whole
6091 @code{goto-char} expression is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, which
6092 is how we saw the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function in its
6093 simplified form.
6094
6095 @node beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6096 @subsection @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
6097
6098 When @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with an argument, an
6099 expression is evaluated which calculates what value to pass to
6100 @code{goto-char}. This expression is rather complicated at first sight.
6101 It includes an inner @code{if} expression and much arithmetic. It looks
6102 like this:
6103
6104 @smallexample
6105 @group
6106 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6107 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6108 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6109 (/ size 10))
6110 (/
6111 (+ 10
6112 (*
6113 size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10)))
6114 @end group
6115 @end smallexample
6116
6117 @menu
6118 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
6119 * Large buffer case::
6120 * Small buffer case::
6121 @end menu
6122
6123 @ifnottex
6124 @node Disentangle beginning-of-buffer
6125 @unnumberedsubsubsec Disentangle @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6126 @end ifnottex
6127
6128 Like other complex-looking expressions, the conditional expression
6129 within @code{beginning-of-buffer} can be disentangled by looking at it
6130 as parts of a template, in this case, the template for an if-then-else
6131 expression. In skeletal form, the expression looks like this:
6132
6133 @smallexample
6134 @group
6135 (if (@var{buffer-is-large}
6136 @var{divide-buffer-size-by-10-and-multiply-by-arg}
6137 @var{else-use-alternate-calculation}
6138 @end group
6139 @end smallexample
6140
6141 The true-or-false-test of this inner @code{if} expression checks the
6142 size of the buffer. The reason for this is that the old version 18
6143 Emacs used numbers that are no bigger than eight million or so and in
6144 the computation that followed, the programmer feared that Emacs might
6145 try to use over-large numbers if the buffer were large. The term
6146 ``overflow'', mentioned in the comment, means numbers that are over
6147 large. More recent versions of Emacs use larger numbers, but this
6148 code has not been touched, if only because people now look at buffers
6149 that are far, far larger than ever before.
6150
6151 There are two cases: if the buffer is large and if it is not.
6152
6153 @node Large buffer case
6154 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a large buffer
6155
6156 In @code{beginning-of-buffer}, the inner @code{if} expression tests
6157 whether the size of the buffer is greater than 10,000 characters. To do
6158 this, it uses the @code{>} function and the computation of @code{size}
6159 that comes from the let expression.
6160
6161 In the old days, the function @code{buffer-size} was used. Not only
6162 was that function called several times, it gave the size of the whole
6163 buffer, not the accessible part. The computation makes much more
6164 sense when it handles just the accessible part. (@xref{Narrowing &
6165 Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more information on focusing
6166 attention to an ``accessible'' part.)
6167
6168 @need 800
6169 The line looks like this:
6170
6171 @smallexample
6172 (if (> size 10000)
6173 @end smallexample
6174
6175 @need 1200
6176 @noindent
6177 When the buffer is large, the then-part of the @code{if} expression is
6178 evaluated. It reads like this (after formatting for easy reading):
6179
6180 @smallexample
6181 @group
6182 (*
6183 (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6184 (/ size 10))
6185 @end group
6186 @end smallexample
6187
6188 @noindent
6189 This expression is a multiplication, with two arguments to the function
6190 @code{*}.
6191
6192 The first argument is @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}. When
6193 @code{"P"} is used as the argument for @code{interactive}, the value
6194 passed to the function as its argument is passed a ``raw prefix
6195 argument'', and not a number. (It is a number in a list.) To perform
6196 the arithmetic, a conversion is necessary, and
6197 @code{prefix-numeric-value} does the job.
6198
6199 @findex / @r{(division)}
6200 @cindex Division
6201 The second argument is @code{(/ size 10)}. This expression divides
6202 the numeric value by ten---the numeric value of the size of the
6203 accessible portion of the buffer. This produces a number that tells
6204 how many characters make up one tenth of the buffer size. (In Lisp,
6205 @code{/} is used for division, just as @code{*} is used for
6206 multiplication.)
6207
6208 @need 1200
6209 In the multiplication expression as a whole, this amount is multiplied
6210 by the value of the prefix argument---the multiplication looks like this:
6211
6212 @smallexample
6213 @group
6214 (* @var{numeric-value-of-prefix-arg}
6215 @var{number-of-characters-in-one-tenth-of-the-accessible-buffer})
6216 @end group
6217 @end smallexample
6218
6219 @noindent
6220 If, for example, the prefix argument is @samp{7}, the one-tenth value
6221 will be multiplied by 7 to give a position 70% of the way through.
6222
6223 @need 1200
6224 The result of all this is that if the accessible portion of the buffer
6225 is large, the @code{goto-char} expression reads like this:
6226
6227 @smallexample
6228 @group
6229 (goto-char (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6230 (/ size 10)))
6231 @end group
6232 @end smallexample
6233
6234 This puts the cursor where we want it.
6235
6236 @node Small buffer case
6237 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a small buffer
6238
6239 If the buffer contains fewer than 10,000 characters, a slightly
6240 different computation is performed. You might think this is not
6241 necessary, since the first computation could do the job. However, in
6242 a small buffer, the first method may not put the cursor on exactly the
6243 desired line; the second method does a better job.
6244
6245 @need 800
6246 The code looks like this:
6247
6248 @c Keep this on one line.
6249 @smallexample
6250 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10))
6251 @end smallexample
6252
6253 @need 1200
6254 @noindent
6255 This is code in which you figure out what happens by discovering how the
6256 functions are embedded in parentheses. It is easier to read if you
6257 reformat it with each expression indented more deeply than its
6258 enclosing expression:
6259
6260 @smallexample
6261 @group
6262 (/
6263 (+ 10
6264 (*
6265 size
6266 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6267 10))
6268 @end group
6269 @end smallexample
6270
6271 @need 1200
6272 @noindent
6273 Looking at parentheses, we see that the innermost operation is
6274 @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}, which converts the raw argument to
6275 a number. In the following expression, this number is multiplied by
6276 the size of the accessible portion of the buffer:
6277
6278 @smallexample
6279 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))
6280 @end smallexample
6281
6282 @noindent
6283 This multiplication creates a number that may be larger than the size of
6284 the buffer---seven times larger if the argument is 7, for example. Ten
6285 is then added to this number and finally the large number is divided by
6286 ten to provide a value that is one character larger than the percentage
6287 position in the buffer.
6288
6289 The number that results from all this is passed to @code{goto-char} and
6290 the cursor is moved to that point.
6291
6292 @need 1500
6293 @node beginning-of-buffer complete
6294 @subsection The Complete @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6295
6296 @need 1000
6297 Here is the complete text of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function:
6298 @sp 1
6299
6300 @c In GNU Emacs 22
6301 @smallexample
6302 @group
6303 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6304 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6305 leave mark at previous position.
6306 With \\[universal-argument] prefix,
6307 do not set mark at previous position.
6308 With numeric arg N,
6309 put point N/10 of the way from the beginning.
6310
6311 If the buffer is narrowed,
6312 this command uses the beginning and size
6313 of the accessible part of the buffer.
6314 @end group
6315
6316 @group
6317 Don't use this command in Lisp programs!
6318 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6319 and avoids clobbering the mark."
6320 (interactive "P")
6321 (or (consp arg)
6322 (and transient-mark-mode mark-active)
6323 (push-mark))
6324 @end group
6325 @group
6326 (let ((size (- (point-max) (point-min))))
6327 (goto-char (if (and arg (not (consp arg)))
6328 (+ (point-min)
6329 (if (> size 10000)
6330 ;; Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!
6331 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6332 (/ size 10))
6333 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6334 10)))
6335 (point-min))))
6336 (if (and arg (not (consp arg))) (forward-line 1)))
6337 @end group
6338 @end smallexample
6339
6340 @ignore
6341 From before GNU Emacs 22
6342 @smallexample
6343 @group
6344 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6345 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6346 leave mark at previous position.
6347 With arg N, put point N/10 of the way
6348 from the true beginning.
6349 @end group
6350 @group
6351 Don't use this in Lisp programs!
6352 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6353 and does not set the mark."
6354 (interactive "P")
6355 (push-mark)
6356 @end group
6357 @group
6358 (goto-char
6359 (if arg
6360 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6361 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6362 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6363 (/ (buffer-size) 10))
6364 @end group
6365 @group
6366 (/ (+ 10 (* (buffer-size)
6367 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6368 10))
6369 (point-min)))
6370 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6371 @end group
6372 @end smallexample
6373 @end ignore
6374
6375 @noindent
6376 Except for two small points, the previous discussion shows how this
6377 function works. The first point deals with a detail in the
6378 documentation string, and the second point concerns the last line of
6379 the function.
6380
6381 @need 800
6382 In the documentation string, there is reference to an expression:
6383
6384 @smallexample
6385 \\[universal-argument]
6386 @end smallexample
6387
6388 @noindent
6389 A @samp{\\} is used before the first square bracket of this
6390 expression. This @samp{\\} tells the Lisp interpreter to substitute
6391 whatever key is currently bound to the @samp{[@dots{}]}. In the case
6392 of @code{universal-argument}, that is usually @kbd{C-u}, but it might
6393 be different. (@xref{Documentation Tips, , Tips for Documentation
6394 Strings, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
6395 information.)
6396
6397 @need 1200
6398 Finally, the last line of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} command says
6399 to move point to the beginning of the next line if the command is
6400 invoked with an argument:
6401
6402 @smallexample
6403 (if (and arg (not (consp arg))) (forward-line 1))
6404 @end smallexample
6405
6406 @noindent
6407 This puts the cursor at the beginning of the first line after the
6408 appropriate tenths position in the buffer. This is a flourish that
6409 means that the cursor is always located @emph{at least} the requested
6410 tenths of the way through the buffer, which is a nicety that is,
6411 perhaps, not necessary, but which, if it did not occur, would be sure
6412 to draw complaints. (The @code{(not (consp arg))} portion is so that
6413 if you specify the command with a @kbd{C-u}, but without a number,
6414 that is to say, if the ``raw prefix argument'' is simply a cons cell,
6415 the command does not put you at the beginning of the second line.)
6416
6417 @node Second Buffer Related Review
6418 @section Review
6419
6420 Here is a brief summary of some of the topics covered in this chapter.
6421
6422 @table @code
6423 @item or
6424 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and return the value of the first
6425 argument that is not @code{nil}; if none return a value that is not
6426 @code{nil}, return @code{nil}. In brief, return the first true value
6427 of the arguments; return a true value if one @emph{or} any of the
6428 others are true.
6429
6430 @item and
6431 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and if any are @code{nil}, return
6432 @code{nil}; if none are @code{nil}, return the value of the last
6433 argument. In brief, return a true value only if all the arguments are
6434 true; return a true value if one @emph{and} each of the others is
6435 true.
6436
6437 @item &optional
6438 A keyword used to indicate that an argument to a function definition
6439 is optional; this means that the function can be evaluated without the
6440 argument, if desired.
6441
6442 @item prefix-numeric-value
6443 Convert the ``raw prefix argument'' produced by @code{(interactive
6444 "P")} to a numeric value.
6445
6446 @item forward-line
6447 Move point forward to the beginning of the next line, or if the argument
6448 is greater than one, forward that many lines. If it can't move as far
6449 forward as it is supposed to, @code{forward-line} goes forward as far as
6450 it can and then returns a count of the number of additional lines it was
6451 supposed to move but couldn't.
6452
6453 @item erase-buffer
6454 Delete the entire contents of the current buffer.
6455
6456 @item bufferp
6457 Return @code{t} if its argument is a buffer; otherwise return @code{nil}.
6458 @end table
6459
6460 @node optional Exercise
6461 @section @code{optional} Argument Exercise
6462
6463 Write an interactive function with an optional argument that tests
6464 whether its argument, a number, is greater than or equal to, or else,
6465 less than the value of @code{fill-column}, and tells you which, in a
6466 message. However, if you do not pass an argument to the function, use
6467 56 as a default value.
6468
6469 @node Narrowing & Widening
6470 @chapter Narrowing and Widening
6471 @cindex Focusing attention (narrowing)
6472 @cindex Narrowing
6473 @cindex Widening
6474
6475 Narrowing is a feature of Emacs that makes it possible for you to focus
6476 on a specific part of a buffer, and work without accidentally changing
6477 other parts. Narrowing is normally disabled since it can confuse
6478 novices.
6479
6480 @menu
6481 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
6482 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
6483 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
6484 * narrow Exercise::
6485 @end menu
6486
6487 @ifnottex
6488 @node Narrowing advantages
6489 @unnumberedsec The Advantages of Narrowing
6490 @end ifnottex
6491
6492 With narrowing, the rest of a buffer is made invisible, as if it weren't
6493 there. This is an advantage if, for example, you want to replace a word
6494 in one part of a buffer but not in another: you narrow to the part you want
6495 and the replacement is carried out only in that section, not in the rest
6496 of the buffer. Searches will only work within a narrowed region, not
6497 outside of one, so if you are fixing a part of a document, you can keep
6498 yourself from accidentally finding parts you do not need to fix by
6499 narrowing just to the region you want.
6500 (The key binding for @code{narrow-to-region} is @kbd{C-x n n}.)
6501
6502 However, narrowing does make the rest of the buffer invisible, which
6503 can scare people who inadvertently invoke narrowing and think they
6504 have deleted a part of their file. Moreover, the @code{undo} command
6505 (which is usually bound to @kbd{C-x u}) does not turn off narrowing
6506 (nor should it), so people can become quite desperate if they do not
6507 know that they can return the rest of a buffer to visibility with the
6508 @code{widen} command.
6509 (The key binding for @code{widen} is @kbd{C-x n w}.)
6510
6511 Narrowing is just as useful to the Lisp interpreter as to a human.
6512 Often, an Emacs Lisp function is designed to work on just part of a
6513 buffer; or conversely, an Emacs Lisp function needs to work on all of a
6514 buffer that has been narrowed. The @code{what-line} function, for
6515 example, removes the narrowing from a buffer, if it has any narrowing
6516 and when it has finished its job, restores the narrowing to what it was.
6517 On the other hand, the @code{count-lines} function
6518 uses narrowing to restrict itself to just that portion
6519 of the buffer in which it is interested and then restores the previous
6520 situation.
6521
6522 @node save-restriction
6523 @section The @code{save-restriction} Special Form
6524 @findex save-restriction
6525
6526 In Emacs Lisp, you can use the @code{save-restriction} special form to
6527 keep track of whatever narrowing is in effect, if any. When the Lisp
6528 interpreter meets with @code{save-restriction}, it executes the code
6529 in the body of the @code{save-restriction} expression, and then undoes
6530 any changes to narrowing that the code caused. If, for example, the
6531 buffer is narrowed and the code that follows @code{save-restriction}
6532 gets rid of the narrowing, @code{save-restriction} returns the buffer
6533 to its narrowed region afterwards. In the @code{what-line} command,
6534 any narrowing the buffer may have is undone by the @code{widen}
6535 command that immediately follows the @code{save-restriction} command.
6536 Any original narrowing is restored just before the completion of the
6537 function.
6538
6539 @need 1250
6540 The template for a @code{save-restriction} expression is simple:
6541
6542 @smallexample
6543 @group
6544 (save-restriction
6545 @var{body}@dots{} )
6546 @end group
6547 @end smallexample
6548
6549 @noindent
6550 The body of the @code{save-restriction} is one or more expressions that
6551 will be evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter.
6552
6553 Finally, a point to note: when you use both @code{save-excursion} and
6554 @code{save-restriction}, one right after the other, you should use
6555 @code{save-excursion} outermost. If you write them in reverse order,
6556 you may fail to record narrowing in the buffer to which Emacs switches
6557 after calling @code{save-excursion}. Thus, when written together,
6558 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} should be written
6559 like this:
6560
6561 @smallexample
6562 @group
6563 (save-excursion
6564 (save-restriction
6565 @var{body}@dots{}))
6566 @end group
6567 @end smallexample
6568
6569 In other circumstances, when not written together, the
6570 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} special forms must
6571 be written in the order appropriate to the function.
6572
6573 @need 1250
6574 For example,
6575
6576 @smallexample
6577 @group
6578 (save-restriction
6579 (widen)
6580 (save-excursion
6581 @var{body}@dots{}))
6582 @end group
6583 @end smallexample
6584
6585 @ignore
6586 Emacs 22
6587 /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
6588
6589 (defun what-line ()
6590 "Print the current buffer line number and narrowed line number of point."
6591 (interactive)
6592 (let ((start (point-min))
6593 (n (line-number-at-pos)))
6594 (if (= start 1)
6595 (message "Line %d" n)
6596 (save-excursion
6597 (save-restriction
6598 (widen)
6599 (message "line %d (narrowed line %d)"
6600 (+ n (line-number-at-pos start) -1) n))))))
6601
6602 (defun line-number-at-pos (&optional pos)
6603 "Return (narrowed) buffer line number at position POS.
6604 If POS is nil, use current buffer location.
6605 Counting starts at (point-min), so the value refers
6606 to the contents of the accessible portion of the buffer."
6607 (let ((opoint (or pos (point))) start)
6608 (save-excursion
6609 (goto-char (point-min))
6610 (setq start (point))
6611 (goto-char opoint)
6612 (forward-line 0)
6613 (1+ (count-lines start (point))))))
6614
6615 (defun count-lines (start end)
6616 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6617 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6618 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6619 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6620 (save-excursion
6621 (save-restriction
6622 (narrow-to-region start end)
6623 (goto-char (point-min))
6624 (if (eq selective-display t)
6625 (save-match-data
6626 (let ((done 0))
6627 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6628 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6629 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6630 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6631 (goto-char (point-max))
6632 (if (and (/= start end)
6633 (not (bolp)))
6634 (1+ done)
6635 done)))
6636 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6637 @end ignore
6638
6639 @node what-line
6640 @section @code{what-line}
6641 @findex what-line
6642 @cindex Widening, example of
6643
6644 The @code{what-line} command tells you the number of the line in which
6645 the cursor is located. The function illustrates the use of the
6646 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} commands. Here is the
6647 original text of the function:
6648
6649 @smallexample
6650 @group
6651 (defun what-line ()
6652 "Print the current line number (in the buffer) of point."
6653 (interactive)
6654 (save-restriction
6655 (widen)
6656 (save-excursion
6657 (beginning-of-line)
6658 (message "Line %d"
6659 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6660 @end group
6661 @end smallexample
6662
6663 (In recent versions of GNU Emacs, the @code{what-line} function has
6664 been expanded to tell you your line number in a narrowed buffer as
6665 well as your line number in a widened buffer. The recent version is
6666 more complex than the version shown here. If you feel adventurous,
6667 you might want to look at it after figuring out how this version
6668 works. You will probably need to use @kbd{C-h f}
6669 (@code{describe-function}). The newer version uses a conditional to
6670 determine whether the buffer has been narrowed.
6671
6672 (Also, it uses @code{line-number-at-pos}, which among other simple
6673 expressions, such as @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, moves point to
6674 the beginning of the current line with @code{(forward-line 0)} rather
6675 than @code{beginning-of-line}.)
6676
6677 The @code{what-line} function as shown here has a documentation line
6678 and is interactive, as you would expect. The next two lines use the
6679 functions @code{save-restriction} and @code{widen}.
6680
6681 The @code{save-restriction} special form notes whatever narrowing is in
6682 effect, if any, in the current buffer and restores that narrowing after
6683 the code in the body of the @code{save-restriction} has been evaluated.
6684
6685 The @code{save-restriction} special form is followed by @code{widen}.
6686 This function undoes any narrowing the current buffer may have had
6687 when @code{what-line} was called. (The narrowing that was there is
6688 the narrowing that @code{save-restriction} remembers.) This widening
6689 makes it possible for the line counting commands to count from the
6690 beginning of the buffer. Otherwise, they would have been limited to
6691 counting within the accessible region. Any original narrowing is
6692 restored just before the completion of the function by the
6693 @code{save-restriction} special form.
6694
6695 The call to @code{widen} is followed by @code{save-excursion}, which
6696 saves the location of the cursor (i.e., of point), and
6697 restores it after the code in the body of the @code{save-excursion}
6698 uses the @code{beginning-of-line} function to move point.
6699
6700 (Note that the @code{(widen)} expression comes between the
6701 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} special forms. When
6702 you write the two @code{save- @dots{}} expressions in sequence, write
6703 @code{save-excursion} outermost.)
6704
6705 @need 1200
6706 The last two lines of the @code{what-line} function are functions to
6707 count the number of lines in the buffer and then print the number in the
6708 echo area.
6709
6710 @smallexample
6711 @group
6712 (message "Line %d"
6713 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6714 @end group
6715 @end smallexample
6716
6717 The @code{message} function prints a one-line message at the bottom of
6718 the Emacs screen. The first argument is inside of quotation marks and
6719 is printed as a string of characters. However, it may contain a
6720 @samp{%d} expression to print a following argument. @samp{%d} prints
6721 the argument as a decimal, so the message will say something such as
6722 @samp{Line 243}.
6723
6724 @need 1200
6725 The number that is printed in place of the @samp{%d} is computed by the
6726 last line of the function:
6727
6728 @smallexample
6729 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))
6730 @end smallexample
6731
6732 @ignore
6733 GNU Emacs 22
6734
6735 (defun count-lines (start end)
6736 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6737 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6738 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6739 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6740 (save-excursion
6741 (save-restriction
6742 (narrow-to-region start end)
6743 (goto-char (point-min))
6744 (if (eq selective-display t)
6745 (save-match-data
6746 (let ((done 0))
6747 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6748 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6749 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6750 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6751 (goto-char (point-max))
6752 (if (and (/= start end)
6753 (not (bolp)))
6754 (1+ done)
6755 done)))
6756 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6757 @end ignore
6758
6759 @noindent
6760 What this does is count the lines from the first position of the
6761 buffer, indicated by the @code{1}, up to @code{(point)}, and then add
6762 one to that number. (The @code{1+} function adds one to its
6763 argument.) We add one to it because line 2 has only one line before
6764 it, and @code{count-lines} counts only the lines @emph{before} the
6765 current line.
6766
6767 After @code{count-lines} has done its job, and the message has been
6768 printed in the echo area, the @code{save-excursion} restores point to
6769 its original position; and @code{save-restriction} restores
6770 the original narrowing, if any.
6771
6772 @node narrow Exercise
6773 @section Exercise with Narrowing
6774
6775 Write a function that will display the first 60 characters of the
6776 current buffer, even if you have narrowed the buffer to its latter
6777 half so that the first line is inaccessible. Restore point, mark, and
6778 narrowing. For this exercise, you need to use a whole potpourri of
6779 functions, including @code{save-restriction}, @code{widen},
6780 @code{goto-char}, @code{point-min}, @code{message}, and
6781 @code{buffer-substring}.
6782
6783 @cindex Properties, mention of @code{buffer-substring-no-properties}
6784 (@code{buffer-substring} is a previously unmentioned function you will
6785 have to investigate yourself; or perhaps you will have to use
6786 @code{buffer-substring-no-properties} or
6787 @code{filter-buffer-substring} @dots{}, yet other functions. Text
6788 properties are a feature otherwise not discussed here. @xref{Text
6789 Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6790 Manual}.)
6791
6792 Additionally, do you really need @code{goto-char} or @code{point-min}?
6793 Or can you write the function without them?
6794
6795 @node car cdr & cons
6796 @chapter @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
6797 @findex car, @r{introduced}
6798 @findex cdr, @r{introduced}
6799
6800 In Lisp, @code{car}, @code{cdr}, and @code{cons} are fundamental
6801 functions. The @code{cons} function is used to construct lists, and
6802 the @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used to take them apart.
6803
6804 In the walk through of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function, we
6805 will see @code{cons} as well as two variants on @code{cdr},
6806 namely, @code{setcdr} and @code{nthcdr}. (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
6807
6808 @menu
6809 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
6810 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
6811 * cons:: Constructing a list.
6812 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
6813 * nth::
6814 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
6815 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
6816 * cons Exercise::
6817 @end menu
6818
6819 @ifnottex
6820 @node Strange Names
6821 @unnumberedsec Strange Names
6822 @end ifnottex
6823
6824 The name of the @code{cons} function is not unreasonable: it is an
6825 abbreviation of the word ``construct''. The origins of the names for
6826 @code{car} and @code{cdr}, on the other hand, are esoteric: @code{car}
6827 is an acronym from the phrase ``Contents of the Address part of the
6828 Register''; and @code{cdr} (pronounced ``could-er'') is an acronym from
6829 the phrase ``Contents of the Decrement part of the Register''. These
6830 phrases refer to specific pieces of hardware on the very early
6831 computer on which the original Lisp was developed. Besides being
6832 obsolete, the phrases have been completely irrelevant for more than 25
6833 years to anyone thinking about Lisp. Nonetheless, although a few
6834 brave scholars have begun to use more reasonable names for these
6835 functions, the old terms are still in use. In particular, since the
6836 terms are used in the Emacs Lisp source code, we will use them in this
6837 introduction.
6838
6839 @node car & cdr
6840 @section @code{car} and @code{cdr}
6841
6842 The @sc{car} of a list is, quite simply, the first item in the list.
6843 Thus the @sc{car} of the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} is
6844 @code{rose}.
6845
6846 @need 1200
6847 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can see this by
6848 evaluating the following:
6849
6850 @smallexample
6851 (car '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
6852 @end smallexample
6853
6854 @noindent
6855 After evaluating the expression, @code{rose} will appear in the echo
6856 area.
6857
6858 Clearly, a more reasonable name for the @code{car} function would be
6859 @code{first} and this is often suggested.
6860
6861 @code{car} does not remove the first item from the list; it only reports
6862 what it is. After @code{car} has been applied to a list, the list is
6863 still the same as it was. In the jargon, @code{car} is
6864 ``non-destructive''. This feature turns out to be important.
6865
6866 The @sc{cdr} of a list is the rest of the list, that is, the
6867 @code{cdr} function returns the part of the list that follows the
6868 first item. Thus, while the @sc{car} of the list @code{'(rose violet
6869 daisy buttercup)} is @code{rose}, the rest of the list, the value
6870 returned by the @code{cdr} function, is @code{(violet daisy
6871 buttercup)}.
6872
6873 @need 800
6874 You can see this by evaluating the following in the usual way:
6875
6876 @smallexample
6877 (cdr '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
6878 @end smallexample
6879
6880 @noindent
6881 When you evaluate this, @code{(violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in
6882 the echo area.
6883
6884 Like @code{car}, @code{cdr} does not remove any elements from the
6885 list---it just returns a report of what the second and subsequent
6886 elements are.
6887
6888 Incidentally, in the example, the list of flowers is quoted. If it were
6889 not, the Lisp interpreter would try to evaluate the list by calling
6890 @code{rose} as a function. In this example, we do not want to do that.
6891
6892 Clearly, a more reasonable name for @code{cdr} would be @code{rest}.
6893
6894 (There is a lesson here: when you name new functions, consider very
6895 carefully what you are doing, since you may be stuck with the names
6896 for far longer than you expect. The reason this document perpetuates
6897 these names is that the Emacs Lisp source code uses them, and if I did
6898 not use them, you would have a hard time reading the code; but do,
6899 please, try to avoid using these terms yourself. The people who come
6900 after you will be grateful to you.)
6901
6902 When @code{car} and @code{cdr} are applied to a list made up of symbols,
6903 such as the list @code{(pine fir oak maple)}, the element of the list
6904 returned by the function @code{car} is the symbol @code{pine} without
6905 any parentheses around it. @code{pine} is the first element in the
6906 list. However, the @sc{cdr} of the list is a list itself, @code{(fir
6907 oak maple)}, as you can see by evaluating the following expressions in
6908 the usual way:
6909
6910 @smallexample
6911 @group
6912 (car '(pine fir oak maple))
6913
6914 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
6915 @end group
6916 @end smallexample
6917
6918 On the other hand, in a list of lists, the first element is itself a
6919 list. @code{car} returns this first element as a list. For example,
6920 the following list contains three sub-lists, a list of carnivores, a
6921 list of herbivores and a list of sea mammals:
6922
6923 @smallexample
6924 @group
6925 (car '((lion tiger cheetah)
6926 (gazelle antelope zebra)
6927 (whale dolphin seal)))
6928 @end group
6929 @end smallexample
6930
6931 @noindent
6932 In this example, the first element or @sc{car} of the list is the list of
6933 carnivores, @code{(lion tiger cheetah)}, and the rest of the list is
6934 @code{((gazelle antelope zebra) (whale dolphin seal))}.
6935
6936 @smallexample
6937 @group
6938 (cdr '((lion tiger cheetah)
6939 (gazelle antelope zebra)
6940 (whale dolphin seal)))
6941 @end group
6942 @end smallexample
6943
6944 It is worth saying again that @code{car} and @code{cdr} are
6945 non-destructive---that is, they do not modify or change lists to which
6946 they are applied. This is very important for how they are used.
6947
6948 Also, in the first chapter, in the discussion about atoms, I said that
6949 in Lisp, ``certain kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated
6950 into parts; but the mechanism for doing this is different from the
6951 mechanism for splitting a list. As far as Lisp is concerned, the
6952 atoms of a list are unsplittable.'' (@xref{Lisp Atoms}.) The
6953 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used for splitting lists and
6954 are considered fundamental to Lisp. Since they cannot split or gain
6955 access to the parts of an array, an array is considered an atom.
6956 Conversely, the other fundamental function, @code{cons}, can put
6957 together or construct a list, but not an array. (Arrays are handled
6958 by array-specific functions. @xref{Arrays, , Arrays, elisp, The GNU
6959 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
6960
6961 @node cons
6962 @section @code{cons}
6963 @findex cons, @r{introduced}
6964
6965 The @code{cons} function constructs lists; it is the inverse of
6966 @code{car} and @code{cdr}. For example, @code{cons} can be used to make
6967 a four element list from the three element list, @code{(fir oak maple)}:
6968
6969 @smallexample
6970 (cons 'pine '(fir oak maple))
6971 @end smallexample
6972
6973 @need 800
6974 @noindent
6975 After evaluating this list, you will see
6976
6977 @smallexample
6978 (pine fir oak maple)
6979 @end smallexample
6980
6981 @noindent
6982 appear in the echo area. @code{cons} causes the creation of a new
6983 list in which the element is followed by the elements of the original
6984 list.
6985
6986 We often say that ``@code{cons} puts a new element at the beginning of
6987 a list; it attaches or pushes elements onto the list'', but this
6988 phrasing can be misleading, since @code{cons} does not change an
6989 existing list, but creates a new one.
6990
6991 Like @code{car} and @code{cdr}, @code{cons} is non-destructive.
6992
6993 @menu
6994 * Build a list::
6995 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
6996 @end menu
6997
6998 @ifnottex
6999 @node Build a list
7000 @unnumberedsubsec Build a list
7001 @end ifnottex
7002
7003 @code{cons} must have a list to attach to.@footnote{Actually, you can
7004 @code{cons} an element to an atom to produce a dotted pair. Dotted
7005 pairs are not discussed here; see @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted
7006 Pair Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.} You
7007 cannot start from absolutely nothing. If you are building a list, you
7008 need to provide at least an empty list at the beginning. Here is a
7009 series of @code{cons} expressions that build up a list of flowers. If
7010 you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate each of
7011 the expressions in the usual way; the value is printed in this text
7012 after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as ``evaluates to''.
7013
7014 @smallexample
7015 @group
7016 (cons 'buttercup ())
7017 @result{} (buttercup)
7018 @end group
7019
7020 @group
7021 (cons 'daisy '(buttercup))
7022 @result{} (daisy buttercup)
7023 @end group
7024
7025 @group
7026 (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup))
7027 @result{} (violet daisy buttercup)
7028 @end group
7029
7030 @group
7031 (cons 'rose '(violet daisy buttercup))
7032 @result{} (rose violet daisy buttercup)
7033 @end group
7034 @end smallexample
7035
7036 @noindent
7037 In the first example, the empty list is shown as @code{()} and a list
7038 made up of @code{buttercup} followed by the empty list is constructed.
7039 As you can see, the empty list is not shown in the list that was
7040 constructed. All that you see is @code{(buttercup)}. The empty list is
7041 not counted as an element of a list because there is nothing in an empty
7042 list. Generally speaking, an empty list is invisible.
7043
7044 The second example, @code{(cons 'daisy '(buttercup))} constructs a new,
7045 two element list by putting @code{daisy} in front of @code{buttercup};
7046 and the third example constructs a three element list by putting
7047 @code{violet} in front of @code{daisy} and @code{buttercup}.
7048
7049 @node length
7050 @subsection Find the Length of a List: @code{length}
7051 @findex length
7052
7053 You can find out how many elements there are in a list by using the Lisp
7054 function @code{length}, as in the following examples:
7055
7056 @smallexample
7057 @group
7058 (length '(buttercup))
7059 @result{} 1
7060 @end group
7061
7062 @group
7063 (length '(daisy buttercup))
7064 @result{} 2
7065 @end group
7066
7067 @group
7068 (length (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup)))
7069 @result{} 3
7070 @end group
7071 @end smallexample
7072
7073 @noindent
7074 In the third example, the @code{cons} function is used to construct a
7075 three element list which is then passed to the @code{length} function as
7076 its argument.
7077
7078 @need 1200
7079 We can also use @code{length} to count the number of elements in an
7080 empty list:
7081
7082 @smallexample
7083 @group
7084 (length ())
7085 @result{} 0
7086 @end group
7087 @end smallexample
7088
7089 @noindent
7090 As you would expect, the number of elements in an empty list is zero.
7091
7092 An interesting experiment is to find out what happens if you try to find
7093 the length of no list at all; that is, if you try to call @code{length}
7094 without giving it an argument, not even an empty list:
7095
7096 @smallexample
7097 (length )
7098 @end smallexample
7099
7100 @need 800
7101 @noindent
7102 What you see, if you evaluate this, is the error message
7103
7104 @smallexample
7105 Lisp error: (wrong-number-of-arguments length 0)
7106 @end smallexample
7107
7108 @noindent
7109 This means that the function receives the wrong number of
7110 arguments, zero, when it expects some other number of arguments. In
7111 this case, one argument is expected, the argument being a list whose
7112 length the function is measuring. (Note that @emph{one} list is
7113 @emph{one} argument, even if the list has many elements inside it.)
7114
7115 The part of the error message that says @samp{length} is the name of
7116 the function.
7117
7118 @ignore
7119 @code{length} is still a subroutine, but you need C-h f to discover that.
7120
7121 In an earlier version:
7122 This is written with a special notation, @samp{#<subr},
7123 that indicates that the function @code{length} is one of the primitive
7124 functions written in C rather than in Emacs Lisp. (@samp{subr} is an
7125 abbreviation for ``subroutine''.) @xref{What Is a Function, , What Is a
7126 Function?, elisp , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
7127 about subroutines.
7128 @end ignore
7129
7130 @node nthcdr
7131 @section @code{nthcdr}
7132 @findex nthcdr
7133
7134 The @code{nthcdr} function is associated with the @code{cdr} function.
7135 What it does is take the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7136
7137 If you take the @sc{cdr} of the list @code{(pine fir
7138 oak maple)}, you will be returned the list @code{(fir oak maple)}. If you
7139 repeat this on what was returned, you will be returned the list
7140 @code{(oak maple)}. (Of course, repeated @sc{cdr}ing on the original
7141 list will just give you the original @sc{cdr} since the function does
7142 not change the list. You need to evaluate the @sc{cdr} of the
7143 @sc{cdr} and so on.) If you continue this, eventually you will be
7144 returned an empty list, which in this case, instead of being shown as
7145 @code{()} is shown as @code{nil}.
7146
7147 @need 1200
7148 For review, here is a series of repeated @sc{cdr}s, the text following
7149 the @samp{@result{}} shows what is returned.
7150
7151 @smallexample
7152 @group
7153 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
7154 @result{}(fir oak maple)
7155 @end group
7156
7157 @group
7158 (cdr '(fir oak maple))
7159 @result{} (oak maple)
7160 @end group
7161
7162 @group
7163 (cdr '(oak maple))
7164 @result{}(maple)
7165 @end group
7166
7167 @group
7168 (cdr '(maple))
7169 @result{} nil
7170 @end group
7171
7172 @group
7173 (cdr 'nil)
7174 @result{} nil
7175 @end group
7176
7177 @group
7178 (cdr ())
7179 @result{} nil
7180 @end group
7181 @end smallexample
7182
7183 @need 1200
7184 You can also do several @sc{cdr}s without printing the values in
7185 between, like this:
7186
7187 @smallexample
7188 @group
7189 (cdr (cdr '(pine fir oak maple)))
7190 @result{} (oak maple)
7191 @end group
7192 @end smallexample
7193
7194 @noindent
7195 In this example, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the innermost list first.
7196 The innermost list is quoted, so it just passes the list as it is to the
7197 innermost @code{cdr}. This @code{cdr} passes a list made up of the
7198 second and subsequent elements of the list to the outermost @code{cdr},
7199 which produces a list composed of the third and subsequent elements of
7200 the original list. In this example, the @code{cdr} function is repeated
7201 and returns a list that consists of the original list without its
7202 first two elements.
7203
7204 The @code{nthcdr} function does the same as repeating the call to
7205 @code{cdr}. In the following example, the argument 2 is passed to the
7206 function @code{nthcdr}, along with the list, and the value returned is
7207 the list without its first two items, which is exactly the same
7208 as repeating @code{cdr} twice on the list:
7209
7210 @smallexample
7211 @group
7212 (nthcdr 2 '(pine fir oak maple))
7213 @result{} (oak maple)
7214 @end group
7215 @end smallexample
7216
7217 @need 1200
7218 Using the original four element list, we can see what happens when
7219 various numeric arguments are passed to @code{nthcdr}, including 0, 1,
7220 and 5:
7221
7222 @smallexample
7223 @group
7224 ;; @r{Leave the list as it was.}
7225 (nthcdr 0 '(pine fir oak maple))
7226 @result{} (pine fir oak maple)
7227 @end group
7228
7229 @group
7230 ;; @r{Return a copy without the first element.}
7231 (nthcdr 1 '(pine fir oak maple))
7232 @result{} (fir oak maple)
7233 @end group
7234
7235 @group
7236 ;; @r{Return a copy of the list without three elements.}
7237 (nthcdr 3 '(pine fir oak maple))
7238 @result{} (maple)
7239 @end group
7240
7241 @group
7242 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all four elements.}
7243 (nthcdr 4 '(pine fir oak maple))
7244 @result{} nil
7245 @end group
7246
7247 @group
7248 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all elements.}
7249 (nthcdr 5 '(pine fir oak maple))
7250 @result{} nil
7251 @end group
7252 @end smallexample
7253
7254 @node nth
7255 @section @code{nth}
7256 @findex nth
7257
7258 The @code{nthcdr} function takes the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7259 The @code{nth} function takes the @sc{car} of the result returned by
7260 @code{nthcdr}. It returns the Nth element of the list.
7261
7262 @need 1500
7263 Thus, if it were not defined in C for speed, the definition of
7264 @code{nth} would be:
7265
7266 @smallexample
7267 @group
7268 (defun nth (n list)
7269 "Returns the Nth element of LIST.
7270 N counts from zero. If LIST is not that long, nil is returned."
7271 (car (nthcdr n list)))
7272 @end group
7273 @end smallexample
7274
7275 @noindent
7276 (Originally, @code{nth} was defined in Emacs Lisp in @file{subr.el},
7277 but its definition was redone in C in the 1980s.)
7278
7279 The @code{nth} function returns a single element of a list.
7280 This can be very convenient.
7281
7282 Note that the elements are numbered from zero, not one. That is to
7283 say, the first element of a list, its @sc{car} is the zeroth element.
7284 This is called ``zero-based'' counting and often bothers people who
7285 are accustomed to the first element in a list being number one, which
7286 is ``one-based''.
7287
7288 @need 1250
7289 For example:
7290
7291 @smallexample
7292 @group
7293 (nth 0 '("one" "two" "three"))
7294 @result{} "one"
7295
7296 (nth 1 '("one" "two" "three"))
7297 @result{} "two"
7298 @end group
7299 @end smallexample
7300
7301 It is worth mentioning that @code{nth}, like @code{nthcdr} and
7302 @code{cdr}, does not change the original list---the function is
7303 non-destructive. This is in sharp contrast to the @code{setcar} and
7304 @code{setcdr} functions.
7305
7306 @node setcar
7307 @section @code{setcar}
7308 @findex setcar
7309
7310 As you might guess from their names, the @code{setcar} and @code{setcdr}
7311 functions set the @sc{car} or the @sc{cdr} of a list to a new value.
7312 They actually change the original list, unlike @code{car} and @code{cdr}
7313 which leave the original list as it was. One way to find out how this
7314 works is to experiment. We will start with the @code{setcar} function.
7315
7316 @need 1200
7317 First, we can make a list and then set the value of a variable to the
7318 list, using the @code{setq} function. Here is a list of animals:
7319
7320 @smallexample
7321 (setq animals '(antelope giraffe lion tiger))
7322 @end smallexample
7323
7324 @noindent
7325 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
7326 this expression in the usual fashion, by positioning the cursor after
7327 the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. (I'm doing this right here
7328 as I write this. This is one of the advantages of having the
7329 interpreter built into the computing environment. Incidentally, when
7330 there is nothing on the line after the final parentheses, such as a
7331 comment, point can be on the next line. Thus, if your cursor is in
7332 the first column of the next line, you do not need to move it.
7333 Indeed, Emacs permits any amount of white space after the final
7334 parenthesis.)
7335
7336 @need 1200
7337 When we evaluate the variable @code{animals}, we see that it is bound to
7338 the list @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}:
7339
7340 @smallexample
7341 @group
7342 animals
7343 @result{} (antelope giraffe lion tiger)
7344 @end group
7345 @end smallexample
7346
7347 @noindent
7348 Put another way, the variable @code{animals} points to the list
7349 @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}.
7350
7351 Next, evaluate the function @code{setcar} while passing it two
7352 arguments, the variable @code{animals} and the quoted symbol
7353 @code{hippopotamus}; this is done by writing the three element list
7354 @code{(setcar animals 'hippopotamus)} and then evaluating it in the
7355 usual fashion:
7356
7357 @smallexample
7358 (setcar animals 'hippopotamus)
7359 @end smallexample
7360
7361 @need 1200
7362 @noindent
7363 After evaluating this expression, evaluate the variable @code{animals}
7364 again. You will see that the list of animals has changed:
7365
7366 @smallexample
7367 @group
7368 animals
7369 @result{} (hippopotamus giraffe lion tiger)
7370 @end group
7371 @end smallexample
7372
7373 @noindent
7374 The first element on the list, @code{antelope} is replaced by
7375 @code{hippopotamus}.
7376
7377 So we can see that @code{setcar} did not add a new element to the list
7378 as @code{cons} would have; it replaced @code{antelope} with
7379 @code{hippopotamus}; it @emph{changed} the list.
7380
7381 @node setcdr
7382 @section @code{setcdr}
7383 @findex setcdr
7384
7385 The @code{setcdr} function is similar to the @code{setcar} function,
7386 except that the function replaces the second and subsequent elements of
7387 a list rather than the first element.
7388
7389 (To see how to change the last element of a list, look ahead to
7390 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, which uses
7391 the @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr} functions.)
7392
7393 @need 1200
7394 To see how this works, set the value of the variable to a list of
7395 domesticated animals by evaluating the following expression:
7396
7397 @smallexample
7398 (setq domesticated-animals '(horse cow sheep goat))
7399 @end smallexample
7400
7401 @need 1200
7402 @noindent
7403 If you now evaluate the list, you will be returned the list
7404 @code{(horse cow sheep goat)}:
7405
7406 @smallexample
7407 @group
7408 domesticated-animals
7409 @result{} (horse cow sheep goat)
7410 @end group
7411 @end smallexample
7412
7413 @need 1200
7414 Next, evaluate @code{setcdr} with two arguments, the name of the
7415 variable which has a list as its value, and the list to which the
7416 @sc{cdr} of the first list will be set;
7417
7418 @smallexample
7419 (setcdr domesticated-animals '(cat dog))
7420 @end smallexample
7421
7422 @noindent
7423 If you evaluate this expression, the list @code{(cat dog)} will appear
7424 in the echo area. This is the value returned by the function. The
7425 result we are interested in is the ``side effect'', which we can see by
7426 evaluating the variable @code{domesticated-animals}:
7427
7428 @smallexample
7429 @group
7430 domesticated-animals
7431 @result{} (horse cat dog)
7432 @end group
7433 @end smallexample
7434
7435 @noindent
7436 Indeed, the list is changed from @code{(horse cow sheep goat)} to
7437 @code{(horse cat dog)}. The @sc{cdr} of the list is changed from
7438 @code{(cow sheep goat)} to @code{(cat dog)}.
7439
7440 @node cons Exercise
7441 @section Exercise
7442
7443 Construct a list of four birds by evaluating several expressions with
7444 @code{cons}. Find out what happens when you @code{cons} a list onto
7445 itself. Replace the first element of the list of four birds with a
7446 fish. Replace the rest of that list with a list of other fish.
7447
7448 @node Cutting & Storing Text
7449 @chapter Cutting and Storing Text
7450 @cindex Cutting and storing text
7451 @cindex Storing and cutting text
7452 @cindex Killing text
7453 @cindex Clipping text
7454 @cindex Erasing text
7455 @cindex Deleting text
7456
7457 Whenever you cut or clip text out of a buffer with a ``kill'' command in
7458 GNU Emacs, it is stored in a list and you can bring it back with a
7459 ``yank'' command.
7460
7461 (The use of the word ``kill'' in Emacs for processes which specifically
7462 @emph{do not} destroy the values of the entities is an unfortunate
7463 historical accident. A much more appropriate word would be ``clip'' since
7464 that is what the kill commands do; they clip text out of a buffer and
7465 put it into storage from which it can be brought back. I have often
7466 been tempted to replace globally all occurrences of ``kill'' in the Emacs
7467 sources with ``clip'' and all occurrences of ``killed'' with ``clipped''.)
7468
7469 @menu
7470 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
7471 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
7472 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
7473 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
7474 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
7475 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
7476 * cons & search-fwd Review::
7477 * search Exercises::
7478 @end menu
7479
7480 @ifnottex
7481 @node Storing Text
7482 @unnumberedsec Storing Text in a List
7483 @end ifnottex
7484
7485 When text is cut out of a buffer, it is stored on a list. Successive
7486 pieces of text are stored on the list successively, so the list might
7487 look like this:
7488
7489 @smallexample
7490 ("a piece of text" "previous piece")
7491 @end smallexample
7492
7493 @need 1200
7494 @noindent
7495 The function @code{cons} can be used to create a new list from a piece
7496 of text (an ``atom'', to use the jargon) and an existing list, like
7497 this:
7498
7499 @smallexample
7500 @group
7501 (cons "another piece"
7502 '("a piece of text" "previous piece"))
7503 @end group
7504 @end smallexample
7505
7506 @need 1200
7507 @noindent
7508 If you evaluate this expression, a list of three elements will appear in
7509 the echo area:
7510
7511 @smallexample
7512 ("another piece" "a piece of text" "previous piece")
7513 @end smallexample
7514
7515 With the @code{car} and @code{nthcdr} functions, you can retrieve
7516 whichever piece of text you want. For example, in the following code,
7517 @code{nthcdr 1 @dots{}} returns the list with the first item removed;
7518 and the @code{car} returns the first element of that remainder---the
7519 second element of the original list:
7520
7521 @smallexample
7522 @group
7523 (car (nthcdr 1 '("another piece"
7524 "a piece of text"
7525 "previous piece")))
7526 @result{} "a piece of text"
7527 @end group
7528 @end smallexample
7529
7530 The actual functions in Emacs are more complex than this, of course.
7531 The code for cutting and retrieving text has to be written so that
7532 Emacs can figure out which element in the list you want---the first,
7533 second, third, or whatever. In addition, when you get to the end of
7534 the list, Emacs should give you the first element of the list, rather
7535 than nothing at all.
7536
7537 The list that holds the pieces of text is called the @dfn{kill ring}.
7538 This chapter leads up to a description of the kill ring and how it is
7539 used by first tracing how the @code{zap-to-char} function works. This
7540 function uses (or ``calls'') a function that invokes a function that
7541 manipulates the kill ring. Thus, before reaching the mountains, we
7542 climb the foothills.
7543
7544 A subsequent chapter describes how text that is cut from the buffer is
7545 retrieved. @xref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}.
7546
7547 @node zap-to-char
7548 @section @code{zap-to-char}
7549 @findex zap-to-char
7550
7551 Let us look at the interactive @code{zap-to-char} function.
7552
7553 @menu
7554 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
7555 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
7556 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
7557 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
7558 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
7559 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
7560 @end menu
7561
7562 @ifnottex
7563 @node Complete zap-to-char
7564 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{zap-to-char} Implementation
7565 @end ifnottex
7566
7567 The @code{zap-to-char} function removes the text in the region between
7568 the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) up to and including the
7569 next occurrence of a specified character. The text that
7570 @code{zap-to-char} removes is put in the kill ring; and it can be
7571 retrieved from the kill ring by typing @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}). If
7572 the command is given an argument, it removes text through that number
7573 of occurrences. Thus, if the cursor were at the beginning of this
7574 sentence and the character were @samp{s}, @samp{Thus} would be
7575 removed. If the argument were two, @samp{Thus, if the curs} would be
7576 removed, up to and including the @samp{s} in @samp{cursor}.
7577
7578 If the specified character is not found, @code{zap-to-char} will say
7579 ``Search failed'', tell you the character you typed, and not remove
7580 any text.
7581
7582 In order to determine how much text to remove, @code{zap-to-char} uses
7583 a search function. Searches are used extensively in code that
7584 manipulates text, and we will focus attention on them as well as on the
7585 deletion command.
7586
7587 @ignore
7588 @c GNU Emacs version 19
7589 (defun zap-to-char (arg char) ; version 19 implementation
7590 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7591 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7592 (interactive "*p\ncZap to char: ")
7593 (kill-region (point)
7594 (progn
7595 (search-forward
7596 (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7597 (point))))
7598 @end ignore
7599
7600 @need 1250
7601 Here is the complete text of the version 22 implementation of the function:
7602
7603 @c GNU Emacs 22
7604 @smallexample
7605 @group
7606 (defun zap-to-char (arg char)
7607 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7608 Case is ignored if `case-fold-search' is non-nil in the current buffer.
7609 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7610 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7611 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7612 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7613 (kill-region (point) (progn
7614 (search-forward (char-to-string char)
7615 nil nil arg)
7616 (point))))
7617 @end group
7618 @end smallexample
7619
7620 The documentation is thorough. You do need to know the jargon meaning
7621 of the word ``kill''.
7622
7623 @cindex curved quotes
7624 @cindex curly quotes
7625 The version 22 documentation string for @code{zap-to-char} uses ASCII
7626 grave accent and apostrophe to quote a symbol, so it appears as
7627 @t{`case-fold-search'}. This quoting style was inspired by 1970s-era
7628 displays in which grave accent and apostrophe were often mirror images
7629 suitable for use as quotes. On most modern displays this is no longer
7630 true, and when these two ASCII characters appear in documentation
7631 strings or diagnostic message formats, Emacs typically transliterates
7632 them to curved single quotes, so that the abovequoted symbol appears
7633 as @t{‘case-fold-search’}. Source-code strings can also simply use
7634 curved quotes directly.
7635
7636 @node zap-to-char interactive
7637 @subsection The @code{interactive} Expression
7638
7639 @need 800
7640 The interactive expression in the @code{zap-to-char} command looks like
7641 this:
7642
7643 @smallexample
7644 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7645 @end smallexample
7646
7647 The part within quotation marks, @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "}, specifies
7648 two different things. First, and most simply, is the @samp{p}.
7649 This part is separated from the next part by a newline, @samp{\n}.
7650 The @samp{p} means that the first argument to the function will be
7651 passed the value of a ``processed prefix''. The prefix argument is
7652 passed by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number, or @kbd{M-} and a number. If
7653 the function is called interactively without a prefix, 1 is passed to
7654 this argument.
7655
7656 The second part of @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "} is
7657 @samp{cZap to char:@: }. In this part, the lower case @samp{c}
7658 indicates that @code{interactive} expects a prompt and that the
7659 argument will be a character. The prompt follows the @samp{c} and is
7660 the string @samp{Zap to char:@: } (with a space after the colon to
7661 make it look good).
7662
7663 What all this does is prepare the arguments to @code{zap-to-char} so they
7664 are of the right type, and give the user a prompt.
7665
7666 In a read-only buffer, the @code{zap-to-char} function copies the text
7667 to the kill ring, but does not remove it. The echo area displays a
7668 message saying that the buffer is read-only. Also, the terminal may
7669 beep or blink at you.
7670
7671 @node zap-to-char body
7672 @subsection The Body of @code{zap-to-char}
7673
7674 The body of the @code{zap-to-char} function contains the code that
7675 kills (that is, removes) the text in the region from the current
7676 position of the cursor up to and including the specified character.
7677
7678 The first part of the code looks like this:
7679
7680 @smallexample
7681 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7682 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7683 (kill-region (point) (progn
7684 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7685 (point)))
7686 @end smallexample
7687
7688 @noindent
7689 @code{char-table-p} is an hitherto unseen function. It determines
7690 whether its argument is a character table. When it is, it sets the
7691 character passed to @code{zap-to-char} to one of them, if that
7692 character exists, or to the character itself. (This becomes important
7693 for certain characters in non-European languages. The @code{aref}
7694 function extracts an element from an array. It is an array-specific
7695 function that is not described in this document. @xref{Arrays, ,
7696 Arrays, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
7697
7698 @noindent
7699 @code{(point)} is the current position of the cursor.
7700
7701 The next part of the code is an expression using @code{progn}. The body
7702 of the @code{progn} consists of calls to @code{search-forward} and
7703 @code{point}.
7704
7705 It is easier to understand how @code{progn} works after learning about
7706 @code{search-forward}, so we will look at @code{search-forward} and
7707 then at @code{progn}.
7708
7709 @node search-forward
7710 @subsection The @code{search-forward} Function
7711 @findex search-forward
7712
7713 The @code{search-forward} function is used to locate the
7714 zapped-for-character in @code{zap-to-char}. If the search is
7715 successful, @code{search-forward} leaves point immediately after the
7716 last character in the target string. (In @code{zap-to-char}, the
7717 target string is just one character long. @code{zap-to-char} uses the
7718 function @code{char-to-string} to ensure that the computer treats that
7719 character as a string.) If the search is backwards,
7720 @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first character in
7721 the target. Also, @code{search-forward} returns @code{t} for true.
7722 (Moving point is therefore a ``side effect''.)
7723
7724 @need 1250
7725 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{search-forward} function looks like this:
7726
7727 @smallexample
7728 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7729 @end smallexample
7730
7731 The @code{search-forward} function takes four arguments:
7732
7733 @enumerate
7734 @item
7735 The first argument is the target, what is searched for. This must be a
7736 string, such as @samp{"z"}.
7737
7738 As it happens, the argument passed to @code{zap-to-char} is a single
7739 character. Because of the way computers are built, the Lisp
7740 interpreter may treat a single character as being different from a
7741 string of characters. Inside the computer, a single character has a
7742 different electronic format than a string of one character. (A single
7743 character can often be recorded in the computer using exactly one
7744 byte; but a string may be longer, and the computer needs to be ready
7745 for this.) Since the @code{search-forward} function searches for a
7746 string, the character that the @code{zap-to-char} function receives as
7747 its argument must be converted inside the computer from one format to
7748 the other; otherwise the @code{search-forward} function will fail.
7749 The @code{char-to-string} function is used to make this conversion.
7750
7751 @item
7752 The second argument bounds the search; it is specified as a position in
7753 the buffer. In this case, the search can go to the end of the buffer,
7754 so no bound is set and the second argument is @code{nil}.
7755
7756 @item
7757 The third argument tells the function what it should do if the search
7758 fails---it can signal an error (and print a message) or it can return
7759 @code{nil}. A @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
7760 signal an error when the search fails.
7761
7762 @item
7763 The fourth argument to @code{search-forward} is the repeat count---how
7764 many occurrences of the string to look for. This argument is optional
7765 and if the function is called without a repeat count, this argument is
7766 passed the value 1. If this argument is negative, the search goes
7767 backwards.
7768 @end enumerate
7769
7770 @need 800
7771 In template form, a @code{search-forward} expression looks like this:
7772
7773 @smallexample
7774 @group
7775 (search-forward "@var{target-string}"
7776 @var{limit-of-search}
7777 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
7778 @var{repeat-count})
7779 @end group
7780 @end smallexample
7781
7782 We will look at @code{progn} next.
7783
7784 @node progn
7785 @subsection The @code{progn} Special Form
7786 @findex progn
7787
7788 @code{progn} is a special form that causes each of its arguments to be
7789 evaluated in sequence and then returns the value of the last one. The
7790 preceding expressions are evaluated only for the side effects they
7791 perform. The values produced by them are discarded.
7792
7793 @need 800
7794 The template for a @code{progn} expression is very simple:
7795
7796 @smallexample
7797 @group
7798 (progn
7799 @var{body}@dots{})
7800 @end group
7801 @end smallexample
7802
7803 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{progn} expression has to do two things:
7804 put point in exactly the right position; and return the location of
7805 point so that @code{kill-region} will know how far to kill to.
7806
7807 The first argument to the @code{progn} is @code{search-forward}. When
7808 @code{search-forward} finds the string, the function leaves point
7809 immediately after the last character in the target string. (In this
7810 case the target string is just one character long.) If the search is
7811 backwards, @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first
7812 character in the target. The movement of point is a side effect.
7813
7814 The second and last argument to @code{progn} is the expression
7815 @code{(point)}. This expression returns the value of point, which in
7816 this case will be the location to which it has been moved by
7817 @code{search-forward}. (In the source, a line that tells the function
7818 to go to the previous character, if it is going forward, was commented
7819 out in 1999; I don't remember whether that feature or mis-feature was
7820 ever a part of the distributed source.) The value of @code{point} is
7821 returned by the @code{progn} expression and is passed to
7822 @code{kill-region} as @code{kill-region}'s second argument.
7823
7824 @node Summing up zap-to-char
7825 @subsection Summing up @code{zap-to-char}
7826
7827 Now that we have seen how @code{search-forward} and @code{progn} work,
7828 we can see how the @code{zap-to-char} function works as a whole.
7829
7830 The first argument to @code{kill-region} is the position of the cursor
7831 when the @code{zap-to-char} command is given---the value of point at
7832 that time. Within the @code{progn}, the search function then moves
7833 point to just after the zapped-to-character and @code{point} returns the
7834 value of this location. The @code{kill-region} function puts together
7835 these two values of point, the first one as the beginning of the region
7836 and the second one as the end of the region, and removes the region.
7837
7838 The @code{progn} special form is necessary because the
7839 @code{kill-region} command takes two arguments; and it would fail if
7840 @code{search-forward} and @code{point} expressions were written in
7841 sequence as two additional arguments. The @code{progn} expression is
7842 a single argument to @code{kill-region} and returns the one value that
7843 @code{kill-region} needs for its second argument.
7844
7845 @node kill-region
7846 @section @code{kill-region}
7847 @findex kill-region
7848
7849 The @code{zap-to-char} function uses the @code{kill-region} function.
7850 This function clips text from a region and copies that text to
7851 the kill ring, from which it may be retrieved.
7852
7853 @ignore
7854 GNU Emacs 22:
7855
7856 (defun kill-region (beg end &optional yank-handler)
7857 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
7858 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
7859 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there.
7860 \(If you want to kill and then yank immediately, use \\[kill-ring-save].)
7861
7862 If you want to append the killed region to the last killed text,
7863 use \\[append-next-kill] before \\[kill-region].
7864
7865 If the buffer is read-only, Emacs will beep and refrain from deleting
7866 the text, but put the text in the kill ring anyway. This means that
7867 you can use the killing commands to copy text from a read-only buffer.
7868
7869 This is the primitive for programs to kill text (as opposed to deleting it).
7870 Supply two arguments, character positions indicating the stretch of text
7871 to be killed.
7872 Any command that calls this function is a \"kill command\".
7873 If the previous command was also a kill command,
7874 the text killed this time appends to the text killed last time
7875 to make one entry in the kill ring.
7876
7877 In Lisp code, optional third arg YANK-HANDLER, if non-nil,
7878 specifies the yank-handler text property to be set on the killed
7879 text. See `insert-for-yank'."
7880 ;; Pass point first, then mark, because the order matters
7881 ;; when calling kill-append.
7882 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
7883 (unless (and beg end)
7884 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
7885 (condition-case nil
7886 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
7887 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
7888 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
7889 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
7890 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
7891 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
7892 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
7893 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
7894 nil)
7895 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only)
7896 ;; The code above failed because the buffer, or some of the characters
7897 ;; in the region, are read-only.
7898 ;; We should beep, in case the user just isn't aware of this.
7899 ;; However, there's no harm in putting
7900 ;; the region's text in the kill ring, anyway.
7901 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
7902 ;; Set this-command now, so it will be set even if we get an error.
7903 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
7904 ;; This should barf, if appropriate, and give us the correct error.
7905 (if kill-read-only-ok
7906 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
7907 ;; Signal an error if the buffer is read-only.
7908 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
7909 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
7910 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
7911 @end ignore
7912
7913 The Emacs 22 version of that function uses @code{condition-case} and
7914 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, both of which we will explain.
7915 @code{condition-case} is an important special form.
7916
7917 In essence, the @code{kill-region} function calls
7918 @code{condition-case}, which takes three arguments. In this function,
7919 the first argument does nothing. The second argument contains the
7920 code that does the work when all goes well. The third argument
7921 contains the code that is called in the event of an error.
7922
7923 @menu
7924 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
7925 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
7926 * Lisp macro::
7927 @end menu
7928
7929 @ifnottex
7930 @node Complete kill-region
7931 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{kill-region} Definition
7932 @end ifnottex
7933
7934 @need 1200
7935 We will go through the @code{condition-case} code in a moment. First,
7936 let us look at the definition of @code{kill-region}, with comments
7937 added:
7938
7939 @c GNU Emacs 22:
7940 @smallexample
7941 @group
7942 (defun kill-region (beg end)
7943 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
7944 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
7945 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there. @dots{} "
7946 @end group
7947
7948 @group
7949 ;; @bullet{} Since order matters, pass point first.
7950 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
7951 ;; @bullet{} And tell us if we cannot cut the text.
7952 ;; 'unless' is an 'if' without a then-part.
7953 (unless (and beg end)
7954 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
7955 @end group
7956
7957 @group
7958 ;; @bullet{} 'condition-case' takes three arguments.
7959 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
7960 ;; information about the error signal is not
7961 ;; stored for use by another function.
7962 (condition-case nil
7963 @end group
7964
7965 @group
7966 ;; @bullet{} The second argument to 'condition-case' tells the
7967 ;; Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
7968 @end group
7969
7970 @group
7971 ;; It starts with a 'let' function that extracts the string
7972 ;; and tests whether it exists. If so (that is what the
7973 ;; 'when' checks), it calls an 'if' function that determines
7974 ;; whether the previous command was another call to
7975 ;; 'kill-region'; if it was, then the new text is appended to
7976 ;; the previous text; if not, then a different function,
7977 ;; 'kill-new', is called.
7978 @end group
7979
7980 @group
7981 ;; The 'kill-append' function concatenates the new string and
7982 ;; the old. The 'kill-new' function inserts text into a new
7983 ;; item in the kill ring.
7984 @end group
7985
7986 @group
7987 ;; 'when' is an 'if' without an else-part. The second 'when'
7988 ;; again checks whether the current string exists; in
7989 ;; addition, it checks whether the previous command was
7990 ;; another call to 'kill-region'. If one or the other
7991 ;; condition is true, then it sets the current command to
7992 ;; be 'kill-region'.
7993 @end group
7994 @group
7995 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
7996 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
7997 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
7998 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
7999 @end group
8000 @group
8001 ;; @minus{} 'yank-handler' is an optional argument to
8002 ;; 'kill-region' that tells the 'kill-append' and
8003 ;; 'kill-new' functions how deal with properties
8004 ;; added to the text, such as 'bold' or 'italics'.
8005 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8006 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
8007 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
8008 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8009 nil)
8010 @end group
8011
8012 @group
8013 ;; @bullet{} The third argument to 'condition-case' tells the interpreter
8014 ;; what to do with an error.
8015 @end group
8016 @group
8017 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8018 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8019 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8020 ;; then the body is executed.
8021 @end group
8022 @group
8023 ;; The first part of the third argument is the following:
8024 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; the if-part
8025 ;; @dots{} the then-part
8026 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8027 @end group
8028 @group
8029 ;; Next, also as part of the then-part, set this-command, so
8030 ;; it will be set in an error
8031 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
8032 ;; Finally, in the then-part, send a message if you may copy
8033 ;; the text to the kill ring without signaling an error, but
8034 ;; don't if you may not.
8035 @end group
8036 @group
8037 (if kill-read-only-ok
8038 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
8039 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8040 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
8041 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))
8042 @end group
8043 @end smallexample
8044
8045 @ignore
8046 @c v 21
8047 @smallexample
8048 @group
8049 (defun kill-region (beg end)
8050 "Kill between point and mark.
8051 The text is deleted but saved in the kill ring."
8052 (interactive "r")
8053 @end group
8054
8055 @group
8056 ;; 1. 'condition-case' takes three arguments.
8057 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
8058 ;; information about the error signal is not
8059 ;; stored for use by another function.
8060 (condition-case nil
8061 @end group
8062
8063 @group
8064 ;; 2. The second argument to 'condition-case'
8065 ;; tells the Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
8066 @end group
8067
8068 @group
8069 ;; The 'delete-and-extract-region' function usually does the
8070 ;; work. If the beginning and ending of the region are both
8071 ;; the same, then the variable 'string' will be empty, or nil
8072 (let ((string (delete-and-extract-region beg end)))
8073 @end group
8074
8075 @group
8076 ;; 'when' is an 'if' clause that cannot take an 'else-part'.
8077 ;; Emacs normally sets the value of 'last-command' to the
8078 ;; previous command.
8079 @end group
8080 @group
8081 ;; 'kill-append' concatenates the new string and the old.
8082 ;; 'kill-new' inserts text into a new item in the kill ring.
8083 (when string
8084 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8085 ;; if true, prepend string
8086 (kill-append string (< end beg))
8087 (kill-new string)))
8088 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8089 @end group
8090
8091 @group
8092 ;; 3. The third argument to 'condition-case' tells the interpreter
8093 ;; what to do with an error.
8094 @end group
8095 @group
8096 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8097 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8098 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8099 ;; then the body is executed.
8100 @end group
8101 @group
8102 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; this is the if-part
8103 ;; then...
8104 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8105 @end group
8106 @group
8107 (if kill-read-only-ok ;; usually this variable is nil
8108 (message "Read only text copied to kill ring")
8109 ;; or else, signal an error if the buffer is read-only;
8110 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8111 ;; and, in any case, signal that the text is read-only.
8112 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
8113 @end group
8114 @end smallexample
8115 @end ignore
8116
8117 @node condition-case
8118 @subsection @code{condition-case}
8119 @findex condition-case
8120
8121 As we have seen earlier (@pxref{Making Errors, , Generate an Error
8122 Message}), when the Emacs Lisp interpreter has trouble evaluating an
8123 expression, it provides you with help; in the jargon, this is called
8124 ``signaling an error''. Usually, the computer stops the program and
8125 shows you a message.
8126
8127 However, some programs undertake complicated actions. They should not
8128 simply stop on an error. In the @code{kill-region} function, the most
8129 likely error is that you will try to kill text that is read-only and
8130 cannot be removed. So the @code{kill-region} function contains code
8131 to handle this circumstance. This code, which makes up the body of
8132 the @code{kill-region} function, is inside of a @code{condition-case}
8133 special form.
8134
8135 @need 800
8136 The template for @code{condition-case} looks like this:
8137
8138 @smallexample
8139 @group
8140 (condition-case
8141 @var{var}
8142 @var{bodyform}
8143 @var{error-handler}@dots{})
8144 @end group
8145 @end smallexample
8146
8147 The second argument, @var{bodyform}, is straightforward. The
8148 @code{condition-case} special form causes the Lisp interpreter to
8149 evaluate the code in @var{bodyform}. If no error occurs, the special
8150 form returns the code's value and produces the side-effects, if any.
8151
8152 In short, the @var{bodyform} part of a @code{condition-case}
8153 expression determines what should happen when everything works
8154 correctly.
8155
8156 However, if an error occurs, among its other actions, the function
8157 generating the error signal will define one or more error condition
8158 names.
8159
8160 An error handler is the third argument to @code{condition-case}.
8161 An error handler has two parts, a @var{condition-name} and a
8162 @var{body}. If the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8163 matches a condition name generated by an error, then the @var{body}
8164 part of the error handler is run.
8165
8166 As you will expect, the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8167 may be either a single condition name or a list of condition names.
8168
8169 Also, a complete @code{condition-case} expression may contain more
8170 than one error handler. When an error occurs, the first applicable
8171 handler is run.
8172
8173 Lastly, the first argument to the @code{condition-case} expression,
8174 the @var{var} argument, is sometimes bound to a variable that
8175 contains information about the error. However, if that argument is
8176 nil, as is the case in @code{kill-region}, that information is
8177 discarded.
8178
8179 @need 1200
8180 In brief, in the @code{kill-region} function, the code
8181 @code{condition-case} works like this:
8182
8183 @smallexample
8184 @group
8185 @var{If no errors}, @var{run only this code}
8186 @var{but}, @var{if errors}, @var{run this other code}.
8187 @end group
8188 @end smallexample
8189
8190 @ignore
8191 2006 Oct 24
8192 In Emacs 22,
8193 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
8194 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
8195 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
8196 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
8197
8198 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
8199 this is line 8054
8200 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar} includes line 8350
8201 @end ignore
8202
8203 @node Lisp macro
8204 @subsection Lisp macro
8205 @cindex Macro, lisp
8206 @cindex Lisp macro
8207
8208 The part of the @code{condition-case} expression that is evaluated in
8209 the expectation that all goes well has a @code{when}. The code uses
8210 @code{when} to determine whether the @code{string} variable points to
8211 text that exists.
8212
8213 A @code{when} expression is simply a programmers' convenience. It is
8214 an @code{if} without the possibility of an else clause. In your mind,
8215 you can replace @code{when} with @code{if} and understand what goes
8216 on. That is what the Lisp interpreter does.
8217
8218 Technically speaking, @code{when} is a Lisp macro. A Lisp macro
8219 enables you to define new control constructs and other language
8220 features. It tells the interpreter how to compute another Lisp
8221 expression which will in turn compute the value. In this case, the
8222 ``other expression'' is an @code{if} expression.
8223
8224 The @code{kill-region} function definition also has an @code{unless}
8225 macro; it is the converse of @code{when}. The @code{unless} macro is
8226 an @code{if} without a then clause
8227
8228 For more about Lisp macros, see @ref{Macros, , Macros, elisp, The GNU
8229 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. The C programming language also
8230 provides macros. These are different, but also useful.
8231
8232 @ignore
8233 We will briefly look at C macros in
8234 @ref{Digression into C}.
8235 @end ignore
8236
8237 @need 1200
8238 Regarding the @code{when} macro, in the @code{condition-case}
8239 expression, when the string has content, then another conditional
8240 expression is executed. This is an @code{if} with both a then-part
8241 and an else-part.
8242
8243 @smallexample
8244 @group
8245 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8246 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8247 (kill-new string nil yank-handler))
8248 @end group
8249 @end smallexample
8250
8251 The then-part is evaluated if the previous command was another call to
8252 @code{kill-region}; if not, the else-part is evaluated.
8253
8254 @code{yank-handler} is an optional argument to @code{kill-region} that
8255 tells the @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new} functions how deal
8256 with properties added to the text, such as ``bold'' or ``italics''.
8257
8258 @code{last-command} is a variable that comes with Emacs that we have
8259 not seen before. Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs
8260 sets the value of @code{last-command} to the previous command.
8261
8262 @need 1200
8263 In this segment of the definition, the @code{if} expression checks
8264 whether the previous command was @code{kill-region}. If it was,
8265
8266 @smallexample
8267 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8268 @end smallexample
8269
8270 @noindent
8271 concatenates a copy of the newly clipped text to the just previously
8272 clipped text in the kill ring.
8273
8274 @node copy-region-as-kill
8275 @section @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8276 @findex copy-region-as-kill
8277 @findex nthcdr
8278
8279 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function copies a region of text from a
8280 buffer and (via either @code{kill-append} or @code{kill-new}) saves it
8281 in the @code{kill-ring}.
8282
8283 If you call @code{copy-region-as-kill} immediately after a
8284 @code{kill-region} command, Emacs appends the newly copied text to the
8285 previously copied text. This means that if you yank back the text, you
8286 get it all, from both this and the previous operation. On the other
8287 hand, if some other command precedes the @code{copy-region-as-kill},
8288 the function copies the text into a separate entry in the kill ring.
8289
8290 @menu
8291 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
8292 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
8293 @end menu
8294
8295 @ifnottex
8296 @node Complete copy-region-as-kill
8297 @unnumberedsubsec The complete @code{copy-region-as-kill} function definition
8298 @end ifnottex
8299
8300 @need 1200
8301 Here is the complete text of the version 22 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8302 function:
8303
8304 @smallexample
8305 @group
8306 (defun copy-region-as-kill (beg end)
8307 "Save the region as if killed, but don't kill it.
8308 In Transient Mark mode, deactivate the mark.
8309 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, also save the text for a window
8310 system cut and paste."
8311 (interactive "r")
8312 @end group
8313 @group
8314 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8315 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8316 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8317 @end group
8318 @group
8319 (if transient-mark-mode
8320 (setq deactivate-mark t))
8321 nil)
8322 @end group
8323 @end smallexample
8324
8325 @need 800
8326 As usual, this function can be divided into its component parts:
8327
8328 @smallexample
8329 @group
8330 (defun copy-region-as-kill (@var{argument-list})
8331 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
8332 (interactive "r")
8333 @var{body}@dots{})
8334 @end group
8335 @end smallexample
8336
8337 The arguments are @code{beg} and @code{end} and the function is
8338 interactive with @code{"r"}, so the two arguments must refer to the
8339 beginning and end of the region. If you have been reading through this
8340 document from the beginning, understanding these parts of a function is
8341 almost becoming routine.
8342
8343 The documentation is somewhat confusing unless you remember that the
8344 word ``kill'' has a meaning different from usual. The ``Transient Mark''
8345 and @code{interprogram-cut-function} comments explain certain
8346 side-effects.
8347
8348 After you once set a mark, a buffer always contains a region. If you
8349 wish, you can use Transient Mark mode to highlight the region
8350 temporarily. (No one wants to highlight the region all the time, so
8351 Transient Mark mode highlights it only at appropriate times. Many
8352 people turn off Transient Mark mode, so the region is never
8353 highlighted.)
8354
8355 Also, a windowing system allows you to copy, cut, and paste among
8356 different programs. In the X windowing system, for example, the
8357 @code{interprogram-cut-function} function is @code{x-select-text},
8358 which works with the windowing system's equivalent of the Emacs kill
8359 ring.
8360
8361 The body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function starts with an
8362 @code{if} clause. What this clause does is distinguish between two
8363 different situations: whether or not this command is executed
8364 immediately after a previous @code{kill-region} command. In the first
8365 case, the new region is appended to the previously copied text.
8366 Otherwise, it is inserted into the beginning of the kill ring as a
8367 separate piece of text from the previous piece.
8368
8369 The last two lines of the function prevent the region from lighting up
8370 if Transient Mark mode is turned on.
8371
8372 The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill} merits discussion in detail.
8373
8374 @node copy-region-as-kill body
8375 @subsection The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8376
8377 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function works in much the same way as
8378 the @code{kill-region} function. Both are written so that two or more
8379 kills in a row combine their text into a single entry. If you yank
8380 back the text from the kill ring, you get it all in one piece.
8381 Moreover, kills that kill forward from the current position of the
8382 cursor are added to the end of the previously copied text and commands
8383 that copy text backwards add it to the beginning of the previously
8384 copied text. This way, the words in the text stay in the proper
8385 order.
8386
8387 Like @code{kill-region}, the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function makes
8388 use of the @code{last-command} variable that keeps track of the
8389 previous Emacs command.
8390
8391 @menu
8392 * last-command & this-command::
8393 * kill-append function::
8394 * kill-new function::
8395 @end menu
8396
8397 @ifnottex
8398 @node last-command & this-command
8399 @unnumberedsubsubsec @code{last-command} and @code{this-command}
8400 @end ifnottex
8401
8402 Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs sets the value of
8403 @code{this-command} to the function being executed (which in this case
8404 would be @code{copy-region-as-kill}). At the same time, Emacs sets
8405 the value of @code{last-command} to the previous value of
8406 @code{this-command}.
8407
8408 In the first part of the body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8409 function, an @code{if} expression determines whether the value of
8410 @code{last-command} is @code{kill-region}. If so, the then-part of
8411 the @code{if} expression is evaluated; it uses the @code{kill-append}
8412 function to concatenate the text copied at this call to the function
8413 with the text already in the first element (the @sc{car}) of the kill
8414 ring. On the other hand, if the value of @code{last-command} is not
8415 @code{kill-region}, then the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function
8416 attaches a new element to the kill ring using the @code{kill-new}
8417 function.
8418
8419 @need 1250
8420 The @code{if} expression reads as follows; it uses @code{eq}:
8421
8422 @smallexample
8423 @group
8424 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8425 ;; @r{then-part}
8426 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8427 ;; @r{else-part}
8428 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8429 @end group
8430 @end smallexample
8431
8432 @findex filter-buffer-substring
8433 (The @code{filter-buffer-substring} function returns a filtered
8434 substring of the buffer, if any. Optionally---the arguments are not
8435 here, so neither is done---the function may delete the initial text or
8436 return the text without its properties; this function is a replacement
8437 for the older @code{buffer-substring} function, which came before text
8438 properties were implemented.)
8439
8440 @findex eq @r{(example of use)}
8441 @noindent
8442 The @code{eq} function tests whether its first argument is the same Lisp
8443 object as its second argument. The @code{eq} function is similar to the
8444 @code{equal} function in that it is used to test for equality, but
8445 differs in that it determines whether two representations are actually
8446 the same object inside the computer, but with different names.
8447 @code{equal} determines whether the structure and contents of two
8448 expressions are the same.
8449
8450 If the previous command was @code{kill-region}, then the Emacs Lisp
8451 interpreter calls the @code{kill-append} function
8452
8453 @node kill-append function
8454 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-append} function
8455 @findex kill-append
8456
8457 @need 800
8458 The @code{kill-append} function looks like this:
8459
8460 @c in GNU Emacs 22
8461 @smallexample
8462 @group
8463 (defun kill-append (string before-p &optional yank-handler)
8464 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8465 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8466 @dots{} "
8467 (let* ((cur (car kill-ring)))
8468 (kill-new (if before-p (concat string cur) (concat cur string))
8469 (or (= (length cur) 0)
8470 (equal yank-handler
8471 (get-text-property 0 'yank-handler cur)))
8472 yank-handler)))
8473 @end group
8474 @end smallexample
8475
8476 @ignore
8477 was:
8478 (defun kill-append (string before-p)
8479 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8480 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8481 If `interprogram-cut-function' is set, pass the resulting kill to
8482 it."
8483 (kill-new (if before-p
8484 (concat string (car kill-ring))
8485 (concat (car kill-ring) string))
8486 t))
8487 @end ignore
8488
8489 @noindent
8490 The @code{kill-append} function is fairly straightforward. It uses
8491 the @code{kill-new} function, which we will discuss in more detail in
8492 a moment.
8493
8494 (Also, the function provides an optional argument called
8495 @code{yank-handler}; when invoked, this argument tells the function
8496 how to deal with properties added to the text, such as ``bold'' or
8497 ``italics''.)
8498
8499 @c !!! bug in GNU Emacs 22 version of kill-append ?
8500 It has a @code{let*} function to set the value of the first element of
8501 the kill ring to @code{cur}. (I do not know why the function does not
8502 use @code{let} instead; only one value is set in the expression.
8503 Perhaps this is a bug that produces no problems?)
8504
8505 Consider the conditional that is one of the two arguments to
8506 @code{kill-new}. It uses @code{concat} to concatenate the new text to
8507 the @sc{car} of the kill ring. Whether it prepends or appends the
8508 text depends on the results of an @code{if} expression:
8509
8510 @smallexample
8511 @group
8512 (if before-p ; @r{if-part}
8513 (concat string cur) ; @r{then-part}
8514 (concat cur string)) ; @r{else-part}
8515 @end group
8516 @end smallexample
8517
8518 @noindent
8519 If the region being killed is before the region that was killed in the
8520 last command, then it should be prepended before the material that was
8521 saved in the previous kill; and conversely, if the killed text follows
8522 what was just killed, it should be appended after the previous text.
8523 The @code{if} expression depends on the predicate @code{before-p} to
8524 decide whether the newly saved text should be put before or after the
8525 previously saved text.
8526
8527 The symbol @code{before-p} is the name of one of the arguments to
8528 @code{kill-append}. When the @code{kill-append} function is
8529 evaluated, it is bound to the value returned by evaluating the actual
8530 argument. In this case, this is the expression @code{(< end beg)}.
8531 This expression does not directly determine whether the killed text in
8532 this command is located before or after the kill text of the last
8533 command; what it does is determine whether the value of the variable
8534 @code{end} is less than the value of the variable @code{beg}. If it
8535 is, it means that the user is most likely heading towards the
8536 beginning of the buffer. Also, the result of evaluating the predicate
8537 expression, @code{(< end beg)}, will be true and the text will be
8538 prepended before the previous text. On the other hand, if the value of
8539 the variable @code{end} is greater than the value of the variable
8540 @code{beg}, the text will be appended after the previous text.
8541
8542 @need 800
8543 When the newly saved text will be prepended, then the string with the new
8544 text will be concatenated before the old text:
8545
8546 @smallexample
8547 (concat string cur)
8548 @end smallexample
8549
8550 @need 1200
8551 @noindent
8552 But if the text will be appended, it will be concatenated
8553 after the old text:
8554
8555 @smallexample
8556 (concat cur string))
8557 @end smallexample
8558
8559 To understand how this works, we first need to review the
8560 @code{concat} function. The @code{concat} function links together or
8561 unites two strings of text. The result is a string. For example:
8562
8563 @smallexample
8564 @group
8565 (concat "abc" "def")
8566 @result{} "abcdef"
8567 @end group
8568
8569 @group
8570 (concat "new "
8571 (car '("first element" "second element")))
8572 @result{} "new first element"
8573
8574 (concat (car
8575 '("first element" "second element")) " modified")
8576 @result{} "first element modified"
8577 @end group
8578 @end smallexample
8579
8580 We can now make sense of @code{kill-append}: it modifies the contents
8581 of the kill ring. The kill ring is a list, each element of which is
8582 saved text. The @code{kill-append} function uses the @code{kill-new}
8583 function which in turn uses the @code{setcar} function.
8584
8585 @node kill-new function
8586 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-new} function
8587 @findex kill-new
8588
8589 @need 1200
8590 In version 22 the @code{kill-new} function looks like this:
8591
8592 @smallexample
8593 @group
8594 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace yank-handler)
8595 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8596 Set `kill-ring-yank-pointer' to point to it.
8597
8598 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8599 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8600 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list.
8601 @dots{}"
8602 @end group
8603 @group
8604 (if (> (length string) 0)
8605 (if yank-handler
8606 (put-text-property 0 (length string)
8607 'yank-handler yank-handler string))
8608 (if yank-handler
8609 (signal 'args-out-of-range
8610 (list string "yank-handler specified for empty string"))))
8611 @end group
8612 @group
8613 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8614 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8615 @end group
8616 @group
8617 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8618 (setcar kill-ring string)
8619 (push string kill-ring)
8620 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8621 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8622 @end group
8623 @group
8624 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8625 (if interprogram-cut-function
8626 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8627 @end group
8628 @end smallexample
8629 @ignore
8630 was:
8631 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace)
8632 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8633 Set the kill-ring-yank pointer to point to it.
8634 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8635 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8636 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list."
8637 (and (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8638 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8639 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8640 (setcar kill-ring string)
8641 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8642 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8643 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8644 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8645 (if interprogram-cut-function
8646 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8647 @end ignore
8648
8649 (Notice that the function is not interactive.)
8650
8651 As usual, we can look at this function in parts.
8652
8653 The function definition has an optional @code{yank-handler} argument,
8654 which when invoked tells the function how to deal with properties
8655 added to the text, such as ``bold'' or ``italics''. We will skip that.
8656
8657 @need 1200
8658 The first line of the documentation makes sense:
8659
8660 @smallexample
8661 Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8662 @end smallexample
8663
8664 @noindent
8665 Let's skip over the rest of the documentation for the moment.
8666
8667 @noindent
8668 Also, let's skip over the initial @code{if} expression and those lines
8669 of code involving @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu}. We will explain
8670 them below.
8671
8672 @need 1200
8673 The critical lines are these:
8674
8675 @smallexample
8676 @group
8677 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8678 ;; @r{then}
8679 (setcar kill-ring string)
8680 @end group
8681 @group
8682 ;; @r{else}
8683 (push string kill-ring)
8684 @end group
8685 @group
8686 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8687 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8688 ;; @r{avoid overly long kill ring}
8689 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8690 @end group
8691 @group
8692 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8693 (if interprogram-cut-function
8694 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8695 @end group
8696 @end smallexample
8697
8698 The conditional test is @w{@code{(and replace kill-ring)}}.
8699 This will be true when two conditions are met: the kill ring has
8700 something in it, and the @code{replace} variable is true.
8701
8702 @need 1250
8703 When the @code{kill-append} function sets @code{replace} to be true
8704 and when the kill ring has at least one item in it, the @code{setcar}
8705 expression is executed:
8706
8707 @smallexample
8708 (setcar kill-ring string)
8709 @end smallexample
8710
8711 The @code{setcar} function actually changes the first element of the
8712 @code{kill-ring} list to the value of @code{string}. It replaces the
8713 first element.
8714
8715 @need 1250
8716 On the other hand, if the kill ring is empty, or replace is false, the
8717 else-part of the condition is executed:
8718
8719 @smallexample
8720 (push string kill-ring)
8721 @end smallexample
8722
8723 @noindent
8724 @need 1250
8725 @code{push} puts its first argument onto the second. It is similar to
8726 the older
8727
8728 @smallexample
8729 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8730 @end smallexample
8731
8732 @noindent
8733 @need 1250
8734 or the newer
8735
8736 @smallexample
8737 (add-to-list kill-ring string)
8738 @end smallexample
8739
8740 @noindent
8741 When it is false, the expression first constructs a new version of the
8742 kill ring by prepending @code{string} to the existing kill ring as a
8743 new element (that is what the @code{push} does). Then it executes a
8744 second @code{if} clause. This second @code{if} clause keeps the kill
8745 ring from growing too long.
8746
8747 Let's look at these two expressions in order.
8748
8749 The @code{push} line of the else-part sets the new value of the kill
8750 ring to what results from adding the string being killed to the old
8751 kill ring.
8752
8753 We can see how this works with an example.
8754
8755 @need 800
8756 First,
8757
8758 @smallexample
8759 (setq example-list '("here is a clause" "another clause"))
8760 @end smallexample
8761
8762 @need 1200
8763 @noindent
8764 After evaluating this expression with @kbd{C-x C-e}, you can evaluate
8765 @code{example-list} and see what it returns:
8766
8767 @smallexample
8768 @group
8769 example-list
8770 @result{} ("here is a clause" "another clause")
8771 @end group
8772 @end smallexample
8773
8774 @need 1200
8775 @noindent
8776 Now, we can add a new element on to this list by evaluating the
8777 following expression:
8778 @findex push, @r{example}
8779
8780 @smallexample
8781 (push "a third clause" example-list)
8782 @end smallexample
8783
8784 @need 800
8785 @noindent
8786 When we evaluate @code{example-list}, we find its value is:
8787
8788 @smallexample
8789 @group
8790 example-list
8791 @result{} ("a third clause" "here is a clause" "another clause")
8792 @end group
8793 @end smallexample
8794
8795 @noindent
8796 Thus, the third clause is added to the list by @code{push}.
8797
8798 @need 1200
8799 Now for the second part of the @code{if} clause. This expression
8800 keeps the kill ring from growing too long. It looks like this:
8801
8802 @smallexample
8803 @group
8804 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8805 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil))
8806 @end group
8807 @end smallexample
8808
8809 The code checks whether the length of the kill ring is greater than
8810 the maximum permitted length. This is the value of
8811 @code{kill-ring-max} (which is 60, by default). If the length of the
8812 kill ring is too long, then this code sets the last element of the
8813 kill ring to @code{nil}. It does this by using two functions,
8814 @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr}.
8815
8816 We looked at @code{setcdr} earlier (@pxref{setcdr, , @code{setcdr}}).
8817 It sets the @sc{cdr} of a list, just as @code{setcar} sets the
8818 @sc{car} of a list. In this case, however, @code{setcdr} will not be
8819 setting the @sc{cdr} of the whole kill ring; the @code{nthcdr}
8820 function is used to cause it to set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last
8821 element of the kill ring---this means that since the @sc{cdr} of the
8822 next to last element is the last element of the kill ring, it will set
8823 the last element of the kill ring.
8824
8825 @findex nthcdr, @r{example}
8826 The @code{nthcdr} function works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a
8827 list---it takes the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr}
8828 @dots{} It does this @var{N} times and returns the results.
8829 (@xref{nthcdr, , @code{nthcdr}}.)
8830
8831 @findex setcdr, @r{example}
8832 Thus, if we had a four element list that was supposed to be three
8833 elements long, we could set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last element
8834 to @code{nil}, and thereby shorten the list. (If you set the last
8835 element to some other value than @code{nil}, which you could do, then
8836 you would not have shortened the list. @xref{setcdr, ,
8837 @code{setcdr}}.)
8838
8839 You can see shortening by evaluating the following three expressions
8840 in turn. First set the value of @code{trees} to @code{(maple oak pine
8841 birch)}, then set the @sc{cdr} of its second @sc{cdr} to @code{nil}
8842 and then find the value of @code{trees}:
8843
8844 @smallexample
8845 @group
8846 (setq trees '(maple oak pine birch))
8847 @result{} (maple oak pine birch)
8848 @end group
8849
8850 @group
8851 (setcdr (nthcdr 2 trees) nil)
8852 @result{} nil
8853
8854 trees
8855 @result{} (maple oak pine)
8856 @end group
8857 @end smallexample
8858
8859 @noindent
8860 (The value returned by the @code{setcdr} expression is @code{nil} since
8861 that is what the @sc{cdr} is set to.)
8862
8863 To repeat, in @code{kill-new}, the @code{nthcdr} function takes the
8864 @sc{cdr} a number of times that is one less than the maximum permitted
8865 size of the kill ring and @code{setcdr} sets the @sc{cdr} of that
8866 element (which will be the rest of the elements in the kill ring) to
8867 @code{nil}. This prevents the kill ring from growing too long.
8868
8869 @need 800
8870 The next to last expression in the @code{kill-new} function is
8871
8872 @smallexample
8873 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8874 @end smallexample
8875
8876 The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a global variable that is set to be
8877 the @code{kill-ring}.
8878
8879 Even though the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is called a
8880 @samp{pointer}, it is a variable just like the kill ring. However, the
8881 name has been chosen to help humans understand how the variable is used.
8882
8883 @need 1200
8884 Now, to return to an early expression in the body of the function:
8885
8886 @smallexample
8887 @group
8888 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8889 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8890 @end group
8891 @end smallexample
8892
8893 @noindent
8894 It starts with an @code{if} expression
8895
8896 In this case, the expression tests first to see whether
8897 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} exists as a function, and if so,
8898 calls it. The @code{fboundp} function returns true if the symbol it
8899 is testing has a function definition that ``is not void''. If the
8900 symbol's function definition were void, we would receive an error
8901 message, as we did when we created errors intentionally (@pxref{Making
8902 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}).
8903
8904 @noindent
8905 The then-part contains an expression whose first element is the
8906 function @code{and}.
8907
8908 @findex and
8909 The @code{and} special form evaluates each of its arguments until one
8910 of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in which case the
8911 @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if none of the
8912 arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value resulting from
8913 evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such a value is not
8914 @code{nil}, it is considered true in Emacs Lisp.) In other words, an
8915 @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its arguments
8916 are true. (@xref{Second Buffer Related Review}.)
8917
8918 The expression determines whether the second argument to
8919 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is true or not.
8920 @ignore
8921 ;; If we're supposed to be extending an existing string, and that
8922 ;; string really is at the front of the menu, then update it in place.
8923 @end ignore
8924
8925 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is one of the functions that make it
8926 possible to use the ``Select and Paste'' menu in the Edit item of a menu
8927 bar; using a mouse, you can look at the various pieces of text you
8928 have saved and select one piece to paste.
8929
8930 The last expression in the @code{kill-new} function adds the newly
8931 copied string to whatever facility exists for copying and pasting
8932 among different programs running in a windowing system. In the X
8933 Windowing system, for example, the @code{x-select-text} function takes
8934 the string and stores it in memory operated by X@. You can paste the
8935 string in another program, such as an Xterm.
8936
8937 @need 1200
8938 The expression looks like this:
8939
8940 @smallexample
8941 @group
8942 (if interprogram-cut-function
8943 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8944 @end group
8945 @end smallexample
8946
8947 If an @code{interprogram-cut-function} exists, then Emacs executes
8948 @code{funcall}, which in turn calls its first argument as a function
8949 and passes the remaining arguments to it. (Incidentally, as far as I
8950 can see, this @code{if} expression could be replaced by an @code{and}
8951 expression similar to the one in the first part of the function.)
8952
8953 We are not going to discuss windowing systems and other programs
8954 further, but merely note that this is a mechanism that enables GNU
8955 Emacs to work easily and well with other programs.
8956
8957 This code for placing text in the kill ring, either concatenated with
8958 an existing element or as a new element, leads us to the code for
8959 bringing back text that has been cut out of the buffer---the yank
8960 commands. However, before discussing the yank commands, it is better
8961 to learn how lists are implemented in a computer. This will make
8962 clear such mysteries as the use of the term ``pointer''. But before
8963 that, we will digress into C.
8964
8965 @ignore
8966 @c is this true in Emacs 22? Does not seems to be
8967
8968 (If the @w{@code{(< end beg))}}
8969 expression is true, @code{kill-append} prepends the string to the just
8970 previously clipped text. For a detailed discussion, see
8971 @ref{kill-append function, , The @code{kill-append} function}.)
8972
8973 If you then yank back the text, i.e., ``paste'' it, you get both
8974 pieces of text at once. That way, if you delete two words in a row,
8975 and then yank them back, you get both words, in their proper order,
8976 with one yank. (The @w{@code{(< end beg))}} expression makes sure the
8977 order is correct.)
8978
8979 On the other hand, if the previous command is not @code{kill-region},
8980 then the @code{kill-new} function is called, which adds the text to
8981 the kill ring as the latest item, and sets the
8982 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable to point to it.
8983 @end ignore
8984 @ignore
8985
8986 @c Evidently, changed for Emacs 22. The zap-to-char command does not
8987 @c use the delete-and-extract-region function
8988
8989 2006 Oct 26, the Digression into C is now OK but should come after
8990 copy-region-as-kill and filter-buffer-substring
8991
8992 2006 Oct 24
8993 In Emacs 22,
8994 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
8995 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
8996 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
8997 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
8998
8999 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9000 @end ignore
9001
9002 @node Digression into C
9003 @section Digression into C
9004 @findex delete-and-extract-region
9005 @cindex C, a digression into
9006 @cindex Digression into C
9007
9008 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function (@pxref{copy-region-as-kill, ,
9009 @code{copy-region-as-kill}}) uses the @code{filter-buffer-substring}
9010 function, which in turn uses the @code{delete-and-extract-region}
9011 function. It removes the contents of a region and you cannot get them
9012 back.
9013
9014 Unlike the other code discussed here, the
9015 @code{delete-and-extract-region} function is not written in Emacs
9016 Lisp; it is written in C and is one of the primitives of the GNU Emacs
9017 system. Since it is very simple, I will digress briefly from Lisp and
9018 describe it here.
9019
9020 @c GNU Emacs 24 in src/editfns.c
9021 @c the DEFUN for delete-and-extract-region
9022
9023 @need 1500
9024 Like many of the other Emacs primitives,
9025 @code{delete-and-extract-region} is written as an instance of a C
9026 macro, a macro being a template for code. The complete macro looks
9027 like this:
9028
9029 @smallexample
9030 @group
9031 DEFUN ("delete-and-extract-region", Fdelete_and_extract_region,
9032 Sdelete_and_extract_region, 2, 2, 0,
9033 doc: /* Delete the text between START and END and return it. */)
9034 (Lisp_Object start, Lisp_Object end)
9035 @{
9036 validate_region (&start, &end);
9037 if (XINT (start) == XINT (end))
9038 return empty_unibyte_string;
9039 return del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9040 @}
9041 @end group
9042 @end smallexample
9043
9044 Without going into the details of the macro writing process, let me
9045 point out that this macro starts with the word @code{DEFUN}. The word
9046 @code{DEFUN} was chosen since the code serves the same purpose as
9047 @code{defun} does in Lisp. (The @code{DEFUN} C macro is defined in
9048 @file{emacs/src/lisp.h}.)
9049
9050 The word @code{DEFUN} is followed by seven parts inside of
9051 parentheses:
9052
9053 @itemize @bullet
9054 @item
9055 The first part is the name given to the function in Lisp,
9056 @code{delete-and-extract-region}.
9057
9058 @item
9059 The second part is the name of the function in C,
9060 @code{Fdelete_and_extract_region}. By convention, it starts with
9061 @samp{F}. Since C does not use hyphens in names, underscores are used
9062 instead.
9063
9064 @item
9065 The third part is the name for the C constant structure that records
9066 information on this function for internal use. It is the name of the
9067 function in C but begins with an @samp{S} instead of an @samp{F}.
9068
9069 @item
9070 The fourth and fifth parts specify the minimum and maximum number of
9071 arguments the function can have. This function demands exactly 2
9072 arguments.
9073
9074 @item
9075 The sixth part is nearly like the argument that follows the
9076 @code{interactive} declaration in a function written in Lisp: a letter
9077 followed, perhaps, by a prompt. The only difference from the Lisp is
9078 when the macro is called with no arguments. Then you write a @code{0}
9079 (which is a ``null string''), as in this macro.
9080
9081 If you were to specify arguments, you would place them between
9082 quotation marks. The C macro for @code{goto-char} includes
9083 @code{"NGoto char: "} in this position to indicate that the function
9084 expects a raw prefix, in this case, a numerical location in a buffer,
9085 and provides a prompt.
9086
9087 @item
9088 The seventh part is a documentation string, just like the one for a
9089 function written in Emacs Lisp. This is written as a C comment. (When
9090 you build Emacs, the program @command{lib-src/make-docfile} extracts
9091 these comments and uses them to make the ``real'' documentation.)
9092 @end itemize
9093
9094 @need 1200
9095 In a C macro, the formal parameters come next, with a statement of
9096 what kind of object they are, followed by what might be called the ``body''
9097 of the macro. For @code{delete-and-extract-region} the ``body''
9098 consists of the following four lines:
9099
9100 @smallexample
9101 @group
9102 validate_region (&start, &end);
9103 if (XINT (start) == XINT (end))
9104 return empty_unibyte_string;
9105 return del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9106 @end group
9107 @end smallexample
9108
9109 The @code{validate_region} function checks whether the values
9110 passed as the beginning and end of the region are the proper type and
9111 are within range. If the beginning and end positions are the same,
9112 then return an empty string.
9113
9114 The @code{del_range_1} function actually deletes the text. It is a
9115 complex function we will not look into. It updates the buffer and
9116 does other things. However, it is worth looking at the two arguments
9117 passed to @code{del_range}. These are @w{@code{XINT (start)}} and
9118 @w{@code{XINT (end)}}.
9119
9120 As far as the C language is concerned, @code{start} and @code{end} are
9121 two integers that mark the beginning and end of the region to be
9122 deleted@footnote{More precisely, and requiring more expert knowledge
9123 to understand, the two integers are of type @code{Lisp_Object}, which can
9124 also be a C union instead of an integer type.}.
9125
9126 In early versions of Emacs, these two numbers were thirty-two bits
9127 long, but the code is slowly being generalized to handle other
9128 lengths. Three of the available bits are used to specify the type of
9129 information; the remaining bits are used as ``content''.
9130
9131 @samp{XINT} is a C macro that extracts the relevant number from the
9132 longer collection of bits; the three other bits are discarded.
9133
9134 @need 800
9135 The command in @code{delete-and-extract-region} looks like this:
9136
9137 @smallexample
9138 del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9139 @end smallexample
9140
9141 @noindent
9142 It deletes the region between the beginning position, @code{start},
9143 and the ending position, @code{end}.
9144
9145 From the point of view of the person writing Lisp, Emacs is all very
9146 simple; but hidden underneath is a great deal of complexity to make it
9147 all work.
9148
9149 @node defvar
9150 @section Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9151 @findex defvar
9152 @cindex Initializing a variable
9153 @cindex Variable initialization
9154
9155 @ignore
9156 2006 Oct 24
9157 In Emacs 22,
9158 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
9159 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
9160 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
9161 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
9162
9163 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9164
9165 @end ignore
9166
9167 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function is written in Emacs Lisp. Two
9168 functions within it, @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new}, copy a
9169 region in a buffer and save it in a variable called the
9170 @code{kill-ring}. This section describes how the @code{kill-ring}
9171 variable is created and initialized using the @code{defvar} special
9172 form.
9173
9174 (Again we note that the term @code{kill-ring} is a misnomer. The text
9175 that is clipped out of the buffer can be brought back; it is not a ring
9176 of corpses, but a ring of resurrectable text.)
9177
9178 In Emacs Lisp, a variable such as the @code{kill-ring} is created and
9179 given an initial value by using the @code{defvar} special form. The
9180 name comes from ``define variable''.
9181
9182 The @code{defvar} special form is similar to @code{setq} in that it sets
9183 the value of a variable. It is unlike @code{setq} in two ways: first,
9184 it only sets the value of the variable if the variable does not already
9185 have a value. If the variable already has a value, @code{defvar} does
9186 not override the existing value. Second, @code{defvar} has a
9187 documentation string.
9188
9189 (There is a related macro, @code{defcustom}, designed for variables
9190 that people customize. It has more features than @code{defvar}.
9191 (@xref{defcustom, , Setting Variables with @code{defcustom}}.)
9192
9193 @menu
9194 * See variable current value::
9195 * defvar and asterisk::
9196 @end menu
9197
9198 @ifnottex
9199 @node See variable current value
9200 @unnumberedsubsec Seeing the Current Value of a Variable
9201 @end ifnottex
9202
9203 You can see the current value of a variable, any variable, by using
9204 the @code{describe-variable} function, which is usually invoked by
9205 typing @kbd{C-h v}. If you type @kbd{C-h v} and then @code{kill-ring}
9206 (followed by @key{RET}) when prompted, you will see what is in your
9207 current kill ring---this may be quite a lot! Conversely, if you have
9208 been doing nothing this Emacs session except read this document, you
9209 may have nothing in it. Also, you will see the documentation for
9210 @code{kill-ring}:
9211
9212 @smallexample
9213 @group
9214 Documentation:
9215 List of killed text sequences.
9216 Since the kill ring is supposed to interact nicely with cut-and-paste
9217 facilities offered by window systems, use of this variable should
9218 @end group
9219 @group
9220 interact nicely with `interprogram-cut-function' and
9221 `interprogram-paste-function'. The functions `kill-new',
9222 `kill-append', and `current-kill' are supposed to implement this
9223 interaction; you may want to use them instead of manipulating the kill
9224 ring directly.
9225 @end group
9226 @end smallexample
9227
9228 @need 800
9229 The kill ring is defined by a @code{defvar} in the following way:
9230
9231 @smallexample
9232 @group
9233 (defvar kill-ring nil
9234 "List of killed text sequences.
9235 @dots{}")
9236 @end group
9237 @end smallexample
9238
9239 @noindent
9240 In this variable definition, the variable is given an initial value of
9241 @code{nil}, which makes sense, since if you have saved nothing, you want
9242 nothing back if you give a @code{yank} command. The documentation
9243 string is written just like the documentation string of a @code{defun}.
9244 As with the documentation string of the @code{defun}, the first line of
9245 the documentation should be a complete sentence, since some commands,
9246 like @code{apropos}, print only the first line of documentation.
9247 Succeeding lines should not be indented; otherwise they look odd when
9248 you use @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}).
9249
9250 @node defvar and asterisk
9251 @subsection @code{defvar} and an asterisk
9252 @findex defvar @r{for a user customizable variable}
9253 @findex defvar @r{with an asterisk}
9254
9255 In the past, Emacs used the @code{defvar} special form both for
9256 internal variables that you would not expect a user to change and for
9257 variables that you do expect a user to change. Although you can still
9258 use @code{defvar} for user customizable variables, please use
9259 @code{defcustom} instead, since it provides a path into
9260 the Customization commands. (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables
9261 using @code{defcustom}}.)
9262
9263 When you specified a variable using the @code{defvar} special form,
9264 you could distinguish a variable that a user might want to change from
9265 others by typing an asterisk, @samp{*}, in the first column of its
9266 documentation string. For example:
9267
9268 @smallexample
9269 @group
9270 (defvar shell-command-default-error-buffer nil
9271 "*Buffer name for ‘shell-command’ @dots{} error output.
9272 @dots{} ")
9273 @end group
9274 @end smallexample
9275
9276 @findex set-variable
9277 @noindent
9278 You could (and still can) use the @code{set-variable} command to
9279 change the value of @code{shell-command-default-error-buffer}
9280 temporarily. However, options set using @code{set-variable} are set
9281 only for the duration of your editing session. The new values are not
9282 saved between sessions. Each time Emacs starts, it reads the original
9283 value, unless you change the value within your @file{.emacs} file,
9284 either by setting it manually or by using @code{customize}.
9285 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
9286
9287 For me, the major use of the @code{set-variable} command is to suggest
9288 variables that I might want to set in my @file{.emacs} file. There
9289 are now more than 700 such variables, far too many to remember
9290 readily. Fortunately, you can press @key{TAB} after calling the
9291 @code{M-x set-variable} command to see the list of variables.
9292 (@xref{Examining, , Examining and Setting Variables, emacs,
9293 The GNU Emacs Manual}.)
9294
9295 @need 1250
9296 @node cons & search-fwd Review
9297 @section Review
9298
9299 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
9300
9301 @table @code
9302 @item car
9303 @itemx cdr
9304 @code{car} returns the first element of a list; @code{cdr} returns the
9305 second and subsequent elements of a list.
9306
9307 @need 1250
9308 For example:
9309
9310 @smallexample
9311 @group
9312 (car '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9313 @result{} 1
9314 (cdr '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9315 @result{} (2 3 4 5 6 7)
9316 @end group
9317 @end smallexample
9318
9319 @item cons
9320 @code{cons} constructs a list by prepending its first argument to its
9321 second argument.
9322
9323 @need 1250
9324 For example:
9325
9326 @smallexample
9327 @group
9328 (cons 1 '(2 3 4))
9329 @result{} (1 2 3 4)
9330 @end group
9331 @end smallexample
9332
9333 @item funcall
9334 @code{funcall} evaluates its first argument as a function. It passes
9335 its remaining arguments to its first argument.
9336
9337 @item nthcdr
9338 Return the result of taking @sc{cdr} @var{n} times on a list.
9339 @iftex
9340 The
9341 @tex
9342 $n^{th}$
9343 @end tex
9344 @code{cdr}.
9345 @end iftex
9346 The ``rest of the rest'', as it were.
9347
9348 @need 1250
9349 For example:
9350
9351 @smallexample
9352 @group
9353 (nthcdr 3 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9354 @result{} (4 5 6 7)
9355 @end group
9356 @end smallexample
9357
9358 @item setcar
9359 @itemx setcdr
9360 @code{setcar} changes the first element of a list; @code{setcdr}
9361 changes the second and subsequent elements of a list.
9362
9363 @need 1250
9364 For example:
9365
9366 @smallexample
9367 @group
9368 (setq triple '(1 2 3))
9369
9370 (setcar triple '37)
9371
9372 triple
9373 @result{} (37 2 3)
9374
9375 (setcdr triple '("foo" "bar"))
9376
9377 triple
9378 @result{} (37 "foo" "bar")
9379 @end group
9380 @end smallexample
9381
9382 @item progn
9383 Evaluate each argument in sequence and then return the value of the
9384 last.
9385
9386 @need 1250
9387 For example:
9388
9389 @smallexample
9390 @group
9391 (progn 1 2 3 4)
9392 @result{} 4
9393 @end group
9394 @end smallexample
9395
9396 @item save-restriction
9397 Record whatever narrowing is in effect in the current buffer, if any,
9398 and restore that narrowing after evaluating the arguments.
9399
9400 @item search-forward
9401 Search for a string, and if the string is found, move point. With a
9402 regular expression, use the similar @code{re-search-forward}.
9403 (@xref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, for an
9404 explanation of regular expression patterns and searches.)
9405
9406 @need 1250
9407 @noindent
9408 @code{search-forward} and @code{re-search-forward} take four
9409 arguments:
9410
9411 @enumerate
9412 @item
9413 The string or regular expression to search for.
9414
9415 @item
9416 Optionally, the limit of the search.
9417
9418 @item
9419 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
9420 error message.
9421
9422 @item
9423 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
9424 search goes backwards.
9425 @end enumerate
9426
9427 @item kill-region
9428 @itemx delete-and-extract-region
9429 @itemx copy-region-as-kill
9430
9431 @code{kill-region} cuts the text between point and mark from the
9432 buffer and stores that text in the kill ring, so you can get it back
9433 by yanking.
9434
9435 @code{copy-region-as-kill} copies the text between point and mark into
9436 the kill ring, from which you can get it by yanking. The function
9437 does not cut or remove the text from the buffer.
9438 @end table
9439
9440 @code{delete-and-extract-region} removes the text between point and
9441 mark from the buffer and throws it away. You cannot get it back.
9442 (This is not an interactive command.)
9443
9444 @need 1500
9445 @node search Exercises
9446 @section Searching Exercises
9447
9448 @itemize @bullet
9449 @item
9450 Write an interactive function that searches for a string. If the
9451 search finds the string, leave point after it and display a message
9452 that says ``Found!''. (Do not use @code{search-forward} for the name
9453 of this function; if you do, you will overwrite the existing version of
9454 @code{search-forward} that comes with Emacs. Use a name such as
9455 @code{test-search} instead.)
9456
9457 @item
9458 Write a function that prints the third element of the kill ring in the
9459 echo area, if any; if the kill ring does not contain a third element,
9460 print an appropriate message.
9461 @end itemize
9462
9463 @node List Implementation
9464 @chapter How Lists are Implemented
9465 @cindex Lists in a computer
9466
9467 In Lisp, atoms are recorded in a straightforward fashion; if the
9468 implementation is not straightforward in practice, it is, nonetheless,
9469 straightforward in theory. The atom @samp{rose}, for example, is
9470 recorded as the four contiguous letters @samp{r}, @samp{o}, @samp{s},
9471 @samp{e}. A list, on the other hand, is kept differently. The mechanism
9472 is equally simple, but it takes a moment to get used to the idea. A
9473 list is kept using a series of pairs of pointers. In the series, the
9474 first pointer in each pair points to an atom or to another list, and the
9475 second pointer in each pair points to the next pair, or to the symbol
9476 @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9477
9478 A pointer itself is quite simply the electronic address of what is
9479 pointed to. Hence, a list is kept as a series of electronic addresses.
9480
9481 @menu
9482 * Lists diagrammed::
9483 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
9484 * List Exercise::
9485 @end menu
9486
9487 @ifnottex
9488 @node Lists diagrammed
9489 @unnumberedsec Lists diagrammed
9490 @end ifnottex
9491
9492 For example, the list @code{(rose violet buttercup)} has three elements,
9493 @samp{rose}, @samp{violet}, and @samp{buttercup}. In the computer, the
9494 electronic address of @samp{rose} is recorded in a segment of computer
9495 memory along with the address that gives the electronic address of where
9496 the atom @samp{violet} is located; and that address (the one that tells
9497 where @samp{violet} is located) is kept along with an address that tells
9498 where the address for the atom @samp{buttercup} is located.
9499
9500 @need 1200
9501 This sounds more complicated than it is and is easier seen in a diagram:
9502
9503 @c clear print-postscript-figures
9504 @c !!! cons-cell-diagram #1
9505 @ifnottex
9506 @smallexample
9507 @group
9508 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9509 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9510 | | |
9511 | | |
9512 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9513 @end group
9514 @end smallexample
9515 @end ifnottex
9516 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9517 @sp 1
9518 @tex
9519 @center @image{cons-1}
9520 @end tex
9521 @sp 1
9522 @end ifset
9523 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9524 @iftex
9525 @smallexample
9526 @group
9527 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9528 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9529 | | |
9530 | | |
9531 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9532 @end group
9533 @end smallexample
9534 @end iftex
9535 @end ifclear
9536
9537 @noindent
9538 In the diagram, each box represents a word of computer memory that
9539 holds a Lisp object, usually in the form of a memory address. The boxes,
9540 i.e., the addresses, are in pairs. Each arrow points to what the address
9541 is the address of, either an atom or another pair of addresses. The
9542 first box is the electronic address of @samp{rose} and the arrow points
9543 to @samp{rose}; the second box is the address of the next pair of boxes,
9544 the first part of which is the address of @samp{violet} and the second
9545 part of which is the address of the next pair. The very last box
9546 points to the symbol @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9547
9548 @need 1200
9549 When a variable is set to a list with a function such as @code{setq},
9550 it stores the address of the first box in the variable. Thus,
9551 evaluation of the expression
9552
9553 @smallexample
9554 (setq bouquet '(rose violet buttercup))
9555 @end smallexample
9556
9557 @need 1250
9558 @noindent
9559 creates a situation like this:
9560
9561 @c cons-cell-diagram #2
9562 @ifnottex
9563 @smallexample
9564 @group
9565 bouquet
9566 |
9567 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9568 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9569 | | |
9570 | | |
9571 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9572 @end group
9573 @end smallexample
9574 @end ifnottex
9575 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9576 @sp 1
9577 @tex
9578 @center @image{cons-2}
9579 @end tex
9580 @sp 1
9581 @end ifset
9582 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9583 @iftex
9584 @smallexample
9585 @group
9586 bouquet
9587 |
9588 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9589 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9590 | | |
9591 | | |
9592 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9593 @end group
9594 @end smallexample
9595 @end iftex
9596 @end ifclear
9597
9598 @noindent
9599 In this example, the symbol @code{bouquet} holds the address of the first
9600 pair of boxes.
9601
9602 @need 1200
9603 This same list can be illustrated in a different sort of box notation
9604 like this:
9605
9606 @c cons-cell-diagram #2a
9607 @ifnottex
9608 @smallexample
9609 @group
9610 bouquet
9611 |
9612 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9613 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9614 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9615 | | | | | | | cup | |
9616 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9617 @end group
9618 @end smallexample
9619 @end ifnottex
9620 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9621 @sp 1
9622 @tex
9623 @center @image{cons-2a}
9624 @end tex
9625 @sp 1
9626 @end ifset
9627 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9628 @iftex
9629 @smallexample
9630 @group
9631 bouquet
9632 |
9633 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9634 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9635 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9636 | | | | | | | cup | |
9637 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9638 @end group
9639 @end smallexample
9640 @end iftex
9641 @end ifclear
9642
9643 (Symbols consist of more than pairs of addresses, but the structure of
9644 a symbol is made up of addresses. Indeed, the symbol @code{bouquet}
9645 consists of a group of address-boxes, one of which is the address of
9646 the printed word @samp{bouquet}, a second of which is the address of a
9647 function definition attached to the symbol, if any, a third of which
9648 is the address of the first pair of address-boxes for the list
9649 @code{(rose violet buttercup)}, and so on. Here we are showing that
9650 the symbol's third address-box points to the first pair of
9651 address-boxes for the list.)
9652
9653 If a symbol is set to the @sc{cdr} of a list, the list itself is not
9654 changed; the symbol simply has an address further down the list. (In
9655 the jargon, @sc{car} and @sc{cdr} are ``non-destructive''.) Thus,
9656 evaluation of the following expression
9657
9658 @smallexample
9659 (setq flowers (cdr bouquet))
9660 @end smallexample
9661
9662 @need 800
9663 @noindent
9664 produces this:
9665
9666 @c cons-cell-diagram #3
9667 @ifnottex
9668 @sp 1
9669 @smallexample
9670 @group
9671 bouquet flowers
9672 | |
9673 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9674 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9675 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9676 | | |
9677 | | |
9678 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9679 @end group
9680 @end smallexample
9681 @sp 1
9682 @end ifnottex
9683 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9684 @sp 1
9685 @tex
9686 @center @image{cons-3}
9687 @end tex
9688 @sp 1
9689 @end ifset
9690 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9691 @iftex
9692 @sp 1
9693 @smallexample
9694 @group
9695 bouquet flowers
9696 | |
9697 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9698 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9699 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9700 | | |
9701 | | |
9702 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9703 @end group
9704 @end smallexample
9705 @sp 1
9706 @end iftex
9707 @end ifclear
9708
9709 @noindent
9710 The value of @code{flowers} is @code{(violet buttercup)}, which is
9711 to say, the symbol @code{flowers} holds the address of the pair of
9712 address-boxes, the first of which holds the address of @code{violet},
9713 and the second of which holds the address of @code{buttercup}.
9714
9715 A pair of address-boxes is called a @dfn{cons cell} or @dfn{dotted
9716 pair}. @xref{Cons Cell Type, , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
9717 Reference Manual}, and @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted Pair
9718 Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
9719 information about cons cells and dotted pairs.
9720
9721 @need 1200
9722 The function @code{cons} adds a new pair of addresses to the front of
9723 a series of addresses like that shown above. For example, evaluating
9724 the expression
9725
9726 @smallexample
9727 (setq bouquet (cons 'lily bouquet))
9728 @end smallexample
9729
9730 @need 1500
9731 @noindent
9732 produces:
9733
9734 @c cons-cell-diagram #4
9735 @ifnottex
9736 @sp 1
9737 @smallexample
9738 @group
9739 bouquet flowers
9740 | |
9741 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9742 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9743 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9744 | | | |
9745 | | | |
9746 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9747 @end group
9748 @end smallexample
9749 @sp 1
9750 @end ifnottex
9751 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9752 @sp 1
9753 @tex
9754 @center @image{cons-4}
9755 @end tex
9756 @sp 1
9757 @end ifset
9758 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9759 @iftex
9760 @sp 1
9761 @smallexample
9762 @group
9763 bouquet flowers
9764 | |
9765 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9766 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9767 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9768 | | | |
9769 | | | |
9770 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9771 @end group
9772 @end smallexample
9773 @sp 1
9774 @end iftex
9775 @end ifclear
9776
9777 @need 1200
9778 @noindent
9779 However, this does not change the value of the symbol
9780 @code{flowers}, as you can see by evaluating the following,
9781
9782 @smallexample
9783 (eq (cdr (cdr bouquet)) flowers)
9784 @end smallexample
9785
9786 @noindent
9787 which returns @code{t} for true.
9788
9789 Until it is reset, @code{flowers} still has the value
9790 @code{(violet buttercup)}; that is, it has the address of the cons
9791 cell whose first address is of @code{violet}. Also, this does not
9792 alter any of the pre-existing cons cells; they are all still there.
9793
9794 Thus, in Lisp, to get the @sc{cdr} of a list, you just get the address
9795 of the next cons cell in the series; to get the @sc{car} of a list,
9796 you get the address of the first element of the list; to @code{cons} a
9797 new element on a list, you add a new cons cell to the front of the list.
9798 That is all there is to it! The underlying structure of Lisp is
9799 brilliantly simple!
9800
9801 And what does the last address in a series of cons cells refer to? It
9802 is the address of the empty list, of @code{nil}.
9803
9804 In summary, when a Lisp variable is set to a value, it is provided with
9805 the address of the list to which the variable refers.
9806
9807 @node Symbols as Chest
9808 @section Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
9809 @cindex Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
9810 @cindex Chest of Drawers, metaphor for a symbol
9811 @cindex Drawers, Chest of, metaphor for a symbol
9812
9813 In an earlier section, I suggested that you might imagine a symbol as
9814 being a chest of drawers. The function definition is put in one
9815 drawer, the value in another, and so on. What is put in the drawer
9816 holding the value can be changed without affecting the contents of the
9817 drawer holding the function definition, and vice versa.
9818
9819 Actually, what is put in each drawer is the address of the value or
9820 function definition. It is as if you found an old chest in the attic,
9821 and in one of its drawers you found a map giving you directions to
9822 where the buried treasure lies.
9823
9824 (In addition to its name, symbol definition, and variable value, a
9825 symbol has a ``drawer'' for a @dfn{property list} which can be used to
9826 record other information. Property lists are not discussed here; see
9827 @ref{Property Lists, , Property Lists, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
9828 Reference Manual}.)
9829
9830 @need 1500
9831 Here is a fanciful representation:
9832
9833 @c chest-of-drawers diagram
9834 @ifnottex
9835 @sp 1
9836 @smallexample
9837 @group
9838 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
9839
9840 __ o0O0o __
9841 / \
9842 ---------------------
9843 | directions to | [map to]
9844 | symbol name | bouquet
9845 | |
9846 +---------------------+
9847 | directions to |
9848 | symbol definition | [none]
9849 | |
9850 +---------------------+
9851 | directions to | [map to]
9852 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
9853 | |
9854 +---------------------+
9855 | directions to |
9856 | property list | [not described here]
9857 | |
9858 +---------------------+
9859 |/ \|
9860 @end group
9861 @end smallexample
9862 @sp 1
9863 @end ifnottex
9864 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9865 @sp 1
9866 @tex
9867 @center @image{drawers}
9868 @end tex
9869 @sp 1
9870 @end ifset
9871 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9872 @iftex
9873 @sp 1
9874 @smallexample
9875 @group
9876 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
9877
9878 __ o0O0o __
9879 / \
9880 ---------------------
9881 | directions to | [map to]
9882 | symbol name | bouquet
9883 | |
9884 +---------------------+
9885 | directions to |
9886 | symbol definition | [none]
9887 | |
9888 +---------------------+
9889 | directions to | [map to]
9890 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
9891 | |
9892 +---------------------+
9893 | directions to |
9894 | property list | [not described here]
9895 | |
9896 +---------------------+
9897 |/ \|
9898 @end group
9899 @end smallexample
9900 @sp 1
9901 @end iftex
9902 @end ifclear
9903
9904 @node List Exercise
9905 @section Exercise
9906
9907 Set @code{flowers} to @code{violet} and @code{buttercup}. Cons two
9908 more flowers on to this list and set this new list to
9909 @code{more-flowers}. Set the @sc{car} of @code{flowers} to a fish.
9910 What does the @code{more-flowers} list now contain?
9911
9912 @node Yanking
9913 @chapter Yanking Text Back
9914 @findex yank
9915 @cindex Text retrieval
9916 @cindex Retrieving text
9917 @cindex Pasting text
9918
9919 Whenever you cut text out of a buffer with a ``kill'' command in GNU Emacs,
9920 you can bring it back with a ``yank'' command. The text that is cut out of
9921 the buffer is put in the kill ring and the yank commands insert the
9922 appropriate contents of the kill ring back into a buffer (not necessarily
9923 the original buffer).
9924
9925 A simple @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}) command inserts the first item from
9926 the kill ring into the current buffer. If the @kbd{C-y} command is
9927 followed immediately by @kbd{M-y}, the first element is replaced by
9928 the second element. Successive @kbd{M-y} commands replace the second
9929 element with the third, fourth, or fifth element, and so on. When the
9930 last element in the kill ring is reached, it is replaced by the first
9931 element and the cycle is repeated. (Thus the kill ring is called a
9932 ``ring'' rather than just a ``list''. However, the actual data structure
9933 that holds the text is a list.
9934 @xref{Kill Ring, , Handling the Kill Ring}, for the details of how the
9935 list is handled as a ring.)
9936
9937 @menu
9938 * Kill Ring Overview::
9939 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
9940 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
9941 @end menu
9942
9943 @node Kill Ring Overview
9944 @section Kill Ring Overview
9945 @cindex Kill ring overview
9946
9947 The kill ring is a list of textual strings. This is what it looks like:
9948
9949 @smallexample
9950 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
9951 @end smallexample
9952
9953 If this were the contents of my kill ring and I pressed @kbd{C-y}, the
9954 string of characters saying @samp{some text} would be inserted in this
9955 buffer where my cursor is located.
9956
9957 The @code{yank} command is also used for duplicating text by copying it.
9958 The copied text is not cut from the buffer, but a copy of it is put on the
9959 kill ring and is inserted by yanking it back.
9960
9961 Three functions are used for bringing text back from the kill ring:
9962 @code{yank}, which is usually bound to @kbd{C-y}; @code{yank-pop},
9963 which is usually bound to @kbd{M-y}; and @code{rotate-yank-pointer},
9964 which is used by the two other functions.
9965
9966 These functions refer to the kill ring through a variable called the
9967 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. Indeed, the insertion code for both the
9968 @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} functions is:
9969
9970 @smallexample
9971 (insert (car kill-ring-yank-pointer))
9972 @end smallexample
9973
9974 @noindent
9975 (Well, no more. In GNU Emacs 22, the function has been replaced by
9976 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{insert-for-yank-1}
9977 repetitively for each @code{yank-handler} segment. In turn,
9978 @code{insert-for-yank-1} strips text properties from the inserted text
9979 according to @code{yank-excluded-properties}. Otherwise, it is just
9980 like @code{insert}. We will stick with plain @code{insert} since it
9981 is easier to understand.)
9982
9983 To begin to understand how @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} work, it is
9984 first necessary to look at the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
9985
9986 @node kill-ring-yank-pointer
9987 @section The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} Variable
9988
9989 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a variable, just as @code{kill-ring} is
9990 a variable. It points to something by being bound to the value of what
9991 it points to, like any other Lisp variable.
9992
9993 @need 1000
9994 Thus, if the value of the kill ring is:
9995
9996 @smallexample
9997 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
9998 @end smallexample
9999
10000 @need 1250
10001 @noindent
10002 and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points to the second clause, the
10003 value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is:
10004
10005 @smallexample
10006 ("a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10007 @end smallexample
10008
10009 As explained in the previous chapter (@pxref{List Implementation}), the
10010 computer does not keep two different copies of the text being pointed to
10011 by both the @code{kill-ring} and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. The
10012 words ``a different piece of text'' and ``yet more text'' are not
10013 duplicated. Instead, the two Lisp variables point to the same pieces of
10014 text. Here is a diagram:
10015
10016 @c cons-cell-diagram #5
10017 @ifnottex
10018 @smallexample
10019 @group
10020 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10021 | |
10022 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10023 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10024 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10025 | | |
10026 | | |
10027 | | --> "yet more text"
10028 | |
10029 | --> "a different piece of text"
10030 |
10031 --> "some text"
10032 @end group
10033 @end smallexample
10034 @sp 1
10035 @end ifnottex
10036 @ifset print-postscript-figures
10037 @sp 1
10038 @tex
10039 @center @image{cons-5}
10040 @end tex
10041 @sp 1
10042 @end ifset
10043 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
10044 @iftex
10045 @smallexample
10046 @group
10047 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10048 | |
10049 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10050 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10051 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10052 | | |
10053 | | |
10054 | | --> "yet more text"
10055 | |
10056 | --> "a different piece of text
10057 |
10058 --> "some text"
10059 @end group
10060 @end smallexample
10061 @sp 1
10062 @end iftex
10063 @end ifclear
10064
10065 Both the variable @code{kill-ring} and the variable
10066 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} are pointers. But the kill ring itself is
10067 usually described as if it were actually what it is composed of. The
10068 @code{kill-ring} is spoken of as if it were the list rather than that it
10069 points to the list. Conversely, the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is
10070 spoken of as pointing to a list.
10071
10072 These two ways of talking about the same thing sound confusing at first but
10073 make sense on reflection. The kill ring is generally thought of as the
10074 complete structure of data that holds the information of what has recently
10075 been cut out of the Emacs buffers. The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
10076 on the other hand, serves to indicate---that is, to ``point to''---that part
10077 of the kill ring of which the first element (the @sc{car}) will be
10078 inserted.
10079
10080 @ignore
10081 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{kill-new} function calls
10082
10083 @code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)}
10084
10085 (defun rotate-yank-pointer (arg)
10086 "Rotate the yanking point in the kill ring.
10087 With argument, rotate that many kills forward (or backward, if negative)."
10088 (interactive "p")
10089 (current-kill arg))
10090
10091 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
10092 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
10093 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
10094 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
10095 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
10096 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
10097 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
10098 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
10099 interprogram-paste-function
10100 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
10101 (if interprogram-paste
10102 (progn
10103 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
10104 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
10105 ;; selection, with identical text.
10106 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
10107 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
10108 interprogram-paste)
10109 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
10110 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
10111 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
10112 (length kill-ring))
10113 kill-ring)))
10114 (or do-not-move
10115 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
10116 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
10117
10118 @end ignore
10119
10120 @need 1500
10121 @node yank nthcdr Exercises
10122 @section Exercises with @code{yank} and @code{nthcdr}
10123
10124 @itemize @bullet
10125 @item
10126 Using @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}), look at the value of
10127 your kill ring. Add several items to your kill ring; look at its
10128 value again. Using @kbd{M-y} (@code{yank-pop)}, move all the way
10129 around the kill ring. How many items were in your kill ring? Find
10130 the value of @code{kill-ring-max}. Was your kill ring full, or could
10131 you have kept more blocks of text within it?
10132
10133 @item
10134 Using @code{nthcdr} and @code{car}, construct a series of expressions
10135 to return the first, second, third, and fourth elements of a list.
10136 @end itemize
10137
10138 @node Loops & Recursion
10139 @chapter Loops and Recursion
10140 @cindex Loops and recursion
10141 @cindex Recursion and loops
10142 @cindex Repetition (loops)
10143
10144 Emacs Lisp has two primary ways to cause an expression, or a series of
10145 expressions, to be evaluated repeatedly: one uses a @code{while}
10146 loop, and the other uses @dfn{recursion}.
10147
10148 Repetition can be very valuable. For example, to move forward four
10149 sentences, you need only write a program that will move forward one
10150 sentence and then repeat the process four times. Since a computer does
10151 not get bored or tired, such repetitive action does not have the
10152 deleterious effects that excessive or the wrong kinds of repetition can
10153 have on humans.
10154
10155 People mostly write Emacs Lisp functions using @code{while} loops and
10156 their kin; but you can use recursion, which provides a very powerful
10157 way to think about and then to solve problems@footnote{You can write
10158 recursive functions to be frugal or wasteful of mental or computer
10159 resources; as it happens, methods that people find easy---that are
10160 frugal of ``mental resources''---sometimes use considerable computer
10161 resources. Emacs was designed to run on machines that we now consider
10162 limited and its default settings are conservative. You may want to
10163 increase the values of @code{max-specpdl-size} and
10164 @code{max-lisp-eval-depth}. In my @file{.emacs} file, I set them to
10165 15 and 30 times their default value.}.
10166
10167 @menu
10168 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
10169 * dolist dotimes::
10170 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
10171 * Looping exercise::
10172 @end menu
10173
10174 @node while
10175 @section @code{while}
10176 @cindex Loops
10177 @findex while
10178
10179 The @code{while} special form tests whether the value returned by
10180 evaluating its first argument is true or false. This is similar to what
10181 the Lisp interpreter does with an @code{if}; what the interpreter does
10182 next, however, is different.
10183
10184 In a @code{while} expression, if the value returned by evaluating the
10185 first argument is false, the Lisp interpreter skips the rest of the
10186 expression (the @dfn{body} of the expression) and does not evaluate it.
10187 However, if the value is true, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the body
10188 of the expression and then again tests whether the first argument to
10189 @code{while} is true or false. If the value returned by evaluating the
10190 first argument is again true, the Lisp interpreter again evaluates the
10191 body of the expression.
10192
10193 @need 1200
10194 The template for a @code{while} expression looks like this:
10195
10196 @smallexample
10197 @group
10198 (while @var{true-or-false-test}
10199 @var{body}@dots{})
10200 @end group
10201 @end smallexample
10202
10203 @menu
10204 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
10205 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
10206 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
10207 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
10208 * Incrementing Loop Details::
10209 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
10210 @end menu
10211
10212 @ifnottex
10213 @node Looping with while
10214 @unnumberedsubsec Looping with @code{while}
10215 @end ifnottex
10216
10217 So long as the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} expression
10218 returns a true value when it is evaluated, the body is repeatedly
10219 evaluated. This process is called a loop since the Lisp interpreter
10220 repeats the same thing again and again, like an airplane doing a loop.
10221 When the result of evaluating the true-or-false-test is false, the
10222 Lisp interpreter does not evaluate the rest of the @code{while}
10223 expression and ``exits the loop''.
10224
10225 Clearly, if the value returned by evaluating the first argument to
10226 @code{while} is always true, the body following will be evaluated
10227 again and again @dots{} and again @dots{} forever. Conversely, if the
10228 value returned is never true, the expressions in the body will never
10229 be evaluated. The craft of writing a @code{while} loop consists of
10230 choosing a mechanism such that the true-or-false-test returns true
10231 just the number of times that you want the subsequent expressions to
10232 be evaluated, and then have the test return false.
10233
10234 The value returned by evaluating a @code{while} is the value of the
10235 true-or-false-test. An interesting consequence of this is that a
10236 @code{while} loop that evaluates without error will return @code{nil}
10237 or false regardless of whether it has looped 1 or 100 times or none at
10238 all. A @code{while} expression that evaluates successfully never
10239 returns a true value! What this means is that @code{while} is always
10240 evaluated for its side effects, which is to say, the consequences of
10241 evaluating the expressions within the body of the @code{while} loop.
10242 This makes sense. It is not the mere act of looping that is desired,
10243 but the consequences of what happens when the expressions in the loop
10244 are repeatedly evaluated.
10245
10246 @node Loop Example
10247 @subsection A @code{while} Loop and a List
10248
10249 A common way to control a @code{while} loop is to test whether a list
10250 has any elements. If it does, the loop is repeated; but if it does not,
10251 the repetition is ended. Since this is an important technique, we will
10252 create a short example to illustrate it.
10253
10254 A simple way to test whether a list has elements is to evaluate the
10255 list: if it has no elements, it is an empty list and will return the
10256 empty list, @code{()}, which is a synonym for @code{nil} or false. On
10257 the other hand, a list with elements will return those elements when it
10258 is evaluated. Since Emacs Lisp considers as true any value that is not
10259 @code{nil}, a list that returns elements will test true in a
10260 @code{while} loop.
10261
10262 @need 1200
10263 For example, you can set the variable @code{empty-list} to @code{nil} by
10264 evaluating the following @code{setq} expression:
10265
10266 @smallexample
10267 (setq empty-list ())
10268 @end smallexample
10269
10270 @noindent
10271 After evaluating the @code{setq} expression, you can evaluate the
10272 variable @code{empty-list} in the usual way, by placing the cursor after
10273 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}; @code{nil} will appear in your
10274 echo area:
10275
10276 @smallexample
10277 empty-list
10278 @end smallexample
10279
10280 On the other hand, if you set a variable to be a list with elements, the
10281 list will appear when you evaluate the variable, as you can see by
10282 evaluating the following two expressions:
10283
10284 @smallexample
10285 @group
10286 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10287
10288 animals
10289 @end group
10290 @end smallexample
10291
10292 Thus, to create a @code{while} loop that tests whether there are any
10293 items in the list @code{animals}, the first part of the loop will be
10294 written like this:
10295
10296 @smallexample
10297 @group
10298 (while animals
10299 @dots{}
10300 @end group
10301 @end smallexample
10302
10303 @noindent
10304 When the @code{while} tests its first argument, the variable
10305 @code{animals} is evaluated. It returns a list. So long as the list
10306 has elements, the @code{while} considers the results of the test to be
10307 true; but when the list is empty, it considers the results of the test
10308 to be false.
10309
10310 To prevent the @code{while} loop from running forever, some mechanism
10311 needs to be provided to empty the list eventually. An oft-used
10312 technique is to have one of the subsequent forms in the @code{while}
10313 expression set the value of the list to be the @sc{cdr} of the list.
10314 Each time the @code{cdr} function is evaluated, the list will be made
10315 shorter, until eventually only the empty list will be left. At this
10316 point, the test of the @code{while} loop will return false, and the
10317 arguments to the @code{while} will no longer be evaluated.
10318
10319 For example, the list of animals bound to the variable @code{animals}
10320 can be set to be the @sc{cdr} of the original list with the
10321 following expression:
10322
10323 @smallexample
10324 (setq animals (cdr animals))
10325 @end smallexample
10326
10327 @noindent
10328 If you have evaluated the previous expressions and then evaluate this
10329 expression, you will see @code{(giraffe lion tiger)} appear in the echo
10330 area. If you evaluate the expression again, @code{(lion tiger)} will
10331 appear in the echo area. If you evaluate it again and yet again,
10332 @code{(tiger)} appears and then the empty list, shown by @code{nil}.
10333
10334 A template for a @code{while} loop that uses the @code{cdr} function
10335 repeatedly to cause the true-or-false-test eventually to test false
10336 looks like this:
10337
10338 @smallexample
10339 @group
10340 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
10341 @var{body}@dots{}
10342 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
10343 @end group
10344 @end smallexample
10345
10346 This test and use of @code{cdr} can be put together in a function that
10347 goes through a list and prints each element of the list on a line of its
10348 own.
10349
10350 @node print-elements-of-list
10351 @subsection An Example: @code{print-elements-of-list}
10352 @findex print-elements-of-list
10353
10354 The @code{print-elements-of-list} function illustrates a @code{while}
10355 loop with a list.
10356
10357 @cindex @file{*scratch*} buffer
10358 The function requires several lines for its output. If you are
10359 reading this in a recent instance of GNU Emacs,
10360 @c GNU Emacs 21, GNU Emacs 22, or a later version,
10361 you can evaluate the following expression inside of Info, as usual.
10362
10363 If you are using an earlier version of Emacs, you need to copy the
10364 necessary expressions to your @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate
10365 them there. This is because the echo area had only one line in the
10366 earlier versions.
10367
10368 You can copy the expressions by marking the beginning of the region
10369 with @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}), moving the cursor to
10370 the end of the region and then copying the region using @kbd{M-w}
10371 (@code{kill-ring-save}, which calls @code{copy-region-as-kill} and
10372 then provides visual feedback). In the @file{*scratch*}
10373 buffer, you can yank the expressions back by typing @kbd{C-y}
10374 (@code{yank}).
10375
10376 After you have copied the expressions to the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
10377 evaluate each expression in turn. Be sure to evaluate the last
10378 expression, @code{(print-elements-of-list animals)}, by typing
10379 @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}, that is, by giving an argument to
10380 @code{eval-last-sexp}. This will cause the result of the evaluation
10381 to be printed in the @file{*scratch*} buffer instead of being printed
10382 in the echo area. (Otherwise you will see something like this in your
10383 echo area: @code{^Jgazelle^J^Jgiraffe^J^Jlion^J^Jtiger^Jnil}, in which
10384 each @samp{^J} stands for a ``newline''.)
10385
10386 @need 1500
10387 In a recent instance of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate these expressions
10388 directly in the Info buffer, and the echo area will grow to show the
10389 results.
10390
10391 @smallexample
10392 @group
10393 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10394
10395 (defun print-elements-of-list (list)
10396 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own."
10397 (while list
10398 (print (car list))
10399 (setq list (cdr list))))
10400
10401 (print-elements-of-list animals)
10402 @end group
10403 @end smallexample
10404
10405 @need 1200
10406 @noindent
10407 When you evaluate the three expressions in sequence, you will see
10408 this:
10409
10410 @smallexample
10411 @group
10412 gazelle
10413
10414 giraffe
10415
10416 lion
10417
10418 tiger
10419 nil
10420 @end group
10421 @end smallexample
10422
10423 Each element of the list is printed on a line of its own (that is what
10424 the function @code{print} does) and then the value returned by the
10425 function is printed. Since the last expression in the function is the
10426 @code{while} loop, and since @code{while} loops always return
10427 @code{nil}, a @code{nil} is printed after the last element of the list.
10428
10429 @node Incrementing Loop
10430 @subsection A Loop with an Incrementing Counter
10431
10432 A loop is not useful unless it stops when it ought. Besides
10433 controlling a loop with a list, a common way of stopping a loop is to
10434 write the first argument as a test that returns false when the correct
10435 number of repetitions are complete. This means that the loop must
10436 have a counter---an expression that counts how many times the loop
10437 repeats itself.
10438
10439 @ifnottex
10440 @node Incrementing Loop Details
10441 @unnumberedsubsec Details of an Incrementing Loop
10442 @end ifnottex
10443
10444 The test for a loop with an incrementing counter can be an expression
10445 such as @code{(< count desired-number)} which returns @code{t} for
10446 true if the value of @code{count} is less than the
10447 @code{desired-number} of repetitions and @code{nil} for false if the
10448 value of @code{count} is equal to or is greater than the
10449 @code{desired-number}. The expression that increments the count can
10450 be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq count (1+ count))}, where
10451 @code{1+} is a built-in function in Emacs Lisp that adds 1 to its
10452 argument. (The expression @w{@code{(1+ count)}} has the same result
10453 as @w{@code{(+ count 1)}}, but is easier for a human to read.)
10454
10455 @need 1250
10456 The template for a @code{while} loop controlled by an incrementing
10457 counter looks like this:
10458
10459 @smallexample
10460 @group
10461 @var{set-count-to-initial-value}
10462 (while (< count desired-number) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10463 @var{body}@dots{}
10464 (setq count (1+ count))) ; @r{incrementer}
10465 @end group
10466 @end smallexample
10467
10468 @noindent
10469 Note that you need to set the initial value of @code{count}; usually it
10470 is set to 1.
10471
10472 @menu
10473 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
10474 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
10475 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
10476 @end menu
10477
10478 @node Incrementing Example
10479 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with incrementing counter
10480
10481 Suppose you are playing on the beach and decide to make a triangle of
10482 pebbles, putting one pebble in the first row, two in the second row,
10483 three in the third row and so on, like this:
10484
10485 @sp 1
10486 @c pebble diagram
10487 @ifnottex
10488 @smallexample
10489 @group
10490 *
10491 * *
10492 * * *
10493 * * * *
10494 @end group
10495 @end smallexample
10496 @end ifnottex
10497 @iftex
10498 @smallexample
10499 @group
10500 @bullet{}
10501 @bullet{} @bullet{}
10502 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10503 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10504 @end group
10505 @end smallexample
10506 @end iftex
10507 @sp 1
10508
10509 @noindent
10510 (About 2500 years ago, Pythagoras and others developed the beginnings of
10511 number theory by considering questions such as this.)
10512
10513 Suppose you want to know how many pebbles you will need to make a
10514 triangle with 7 rows?
10515
10516 Clearly, what you need to do is add up the numbers from 1 to 7. There
10517 are two ways to do this; start with the smallest number, one, and add up
10518 the list in sequence, 1, 2, 3, 4 and so on; or start with the largest
10519 number and add the list going down: 7, 6, 5, 4 and so on. Because both
10520 mechanisms illustrate common ways of writing @code{while} loops, we will
10521 create two examples, one counting up and the other counting down. In
10522 this first example, we will start with 1 and add 2, 3, 4 and so on.
10523
10524 If you are just adding up a short list of numbers, the easiest way to do
10525 it is to add up all the numbers at once. However, if you do not know
10526 ahead of time how many numbers your list will have, or if you want to be
10527 prepared for a very long list, then you need to design your addition so
10528 that what you do is repeat a simple process many times instead of doing
10529 a more complex process once.
10530
10531 For example, instead of adding up all the pebbles all at once, what you
10532 can do is add the number of pebbles in the first row, 1, to the number
10533 in the second row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to the
10534 third row, 3. Then you can add the number in the fourth row, 4, to the
10535 total of the first three rows; and so on.
10536
10537 The critical characteristic of the process is that each repetitive
10538 action is simple. In this case, at each step we add only two numbers,
10539 the number of pebbles in the row and the total already found. This
10540 process of adding two numbers is repeated again and again until the last
10541 row has been added to the total of all the preceding rows. In a more
10542 complex loop the repetitive action might not be so simple, but it will
10543 be simpler than doing everything all at once.
10544
10545 @node Inc Example parts
10546 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
10547
10548 The preceding analysis gives us the bones of our function definition:
10549 first, we will need a variable that we can call @code{total} that will
10550 be the total number of pebbles. This will be the value returned by
10551 the function.
10552
10553 Second, we know that the function will require an argument: this
10554 argument will be the total number of rows in the triangle. It can be
10555 called @code{number-of-rows}.
10556
10557 Finally, we need a variable to use as a counter. We could call this
10558 variable @code{counter}, but a better name is @code{row-number}. That
10559 is because what the counter does in this function is count rows, and a
10560 program should be written to be as understandable as possible.
10561
10562 When the Lisp interpreter first starts evaluating the expressions in the
10563 function, the value of @code{total} should be set to zero, since we have
10564 not added anything to it. Then the function should add the number of
10565 pebbles in the first row to the total, and then add the number of
10566 pebbles in the second to the total, and then add the number of
10567 pebbles in the third row to the total, and so on, until there are no
10568 more rows left to add.
10569
10570 Both @code{total} and @code{row-number} are used only inside the
10571 function, so they can be declared as local variables with @code{let}
10572 and given initial values. Clearly, the initial value for @code{total}
10573 should be 0. The initial value of @code{row-number} should be 1,
10574 since we start with the first row. This means that the @code{let}
10575 statement will look like this:
10576
10577 @smallexample
10578 @group
10579 (let ((total 0)
10580 (row-number 1))
10581 @var{body}@dots{})
10582 @end group
10583 @end smallexample
10584
10585 After the internal variables are declared and bound to their initial
10586 values, we can begin the @code{while} loop. The expression that serves
10587 as the test should return a value of @code{t} for true so long as the
10588 @code{row-number} is less than or equal to the @code{number-of-rows}.
10589 (If the expression tests true only so long as the row number is less
10590 than the number of rows in the triangle, the last row will never be
10591 added to the total; hence the row number has to be either less than or
10592 equal to the number of rows.)
10593
10594 @need 1500
10595 @findex <= @r{(less than or equal)}
10596 Lisp provides the @code{<=} function that returns true if the value of
10597 its first argument is less than or equal to the value of its second
10598 argument and false otherwise. So the expression that the @code{while}
10599 will evaluate as its test should look like this:
10600
10601 @smallexample
10602 (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10603 @end smallexample
10604
10605 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
10606 of pebbles in a row to the total already found. Since the number of
10607 pebbles in the row is equal to the row number, the total can be found by
10608 adding the row number to the total. (Clearly, in a more complex
10609 situation, the number of pebbles in the row might be related to the row
10610 number in a more complicated way; if this were the case, the row number
10611 would be replaced by the appropriate expression.)
10612
10613 @smallexample
10614 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10615 @end smallexample
10616
10617 @noindent
10618 What this does is set the new value of @code{total} to be equal to the
10619 sum of adding the number of pebbles in the row to the previous total.
10620
10621 After setting the value of @code{total}, the conditions need to be
10622 established for the next repetition of the loop, if there is one. This
10623 is done by incrementing the value of the @code{row-number} variable,
10624 which serves as a counter. After the @code{row-number} variable has
10625 been incremented, the true-or-false-test at the beginning of the
10626 @code{while} loop tests whether its value is still less than or equal to
10627 the value of the @code{number-of-rows} and if it is, adds the new value
10628 of the @code{row-number} variable to the @code{total} of the previous
10629 repetition of the loop.
10630
10631 @need 1200
10632 The built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1+} adds 1 to a number, so the
10633 @code{row-number} variable can be incremented with this expression:
10634
10635 @smallexample
10636 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))
10637 @end smallexample
10638
10639 @node Inc Example altogether
10640 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
10641
10642 We have created the parts for the function definition; now we need to
10643 put them together.
10644
10645 @need 800
10646 First, the contents of the @code{while} expression:
10647
10648 @smallexample
10649 @group
10650 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10651 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10652 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))) ; @r{incrementer}
10653 @end group
10654 @end smallexample
10655
10656 Along with the @code{let} expression varlist, this very nearly
10657 completes the body of the function definition. However, it requires
10658 one final element, the need for which is somewhat subtle.
10659
10660 The final touch is to place the variable @code{total} on a line by
10661 itself after the @code{while} expression. Otherwise, the value returned
10662 by the whole function is the value of the last expression that is
10663 evaluated in the body of the @code{let}, and this is the value
10664 returned by the @code{while}, which is always @code{nil}.
10665
10666 This may not be evident at first sight. It almost looks as if the
10667 incrementing expression is the last expression of the whole function.
10668 But that expression is part of the body of the @code{while}; it is the
10669 last element of the list that starts with the symbol @code{while}.
10670 Moreover, the whole of the @code{while} loop is a list within the body
10671 of the @code{let}.
10672
10673 @need 1250
10674 In outline, the function will look like this:
10675
10676 @smallexample
10677 @group
10678 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
10679 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
10680 (let (@var{varlist})
10681 (while (@var{true-or-false-test})
10682 @var{body-of-while}@dots{} )
10683 @dots{} )) ; @r{Need final expression here.}
10684 @end group
10685 @end smallexample
10686
10687 The result of evaluating the @code{let} is what is going to be returned
10688 by the @code{defun} since the @code{let} is not embedded within any
10689 containing list, except for the @code{defun} as a whole. However, if
10690 the @code{while} is the last element of the @code{let} expression, the
10691 function will always return @code{nil}. This is not what we want!
10692 Instead, what we want is the value of the variable @code{total}. This
10693 is returned by simply placing the symbol as the last element of the list
10694 starting with @code{let}. It gets evaluated after the preceding
10695 elements of the list are evaluated, which means it gets evaluated after
10696 it has been assigned the correct value for the total.
10697
10698 It may be easier to see this by printing the list starting with
10699 @code{let} all on one line. This format makes it evident that the
10700 @var{varlist} and @code{while} expressions are the second and third
10701 elements of the list starting with @code{let}, and the @code{total} is
10702 the last element:
10703
10704 @smallexample
10705 @group
10706 (let (@var{varlist}) (while (@var{true-or-false-test}) @var{body-of-while}@dots{} ) total)
10707 @end group
10708 @end smallexample
10709
10710 @need 1200
10711 Putting everything together, the @code{triangle} function definition
10712 looks like this:
10713
10714 @smallexample
10715 @group
10716 (defun triangle (number-of-rows) ; @r{Version with}
10717 ; @r{ incrementing counter.}
10718 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
10719 The first row has one pebble, the second row two pebbles,
10720 the third row three pebbles, and so on.
10721 The argument is NUMBER-OF-ROWS."
10722 @end group
10723 @group
10724 (let ((total 0)
10725 (row-number 1))
10726 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10727 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10728 (setq row-number (1+ row-number)))
10729 total))
10730 @end group
10731 @end smallexample
10732
10733 @need 1200
10734 After you have installed @code{triangle} by evaluating the function, you
10735 can try it out. Here are two examples:
10736
10737 @smallexample
10738 @group
10739 (triangle 4)
10740
10741 (triangle 7)
10742 @end group
10743 @end smallexample
10744
10745 @noindent
10746 The sum of the first four numbers is 10 and the sum of the first seven
10747 numbers is 28.
10748
10749 @node Decrementing Loop
10750 @subsection Loop with a Decrementing Counter
10751
10752 Another common way to write a @code{while} loop is to write the test
10753 so that it determines whether a counter is greater than zero. So long
10754 as the counter is greater than zero, the loop is repeated. But when
10755 the counter is equal to or less than zero, the loop is stopped. For
10756 this to work, the counter has to start out greater than zero and then
10757 be made smaller and smaller by a form that is evaluated
10758 repeatedly.
10759
10760 The test will be an expression such as @code{(> counter 0)} which
10761 returns @code{t} for true if the value of @code{counter} is greater
10762 than zero, and @code{nil} for false if the value of @code{counter} is
10763 equal to or less than zero. The expression that makes the number
10764 smaller and smaller can be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq
10765 counter (1- counter))}, where @code{1-} is a built-in function in
10766 Emacs Lisp that subtracts 1 from its argument.
10767
10768 @need 1250
10769 The template for a decrementing @code{while} loop looks like this:
10770
10771 @smallexample
10772 @group
10773 (while (> counter 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10774 @var{body}@dots{}
10775 (setq counter (1- counter))) ; @r{decrementer}
10776 @end group
10777 @end smallexample
10778
10779 @menu
10780 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
10781 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
10782 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
10783 @end menu
10784
10785 @node Decrementing Example
10786 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with decrementing counter
10787
10788 To illustrate a loop with a decrementing counter, we will rewrite the
10789 @code{triangle} function so the counter decreases to zero.
10790
10791 This is the reverse of the earlier version of the function. In this
10792 case, to find out how many pebbles are needed to make a triangle with
10793 3 rows, add the number of pebbles in the third row, 3, to the number
10794 in the preceding row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to
10795 the row that precedes them, which is 1.
10796
10797 Likewise, to find the number of pebbles in a triangle with 7 rows, add
10798 the number of pebbles in the seventh row, 7, to the number in the
10799 preceding row, which is 6, and then add the total of those two rows to
10800 the row that precedes them, which is 5, and so on. As in the previous
10801 example, each addition only involves adding two numbers, the total of
10802 the rows already added up and the number of pebbles in the row that is
10803 being added to the total. This process of adding two numbers is
10804 repeated again and again until there are no more pebbles to add.
10805
10806 We know how many pebbles to start with: the number of pebbles in the
10807 last row is equal to the number of rows. If the triangle has seven
10808 rows, the number of pebbles in the last row is 7. Likewise, we know how
10809 many pebbles are in the preceding row: it is one less than the number in
10810 the row.
10811
10812 @node Dec Example parts
10813 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
10814
10815 We start with three variables: the total number of rows in the
10816 triangle; the number of pebbles in a row; and the total number of
10817 pebbles, which is what we want to calculate. These variables can be
10818 named @code{number-of-rows}, @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}, and
10819 @code{total}, respectively.
10820
10821 Both @code{total} and @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} are used only
10822 inside the function and are declared with @code{let}. The initial
10823 value of @code{total} should, of course, be zero. However, the
10824 initial value of @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be equal to
10825 the number of rows in the triangle, since the addition will start with
10826 the longest row.
10827
10828 @need 1250
10829 This means that the beginning of the @code{let} expression will look
10830 like this:
10831
10832 @smallexample
10833 @group
10834 (let ((total 0)
10835 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
10836 @var{body}@dots{})
10837 @end group
10838 @end smallexample
10839
10840 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
10841 of pebbles in a row to the total already found, that is, by repeatedly
10842 evaluating the following expression:
10843
10844 @smallexample
10845 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
10846 @end smallexample
10847
10848 @noindent
10849 After the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is added to the @code{total},
10850 the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be decremented by one, since
10851 the next time the loop repeats, the preceding row will be
10852 added to the total.
10853
10854 The number of pebbles in a preceding row is one less than the number of
10855 pebbles in a row, so the built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1-} can be
10856 used to compute the number of pebbles in the preceding row. This can be
10857 done with the following expression:
10858
10859 @smallexample
10860 @group
10861 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
10862 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row))
10863 @end group
10864 @end smallexample
10865
10866 Finally, we know that the @code{while} loop should stop making repeated
10867 additions when there are no pebbles in a row. So the test for
10868 the @code{while} loop is simply:
10869
10870 @smallexample
10871 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
10872 @end smallexample
10873
10874 @node Dec Example altogether
10875 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
10876
10877 We can put these expressions together to create a function definition
10878 that works. However, on examination, we find that one of the local
10879 variables is unneeded!
10880
10881 @need 1250
10882 The function definition looks like this:
10883
10884 @smallexample
10885 @group
10886 ;;; @r{First subtractive version.}
10887 (defun triangle (number-of-rows)
10888 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
10889 (let ((total 0)
10890 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
10891 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
10892 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
10893 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
10894 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row)))
10895 total))
10896 @end group
10897 @end smallexample
10898
10899 As written, this function works.
10900
10901 However, we do not need @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}.
10902
10903 @cindex Argument as local variable
10904 When the @code{triangle} function is evaluated, the symbol
10905 @code{number-of-rows} will be bound to a number, giving it an initial
10906 value. That number can be changed in the body of the function as if
10907 it were a local variable, without any fear that such a change will
10908 effect the value of the variable outside of the function. This is a
10909 very useful characteristic of Lisp; it means that the variable
10910 @code{number-of-rows} can be used anywhere in the function where
10911 @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is used.
10912
10913 @need 800
10914 Here is a second version of the function written a bit more cleanly:
10915
10916 @smallexample
10917 @group
10918 (defun triangle (number) ; @r{Second version.}
10919 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
10920 (let ((total 0))
10921 (while (> number 0)
10922 (setq total (+ total number))
10923 (setq number (1- number)))
10924 total))
10925 @end group
10926 @end smallexample
10927
10928 In brief, a properly written @code{while} loop will consist of three parts:
10929
10930 @enumerate
10931 @item
10932 A test that will return false after the loop has repeated itself the
10933 correct number of times.
10934
10935 @item
10936 An expression the evaluation of which will return the value desired
10937 after being repeatedly evaluated.
10938
10939 @item
10940 An expression to change the value passed to the true-or-false-test so
10941 that the test returns false after the loop has repeated itself the right
10942 number of times.
10943 @end enumerate
10944
10945 @node dolist dotimes
10946 @section Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
10947
10948 In addition to @code{while}, both @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
10949 provide for looping. Sometimes these are quicker to write than the
10950 equivalent @code{while} loop. Both are Lisp macros. (@xref{Macros, ,
10951 Macros, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. )
10952
10953 @code{dolist} works like a @code{while} loop that ``@sc{cdr}s down a
10954 list'': @code{dolist} automatically shortens the list each time it
10955 loops---takes the @sc{cdr} of the list---and binds the @sc{car} of
10956 each shorter version of the list to the first of its arguments.
10957
10958 @code{dotimes} loops a specific number of times: you specify the number.
10959
10960 @menu
10961 * dolist::
10962 * dotimes::
10963 @end menu
10964
10965 @node dolist
10966 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{dolist} Macro
10967 @findex dolist
10968
10969 Suppose, for example, you want to reverse a list, so that
10970 ``first'' ``second'' ``third'' becomes ``third'' ``second'' ``first''.
10971
10972 @need 1250
10973 In practice, you would use the @code{reverse} function, like this:
10974
10975 @smallexample
10976 @group
10977 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10978
10979 (reverse animals)
10980 @end group
10981 @end smallexample
10982
10983 @need 800
10984 @noindent
10985 Here is how you could reverse the list using a @code{while} loop:
10986
10987 @smallexample
10988 @group
10989 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10990
10991 (defun reverse-list-with-while (list)
10992 "Using while, reverse the order of LIST."
10993 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
10994 (while list
10995 (setq value (cons (car list) value))
10996 (setq list (cdr list)))
10997 value))
10998
10999 (reverse-list-with-while animals)
11000 @end group
11001 @end smallexample
11002
11003 @need 800
11004 @noindent
11005 And here is how you could use the @code{dolist} macro:
11006
11007 @smallexample
11008 @group
11009 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11010
11011 (defun reverse-list-with-dolist (list)
11012 "Using dolist, reverse the order of LIST."
11013 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
11014 (dolist (element list value)
11015 (setq value (cons element value)))))
11016
11017 (reverse-list-with-dolist animals)
11018 @end group
11019 @end smallexample
11020
11021 @need 1250
11022 @noindent
11023 In Info, you can place your cursor after the closing parenthesis of
11024 each expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}; in each case, you should see
11025
11026 @smallexample
11027 (tiger lion giraffe gazelle)
11028 @end smallexample
11029
11030 @noindent
11031 in the echo area.
11032
11033 For this example, the existing @code{reverse} function is obviously best.
11034 The @code{while} loop is just like our first example (@pxref{Loop
11035 Example, , A @code{while} Loop and a List}). The @code{while} first
11036 checks whether the list has elements; if so, it constructs a new list
11037 by adding the first element of the list to the existing list (which in
11038 the first iteration of the loop is @code{nil}). Since the second
11039 element is prepended in front of the first element, and the third
11040 element is prepended in front of the second element, the list is reversed.
11041
11042 In the expression using a @code{while} loop,
11043 the @w{@code{(setq list (cdr list))}}
11044 expression shortens the list, so the @code{while} loop eventually
11045 stops. In addition, it provides the @code{cons} expression with a new
11046 first element by creating a new and shorter list at each repetition of
11047 the loop.
11048
11049 The @code{dolist} expression does very much the same as the
11050 @code{while} expression, except that the @code{dolist} macro does some
11051 of the work you have to do when writing a @code{while} expression.
11052
11053 Like a @code{while} loop, a @code{dolist} loops. What is different is
11054 that it automatically shortens the list each time it loops---it
11055 ``@sc{cdr}s down the list'' on its own---and it automatically binds
11056 the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list to the first of its
11057 arguments.
11058
11059 In the example, the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list is
11060 referred to using the symbol @samp{element}, the list itself is called
11061 @samp{list}, and the value returned is called @samp{value}. The
11062 remainder of the @code{dolist} expression is the body.
11063
11064 The @code{dolist} expression binds the @sc{car} of each shorter
11065 version of the list to @code{element} and then evaluates the body of
11066 the expression; and repeats the loop. The result is returned in
11067 @code{value}.
11068
11069 @node dotimes
11070 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{dotimes} Macro
11071 @findex dotimes
11072
11073 The @code{dotimes} macro is similar to @code{dolist}, except that it
11074 loops a specific number of times.
11075
11076 The first argument to @code{dotimes} is assigned the numbers 0, 1, 2
11077 and so forth each time around the loop, and the value of the third
11078 argument is returned. You need to provide the value of the second
11079 argument, which is how many times the macro loops.
11080
11081 @need 1250
11082 For example, the following binds the numbers from 0 up to, but not
11083 including, the number 3 to the first argument, @var{number}, and then
11084 constructs a list of the three numbers. (The first number is 0, the
11085 second number is 1, and the third number is 2; this makes a total of
11086 three numbers in all, starting with zero as the first number.)
11087
11088 @smallexample
11089 @group
11090 (let (value) ; otherwise a value is a void variable
11091 (dotimes (number 3 value)
11092 (setq value (cons number value))))
11093
11094 @result{} (2 1 0)
11095 @end group
11096 @end smallexample
11097
11098 @noindent
11099 @code{dotimes} returns @code{value}, so the way to use
11100 @code{dotimes} is to operate on some expression @var{number} number of
11101 times and then return the result, either as a list or an atom.
11102
11103 @need 1250
11104 Here is an example of a @code{defun} that uses @code{dotimes} to add
11105 up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
11106
11107 @smallexample
11108 @group
11109 (defun triangle-using-dotimes (number-of-rows)
11110 "Using ‘dotimes’, add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
11111 (let ((total 0)) ; otherwise a total is a void variable
11112 (dotimes (number number-of-rows total)
11113 (setq total (+ total (1+ number))))))
11114
11115 (triangle-using-dotimes 4)
11116 @end group
11117 @end smallexample
11118
11119 @node Recursion
11120 @section Recursion
11121 @cindex Recursion
11122
11123 A recursive function contains code that tells the Lisp interpreter to
11124 call a program that runs exactly like itself, but with slightly
11125 different arguments. The code runs exactly the same because it has
11126 the same name. However, even though the program has the same name, it
11127 is not the same entity. It is different. In the jargon, it is a
11128 different ``instance''.
11129
11130 Eventually, if the program is written correctly, the ``slightly
11131 different arguments'' will become sufficiently different from the first
11132 arguments that the final instance will stop.
11133
11134 @menu
11135 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
11136 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
11137 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
11138 * Recursive triangle function::
11139 * Recursion with cond::
11140 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
11141 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
11142 * No deferment solution::
11143 @end menu
11144
11145 @node Building Robots
11146 @subsection Building Robots: Extending the Metaphor
11147 @cindex Building robots
11148 @cindex Robots, building
11149
11150 It is sometimes helpful to think of a running program as a robot that
11151 does a job. In doing its job, a recursive function calls on a second
11152 robot to help it. The second robot is identical to the first in every
11153 way, except that the second robot helps the first and has been
11154 passed different arguments than the first.
11155
11156 In a recursive function, the second robot may call a third; and the
11157 third may call a fourth, and so on. Each of these is a different
11158 entity; but all are clones.
11159
11160 Since each robot has slightly different instructions---the arguments
11161 will differ from one robot to the next---the last robot should know
11162 when to stop.
11163
11164 Let's expand on the metaphor in which a computer program is a robot.
11165
11166 A function definition provides the blueprints for a robot. When you
11167 install a function definition, that is, when you evaluate a
11168 @code{defun} macro, you install the necessary equipment to build
11169 robots. It is as if you were in a factory, setting up an assembly
11170 line. Robots with the same name are built according to the same
11171 blueprints. So they have, as it were, the same ``model number'', but a
11172 different ``serial number''.
11173
11174 We often say that a recursive function ``calls itself''. What we mean
11175 is that the instructions in a recursive function cause the Lisp
11176 interpreter to run a different function that has the same name and
11177 does the same job as the first, but with different arguments.
11178
11179 It is important that the arguments differ from one instance to the
11180 next; otherwise, the process will never stop.
11181
11182 @node Recursive Definition Parts
11183 @subsection The Parts of a Recursive Definition
11184 @cindex Parts of a Recursive Definition
11185 @cindex Recursive Definition Parts
11186
11187 A recursive function typically contains a conditional expression which
11188 has three parts:
11189
11190 @enumerate
11191 @item
11192 A true-or-false-test that determines whether the function is called
11193 again, here called the @dfn{do-again-test}.
11194
11195 @item
11196 The name of the function. When this name is called, a new instance of
11197 the function---a new robot, as it were---is created and told what to do.
11198
11199 @item
11200 An expression that returns a different value each time the function is
11201 called, here called the @dfn{next-step-expression}. Consequently, the
11202 argument (or arguments) passed to the new instance of the function
11203 will be different from that passed to the previous instance. This
11204 causes the conditional expression, the @dfn{do-again-test}, to test
11205 false after the correct number of repetitions.
11206 @end enumerate
11207
11208 Recursive functions can be much simpler than any other kind of
11209 function. Indeed, when people first start to use them, they often look
11210 so mysteriously simple as to be incomprehensible. Like riding a
11211 bicycle, reading a recursive function definition takes a certain knack
11212 which is hard at first but then seems simple.
11213
11214 @need 1200
11215 There are several different common recursive patterns. A very simple
11216 pattern looks like this:
11217
11218 @smallexample
11219 @group
11220 (defun @var{name-of-recursive-function} (@var{argument-list})
11221 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
11222 (if @var{do-again-test}
11223 @var{body}@dots{}
11224 (@var{name-of-recursive-function}
11225 @var{next-step-expression})))
11226 @end group
11227 @end smallexample
11228
11229 Each time a recursive function is evaluated, a new instance of it is
11230 created and told what to do. The arguments tell the instance what to do.
11231
11232 An argument is bound to the value of the next-step-expression. Each
11233 instance runs with a different value of the next-step-expression.
11234
11235 The value in the next-step-expression is used in the do-again-test.
11236
11237 The value returned by the next-step-expression is passed to the new
11238 instance of the function, which evaluates it (or some
11239 transmogrification of it) to determine whether to continue or stop.
11240 The next-step-expression is designed so that the do-again-test returns
11241 false when the function should no longer be repeated.
11242
11243 The do-again-test is sometimes called the @dfn{stop condition},
11244 since it stops the repetitions when it tests false.
11245
11246 @node Recursion with list
11247 @subsection Recursion with a List
11248
11249 The example of a @code{while} loop that printed the elements of a list
11250 of numbers can be written recursively. Here is the code, including
11251 an expression to set the value of the variable @code{animals} to a list.
11252
11253 If you are reading this in Info in Emacs, you can evaluate this
11254 expression directly in Info. Otherwise, you must copy the example
11255 to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate each expression there.
11256 Use @kbd{C-u C-x C-e} to evaluate the
11257 @code{(print-elements-recursively animals)} expression so that the
11258 results are printed in the buffer; otherwise the Lisp interpreter will
11259 try to squeeze the results into the one line of the echo area.
11260
11261 Also, place your cursor immediately after the last closing parenthesis
11262 of the @code{print-elements-recursively} function, before the comment.
11263 Otherwise, the Lisp interpreter will try to evaluate the comment.
11264
11265 @findex print-elements-recursively
11266 @smallexample
11267 @group
11268 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11269
11270 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11271 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11272 Uses recursion."
11273 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11274 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11275 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11276 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11277
11278 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11279 @end group
11280 @end smallexample
11281
11282 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function first tests whether
11283 there is any content in the list; if there is, the function prints the
11284 first element of the list, the @sc{car} of the list. Then the
11285 function ``invokes itself'', but gives itself as its argument, not the
11286 whole list, but the second and subsequent elements of the list, the
11287 @sc{cdr} of the list.
11288
11289 Put another way, if the list is not empty, the function invokes
11290 another instance of code that is similar to the initial code, but is a
11291 different thread of execution, with different arguments than the first
11292 instance.
11293
11294 Put in yet another way, if the list is not empty, the first robot
11295 assembles a second robot and tells it what to do; the second robot is
11296 a different individual from the first, but is the same model.
11297
11298 When the second evaluation occurs, the @code{when} expression is
11299 evaluated and if true, prints the first element of the list it
11300 receives as its argument (which is the second element of the original
11301 list). Then the function ``calls itself'' with the @sc{cdr} of the list
11302 it is invoked with, which (the second time around) is the @sc{cdr} of
11303 the @sc{cdr} of the original list.
11304
11305 Note that although we say that the function ``calls itself'', what we
11306 mean is that the Lisp interpreter assembles and instructs a new
11307 instance of the program. The new instance is a clone of the first,
11308 but is a separate individual.
11309
11310 Each time the function ``invokes itself'', it invokes itself on a
11311 shorter version of the original list. It creates a new instance that
11312 works on a shorter list.
11313
11314 Eventually, the function invokes itself on an empty list. It creates
11315 a new instance whose argument is @code{nil}. The conditional expression
11316 tests the value of @code{list}. Since the value of @code{list} is
11317 @code{nil}, the @code{when} expression tests false so the then-part is
11318 not evaluated. The function as a whole then returns @code{nil}.
11319
11320 @need 1200
11321 When you evaluate the expression @code{(print-elements-recursively
11322 animals)} in the @file{*scratch*} buffer, you see this result:
11323
11324 @smallexample
11325 @group
11326 gazelle
11327
11328 giraffe
11329
11330 lion
11331
11332 tiger
11333 nil
11334 @end group
11335 @end smallexample
11336
11337 @need 2000
11338 @node Recursive triangle function
11339 @subsection Recursion in Place of a Counter
11340 @findex triangle-recursively
11341
11342 @need 1200
11343 The @code{triangle} function described in a previous section can also
11344 be written recursively. It looks like this:
11345
11346 @smallexample
11347 @group
11348 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
11349 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11350 Uses recursion."
11351 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
11352 1 ; @r{then-part}
11353 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
11354 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11355 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11356
11357 (triangle-recursively 7)
11358 @end group
11359 @end smallexample
11360
11361 @noindent
11362 You can install this function by evaluating it and then try it by
11363 evaluating @code{(triangle-recursively 7)}. (Remember to put your
11364 cursor immediately after the last parenthesis of the function
11365 definition, before the comment.) The function evaluates to 28.
11366
11367 To understand how this function works, let's consider what happens in the
11368 various cases when the function is passed 1, 2, 3, or 4 as the value of
11369 its argument.
11370
11371 @menu
11372 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
11373 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
11374 @end menu
11375
11376 @ifnottex
11377 @node Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2
11378 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 1 or 2
11379 @end ifnottex
11380
11381 First, what happens if the value of the argument is 1?
11382
11383 The function has an @code{if} expression after the documentation
11384 string. It tests whether the value of @code{number} is equal to 1; if
11385 so, Emacs evaluates the then-part of the @code{if} expression, which
11386 returns the number 1 as the value of the function. (A triangle with
11387 one row has one pebble in it.)
11388
11389 Suppose, however, that the value of the argument is 2. In this case,
11390 Emacs evaluates the else-part of the @code{if} expression.
11391
11392 @need 1200
11393 The else-part consists of an addition, the recursive call to
11394 @code{triangle-recursively} and a decrementing action; and it looks like
11395 this:
11396
11397 @smallexample
11398 (+ number (triangle-recursively (1- number)))
11399 @end smallexample
11400
11401 When Emacs evaluates this expression, the innermost expression is
11402 evaluated first; then the other parts in sequence. Here are the steps
11403 in detail:
11404
11405 @table @i
11406 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression.
11407
11408 The innermost expression is @code{(1- number)} so Emacs decrements the
11409 value of @code{number} from 2 to 1.
11410
11411 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11412
11413 The Lisp interpreter creates an individual instance of
11414 @code{triangle-recursively}. It does not matter that this function is
11415 contained within itself. Emacs passes the result Step 1 as the
11416 argument used by this instance of the @code{triangle-recursively}
11417 function
11418
11419 In this case, Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with an
11420 argument of 1. This means that this evaluation of
11421 @code{triangle-recursively} returns 1.
11422
11423 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the value of @code{number}.
11424
11425 The variable @code{number} is the second element of the list that
11426 starts with @code{+}; its value is 2.
11427
11428 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{+} expression.
11429
11430 The @code{+} expression receives two arguments, the first
11431 from the evaluation of @code{number} (Step 3) and the second from the
11432 evaluation of @code{triangle-recursively} (Step 2).
11433
11434 The result of the addition is the sum of 2 plus 1, and the number 3 is
11435 returned, which is correct. A triangle with two rows has three
11436 pebbles in it.
11437 @end table
11438
11439 @node Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4
11440 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 3 or 4
11441
11442 Suppose that @code{triangle-recursively} is called with an argument of
11443 3.
11444
11445 @table @i
11446 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the do-again-test.
11447
11448 The @code{if} expression is evaluated first. This is the do-again
11449 test and returns false, so the else-part of the @code{if} expression
11450 is evaluated. (Note that in this example, the do-again-test causes
11451 the function to call itself when it tests false, not when it tests
11452 true.)
11453
11454 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression of the else-part.
11455
11456 The innermost expression of the else-part is evaluated, which decrements
11457 3 to 2. This is the next-step-expression.
11458
11459 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11460
11461 The number 2 is passed to the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11462
11463 We already know what happens when Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with
11464 an argument of 2. After going through the sequence of actions described
11465 earlier, it returns a value of 3. So that is what will happen here.
11466
11467 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the addition.
11468
11469 3 will be passed as an argument to the addition and will be added to the
11470 number with which the function was called, which is 3.
11471 @end table
11472
11473 @noindent
11474 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 6.
11475
11476 Now that we know what will happen when @code{triangle-recursively} is
11477 called with an argument of 3, it is evident what will happen if it is
11478 called with an argument of 4:
11479
11480 @quotation
11481 @need 800
11482 In the recursive call, the evaluation of
11483
11484 @smallexample
11485 (triangle-recursively (1- 4))
11486 @end smallexample
11487
11488 @need 800
11489 @noindent
11490 will return the value of evaluating
11491
11492 @smallexample
11493 (triangle-recursively 3)
11494 @end smallexample
11495
11496 @noindent
11497 which is 6 and this value will be added to 4 by the addition in the
11498 third line.
11499 @end quotation
11500
11501 @noindent
11502 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 10.
11503
11504 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is evaluated, it evaluates a
11505 version of itself---a different instance of itself---with a smaller
11506 argument, until the argument is small enough so that it does not
11507 evaluate itself.
11508
11509 Note that this particular design for a recursive function
11510 requires that operations be deferred.
11511
11512 Before @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} can calculate its answer, it
11513 must call @code{(triangle-recursively 6)}; and before
11514 @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} can calculate its answer, it must call
11515 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)}; and so on. That is to say, the
11516 calculation that @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} makes must be
11517 deferred until @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} makes its calculation;
11518 and @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} must defer until
11519 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)} completes; and so on.
11520
11521 If each of these instances of @code{triangle-recursively} are thought
11522 of as different robots, the first robot must wait for the second to
11523 complete its job, which must wait until the third completes, and so
11524 on.
11525
11526 There is a way around this kind of waiting, which we will discuss in
11527 @ref{No Deferment, , Recursion without Deferments}.
11528
11529 @node Recursion with cond
11530 @subsection Recursion Example Using @code{cond}
11531 @findex cond
11532
11533 The version of @code{triangle-recursively} described earlier is written
11534 with the @code{if} special form. It can also be written using another
11535 special form called @code{cond}. The name of the special form
11536 @code{cond} is an abbreviation of the word @samp{conditional}.
11537
11538 Although the @code{cond} special form is not used as often in the
11539 Emacs Lisp sources as @code{if}, it is used often enough to justify
11540 explaining it.
11541
11542 @need 800
11543 The template for a @code{cond} expression looks like this:
11544
11545 @smallexample
11546 @group
11547 (cond
11548 @var{body}@dots{})
11549 @end group
11550 @end smallexample
11551
11552 @noindent
11553 where the @var{body} is a series of lists.
11554
11555 @need 800
11556 Written out more fully, the template looks like this:
11557
11558 @smallexample
11559 @group
11560 (cond
11561 (@var{first-true-or-false-test} @var{first-consequent})
11562 (@var{second-true-or-false-test} @var{second-consequent})
11563 (@var{third-true-or-false-test} @var{third-consequent})
11564 @dots{})
11565 @end group
11566 @end smallexample
11567
11568 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates the @code{cond} expression, it
11569 evaluates the first element (the @sc{car} or true-or-false-test) of
11570 the first expression in a series of expressions within the body of the
11571 @code{cond}.
11572
11573 If the true-or-false-test returns @code{nil} the rest of that
11574 expression, the consequent, is skipped and the true-or-false-test of the
11575 next expression is evaluated. When an expression is found whose
11576 true-or-false-test returns a value that is not @code{nil}, the
11577 consequent of that expression is evaluated. The consequent can be one
11578 or more expressions. If the consequent consists of more than one
11579 expression, the expressions are evaluated in sequence and the value of
11580 the last one is returned. If the expression does not have a consequent,
11581 the value of the true-or-false-test is returned.
11582
11583 If none of the true-or-false-tests test true, the @code{cond} expression
11584 returns @code{nil}.
11585
11586 @need 1250
11587 Written using @code{cond}, the @code{triangle} function looks like this:
11588
11589 @smallexample
11590 @group
11591 (defun triangle-using-cond (number)
11592 (cond ((<= number 0) 0)
11593 ((= number 1) 1)
11594 ((> number 1)
11595 (+ number (triangle-using-cond (1- number))))))
11596 @end group
11597 @end smallexample
11598
11599 @noindent
11600 In this example, the @code{cond} returns 0 if the number is less than or
11601 equal to 0, it returns 1 if the number is 1 and it evaluates @code{(+
11602 number (triangle-using-cond (1- number)))} if the number is greater than
11603 1.
11604
11605 @node Recursive Patterns
11606 @subsection Recursive Patterns
11607 @cindex Recursive Patterns
11608
11609 Here are three common recursive patterns. Each involves a list.
11610 Recursion does not need to involve lists, but Lisp is designed for lists
11611 and this provides a sense of its primal capabilities.
11612
11613 @menu
11614 * Every::
11615 * Accumulate::
11616 * Keep::
11617 @end menu
11618
11619 @node Every
11620 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{every}
11621 @cindex Every, type of recursive pattern
11622 @cindex Recursive pattern - every
11623
11624 In the @code{every} recursive pattern, an action is performed on every
11625 element of a list.
11626
11627 @need 1500
11628 The basic pattern is:
11629
11630 @itemize @bullet
11631 @item
11632 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
11633 @item
11634 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list)
11635 @itemize @minus
11636 @item
11637 through a recursive call by the function on the rest (the
11638 @sc{cdr}) of the list,
11639 @item
11640 and, optionally, combine the acted-on element, using @code{cons},
11641 with the results of acting on the rest.
11642 @end itemize
11643 @end itemize
11644
11645 @need 1500
11646 Here is example:
11647
11648 @smallexample
11649 @group
11650 (defun square-each (numbers-list)
11651 "Square each of a NUMBERS LIST, recursively."
11652 (if (not numbers-list) ; do-again-test
11653 nil
11654 (cons
11655 (* (car numbers-list) (car numbers-list))
11656 (square-each (cdr numbers-list))))) ; next-step-expression
11657 @end group
11658
11659 @group
11660 (square-each '(1 2 3))
11661 @result{} (1 4 9)
11662 @end group
11663 @end smallexample
11664
11665 @need 1200
11666 @noindent
11667 If @code{numbers-list} is empty, do nothing. But if it has content,
11668 construct a list combining the square of the first number in the list
11669 with the result of the recursive call.
11670
11671 (The example follows the pattern exactly: @code{nil} is returned if
11672 the numbers' list is empty. In practice, you would write the
11673 conditional so it carries out the action when the numbers' list is not
11674 empty.)
11675
11676 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function (@pxref{Recursion with
11677 list, , Recursion with a List}) is another example of an @code{every}
11678 pattern, except in this case, rather than bring the results together
11679 using @code{cons}, we print each element of output.
11680
11681 @need 1250
11682 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function looks like this:
11683
11684 @smallexample
11685 @group
11686 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11687 @end group
11688
11689 @group
11690 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11691 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11692 Uses recursion."
11693 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11694 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11695 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11696 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11697
11698 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11699 @end group
11700 @end smallexample
11701
11702 @need 1500
11703 The pattern for @code{print-elements-recursively} is:
11704
11705 @itemize @bullet
11706 @item
11707 When the list is empty, do nothing.
11708 @item
11709 But when the list has at least one element,
11710 @itemize @minus
11711 @item
11712 act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11713 @item
11714 and make a recursive call on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11715 @end itemize
11716 @end itemize
11717
11718 @node Accumulate
11719 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{accumulate}
11720 @cindex Accumulate, type of recursive pattern
11721 @cindex Recursive pattern - accumulate
11722
11723 Another recursive pattern is called the @code{accumulate} pattern. In
11724 the @code{accumulate} recursive pattern, an action is performed on
11725 every element of a list and the result of that action is accumulated
11726 with the results of performing the action on the other elements.
11727
11728 This is very like the ``every'' pattern using @code{cons}, except that
11729 @code{cons} is not used, but some other combiner.
11730
11731 @need 1500
11732 The pattern is:
11733
11734 @itemize @bullet
11735 @item
11736 If a list be empty, return zero or some other constant.
11737 @item
11738 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11739 @itemize @minus
11740 @item
11741 and combine that acted-on element, using @code{+} or
11742 some other combining function, with
11743 @item
11744 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11745 @end itemize
11746 @end itemize
11747
11748 @need 1500
11749 Here is an example:
11750
11751 @smallexample
11752 @group
11753 (defun add-elements (numbers-list)
11754 "Add the elements of NUMBERS-LIST together."
11755 (if (not numbers-list)
11756 0
11757 (+ (car numbers-list) (add-elements (cdr numbers-list)))))
11758 @end group
11759
11760 @group
11761 (add-elements '(1 2 3 4))
11762 @result{} 10
11763 @end group
11764 @end smallexample
11765
11766 @xref{Files List, , Making a List of Files}, for an example of the
11767 accumulate pattern.
11768
11769 @node Keep
11770 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{keep}
11771 @cindex Keep, type of recursive pattern
11772 @cindex Recursive pattern - keep
11773
11774 A third recursive pattern is called the @code{keep} pattern.
11775 In the @code{keep} recursive pattern, each element of a list is tested;
11776 the element is acted on and the results are kept only if the element
11777 meets a criterion.
11778
11779 Again, this is very like the ``every'' pattern, except the element is
11780 skipped unless it meets a criterion.
11781
11782 @need 1500
11783 The pattern has three parts:
11784
11785 @itemize @bullet
11786 @item
11787 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
11788 @item
11789 Else, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) passes
11790 a test
11791 @itemize @minus
11792 @item
11793 act on that element and combine it, using @code{cons} with
11794 @item
11795 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11796 @end itemize
11797 @item
11798 Otherwise, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) fails
11799 the test
11800 @itemize @minus
11801 @item
11802 skip on that element,
11803 @item
11804 and, recursively call the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11805 @end itemize
11806 @end itemize
11807
11808 @need 1500
11809 Here is an example that uses @code{cond}:
11810
11811 @smallexample
11812 @group
11813 (defun keep-three-letter-words (word-list)
11814 "Keep three letter words in WORD-LIST."
11815 (cond
11816 ;; First do-again-test: stop-condition
11817 ((not word-list) nil)
11818
11819 ;; Second do-again-test: when to act
11820 ((eq 3 (length (symbol-name (car word-list))))
11821 ;; combine acted-on element with recursive call on shorter list
11822 (cons (car word-list) (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list))))
11823
11824 ;; Third do-again-test: when to skip element;
11825 ;; recursively call shorter list with next-step expression
11826 (t (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list)))))
11827 @end group
11828
11829 @group
11830 (keep-three-letter-words '(one two three four five six))
11831 @result{} (one two six)
11832 @end group
11833 @end smallexample
11834
11835 It goes without saying that you need not use @code{nil} as the test for
11836 when to stop; and you can, of course, combine these patterns.
11837
11838 @node No Deferment
11839 @subsection Recursion without Deferments
11840 @cindex Deferment in recursion
11841 @cindex Recursion without Deferments
11842
11843 Let's consider again what happens with the @code{triangle-recursively}
11844 function. We will find that the intermediate calculations are
11845 deferred until all can be done.
11846
11847 @need 800
11848 Here is the function definition:
11849
11850 @smallexample
11851 @group
11852 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
11853 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11854 Uses recursion."
11855 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
11856 1 ; @r{then-part}
11857 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
11858 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11859 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11860 @end group
11861 @end smallexample
11862
11863 What happens when we call this function with a argument of 7?
11864
11865 The first instance of the @code{triangle-recursively} function adds
11866 the number 7 to the value returned by a second instance of
11867 @code{triangle-recursively}, an instance that has been passed an
11868 argument of 6. That is to say, the first calculation is:
11869
11870 @smallexample
11871 (+ 7 (triangle-recursively 6))
11872 @end smallexample
11873
11874 @noindent
11875 The first instance of @code{triangle-recursively}---you may want to
11876 think of it as a little robot---cannot complete its job. It must hand
11877 off the calculation for @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} to a second
11878 instance of the program, to a second robot. This second individual is
11879 completely different from the first one; it is, in the jargon, a
11880 ``different instantiation''. Or, put another way, it is a different
11881 robot. It is the same model as the first; it calculates triangle
11882 numbers recursively; but it has a different serial number.
11883
11884 And what does @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} return? It returns the
11885 number 6 added to the value returned by evaluating
11886 @code{triangle-recursively} with an argument of 5. Using the robot
11887 metaphor, it asks yet another robot to help it.
11888
11889 @need 800
11890 Now the total is:
11891
11892 @smallexample
11893 (+ 7 6 (triangle-recursively 5))
11894 @end smallexample
11895
11896 @need 800
11897 And what happens next?
11898
11899 @smallexample
11900 (+ 7 6 5 (triangle-recursively 4))
11901 @end smallexample
11902
11903 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is called, except for the last
11904 time, it creates another instance of the program---another robot---and
11905 asks it to make a calculation.
11906
11907 @need 800
11908 Eventually, the full addition is set up and performed:
11909
11910 @smallexample
11911 (+ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1)
11912 @end smallexample
11913
11914 This design for the function defers the calculation of the first step
11915 until the second can be done, and defers that until the third can be
11916 done, and so on. Each deferment means the computer must remember what
11917 is being waited on. This is not a problem when there are only a few
11918 steps, as in this example. But it can be a problem when there are
11919 more steps.
11920
11921 @node No deferment solution
11922 @subsection No Deferment Solution
11923 @cindex No deferment solution
11924 @cindex Solution without deferment
11925
11926 The solution to the problem of deferred operations is to write in a
11927 manner that does not defer operations@footnote{The phrase @dfn{tail
11928 recursive} is used to describe such a process, one that uses
11929 ``constant space''.}. This requires
11930 writing to a different pattern, often one that involves writing two
11931 function definitions, an ``initialization'' function and a ``helper''
11932 function.
11933
11934 The ``initialization'' function sets up the job; the ``helper'' function
11935 does the work.
11936
11937 @need 1200
11938 Here are the two function definitions for adding up numbers. They are
11939 so simple, I find them hard to understand.
11940
11941 @smallexample
11942 @group
11943 (defun triangle-initialization (number)
11944 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11945 This is the `initialization' component of a two function
11946 duo that uses recursion."
11947 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 number))
11948 @end group
11949 @end smallexample
11950
11951 @smallexample
11952 @group
11953 (defun triangle-recursive-helper (sum counter number)
11954 "Return SUM, using COUNTER, through NUMBER inclusive.
11955 This is the “helper” component of a two function duo
11956 that uses recursion."
11957 (if (> counter number)
11958 sum
11959 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum}
11960 (1+ counter) ; @r{counter}
11961 number))) ; @r{number}
11962 @end group
11963 @end smallexample
11964
11965 @need 1250
11966 Install both function definitions by evaluating them, then call
11967 @code{triangle-initialization} with 2 rows:
11968
11969 @smallexample
11970 @group
11971 (triangle-initialization 2)
11972 @result{} 3
11973 @end group
11974 @end smallexample
11975
11976 The ``initialization'' function calls the first instance of the ``helper''
11977 function with three arguments: zero, zero, and a number which is the
11978 number of rows in the triangle.
11979
11980 The first two arguments passed to the ``helper'' function are
11981 initialization values. These values are changed when
11982 @code{triangle-recursive-helper} invokes new instances.@footnote{The
11983 jargon is mildly confusing: @code{triangle-recursive-helper} uses a
11984 process that is iterative in a procedure that is recursive. The
11985 process is called iterative because the computer need only record the
11986 three values, @code{sum}, @code{counter}, and @code{number}; the
11987 procedure is recursive because the function ``calls itself''. On the
11988 other hand, both the process and the procedure used by
11989 @code{triangle-recursively} are called recursive. The word
11990 ``recursive'' has different meanings in the two contexts.}
11991
11992 Let's see what happens when we have a triangle that has one row. (This
11993 triangle will have one pebble in it!)
11994
11995 @need 1200
11996 @code{triangle-initialization} will call its helper with
11997 the arguments @w{@code{0 0 1}}. That function will run the conditional
11998 test whether @code{(> counter number)}:
11999
12000 @smallexample
12001 (> 0 1)
12002 @end smallexample
12003
12004 @need 1200
12005 @noindent
12006 and find that the result is false, so it will invoke
12007 the else-part of the @code{if} clause:
12008
12009 @smallexample
12010 @group
12011 (triangle-recursive-helper
12012 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12013 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12014 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12015 @end group
12016 @end smallexample
12017
12018 @need 800
12019 @noindent
12020 which will first compute:
12021
12022 @smallexample
12023 @group
12024 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ 0 0) ; @r{sum}
12025 (1+ 0) ; @r{counter}
12026 1) ; @r{number}
12027 @exdent which is:
12028
12029 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 1)
12030 @end group
12031 @end smallexample
12032
12033 Again, @code{(> counter number)} will be false, so again, the Lisp
12034 interpreter will evaluate @code{triangle-recursive-helper}, creating a
12035 new instance with new arguments.
12036
12037 @need 800
12038 This new instance will be;
12039
12040 @smallexample
12041 @group
12042 (triangle-recursive-helper
12043 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12044 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12045 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12046
12047 @exdent which is:
12048
12049 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 1)
12050 @end group
12051 @end smallexample
12052
12053 In this case, the @code{(> counter number)} test will be true! So the
12054 instance will return the value of the sum, which will be 1, as
12055 expected.
12056
12057 Now, let's pass @code{triangle-initialization} an argument
12058 of 2, to find out how many pebbles there are in a triangle with two rows.
12059
12060 That function calls @code{(triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 2)}.
12061
12062 @need 800
12063 In stages, the instances called will be:
12064
12065 @smallexample
12066 @group
12067 @r{sum counter number}
12068 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 2)
12069
12070 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 2)
12071
12072 (triangle-recursive-helper 3 3 2)
12073 @end group
12074 @end smallexample
12075
12076 When the last instance is called, the @code{(> counter number)} test
12077 will be true, so the instance will return the value of @code{sum},
12078 which will be 3.
12079
12080 This kind of pattern helps when you are writing functions that can use
12081 many resources in a computer.
12082
12083 @need 1500
12084 @node Looping exercise
12085 @section Looping Exercise
12086
12087 @itemize @bullet
12088 @item
12089 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} in which each row has a
12090 value which is the square of the row number. Use a @code{while} loop.
12091
12092 @item
12093 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} that multiplies instead of
12094 adds the values.
12095
12096 @item
12097 Rewrite these two functions recursively. Rewrite these functions
12098 using @code{cond}.
12099
12100 @c comma in printed title causes problem in Info cross reference
12101 @item
12102 Write a function for Texinfo mode that creates an index entry at the
12103 beginning of a paragraph for every @samp{@@dfn} within the paragraph.
12104 (In a Texinfo file, @samp{@@dfn} marks a definition. This book is
12105 written in Texinfo.)
12106
12107 Many of the functions you will need are described in two of the
12108 previous chapters, @ref{Cutting & Storing Text, , Cutting and Storing
12109 Text}, and @ref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}. If you use
12110 @code{forward-paragraph} to put the index entry at the beginning of
12111 the paragraph, you will have to use @w{@kbd{C-h f}}
12112 (@code{describe-function}) to find out how to make the command go
12113 backwards.
12114
12115 For more information, see
12116 @ifinfo
12117 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating Definitions, texinfo}.
12118 @end ifinfo
12119 @ifhtml
12120 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating, texinfo, Texinfo Manual}, which goes to
12121 a Texinfo manual in the current directory. Or, if you are on the
12122 Internet, see
12123 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/manual/texinfo/}
12124 @end ifhtml
12125 @iftex
12126 ``Indicating Definitions, Commands, etc.''@: in @cite{Texinfo, The GNU
12127 Documentation Format}.
12128 @end iftex
12129 @end itemize
12130
12131 @node Regexp Search
12132 @chapter Regular Expression Searches
12133 @cindex Searches, illustrating
12134 @cindex Regular expression searches
12135 @cindex Patterns, searching for
12136 @cindex Motion by sentence and paragraph
12137 @cindex Sentences, movement by
12138 @cindex Paragraphs, movement by
12139
12140 Regular expression searches are used extensively in GNU Emacs. The
12141 two functions, @code{forward-sentence} and @code{forward-paragraph},
12142 illustrate these searches well. They use regular expressions to find
12143 where to move point. The phrase ``regular expression'' is often written
12144 as ``regexp''.
12145
12146 Regular expression searches are described in @ref{Regexp Search, ,
12147 Regular Expression Search, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, as well as in
12148 @ref{Regular Expressions, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
12149 Manual}. In writing this chapter, I am presuming that you have at
12150 least a mild acquaintance with them. The major point to remember is
12151 that regular expressions permit you to search for patterns as well as
12152 for literal strings of characters. For example, the code in
12153 @code{forward-sentence} searches for the pattern of possible
12154 characters that could mark the end of a sentence, and moves point to
12155 that spot.
12156
12157 Before looking at the code for the @code{forward-sentence} function, it
12158 is worth considering what the pattern that marks the end of a sentence
12159 must be. The pattern is discussed in the next section; following that
12160 is a description of the regular expression search function,
12161 @code{re-search-forward}. The @code{forward-sentence} function
12162 is described in the section following. Finally, the
12163 @code{forward-paragraph} function is described in the last section of
12164 this chapter. @code{forward-paragraph} is a complex function that
12165 introduces several new features.
12166
12167 @menu
12168 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
12169 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
12170 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
12171 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
12172 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
12173 * Regexp Review::
12174 * re-search Exercises::
12175 @end menu
12176
12177 @node sentence-end
12178 @section The Regular Expression for @code{sentence-end}
12179 @findex sentence-end
12180
12181 The symbol @code{sentence-end} is bound to the pattern that marks the
12182 end of a sentence. What should this regular expression be?
12183
12184 Clearly, a sentence may be ended by a period, a question mark, or an
12185 exclamation mark. Indeed, in English, only clauses that end with one
12186 of those three characters should be considered the end of a sentence.
12187 This means that the pattern should include the character set:
12188
12189 @smallexample
12190 [.?!]
12191 @end smallexample
12192
12193 However, we do not want @code{forward-sentence} merely to jump to a
12194 period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark, because such a character
12195 might be used in the middle of a sentence. A period, for example, is
12196 used after abbreviations. So other information is needed.
12197
12198 According to convention, you type two spaces after every sentence, but
12199 only one space after a period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark in
12200 the body of a sentence. So a period, a question mark, or an exclamation
12201 mark followed by two spaces is a good indicator of an end of sentence.
12202 However, in a file, the two spaces may instead be a tab or the end of a
12203 line. This means that the regular expression should include these three
12204 items as alternatives.
12205
12206 @need 800
12207 This group of alternatives will look like this:
12208
12209 @smallexample
12210 @group
12211 \\($\\| \\| \\)
12212 ^ ^^
12213 TAB SPC
12214 @end group
12215 @end smallexample
12216
12217 @noindent
12218 Here, @samp{$} indicates the end of the line, and I have pointed out
12219 where the tab and two spaces are inserted in the expression. Both are
12220 inserted by putting the actual characters into the expression.
12221
12222 Two backslashes, @samp{\\}, are required before the parentheses and
12223 vertical bars: the first backslash quotes the following backslash in
12224 Emacs; and the second indicates that the following character, the
12225 parenthesis or the vertical bar, is special.
12226
12227 @need 1000
12228 Also, a sentence may be followed by one or more carriage returns, like
12229 this:
12230
12231 @smallexample
12232 @group
12233 [
12234 ]*
12235 @end group
12236 @end smallexample
12237
12238 @noindent
12239 Like tabs and spaces, a carriage return is inserted into a regular
12240 expression by inserting it literally. The asterisk indicates that the
12241 @key{RET} is repeated zero or more times.
12242
12243 But a sentence end does not consist only of a period, a question mark or
12244 an exclamation mark followed by appropriate space: a closing quotation
12245 mark or a closing brace of some kind may precede the space. Indeed more
12246 than one such mark or brace may precede the space. These require a
12247 expression that looks like this:
12248
12249 @smallexample
12250 []\"')@}]*
12251 @end smallexample
12252
12253 In this expression, the first @samp{]} is the first character in the
12254 expression; the second character is @samp{"}, which is preceded by a
12255 @samp{\} to tell Emacs the @samp{"} is @emph{not} special. The last
12256 three characters are @samp{'}, @samp{)}, and @samp{@}}.
12257
12258 All this suggests what the regular expression pattern for matching the
12259 end of a sentence should be; and, indeed, if we evaluate
12260 @code{sentence-end} we find that it returns the following value:
12261
12262 @smallexample
12263 @group
12264 sentence-end
12265 @result{} "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12266 ]*"
12267 @end group
12268 @end smallexample
12269
12270 @noindent
12271 (Well, not in GNU Emacs 22; that is because of an effort to make the
12272 process simpler and to handle more glyphs and languages. When the
12273 value of @code{sentence-end} is @code{nil}, then use the value defined
12274 by the function @code{sentence-end}. (Here is a use of the difference
12275 between a value and a function in Emacs Lisp.) The function returns a
12276 value constructed from the variables @code{sentence-end-base},
12277 @code{sentence-end-double-space}, @code{sentence-end-without-period},
12278 and @code{sentence-end-without-space}. The critical variable is
12279 @code{sentence-end-base}; its global value is similar to the one
12280 described above but it also contains two additional quotation marks.
12281 These have differing degrees of curliness. The
12282 @code{sentence-end-without-period} variable, when true, tells Emacs
12283 that a sentence may end without a period, such as text in Thai.)
12284
12285 @ignore
12286 @noindent
12287 (Note that here the @key{TAB}, two spaces, and @key{RET} are shown
12288 literally in the pattern.)
12289
12290 This regular expression can be deciphered as follows:
12291
12292 @table @code
12293 @item [.?!]
12294 The first part of the pattern is the three characters, a period, a question
12295 mark and an exclamation mark, within square brackets. The pattern must
12296 begin with one or other of these characters.
12297
12298 @item []\"')@}]*
12299 The second part of the pattern is the group of closing braces and
12300 quotation marks, which can appear zero or more times. These may follow
12301 the period, question mark or exclamation mark. In a regular expression,
12302 the backslash, @samp{\}, followed by the double quotation mark,
12303 @samp{"}, indicates the class of string-quote characters. Usually, the
12304 double quotation mark is the only character in this class. The
12305 asterisk, @samp{*}, indicates that the items in the previous group (the
12306 group surrounded by square brackets, @samp{[]}) may be repeated zero or
12307 more times.
12308
12309 @item \\($\\| \\| \\)
12310 The third part of the pattern is one or other of: either the end of a
12311 line, or two blank spaces, or a tab. The double back-slashes are used
12312 to prevent Emacs from reading the parentheses and vertical bars as part
12313 of the search pattern; the parentheses are used to mark the group and
12314 the vertical bars are used to indicated that the patterns to either side
12315 of them are alternatives. The dollar sign is used to indicate the end
12316 of a line and both the two spaces and the tab are each inserted as is to
12317 indicate what they are.
12318
12319 @item [@key{RET}]*
12320 Finally, the last part of the pattern indicates that the end of the line
12321 or the whitespace following the period, question mark or exclamation
12322 mark may, but need not, be followed by one or more carriage returns. In
12323 the pattern, the carriage return is inserted as an actual carriage
12324 return between square brackets but here it is shown as @key{RET}.
12325 @end table
12326 @end ignore
12327
12328 @node re-search-forward
12329 @section The @code{re-search-forward} Function
12330 @findex re-search-forward
12331
12332 The @code{re-search-forward} function is very like the
12333 @code{search-forward} function. (@xref{search-forward, , The
12334 @code{search-forward} Function}.)
12335
12336 @code{re-search-forward} searches for a regular expression. If the
12337 search is successful, it leaves point immediately after the last
12338 character in the target. If the search is backwards, it leaves point
12339 just before the first character in the target. You may tell
12340 @code{re-search-forward} to return @code{t} for true. (Moving point
12341 is therefore a ``side effect''.)
12342
12343 Like @code{search-forward}, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes
12344 four arguments:
12345
12346 @enumerate
12347 @item
12348 The first argument is the regular expression that the function searches
12349 for. The regular expression will be a string between quotation marks.
12350
12351 @item
12352 The optional second argument limits how far the function will search; it is a
12353 bound, which is specified as a position in the buffer.
12354
12355 @item
12356 The optional third argument specifies how the function responds to
12357 failure: @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
12358 signal an error (and print a message) when the search fails; any other
12359 value causes it to return @code{nil} if the search fails and @code{t}
12360 if the search succeeds.
12361
12362 @item
12363 The optional fourth argument is the repeat count. A negative repeat
12364 count causes @code{re-search-forward} to search backwards.
12365 @end enumerate
12366
12367 @need 800
12368 The template for @code{re-search-forward} looks like this:
12369
12370 @smallexample
12371 @group
12372 (re-search-forward "@var{regular-expression}"
12373 @var{limit-of-search}
12374 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
12375 @var{repeat-count})
12376 @end group
12377 @end smallexample
12378
12379 The second, third, and fourth arguments are optional. However, if you
12380 want to pass a value to either or both of the last two arguments, you
12381 must also pass a value to all the preceding arguments. Otherwise, the
12382 Lisp interpreter will mistake which argument you are passing the value
12383 to.
12384
12385 @need 1200
12386 In the @code{forward-sentence} function, the regular expression will be
12387 the value of the variable @code{sentence-end}. In simple form, that is:
12388
12389 @smallexample
12390 @group
12391 "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12392 ]*"
12393 @end group
12394 @end smallexample
12395
12396 @noindent
12397 The limit of the search will be the end of the paragraph (since a
12398 sentence cannot go beyond a paragraph). If the search fails, the
12399 function will return @code{nil}; and the repeat count will be provided
12400 by the argument to the @code{forward-sentence} function.
12401
12402 @node forward-sentence
12403 @section @code{forward-sentence}
12404 @findex forward-sentence
12405
12406 The command to move the cursor forward a sentence is a straightforward
12407 illustration of how to use regular expression searches in Emacs Lisp.
12408 Indeed, the function looks longer and more complicated than it is; this
12409 is because the function is designed to go backwards as well as forwards;
12410 and, optionally, over more than one sentence. The function is usually
12411 bound to the key command @kbd{M-e}.
12412
12413 @menu
12414 * Complete forward-sentence::
12415 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
12416 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
12417 @end menu
12418
12419 @ifnottex
12420 @node Complete forward-sentence
12421 @unnumberedsubsec Complete @code{forward-sentence} function definition
12422 @end ifnottex
12423
12424 @need 1250
12425 Here is the code for @code{forward-sentence}:
12426
12427 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12428 @smallexample
12429 @group
12430 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12431 "Move forward to next end of sentence. With argument, repeat.
12432 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to start of sentence.
12433
12434 The variable `sentence-end' is a regular expression that matches ends of
12435 sentences. Also, every paragraph boundary terminates sentences as well."
12436 @end group
12437 @group
12438 (interactive "p")
12439 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12440 (let ((opoint (point))
12441 (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12442 (while (< arg 0)
12443 (let ((pos (point))
12444 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12445 (if (and (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)
12446 (or (< (match-end 0) pos)
12447 (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)))
12448 (goto-char (match-end 0))
12449 (goto-char par-beg)))
12450 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12451 @end group
12452 @group
12453 (while (> arg 0)
12454 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12455 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12456 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12457 (goto-char par-end)))
12458 (setq arg (1- arg)))
12459 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)))
12460 @end group
12461 @end smallexample
12462
12463 @ignore
12464 GNU Emacs 21
12465 @smallexample
12466 @group
12467 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12468 "Move forward to next sentence-end. With argument, repeat.
12469 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to sentence-beginning.
12470 Sentence ends are identified by the value of sentence-end
12471 treated as a regular expression. Also, every paragraph boundary
12472 terminates sentences as well."
12473 @end group
12474 @group
12475 (interactive "p")
12476 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12477 (while (< arg 0)
12478 (let ((par-beg
12479 (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12480 (if (re-search-backward
12481 (concat sentence-end "[^ \t\n]") par-beg t)
12482 (goto-char (1- (match-end 0)))
12483 (goto-char par-beg)))
12484 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12485 (while (> arg 0)
12486 (let ((par-end
12487 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12488 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12489 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12490 (goto-char par-end)))
12491 (setq arg (1- arg))))
12492 @end group
12493 @end smallexample
12494 @end ignore
12495
12496 The function looks long at first sight and it is best to look at its
12497 skeleton first, and then its muscle. The way to see the skeleton is to
12498 look at the expressions that start in the left-most columns:
12499
12500 @smallexample
12501 @group
12502 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12503 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
12504 (interactive "p")
12505 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12506 (let ((opoint (point)) (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12507 (while (< arg 0)
12508 (let ((pos (point))
12509 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12510 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-backwards}
12511 (while (> arg 0)
12512 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12513 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-forwards}
12514 @var{handle-forms-and-equivalent}
12515 @end group
12516 @end smallexample
12517
12518 This looks much simpler! The function definition consists of
12519 documentation, an @code{interactive} expression, an @code{or}
12520 expression, a @code{let} expression, and @code{while} loops.
12521
12522 Let's look at each of these parts in turn.
12523
12524 We note that the documentation is thorough and understandable.
12525
12526 The function has an @code{interactive "p"} declaration. This means
12527 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the
12528 function as its argument. (This will be a number.) If the function
12529 is not passed an argument (it is optional) then the argument
12530 @code{arg} will be bound to 1.
12531
12532 When @code{forward-sentence} is called non-interactively without an
12533 argument, @code{arg} is bound to @code{nil}. The @code{or} expression
12534 handles this. What it does is either leave the value of @code{arg} as
12535 it is, but only if @code{arg} is bound to a value; or it sets the
12536 value of @code{arg} to 1, in the case when @code{arg} is bound to
12537 @code{nil}.
12538
12539 Next is a @code{let}. That specifies the values of two local
12540 variables, @code{point} and @code{sentence-end}. The local value of
12541 point, from before the search, is used in the
12542 @code{constrain-to-field} function which handles forms and
12543 equivalents. The @code{sentence-end} variable is set by the
12544 @code{sentence-end} function.
12545
12546 @node fwd-sentence while loops
12547 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{while} loops
12548
12549 Two @code{while} loops follow. The first @code{while} has a
12550 true-or-false-test that tests true if the prefix argument for
12551 @code{forward-sentence} is a negative number. This is for going
12552 backwards. The body of this loop is similar to the body of the second
12553 @code{while} clause, but it is not exactly the same. We will skip
12554 this @code{while} loop and concentrate on the second @code{while}
12555 loop.
12556
12557 @need 1500
12558 The second @code{while} loop is for moving point forward. Its skeleton
12559 looks like this:
12560
12561 @smallexample
12562 @group
12563 (while (> arg 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
12564 (let @var{varlist}
12565 (if (@var{true-or-false-test})
12566 @var{then-part}
12567 @var{else-part}
12568 (setq arg (1- arg)))) ; @code{while} @r{loop decrementer}
12569 @end group
12570 @end smallexample
12571
12572 The @code{while} loop is of the decrementing kind.
12573 (@xref{Decrementing Loop, , A Loop with a Decrementing Counter}.) It
12574 has a true-or-false-test that tests true so long as the counter (in
12575 this case, the variable @code{arg}) is greater than zero; and it has a
12576 decrementer that subtracts 1 from the value of the counter every time
12577 the loop repeats.
12578
12579 If no prefix argument is given to @code{forward-sentence}, which is
12580 the most common way the command is used, this @code{while} loop will
12581 run once, since the value of @code{arg} will be 1.
12582
12583 The body of the @code{while} loop consists of a @code{let} expression,
12584 which creates and binds a local variable, and has, as its body, an
12585 @code{if} expression.
12586
12587 @need 1250
12588 The body of the @code{while} loop looks like this:
12589
12590 @smallexample
12591 @group
12592 (let ((par-end
12593 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12594 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12595 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12596 (goto-char par-end)))
12597 @end group
12598 @end smallexample
12599
12600 The @code{let} expression creates and binds the local variable
12601 @code{par-end}. As we shall see, this local variable is designed to
12602 provide a bound or limit to the regular expression search. If the
12603 search fails to find a proper sentence ending in the paragraph, it will
12604 stop on reaching the end of the paragraph.
12605
12606 But first, let us examine how @code{par-end} is bound to the value of
12607 the end of the paragraph. What happens is that the @code{let} sets the
12608 value of @code{par-end} to the value returned when the Lisp interpreter
12609 evaluates the expression
12610
12611 @smallexample
12612 @group
12613 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))
12614 @end group
12615 @end smallexample
12616
12617 @noindent
12618 In this expression, @code{(end-of-paragraph-text)} moves point to the
12619 end of the paragraph, @code{(point)} returns the value of point, and then
12620 @code{save-excursion} restores point to its original position. Thus,
12621 the @code{let} binds @code{par-end} to the value returned by the
12622 @code{save-excursion} expression, which is the position of the end of
12623 the paragraph. (The @code{end-of-paragraph-text} function uses
12624 @code{forward-paragraph}, which we will discuss shortly.)
12625
12626 @need 1200
12627 Emacs next evaluates the body of the @code{let}, which is an @code{if}
12628 expression that looks like this:
12629
12630 @smallexample
12631 @group
12632 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t) ; @r{if-part}
12633 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n") ; @r{then-part}
12634 (goto-char par-end))) ; @r{else-part}
12635 @end group
12636 @end smallexample
12637
12638 The @code{if} tests whether its first argument is true and if so,
12639 evaluates its then-part; otherwise, the Emacs Lisp interpreter
12640 evaluates the else-part. The true-or-false-test of the @code{if}
12641 expression is the regular expression search.
12642
12643 It may seem odd to have what looks like the ``real work'' of
12644 the @code{forward-sentence} function buried here, but this is a common
12645 way this kind of operation is carried out in Lisp.
12646
12647 @node fwd-sentence re-search
12648 @unnumberedsubsec The regular expression search
12649
12650 The @code{re-search-forward} function searches for the end of the
12651 sentence, that is, for the pattern defined by the @code{sentence-end}
12652 regular expression. If the pattern is found---if the end of the sentence is
12653 found---then the @code{re-search-forward} function does two things:
12654
12655 @enumerate
12656 @item
12657 The @code{re-search-forward} function carries out a side effect, which
12658 is to move point to the end of the occurrence found.
12659
12660 @item
12661 The @code{re-search-forward} function returns a value of true. This is
12662 the value received by the @code{if}, and means that the search was
12663 successful.
12664 @end enumerate
12665
12666 @noindent
12667 The side effect, the movement of point, is completed before the
12668 @code{if} function is handed the value returned by the successful
12669 conclusion of the search.
12670
12671 When the @code{if} function receives the value of true from a successful
12672 call to @code{re-search-forward}, the @code{if} evaluates the then-part,
12673 which is the expression @code{(skip-chars-backward " \t\n")}. This
12674 expression moves backwards over any blank spaces, tabs or carriage
12675 returns until a printed character is found and then leaves point after
12676 the character. Since point has already been moved to the end of the
12677 pattern that marks the end of the sentence, this action leaves point
12678 right after the closing printed character of the sentence, which is
12679 usually a period.
12680
12681 On the other hand, if the @code{re-search-forward} function fails to
12682 find a pattern marking the end of the sentence, the function returns
12683 false. The false then causes the @code{if} to evaluate its third
12684 argument, which is @code{(goto-char par-end)}: it moves point to the
12685 end of the paragraph.
12686
12687 (And if the text is in a form or equivalent, and point may not move
12688 fully, then the @code{constrain-to-field} function comes into play.)
12689
12690 Regular expression searches are exceptionally useful and the pattern
12691 illustrated by @code{re-search-forward}, in which the search is the
12692 test of an @code{if} expression, is handy. You will see or write code
12693 incorporating this pattern often.
12694
12695 @node forward-paragraph
12696 @section @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
12697 @findex forward-paragraph
12698
12699 @ignore
12700 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12701 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
12702 "Move forward to end of paragraph.
12703 With argument ARG, do it ARG times;
12704 a negative argument ARG = -N means move backward N paragraphs.
12705
12706 A line which `paragraph-start' matches either separates paragraphs
12707 \(if `paragraph-separate' matches it also) or is the first line of a paragraph.
12708 A paragraph end is the beginning of a line which is not part of the paragraph
12709 to which the end of the previous line belongs, or the end of the buffer.
12710 Returns the count of paragraphs left to move."
12711 (interactive "p")
12712 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12713 (let* ((opoint (point))
12714 (fill-prefix-regexp
12715 (and fill-prefix (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
12716 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12717 (regexp-quote fill-prefix)))
12718 ;; Remove ^ from paragraph-start and paragraph-sep if they are there.
12719 ;; These regexps shouldn't be anchored, because we look for them
12720 ;; starting at the left-margin. This allows paragraph commands to
12721 ;; work normally with indented text.
12722 ;; This hack will not find problem cases like "whatever\\|^something".
12723 (parstart (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-start))
12724 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-start 0)))
12725 (substring paragraph-start 1)
12726 paragraph-start))
12727 (parsep (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-separate))
12728 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-separate 0)))
12729 (substring paragraph-separate 1)
12730 paragraph-separate))
12731 (parsep
12732 (if fill-prefix-regexp
12733 (concat parsep "\\|"
12734 fill-prefix-regexp "[ \t]*$")
12735 parsep))
12736 ;; This is used for searching.
12737 (sp-parstart (concat "^[ \t]*\\(?:" parstart "\\|" parsep "\\)"))
12738 start found-start)
12739 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp)))
12740 (if (and (not (looking-at parsep))
12741 (re-search-backward "^\n" (max (1- (point)) (point-min)) t)
12742 (looking-at parsep))
12743 (setq arg (1+ arg))
12744 (setq start (point))
12745 ;; Move back over paragraph-separating lines.
12746 (forward-char -1) (beginning-of-line)
12747 (while (and (not (bobp))
12748 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12749 (looking-at parsep)))
12750 (forward-line -1))
12751 (if (bobp)
12752 nil
12753 (setq arg (1+ arg))
12754 ;; Go to end of the previous (non-separating) line.
12755 (end-of-line)
12756 ;; Search back for line that starts or separates paragraphs.
12757 (if (if fill-prefix-regexp
12758 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
12759 (let (multiple-lines)
12760 (while (and (progn (beginning-of-line) (not (bobp)))
12761 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12762 (not (looking-at parsep)))
12763 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
12764 (unless (= (point) start)
12765 (setq multiple-lines t))
12766 (forward-line -1))
12767 (move-to-left-margin)
12768 ;; This deleted code caused a long hanging-indent line
12769 ;; not to be filled together with the following lines.
12770 ;; ;; Don't move back over a line before the paragraph
12771 ;; ;; which doesn't start with fill-prefix
12772 ;; ;; unless that is the only line we've moved over.
12773 ;; (and (not (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
12774 ;; multiple-lines
12775 ;; (forward-line 1))
12776 (not (bobp)))
12777 (while (and (re-search-backward sp-parstart nil 1)
12778 (setq found-start t)
12779 ;; Found a candidate, but need to check if it is a
12780 ;; REAL parstart.
12781 (progn (setq start (point))
12782 (move-to-left-margin)
12783 (not (looking-at parsep)))
12784 (not (and (looking-at parstart)
12785 (or (not use-hard-newlines)
12786 (bobp)
12787 (get-text-property
12788 (1- start) 'hard)))))
12789 (setq found-start nil)
12790 (goto-char start))
12791 found-start)
12792 ;; Found one.
12793 (progn
12794 ;; Move forward over paragraph separators.
12795 ;; We know this cannot reach the place we started
12796 ;; because we know we moved back over a non-separator.
12797 (while (and (not (eobp))
12798 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12799 (looking-at parsep)))
12800 (forward-line 1))
12801 ;; If line before paragraph is just margin, back up to there.
12802 (end-of-line 0)
12803 (if (> (current-column) (current-left-margin))
12804 (forward-char 1)
12805 (skip-chars-backward " \t")
12806 (if (not (bolp))
12807 (forward-line 1))))
12808 ;; No starter or separator line => use buffer beg.
12809 (goto-char (point-min))))))
12810
12811 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
12812 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
12813 (while (and (not (eobp))
12814 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
12815 (looking-at parsep))
12816 (forward-line 1))
12817 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
12818 ;; ... and one more line.
12819 (forward-line 1)
12820 (if fill-prefix-regexp
12821 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
12822 (while (and (not (eobp))
12823 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
12824 (not (looking-at parsep))
12825 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
12826 (forward-line 1))
12827 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
12828 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
12829 (goto-char start)
12830 (not (eobp)))
12831 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12832 (not (looking-at parsep)))
12833 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
12834 (and use-hard-newlines
12835 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
12836 (forward-char 1))
12837 (if (< (point) (point-max))
12838 (goto-char start))))
12839 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)
12840 ;; Return the number of steps that could not be done.
12841 arg))
12842 @end ignore
12843
12844 The @code{forward-paragraph} function moves point forward to the end
12845 of the paragraph. It is usually bound to @kbd{M-@}} and makes use of a
12846 number of functions that are important in themselves, including
12847 @code{let*}, @code{match-beginning}, and @code{looking-at}.
12848
12849 The function definition for @code{forward-paragraph} is considerably
12850 longer than the function definition for @code{forward-sentence}
12851 because it works with a paragraph, each line of which may begin with a
12852 fill prefix.
12853
12854 A fill prefix consists of a string of characters that are repeated at
12855 the beginning of each line. For example, in Lisp code, it is a
12856 convention to start each line of a paragraph-long comment with
12857 @samp{;;; }. In Text mode, four blank spaces make up another common
12858 fill prefix, creating an indented paragraph. (@xref{Fill Prefix, , ,
12859 emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for more information about fill
12860 prefixes.)
12861
12862 The existence of a fill prefix means that in addition to being able to
12863 find the end of a paragraph whose lines begin on the left-most
12864 column, the @code{forward-paragraph} function must be able to find the
12865 end of a paragraph when all or many of the lines in the buffer begin
12866 with the fill prefix.
12867
12868 Moreover, it is sometimes practical to ignore a fill prefix that
12869 exists, especially when blank lines separate paragraphs.
12870 This is an added complication.
12871
12872 @menu
12873 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
12874 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
12875 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
12876 @end menu
12877
12878 @ifnottex
12879 @node forward-paragraph in brief
12880 @unnumberedsubsec Shortened @code{forward-paragraph} function definition
12881 @end ifnottex
12882
12883 Rather than print all of the @code{forward-paragraph} function, we
12884 will only print parts of it. Read without preparation, the function
12885 can be daunting!
12886
12887 @need 800
12888 In outline, the function looks like this:
12889
12890 @smallexample
12891 @group
12892 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
12893 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
12894 (interactive "p")
12895 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12896 (let*
12897 @var{varlist}
12898 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp))) ; @r{backward-moving-code}
12899 @dots{}
12900 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp))) ; @r{forward-moving-code}
12901 @dots{}
12902 @end group
12903 @end smallexample
12904
12905 The first parts of the function are routine: the function's argument
12906 list consists of one optional argument. Documentation follows.
12907
12908 The lower case @samp{p} in the @code{interactive} declaration means
12909 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the function.
12910 This will be a number, and is the repeat count of how many paragraphs
12911 point will move. The @code{or} expression in the next line handles
12912 the common case when no argument is passed to the function, which occurs
12913 if the function is called from other code rather than interactively.
12914 This case was described earlier. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
12915 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Now we reach the end of the
12916 familiar part of this function.
12917
12918 @node fwd-para let
12919 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{let*} expression
12920
12921 The next line of the @code{forward-paragraph} function begins a
12922 @code{let*} expression. This is a different than @code{let}. The
12923 symbol is @code{let*} not @code{let}.
12924
12925 @findex let*
12926 The @code{let*} special form is like @code{let} except that Emacs sets
12927 each variable in sequence, one after another, and variables in the
12928 latter part of the varlist can make use of the values to which Emacs
12929 set variables in the earlier part of the varlist.
12930
12931 @ignore
12932 ( refappend save-excursion, , code save-excursion in code append-to-buffer .)
12933 @end ignore
12934
12935 (@ref{append save-excursion, , @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
12936
12937 In the @code{let*} expression in this function, Emacs binds a total of
12938 seven variables: @code{opoint}, @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
12939 @code{parstart}, @code{parsep}, @code{sp-parstart}, @code{start}, and
12940 @code{found-start}.
12941
12942 The variable @code{parsep} appears twice, first, to remove instances
12943 of @samp{^}, and second, to handle fill prefixes.
12944
12945 The variable @code{opoint} is just the value of @code{point}. As you
12946 can guess, it is used in a @code{constrain-to-field} expression, just
12947 as in @code{forward-sentence}.
12948
12949 The variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is set to the value returned by
12950 evaluating the following list:
12951
12952 @smallexample
12953 @group
12954 (and fill-prefix
12955 (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
12956 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12957 (regexp-quote fill-prefix))
12958 @end group
12959 @end smallexample
12960
12961 @noindent
12962 This is an expression whose first element is the @code{and} special form.
12963
12964 As we learned earlier (@pxref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new}
12965 function}), the @code{and} special form evaluates each of its
12966 arguments until one of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in
12967 which case the @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if
12968 none of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value
12969 resulting from evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such
12970 a value is not @code{nil}, it is considered true in Lisp.) In other
12971 words, an @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its
12972 arguments are true.
12973 @findex and
12974
12975 In this case, the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to a
12976 non-@code{nil} value only if the following four expressions produce a
12977 true (i.e., a non-@code{nil}) value when they are evaluated; otherwise,
12978 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to @code{nil}.
12979
12980 @table @code
12981 @item fill-prefix
12982 When this variable is evaluated, the value of the fill prefix, if any,
12983 is returned. If there is no fill prefix, this variable returns
12984 @code{nil}.
12985
12986 @item (not (equal fill-prefix "")
12987 This expression checks whether an existing fill prefix is an empty
12988 string, that is, a string with no characters in it. An empty string is
12989 not a useful fill prefix.
12990
12991 @item (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12992 This expression returns @code{nil} if the variable
12993 @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix} has been turned on by being set to a
12994 true value such as @code{t}.
12995
12996 @item (regexp-quote fill-prefix)
12997 This is the last argument to the @code{and} special form. If all the
12998 arguments to the @code{and} are true, the value resulting from
12999 evaluating this expression will be returned by the @code{and} expression
13000 and bound to the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
13001 @end table
13002
13003 @findex regexp-quote
13004 @noindent
13005 The result of evaluating this @code{and} expression successfully is that
13006 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be bound to the value of
13007 @code{fill-prefix} as modified by the @code{regexp-quote} function.
13008 What @code{regexp-quote} does is read a string and return a regular
13009 expression that will exactly match the string and match nothing else.
13010 This means that @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be set to a value that
13011 will exactly match the fill prefix if the fill prefix exists.
13012 Otherwise, the variable will be set to @code{nil}.
13013
13014 The next two local variables in the @code{let*} expression are
13015 designed to remove instances of @samp{^} from @code{parstart} and
13016 @code{parsep}, the local variables which indicate the paragraph start
13017 and the paragraph separator. The next expression sets @code{parsep}
13018 again. That is to handle fill prefixes.
13019
13020 This is the setting that requires the definition call @code{let*}
13021 rather than @code{let}. The true-or-false-test for the @code{if}
13022 depends on whether the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} evaluates to
13023 @code{nil} or some other value.
13024
13025 If @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does not have a value, Emacs evaluates
13026 the else-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to
13027 its local value. (@code{parsep} is a regular expression that matches
13028 what separates paragraphs.)
13029
13030 But if @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does have a value, Emacs evaluates
13031 the then-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to a
13032 regular expression that includes the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} as part
13033 of the pattern.
13034
13035 Specifically, @code{parsep} is set to the original value of the
13036 paragraph separate regular expression concatenated with an alternative
13037 expression that consists of the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} followed by
13038 optional whitespace to the end of the line. The whitespace is defined
13039 by @w{@code{"[ \t]*$"}}.) The @samp{\\|} defines this portion of the
13040 regexp as an alternative to @code{parsep}.
13041
13042 According to a comment in the code, the next local variable,
13043 @code{sp-parstart}, is used for searching, and then the final two,
13044 @code{start} and @code{found-start}, are set to @code{nil}.
13045
13046 Now we get into the body of the @code{let*}. The first part of the body
13047 of the @code{let*} deals with the case when the function is given a
13048 negative argument and is therefore moving backwards. We will skip this
13049 section.
13050
13051 @node fwd-para while
13052 @unnumberedsubsec The forward motion @code{while} loop
13053
13054 The second part of the body of the @code{let*} deals with forward
13055 motion. It is a @code{while} loop that repeats itself so long as the
13056 value of @code{arg} is greater than zero. In the most common use of
13057 the function, the value of the argument is 1, so the body of the
13058 @code{while} loop is evaluated exactly once, and the cursor moves
13059 forward one paragraph.
13060
13061 @ignore
13062 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13063
13064 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13065 (while (and (not (eobp))
13066 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13067 (looking-at parsep))
13068 (forward-line 1))
13069 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13070 ;; ... and one more line.
13071 (forward-line 1)
13072
13073 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13074 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13075 (while (and (not (eobp))
13076 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13077 (not (looking-at parsep))
13078 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13079 (forward-line 1))
13080
13081 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13082 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13083 (goto-char start)
13084 (not (eobp)))
13085 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13086 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13087 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13088 (and use-hard-newlines
13089 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13090 (forward-char 1))
13091
13092 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13093 (goto-char start))))
13094 @end ignore
13095
13096 This part handles three situations: when point is between paragraphs,
13097 when there is a fill prefix and when there is no fill prefix.
13098
13099 @need 800
13100 The @code{while} loop looks like this:
13101
13102 @smallexample
13103 @group
13104 ;; @r{going forwards and not at the end of the buffer}
13105 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13106
13107 ;; @r{between paragraphs}
13108 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13109 (while (and (not (eobp))
13110 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13111 (looking-at parsep))
13112 (forward-line 1))
13113 ;; @r{This decrements the loop}
13114 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13115 ;; ... and one more line.
13116 (forward-line 1)
13117 @end group
13118
13119 @group
13120 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13121 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13122 ;; we go forward line by line
13123 (while (and (not (eobp))
13124 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13125 (not (looking-at parsep))
13126 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13127 (forward-line 1))
13128 @end group
13129
13130 @group
13131 ;; There is no fill prefix;
13132 ;; we go forward character by character
13133 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13134 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13135 (goto-char start)
13136 (not (eobp)))
13137 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13138 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13139 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13140 (and use-hard-newlines
13141 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13142 (forward-char 1))
13143 @end group
13144
13145 @group
13146 ;; and if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the end,
13147 ;; go to whatever was found in the regular expression search
13148 ;; for sp-parstart
13149 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13150 (goto-char start))))
13151 @end group
13152 @end smallexample
13153
13154 @findex eobp
13155 We can see that this is a decrementing counter @code{while} loop,
13156 using the expression @code{(setq arg (1- arg))} as the decrementer.
13157 That expression is not far from the @code{while}, but is hidden in
13158 another Lisp macro, an @code{unless} macro. Unless we are at the end
13159 of the buffer---that is what the @code{eobp} function determines; it
13160 is an abbreviation of @samp{End Of Buffer P}---we decrease the value
13161 of @code{arg} by one.
13162
13163 (If we are at the end of the buffer, we cannot go forward any more and
13164 the next loop of the @code{while} expression will test false since the
13165 test is an @code{and} with @code{(not (eobp))}. The @code{not}
13166 function means exactly as you expect; it is another name for
13167 @code{null}, a function that returns true when its argument is false.)
13168
13169 Interestingly, the loop count is not decremented until we leave the
13170 space between paragraphs, unless we come to the end of buffer or stop
13171 seeing the local value of the paragraph separator.
13172
13173 That second @code{while} also has a @code{(move-to-left-margin)}
13174 expression. The function is self-explanatory. It is inside a
13175 @code{progn} expression and not the last element of its body, so it is
13176 only invoked for its side effect, which is to move point to the left
13177 margin of the current line.
13178
13179 @findex looking-at
13180 The @code{looking-at} function is also self-explanatory; it returns
13181 true if the text after point matches the regular expression given as
13182 its argument.
13183
13184 The rest of the body of the loop looks difficult at first, but makes
13185 sense as you come to understand it.
13186
13187 @need 800
13188 First consider what happens if there is a fill prefix:
13189
13190 @smallexample
13191 @group
13192 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13193 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13194 ;; we go forward line by line
13195 (while (and (not (eobp))
13196 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13197 (not (looking-at parsep))
13198 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13199 (forward-line 1))
13200 @end group
13201 @end smallexample
13202
13203 @noindent
13204 This expression moves point forward line by line so long
13205 as four conditions are true:
13206
13207 @enumerate
13208 @item
13209 Point is not at the end of the buffer.
13210
13211 @item
13212 We can move to the left margin of the text and are
13213 not at the end of the buffer.
13214
13215 @item
13216 The text following point does not separate paragraphs.
13217
13218 @item
13219 The pattern following point is the fill prefix regular expression.
13220 @end enumerate
13221
13222 The last condition may be puzzling, until you remember that point was
13223 moved to the beginning of the line early in the @code{forward-paragraph}
13224 function. This means that if the text has a fill prefix, the
13225 @code{looking-at} function will see it.
13226
13227 @need 1250
13228 Consider what happens when there is no fill prefix.
13229
13230 @smallexample
13231 @group
13232 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13233 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13234 (goto-char start)
13235 (not (eobp)))
13236 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13237 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13238 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13239 (and use-hard-newlines
13240 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13241 (forward-char 1))
13242 @end group
13243 @end smallexample
13244
13245 @noindent
13246 This @code{while} loop has us searching forward for
13247 @code{sp-parstart}, which is the combination of possible whitespace
13248 with the local value of the start of a paragraph or of a paragraph
13249 separator. (The latter two are within an expression starting
13250 @code{\(?:} so that they are not referenced by the
13251 @code{match-beginning} function.)
13252
13253 @need 800
13254 The two expressions,
13255
13256 @smallexample
13257 @group
13258 (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13259 (goto-char start)
13260 @end group
13261 @end smallexample
13262
13263 @noindent
13264 mean go to the start of the text matched by the regular expression
13265 search.
13266
13267 The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression is new. It returns a number
13268 specifying the location of the start of the text that was matched by
13269 the last search.
13270
13271 The @code{match-beginning} function is used here because of a
13272 characteristic of a forward search: a successful forward search,
13273 regardless of whether it is a plain search or a regular expression
13274 search, moves point to the end of the text that is found. In this
13275 case, a successful search moves point to the end of the pattern for
13276 @code{sp-parstart}.
13277
13278 However, we want to put point at the end of the current paragraph, not
13279 somewhere else. Indeed, since the search possibly includes the
13280 paragraph separator, point may end up at the beginning of the next one
13281 unless we use an expression that includes @code{match-beginning}.
13282
13283 @findex match-beginning
13284 When given an argument of 0, @code{match-beginning} returns the
13285 position that is the start of the text matched by the most recent
13286 search. In this case, the most recent search looks for
13287 @code{sp-parstart}. The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression returns
13288 the beginning position of that pattern, rather than the end position
13289 of that pattern.
13290
13291 (Incidentally, when passed a positive number as an argument, the
13292 @code{match-beginning} function returns the location of point at that
13293 parenthesized expression in the last search unless that parenthesized
13294 expression begins with @code{\(?:}. I don't know why @code{\(?:}
13295 appears here since the argument is 0.)
13296
13297 @need 1250
13298 The last expression when there is no fill prefix is
13299
13300 @smallexample
13301 @group
13302 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13303 (goto-char start))))
13304 @end group
13305 @end smallexample
13306
13307 @noindent
13308 This says that if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the
13309 end, point should move to the beginning of whatever was found by the
13310 regular expression search for @code{sp-parstart}.
13311
13312 The full definition for the @code{forward-paragraph} function not only
13313 includes code for going forwards, but also code for going backwards.
13314
13315 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs and you want to see the
13316 whole function, you can type @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function})
13317 and the name of the function. This gives you the function
13318 documentation and the name of the library containing the function's
13319 source. Place point over the name of the library and press the RET
13320 key; you will be taken directly to the source. (Be sure to install
13321 your sources! Without them, you are like a person who tries to drive
13322 a car with his eyes shut!)
13323
13324 @node etags
13325 @section Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File
13326 @findex etags
13327 @cindex @file{TAGS} file, create own
13328
13329 Besides @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}), another way to see the
13330 source of a function is to type @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) and the
13331 name of the function when prompted for it. This is a good habit to
13332 get into. The @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) command takes you directly
13333 to the source for a function, variable, or node. The function depends
13334 on tags tables to tell it where to go.
13335
13336 If the @code{find-tag} function first asks you for the name of a
13337 @file{TAGS} table, give it the name of a @file{TAGS} file such as
13338 @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}. (The exact path to your
13339 @file{TAGS} file depends on how your copy of Emacs was installed. I
13340 just told you the location that provides both my C and my Emacs Lisp
13341 sources.)
13342
13343 You can also create your own @file{TAGS} file for directories that
13344 lack one.
13345
13346 You often need to build and install tags tables yourself. They are
13347 not built automatically. A tags table is called a @file{TAGS} file;
13348 the name is in upper case letters.
13349
13350 You can create a @file{TAGS} file by calling the @code{etags} program
13351 that comes as a part of the Emacs distribution. Usually, @code{etags}
13352 is compiled and installed when Emacs is built. (@code{etags} is not
13353 an Emacs Lisp function or a part of Emacs; it is a C program.)
13354
13355 @need 1250
13356 To create a @file{TAGS} file, first switch to the directory in which
13357 you want to create the file. In Emacs you can do this with the
13358 @kbd{M-x cd} command, or by visiting a file in the directory, or by
13359 listing the directory with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the
13360 compile command, with @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute
13361
13362 @smallexample
13363 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
13364 @end smallexample
13365
13366 @noindent
13367 to create a @file{TAGS} file for Emacs Lisp.
13368
13369 For example, if you have a large number of files in your
13370 @file{~/emacs} directory, as I do---I have 137 @file{.el} files in it,
13371 of which I load 12---you can create a @file{TAGS} file for the Emacs
13372 Lisp files in that directory.
13373
13374 @need 1250
13375 The @code{etags} program takes all the usual shell ``wildcards''. For
13376 example, if you have two directories for which you want a single
13377 @file{TAGS} file, type @w{@code{etags *.el ../elisp/*.el}}, where
13378 @file{../elisp/} is the second directory:
13379
13380 @smallexample
13381 M-x compile RET etags *.el ../elisp/*.el RET
13382 @end smallexample
13383
13384 @need 1250
13385 Type
13386
13387 @smallexample
13388 M-x compile RET etags --help RET
13389 @end smallexample
13390
13391 @noindent
13392 to see a list of the options accepted by @code{etags} as well as a
13393 list of supported languages.
13394
13395 The @code{etags} program handles more than 20 languages, including
13396 Emacs Lisp, Common Lisp, Scheme, C, C++, Ada, Fortran, HTML, Java,
13397 LaTeX, Pascal, Perl, PostScript, Python, TeX, Texinfo, makefiles, and
13398 most assemblers. The program has no switches for specifying the
13399 language; it recognizes the language in an input file according to its
13400 file name and contents.
13401
13402 @file{etags} is very helpful when you are writing code yourself and
13403 want to refer back to functions you have already written. Just run
13404 @code{etags} again at intervals as you write new functions, so they
13405 become part of the @file{TAGS} file.
13406
13407 If you think an appropriate @file{TAGS} file already exists for what
13408 you want, but do not know where it is, you can use the @code{locate}
13409 program to attempt to find it.
13410
13411 Type @w{@kbd{M-x locate @key{RET} TAGS @key{RET}}} and Emacs will list
13412 for you the full path names of all your @file{TAGS} files. On my
13413 system, this command lists 34 @file{TAGS} files. On the other hand, a
13414 ``plain vanilla'' system I recently installed did not contain any
13415 @file{TAGS} files.
13416
13417 If the tags table you want has been created, you can use the @code{M-x
13418 visit-tags-table} command to specify it. Otherwise, you will need to
13419 create the tag table yourself and then use @code{M-x
13420 visit-tags-table}.
13421
13422 @subsubheading Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13423 @cindex Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13424 @cindex Tags in the Emacs sources
13425 @findex make tags
13426
13427 The GNU Emacs sources come with a @file{Makefile} that contains a
13428 sophisticated @code{etags} command that creates, collects, and merges
13429 tags tables from all over the Emacs sources and puts the information
13430 into one @file{TAGS} file in the @file{src/} directory. (The
13431 @file{src/} directory is below the top level of your Emacs directory.)
13432
13433 @need 1250
13434 To build this @file{TAGS} file, go to the top level of your Emacs
13435 source directory and run the compile command @code{make tags}:
13436
13437 @smallexample
13438 M-x compile RET make tags RET
13439 @end smallexample
13440
13441 @noindent
13442 (The @code{make tags} command works well with the GNU Emacs sources,
13443 as well as with some other source packages.)
13444
13445 For more information, see @ref{Tags, , Tag Tables, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13446 Manual}.
13447
13448 @node Regexp Review
13449 @section Review
13450
13451 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
13452
13453 @table @code
13454 @item while
13455 Repeatedly evaluate the body of the expression so long as the first
13456 element of the body tests true. Then return @code{nil}. (The
13457 expression is evaluated only for its side effects.)
13458
13459 @need 1250
13460 For example:
13461
13462 @smallexample
13463 @group
13464 (let ((foo 2))
13465 (while (> foo 0)
13466 (insert (format "foo is %d.\n" foo))
13467 (setq foo (1- foo))))
13468
13469 @result{} foo is 2.
13470 foo is 1.
13471 nil
13472 @end group
13473 @end smallexample
13474
13475 @noindent
13476 (The @code{insert} function inserts its arguments at point; the
13477 @code{format} function returns a string formatted from its arguments
13478 the way @code{message} formats its arguments; @code{\n} produces a new
13479 line.)
13480
13481 @item re-search-forward
13482 Search for a pattern, and if the pattern is found, move point to rest
13483 just after it.
13484
13485 @noindent
13486 Takes four arguments, like @code{search-forward}:
13487
13488 @enumerate
13489 @item
13490 A regular expression that specifies the pattern to search for.
13491 (Remember to put quotation marks around this argument!)
13492
13493 @item
13494 Optionally, the limit of the search.
13495
13496 @item
13497 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
13498 error message.
13499
13500 @item
13501 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
13502 search goes backwards.
13503 @end enumerate
13504
13505 @item let*
13506 Bind some variables locally to particular values,
13507 and then evaluate the remaining arguments, returning the value of the
13508 last one. While binding the local variables, use the local values of
13509 variables bound earlier, if any.
13510
13511 @need 1250
13512 For example:
13513
13514 @smallexample
13515 @group
13516 (let* ((foo 7)
13517 (bar (* 3 foo)))
13518 (message "‘bar’ is %d." bar))
13519 @result{} ‘bar’ is 21.
13520 @end group
13521 @end smallexample
13522
13523 @item match-beginning
13524 Return the position of the start of the text found by the last regular
13525 expression search.
13526
13527 @item looking-at
13528 Return @code{t} for true if the text after point matches the argument,
13529 which should be a regular expression.
13530
13531 @item eobp
13532 Return @code{t} for true if point is at the end of the accessible part
13533 of a buffer. The end of the accessible part is the end of the buffer
13534 if the buffer is not narrowed; it is the end of the narrowed part if
13535 the buffer is narrowed.
13536 @end table
13537
13538 @need 1500
13539 @node re-search Exercises
13540 @section Exercises with @code{re-search-forward}
13541
13542 @itemize @bullet
13543 @item
13544 Write a function to search for a regular expression that matches two
13545 or more blank lines in sequence.
13546
13547 @item
13548 Write a function to search for duplicated words, such as ``the the''.
13549 @xref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13550 Manual}, for information on how to write a regexp (a regular
13551 expression) to match a string that is composed of two identical
13552 halves. You can devise several regexps; some are better than others.
13553 The function I use is described in an appendix, along with several
13554 regexps. @xref{the-the, , @code{the-the} Duplicated Words Function}.
13555 @end itemize
13556
13557 @node Counting Words
13558 @chapter Counting via Repetition and Regexps
13559 @cindex Repetition for word counting
13560 @cindex Regular expressions for word counting
13561
13562 Repetition and regular expression searches are powerful tools that you
13563 often use when you write code in Emacs Lisp. This chapter illustrates
13564 the use of regular expression searches through the construction of
13565 word count commands using @code{while} loops and recursion.
13566
13567 @menu
13568 * Why Count Words::
13569 * @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
13570 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
13571 * Counting Exercise::
13572 @end menu
13573
13574 @ifnottex
13575 @node Why Count Words
13576 @unnumberedsec Counting words
13577 @end ifnottex
13578
13579 The standard Emacs distribution contains functions for counting the
13580 number of lines and words within a region.
13581
13582 Certain types of writing ask you to count words. Thus, if you write
13583 an essay, you may be limited to 800 words; if you write a novel, you
13584 may discipline yourself to write 1000 words a day. It seems odd, but
13585 for a long time, Emacs lacked a word count command. Perhaps people used
13586 Emacs mostly for code or types of documentation that did not require
13587 word counts; or perhaps they restricted themselves to the operating
13588 system word count command, @code{wc}. Alternatively, people may have
13589 followed the publishers' convention and computed a word count by
13590 dividing the number of characters in a document by five.
13591
13592 There are many ways to implement a command to count words. Here are
13593 some examples, which you may wish to compare with the standard Emacs
13594 command, @code{count-words-region}.
13595
13596 @node @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13597 @section The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} Function
13598 @findex @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13599
13600 A word count command could count words in a line, paragraph, region,
13601 or buffer. What should the command cover? You could design the
13602 command to count the number of words in a complete buffer. However,
13603 the Emacs tradition encourages flexibility---you may want to count
13604 words in just a section, rather than all of a buffer. So it makes
13605 more sense to design the command to count the number of words in a
13606 region. Once you have a command to count words in a region, you can,
13607 if you wish, count words in a whole buffer by marking it with
13608 @w{@kbd{C-x h}} (@code{mark-whole-buffer}).
13609
13610 Clearly, counting words is a repetitive act: starting from the
13611 beginning of the region, you count the first word, then the second
13612 word, then the third word, and so on, until you reach the end of the
13613 region. This means that word counting is ideally suited to recursion
13614 or to a @code{while} loop.
13615
13616 @menu
13617 * Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
13618 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
13619 @end menu
13620
13621 @ifnottex
13622 @node Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13623 @unnumberedsubsec Designing @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13624 @end ifnottex
13625
13626 First, we will implement the word count command with a @code{while}
13627 loop, then with recursion. The command will, of course, be
13628 interactive.
13629
13630 @need 800
13631 The template for an interactive function definition is, as always:
13632
13633 @smallexample
13634 @group
13635 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
13636 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
13637 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
13638 @var{body}@dots{})
13639 @end group
13640 @end smallexample
13641
13642 What we need to do is fill in the slots.
13643
13644 The name of the function should be self-explanatory and similar to the
13645 existing @code{count-lines-region} name. This makes the name easier
13646 to remember. @code{count-words-region} is the obvious choice. Since
13647 that name is now used for the standard Emacs command to count words, we
13648 will name our implementation @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
13649
13650 The function counts words within a region. This means that the
13651 argument list must contain symbols that are bound to the two
13652 positions, the beginning and end of the region. These two positions
13653 can be called @samp{beginning} and @samp{end} respectively. The first
13654 line of the documentation should be a single sentence, since that is
13655 all that is printed as documentation by a command such as
13656 @code{apropos}. The interactive expression will be of the form
13657 @samp{(interactive "r")}, since that will cause Emacs to pass the
13658 beginning and end of the region to the function's argument list. All
13659 this is routine.
13660
13661 The body of the function needs to be written to do three tasks:
13662 first, to set up conditions under which the @code{while} loop can
13663 count words, second, to run the @code{while} loop, and third, to send
13664 a message to the user.
13665
13666 When a user calls @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}, point may be at the
13667 beginning or the end of the region. However, the counting process
13668 must start at the beginning of the region. This means we will want
13669 to put point there if it is not already there. Executing
13670 @code{(goto-char beginning)} ensures this. Of course, we will want to
13671 return point to its expected position when the function finishes its
13672 work. For this reason, the body must be enclosed in a
13673 @code{save-excursion} expression.
13674
13675 The central part of the body of the function consists of a
13676 @code{while} loop in which one expression jumps point forward word by
13677 word, and another expression counts those jumps. The true-or-false-test
13678 of the @code{while} loop should test true so long as point should jump
13679 forward, and false when point is at the end of the region.
13680
13681 We could use @code{(forward-word 1)} as the expression for moving point
13682 forward word by word, but it is easier to see what Emacs identifies as a
13683 ``word'' if we use a regular expression search.
13684
13685 A regular expression search that finds the pattern for which it is
13686 searching leaves point after the last character matched. This means
13687 that a succession of successful word searches will move point forward
13688 word by word.
13689
13690 As a practical matter, we want the regular expression search to jump
13691 over whitespace and punctuation between words as well as over the
13692 words themselves. A regexp that refuses to jump over interword
13693 whitespace would never jump more than one word! This means that
13694 the regexp should include the whitespace and punctuation that follows
13695 a word, if any, as well as the word itself. (A word may end a buffer
13696 and not have any following whitespace or punctuation, so that part of
13697 the regexp must be optional.)
13698
13699 Thus, what we want for the regexp is a pattern defining one or more
13700 word constituent characters followed, optionally, by one or more
13701 characters that are not word constituents. The regular expression for
13702 this is:
13703
13704 @smallexample
13705 \w+\W*
13706 @end smallexample
13707
13708 @noindent
13709 The buffer's syntax table determines which characters are and are not
13710 word constituents. For more information about syntax,
13711 @pxref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
13712 Reference Manual}.
13713
13714 @need 800
13715 The search expression looks like this:
13716
13717 @smallexample
13718 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13719 @end smallexample
13720
13721 @noindent
13722 (Note that paired backslashes precede the @samp{w} and @samp{W}. A
13723 single backslash has special meaning to the Emacs Lisp interpreter.
13724 It indicates that the following character is interpreted differently
13725 than usual. For example, the two characters, @samp{\n}, stand for
13726 @samp{newline}, rather than for a backslash followed by @samp{n}. Two
13727 backslashes in a row stand for an ordinary, ``unspecial'' backslash, so
13728 Emacs Lisp interpreter ends of seeing a single backslash followed by a
13729 letter. So it discovers the letter is special.)
13730
13731 We need a counter to count how many words there are; this variable
13732 must first be set to 0 and then incremented each time Emacs goes
13733 around the @code{while} loop. The incrementing expression is simply:
13734
13735 @smallexample
13736 (setq count (1+ count))
13737 @end smallexample
13738
13739 Finally, we want to tell the user how many words there are in the
13740 region. The @code{message} function is intended for presenting this
13741 kind of information to the user. The message has to be phrased so
13742 that it reads properly regardless of how many words there are in the
13743 region: we don't want to say that ``there are 1 words in the region''.
13744 The conflict between singular and plural is ungrammatical. We can
13745 solve this problem by using a conditional expression that evaluates
13746 different messages depending on the number of words in the region.
13747 There are three possibilities: no words in the region, one word in the
13748 region, and more than one word. This means that the @code{cond}
13749 special form is appropriate.
13750
13751 @need 1500
13752 All this leads to the following function definition:
13753
13754 @smallexample
13755 @group
13756 ;;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
13757 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
13758 "Print number of words in the region.
13759 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
13760 character followed by at least one character that
13761 is not a word-constituent. The buffer’s syntax
13762 table determines which characters these are."
13763 (interactive "r")
13764 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
13765 @end group
13766
13767 @group
13768 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
13769 (save-excursion
13770 (goto-char beginning)
13771 (let ((count 0))
13772 @end group
13773
13774 @group
13775 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
13776 (while (< (point) end)
13777 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13778 (setq count (1+ count)))
13779 @end group
13780
13781 @group
13782 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
13783 (cond ((zerop count)
13784 (message
13785 "The region does NOT have any words."))
13786 ((= 1 count)
13787 (message
13788 "The region has 1 word."))
13789 (t
13790 (message
13791 "The region has %d words." count))))))
13792 @end group
13793 @end smallexample
13794
13795 @noindent
13796 As written, the function works, but not in all circumstances.
13797
13798 @node Whitespace Bug
13799 @subsection The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13800
13801 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} command described in the preceding
13802 section has two bugs, or rather, one bug with two manifestations.
13803 First, if you mark a region containing only whitespace in the middle
13804 of some text, the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} command tells you that the
13805 region contains one word! Second, if you mark a region containing
13806 only whitespace at the end of the buffer or the accessible portion of
13807 a narrowed buffer, the command displays an error message that looks
13808 like this:
13809
13810 @smallexample
13811 Search failed: "\\w+\\W*"
13812 @end smallexample
13813
13814 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can test for these
13815 bugs yourself.
13816
13817 First, evaluate the function in the usual manner to install it.
13818 @ifinfo
13819 Here is a copy of the definition. Place your cursor after the closing
13820 parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e} to install it.
13821
13822 @smallexample
13823 @group
13824 ;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
13825 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
13826 "Print number of words in the region.
13827 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent character followed
13828 by at least one character that is not a word-constituent. The buffer’s
13829 syntax table determines which characters these are."
13830 @end group
13831 @group
13832 (interactive "r")
13833 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
13834 @end group
13835
13836 @group
13837 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
13838 (save-excursion
13839 (goto-char beginning)
13840 (let ((count 0))
13841 @end group
13842
13843 @group
13844 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
13845 (while (< (point) end)
13846 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13847 (setq count (1+ count)))
13848 @end group
13849
13850 @group
13851 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
13852 (cond ((zerop count)
13853 (message "The region does NOT have any words."))
13854 ((= 1 count) (message "The region has 1 word."))
13855 (t (message "The region has %d words." count))))))
13856 @end group
13857 @end smallexample
13858 @end ifinfo
13859
13860 @need 1000
13861 If you wish, you can also install this keybinding by evaluating it:
13862
13863 @smallexample
13864 (global-set-key "\C-c=" '@value{COUNT-WORDS})
13865 @end smallexample
13866
13867 To conduct the first test, set mark and point to the beginning and end
13868 of the following line and then type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x
13869 @value{COUNT-WORDS}} if you have not bound @kbd{C-c =}):
13870
13871 @smallexample
13872 one two three
13873 @end smallexample
13874
13875 @noindent
13876 Emacs will tell you, correctly, that the region has three words.
13877
13878 Repeat the test, but place mark at the beginning of the line and place
13879 point just @emph{before} the word @samp{one}. Again type the command
13880 @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}). Emacs should tell you
13881 that the region has no words, since it is composed only of the
13882 whitespace at the beginning of the line. But instead Emacs tells you
13883 that the region has one word!
13884
13885 For the third test, copy the sample line to the end of the
13886 @file{*scratch*} buffer and then type several spaces at the end of the
13887 line. Place mark right after the word @samp{three} and point at the
13888 end of line. (The end of the line will be the end of the buffer.)
13889 Type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}) as you did before.
13890 Again, Emacs should tell you that the region has no words, since it is
13891 composed only of the whitespace at the end of the line. Instead,
13892 Emacs displays an error message saying @samp{Search failed}.
13893
13894 The two bugs stem from the same problem.
13895
13896 Consider the first manifestation of the bug, in which the command
13897 tells you that the whitespace at the beginning of the line contains
13898 one word. What happens is this: The @code{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13899 command moves point to the beginning of the region. The @code{while}
13900 tests whether the value of point is smaller than the value of
13901 @code{end}, which it is. Consequently, the regular expression search
13902 looks for and finds the first word. It leaves point after the word.
13903 @code{count} is set to one. The @code{while} loop repeats; but this
13904 time the value of point is larger than the value of @code{end}, the
13905 loop is exited; and the function displays a message saying the number
13906 of words in the region is one. In brief, the regular expression
13907 search looks for and finds the word even though it is outside
13908 the marked region.
13909
13910 In the second manifestation of the bug, the region is whitespace at
13911 the end of the buffer. Emacs says @samp{Search failed}. What happens
13912 is that the true-or-false-test in the @code{while} loop tests true, so
13913 the search expression is executed. But since there are no more words
13914 in the buffer, the search fails.
13915
13916 In both manifestations of the bug, the search extends or attempts to
13917 extend outside of the region.
13918
13919 The solution is to limit the search to the region---this is a fairly
13920 simple action, but as you may have come to expect, it is not quite as
13921 simple as you might think.
13922
13923 As we have seen, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes a search
13924 pattern as its first argument. But in addition to this first,
13925 mandatory argument, it accepts three optional arguments. The optional
13926 second argument bounds the search. The optional third argument, if
13927 @code{t}, causes the function to return @code{nil} rather than signal
13928 an error if the search fails. The optional fourth argument is a
13929 repeat count. (In Emacs, you can see a function's documentation by
13930 typing @kbd{C-h f}, the name of the function, and then @key{RET}.)
13931
13932 In the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition, the value of the end of
13933 the region is held by the variable @code{end} which is passed as an
13934 argument to the function. Thus, we can add @code{end} as an argument
13935 to the regular expression search expression:
13936
13937 @smallexample
13938 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end)
13939 @end smallexample
13940
13941 However, if you make only this change to the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13942 definition and then test the new version of the definition on a
13943 stretch of whitespace, you will receive an error message saying
13944 @samp{Search failed}.
13945
13946 What happens is this: the search is limited to the region, and fails
13947 as you expect because there are no word-constituent characters in the
13948 region. Since it fails, we receive an error message. But we do not
13949 want to receive an error message in this case; we want to receive the
13950 message that "The region does NOT have any words."
13951
13952 The solution to this problem is to provide @code{re-search-forward}
13953 with a third argument of @code{t}, which causes the function to return
13954 @code{nil} rather than signal an error if the search fails.
13955
13956 However, if you make this change and try it, you will see the message
13957 ``Counting words in region ... '' and @dots{} you will keep on seeing
13958 that message @dots{}, until you type @kbd{C-g} (@code{keyboard-quit}).
13959
13960 Here is what happens: the search is limited to the region, as before,
13961 and it fails because there are no word-constituent characters in the
13962 region, as expected. Consequently, the @code{re-search-forward}
13963 expression returns @code{nil}. It does nothing else. In particular,
13964 it does not move point, which it does as a side effect if it finds the
13965 search target. After the @code{re-search-forward} expression returns
13966 @code{nil}, the next expression in the @code{while} loop is evaluated.
13967 This expression increments the count. Then the loop repeats. The
13968 true-or-false-test tests true because the value of point is still less
13969 than the value of end, since the @code{re-search-forward} expression
13970 did not move point. @dots{} and the cycle repeats @dots{}
13971
13972 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition requires yet another
13973 modification, to cause the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} loop
13974 to test false if the search fails. Put another way, there are two
13975 conditions that must be satisfied in the true-or-false-test before the
13976 word count variable is incremented: point must still be within the
13977 region and the search expression must have found a word to count.
13978
13979 Since both the first condition and the second condition must be true
13980 together, the two expressions, the region test and the search
13981 expression, can be joined with an @code{and} special form and embedded in
13982 the @code{while} loop as the true-or-false-test, like this:
13983
13984 @smallexample
13985 (and (< (point) end) (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
13986 @end smallexample
13987
13988 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
13989 @c also trouble with an overfull hbox
13990 @iftex
13991 @noindent
13992 (For information about @code{and}, see
13993 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
13994 @end iftex
13995 @ifinfo
13996 @noindent
13997 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
13998 information about @code{and}.)
13999 @end ifinfo
14000
14001 The @code{re-search-forward} expression returns @code{t} if the search
14002 succeeds and as a side effect moves point. Consequently, as words are
14003 found, point is moved through the region. When the search expression
14004 fails to find another word, or when point reaches the end of the
14005 region, the true-or-false-test tests false, the @code{while} loop
14006 exits, and the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function displays one or
14007 other of its messages.
14008
14009 After incorporating these final changes, the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14010 works without bugs (or at least, without bugs that I have found!).
14011 Here is what it looks like:
14012
14013 @smallexample
14014 @group
14015 ;;; @r{Final version:} @code{while}
14016 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14017 "Print number of words in the region."
14018 (interactive "r")
14019 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14020 @end group
14021
14022 @group
14023 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14024 (save-excursion
14025 (let ((count 0))
14026 (goto-char beginning)
14027 @end group
14028
14029 @group
14030 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14031 (while (and (< (point) end)
14032 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
14033 (setq count (1+ count)))
14034 @end group
14035
14036 @group
14037 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14038 (cond ((zerop count)
14039 (message
14040 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14041 ((= 1 count)
14042 (message
14043 "The region has 1 word."))
14044 (t
14045 (message
14046 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14047 @end group
14048 @end smallexample
14049
14050 @node recursive-count-words
14051 @section Count Words Recursively
14052 @cindex Count words recursively
14053 @cindex Recursively counting words
14054 @cindex Words, counted recursively
14055
14056 You can write the function for counting words recursively as well as
14057 with a @code{while} loop. Let's see how this is done.
14058
14059 First, we need to recognize that the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14060 function has three jobs: it sets up the appropriate conditions for
14061 counting to occur; it counts the words in the region; and it sends a
14062 message to the user telling how many words there are.
14063
14064 If we write a single recursive function to do everything, we will
14065 receive a message for every recursive call. If the region contains 13
14066 words, we will receive thirteen messages, one right after the other.
14067 We don't want this! Instead, we must write two functions to do the
14068 job, one of which (the recursive function) will be used inside of the
14069 other. One function will set up the conditions and display the
14070 message; the other will return the word count.
14071
14072 Let us start with the function that causes the message to be displayed.
14073 We can continue to call this @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14074
14075 This is the function that the user will call. It will be interactive.
14076 Indeed, it will be similar to our previous versions of this
14077 function, except that it will call @code{recursive-count-words} to
14078 determine how many words are in the region.
14079
14080 @need 1250
14081 We can readily construct a template for this function, based on our
14082 previous versions:
14083
14084 @smallexample
14085 @group
14086 ;; @r{Recursive version; uses regular expression search}
14087 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14088 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14089 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
14090 @end group
14091 @group
14092
14093 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14094 (@var{explanatory message})
14095 (@var{set-up functions}@dots{}
14096 @end group
14097 @group
14098
14099 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14100 @var{recursive call}
14101 @end group
14102 @group
14103
14104 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14105 @var{message providing word count}))
14106 @end group
14107 @end smallexample
14108
14109 The definition looks straightforward, except that somehow the count
14110 returned by the recursive call must be passed to the message
14111 displaying the word count. A little thought suggests that this can be
14112 done by making use of a @code{let} expression: we can bind a variable
14113 in the varlist of a @code{let} expression to the number of words in
14114 the region, as returned by the recursive call; and then the
14115 @code{cond} expression, using binding, can display the value to the
14116 user.
14117
14118 Often, one thinks of the binding within a @code{let} expression as
14119 somehow secondary to the ``primary'' work of a function. But in this
14120 case, what you might consider the ``primary'' job of the function,
14121 counting words, is done within the @code{let} expression.
14122
14123 @need 1250
14124 Using @code{let}, the function definition looks like this:
14125
14126 @smallexample
14127 @group
14128 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14129 "Print number of words in the region."
14130 (interactive "r")
14131 @end group
14132
14133 @group
14134 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14135 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14136 (save-excursion
14137 (goto-char beginning)
14138 @end group
14139
14140 @group
14141 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14142 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14143 @end group
14144
14145 @group
14146 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14147 (cond ((zerop count)
14148 (message
14149 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14150 ((= 1 count)
14151 (message
14152 "The region has 1 word."))
14153 (t
14154 (message
14155 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14156 @end group
14157 @end smallexample
14158
14159 Next, we need to write the recursive counting function.
14160
14161 A recursive function has at least three parts: the ``do-again-test'', the
14162 ``next-step-expression'', and the recursive call.
14163
14164 The do-again-test determines whether the function will or will not be
14165 called again. Since we are counting words in a region and can use a
14166 function that moves point forward for every word, the do-again-test
14167 can check whether point is still within the region. The do-again-test
14168 should find the value of point and determine whether point is before,
14169 at, or after the value of the end of the region. We can use the
14170 @code{point} function to locate point. Clearly, we must pass the
14171 value of the end of the region to the recursive counting function as an
14172 argument.
14173
14174 In addition, the do-again-test should also test whether the search finds a
14175 word. If it does not, the function should not call itself again.
14176
14177 The next-step-expression changes a value so that when the recursive
14178 function is supposed to stop calling itself, it stops. More
14179 precisely, the next-step-expression changes a value so that at the
14180 right time, the do-again-test stops the recursive function from
14181 calling itself again. In this case, the next-step-expression can be
14182 the expression that moves point forward, word by word.
14183
14184 The third part of a recursive function is the recursive call.
14185
14186 Somewhere, also, we also need a part that does the ``work'' of the
14187 function, a part that does the counting. A vital part!
14188
14189 @need 1250
14190 But already, we have an outline of the recursive counting function:
14191
14192 @smallexample
14193 @group
14194 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14195 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14196 @var{do-again-test}
14197 @var{next-step-expression}
14198 @var{recursive call})
14199 @end group
14200 @end smallexample
14201
14202 Now we need to fill in the slots. Let's start with the simplest cases
14203 first: if point is at or beyond the end of the region, there cannot
14204 be any words in the region, so the function should return zero.
14205 Likewise, if the search fails, there are no words to count, so the
14206 function should return zero.
14207
14208 On the other hand, if point is within the region and the search
14209 succeeds, the function should call itself again.
14210
14211 @need 800
14212 Thus, the do-again-test should look like this:
14213
14214 @smallexample
14215 @group
14216 (and (< (point) region-end)
14217 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14218 @end group
14219 @end smallexample
14220
14221 Note that the search expression is part of the do-again-test---the
14222 function returns @code{t} if its search succeeds and @code{nil} if it
14223 fails. (@xref{Whitespace Bug, , The Whitespace Bug in
14224 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}}, for an explanation of how
14225 @code{re-search-forward} works.)
14226
14227 The do-again-test is the true-or-false test of an @code{if} clause.
14228 Clearly, if the do-again-test succeeds, the then-part of the @code{if}
14229 clause should call the function again; but if it fails, the else-part
14230 should return zero since either point is outside the region or the
14231 search failed because there were no words to find.
14232
14233 But before considering the recursive call, we need to consider the
14234 next-step-expression. What is it? Interestingly, it is the search
14235 part of the do-again-test.
14236
14237 In addition to returning @code{t} or @code{nil} for the
14238 do-again-test, @code{re-search-forward} moves point forward as a side
14239 effect of a successful search. This is the action that changes the
14240 value of point so that the recursive function stops calling itself
14241 when point completes its movement through the region. Consequently,
14242 the @code{re-search-forward} expression is the next-step-expression.
14243
14244 @need 1200
14245 In outline, then, the body of the @code{recursive-count-words}
14246 function looks like this:
14247
14248 @smallexample
14249 @group
14250 (if @var{do-again-test-and-next-step-combined}
14251 ;; @r{then}
14252 @var{recursive-call-returning-count}
14253 ;; @r{else}
14254 @var{return-zero})
14255 @end group
14256 @end smallexample
14257
14258 How to incorporate the mechanism that counts?
14259
14260 If you are not used to writing recursive functions, a question like
14261 this can be troublesome. But it can and should be approached
14262 systematically.
14263
14264 We know that the counting mechanism should be associated in some way
14265 with the recursive call. Indeed, since the next-step-expression moves
14266 point forward by one word, and since a recursive call is made for
14267 each word, the counting mechanism must be an expression that adds one
14268 to the value returned by a call to @code{recursive-count-words}.
14269
14270 @need 800
14271 Consider several cases:
14272
14273 @itemize @bullet
14274 @item
14275 If there are two words in the region, the function should return
14276 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14277 the first word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14278 words in the region, which in this case is one.
14279
14280 @item
14281 If there is one word in the region, the function should return
14282 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14283 that word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14284 words in the region, which in this case is zero.
14285
14286 @item
14287 If there are no words in the region, the function should return zero.
14288 @end itemize
14289
14290 From the sketch we can see that the else-part of the @code{if} returns
14291 zero for the case of no words. This means that the then-part of the
14292 @code{if} must return a value resulting from adding one to the value
14293 returned from a count of the remaining words.
14294
14295 @need 1200
14296 The expression will look like this, where @code{1+} is a function that
14297 adds one to its argument.
14298
14299 @smallexample
14300 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14301 @end smallexample
14302
14303 @need 1200
14304 The whole @code{recursive-count-words} function will then look like
14305 this:
14306
14307 @smallexample
14308 @group
14309 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14310 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14311
14312 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14313 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14314 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14315 @end group
14316
14317 @group
14318 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14319 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14320
14321 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14322 0))
14323 @end group
14324 @end smallexample
14325
14326 @need 1250
14327 Let's examine how this works:
14328
14329 If there are no words in the region, the else part of the @code{if}
14330 expression is evaluated and consequently the function returns zero.
14331
14332 If there is one word in the region, the value of point is less than
14333 the value of @code{region-end} and the search succeeds. In this case,
14334 the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression tests true, and the
14335 then-part of the @code{if} expression is evaluated. The counting
14336 expression is evaluated. This expression returns a value (which will
14337 be the value returned by the whole function) that is the sum of one
14338 added to the value returned by a recursive call.
14339
14340 Meanwhile, the next-step-expression has caused point to jump over the
14341 first (and in this case only) word in the region. This means that
14342 when @code{(recursive-count-words region-end)} is evaluated a second
14343 time, as a result of the recursive call, the value of point will be
14344 equal to or greater than the value of region end. So this time,
14345 @code{recursive-count-words} will return zero. The zero will be added
14346 to one, and the original evaluation of @code{recursive-count-words}
14347 will return one plus zero, which is one, which is the correct amount.
14348
14349 Clearly, if there are two words in the region, the first call to
14350 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14351 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14352 remaining word---that is, it adds one to one, producing two, which is
14353 the correct amount.
14354
14355 Similarly, if there are three words in the region, the first call to
14356 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14357 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14358 remaining two words---and so on and so on.
14359
14360 @need 1250
14361 @noindent
14362 With full documentation the two functions look like this:
14363
14364 @need 1250
14365 @noindent
14366 The recursive function:
14367
14368 @findex recursive-count-words
14369 @smallexample
14370 @group
14371 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14372 "Number of words between point and REGION-END."
14373 @end group
14374
14375 @group
14376 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14377 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14378 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14379 @end group
14380
14381 @group
14382 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14383 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14384
14385 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14386 0))
14387 @end group
14388 @end smallexample
14389
14390 @need 800
14391 @noindent
14392 The wrapper:
14393
14394 @smallexample
14395 @group
14396 ;;; @r{Recursive version}
14397 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14398 "Print number of words in the region.
14399 @end group
14400
14401 @group
14402 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
14403 character followed by at least one character that is
14404 not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax table
14405 determines which characters these are."
14406 @end group
14407 @group
14408 (interactive "r")
14409 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14410 (save-excursion
14411 (goto-char beginning)
14412 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14413 @end group
14414 @group
14415 (cond ((zerop count)
14416 (message
14417 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14418 @end group
14419 @group
14420 ((= 1 count)
14421 (message "The region has 1 word."))
14422 (t
14423 (message
14424 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14425 @end group
14426 @end smallexample
14427
14428 @node Counting Exercise
14429 @section Exercise: Counting Punctuation
14430
14431 Using a @code{while} loop, write a function to count the number of
14432 punctuation marks in a region---period, comma, semicolon, colon,
14433 exclamation mark, and question mark. Do the same using recursion.
14434
14435 @node Words in a defun
14436 @chapter Counting Words in a @code{defun}
14437 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14438 @cindex Word counting in a @code{defun}
14439
14440 Our next project is to count the number of words in a function
14441 definition. Clearly, this can be done using some variant of
14442 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}. @xref{Counting Words, , Counting via
14443 Repetition and Regexps}. If we are just going to count the words in
14444 one definition, it is easy enough to mark the definition with the
14445 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}) command, and then call
14446 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14447
14448 However, I am more ambitious: I want to count the words and symbols in
14449 every definition in the Emacs sources and then print a graph that
14450 shows how many functions there are of each length: how many contain 40
14451 to 49 words or symbols, how many contain 50 to 59 words or symbols,
14452 and so on. I have often been curious how long a typical function is,
14453 and this will tell.
14454
14455 @menu
14456 * Divide and Conquer::
14457 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
14458 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
14459 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14460 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
14461 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
14462 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
14463 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
14464 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
14465 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
14466 @end menu
14467
14468 @ifnottex
14469 @node Divide and Conquer
14470 @unnumberedsec Divide and Conquer
14471 @end ifnottex
14472
14473 Described in one phrase, the histogram project is daunting; but
14474 divided into numerous small steps, each of which we can take one at a
14475 time, the project becomes less fearsome. Let us consider what the
14476 steps must be:
14477
14478 @itemize @bullet
14479 @item
14480 First, write a function to count the words in one definition. This
14481 includes the problem of handling symbols as well as words.
14482
14483 @item
14484 Second, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14485 in a file. This function can use the @code{count-words-in-defun}
14486 function.
14487
14488 @item
14489 Third, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14490 in each of several files. This entails automatically finding the
14491 various files, switching to them, and counting the words in the
14492 definitions within them.
14493
14494 @item
14495 Fourth, write a function to convert the list of numbers that we
14496 created in step three to a form that will be suitable for printing as
14497 a graph.
14498
14499 @item
14500 Fifth, write a function to print the results as a graph.
14501 @end itemize
14502
14503 This is quite a project! But if we take each step slowly, it will not
14504 be difficult.
14505
14506 @node Words and Symbols
14507 @section What to Count?
14508 @cindex Words and symbols in defun
14509
14510 When we first start thinking about how to count the words in a
14511 function definition, the first question is (or ought to be) what are
14512 we going to count? When we speak of ``words'' with respect to a Lisp
14513 function definition, we are actually speaking, in large part, of
14514 ``symbols''. For example, the following @code{multiply-by-seven}
14515 function contains the five symbols @code{defun},
14516 @code{multiply-by-seven}, @code{number}, @code{*}, and @code{7}. In
14517 addition, in the documentation string, it contains the four words
14518 @samp{Multiply}, @samp{NUMBER}, @samp{by}, and @samp{seven}. The
14519 symbol @samp{number} is repeated, so the definition contains a total
14520 of ten words and symbols.
14521
14522 @smallexample
14523 @group
14524 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
14525 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
14526 (* 7 number))
14527 @end group
14528 @end smallexample
14529
14530 @noindent
14531 However, if we mark the @code{multiply-by-seven} definition with
14532 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}), and then call
14533 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} on it, we will find that
14534 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} claims the definition has eleven words, not
14535 ten! Something is wrong!
14536
14537 The problem is twofold: @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} does not count the
14538 @samp{*} as a word, and it counts the single symbol,
14539 @code{multiply-by-seven}, as containing three words. The hyphens are
14540 treated as if they were interword spaces rather than intraword
14541 connectors: @samp{multiply-by-seven} is counted as if it were written
14542 @samp{multiply by seven}.
14543
14544 The cause of this confusion is the regular expression search within
14545 the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition that moves point forward word
14546 by word. In the canonical version of @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}, the
14547 regexp is:
14548
14549 @smallexample
14550 "\\w+\\W*"
14551 @end smallexample
14552
14553 @noindent
14554 This regular expression is a pattern defining one or more word
14555 constituent characters possibly followed by one or more characters
14556 that are not word constituents. What is meant by ``word constituent
14557 characters'' brings us to the issue of syntax, which is worth a section
14558 of its own.
14559
14560 @node Syntax
14561 @section What Constitutes a Word or Symbol?
14562 @cindex Syntax categories and tables
14563
14564 Emacs treats different characters as belonging to different
14565 @dfn{syntax categories}. For example, the regular expression,
14566 @samp{\\w+}, is a pattern specifying one or more @emph{word
14567 constituent} characters. Word constituent characters are members of
14568 one syntax category. Other syntax categories include the class of
14569 punctuation characters, such as the period and the comma, and the
14570 class of whitespace characters, such as the blank space and the tab
14571 character. (For more information, @pxref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax
14572 Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
14573
14574 Syntax tables specify which characters belong to which categories.
14575 Usually, a hyphen is not specified as a ``word constituent character''.
14576 Instead, it is specified as being in the ``class of characters that are
14577 part of symbol names but not words.'' This means that the
14578 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function treats it in the same way it treats
14579 an interword white space, which is why @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14580 counts @samp{multiply-by-seven} as three words.
14581
14582 There are two ways to cause Emacs to count @samp{multiply-by-seven} as
14583 one symbol: modify the syntax table or modify the regular expression.
14584
14585 We could redefine a hyphen as a word constituent character by
14586 modifying the syntax table that Emacs keeps for each mode. This
14587 action would serve our purpose, except that a hyphen is merely the
14588 most common character within symbols that is not typically a word
14589 constituent character; there are others, too.
14590
14591 Alternatively, we can redefine the regexp used in the
14592 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition so as to include symbols. This
14593 procedure has the merit of clarity, but the task is a little tricky.
14594
14595 @need 1200
14596 The first part is simple enough: the pattern must match ``at least one
14597 character that is a word or symbol constituent''. Thus:
14598
14599 @smallexample
14600 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+"
14601 @end smallexample
14602
14603 @noindent
14604 The @samp{\\(} is the first part of the grouping construct that
14605 includes the @samp{\\w} and the @samp{\\s_} as alternatives, separated
14606 by the @samp{\\|}. The @samp{\\w} matches any word-constituent
14607 character and the @samp{\\s_} matches any character that is part of a
14608 symbol name but not a word-constituent character. The @samp{+}
14609 following the group indicates that the word or symbol constituent
14610 characters must be matched at least once.
14611
14612 However, the second part of the regexp is more difficult to design.
14613 What we want is to follow the first part with ``optionally one or more
14614 characters that are not constituents of a word or symbol''. At first,
14615 I thought I could define this with the following:
14616
14617 @smallexample
14618 "\\(\\W\\|\\S_\\)*"
14619 @end smallexample
14620
14621 @noindent
14622 The upper case @samp{W} and @samp{S} match characters that are
14623 @emph{not} word or symbol constituents. Unfortunately, this
14624 expression matches any character that is either not a word constituent
14625 or not a symbol constituent. This matches any character!
14626
14627 I then noticed that every word or symbol in my test region was
14628 followed by white space (blank space, tab, or newline). So I tried
14629 placing a pattern to match one or more blank spaces after the pattern
14630 for one or more word or symbol constituents. This failed, too. Words
14631 and symbols are often separated by whitespace, but in actual code
14632 parentheses may follow symbols and punctuation may follow words. So
14633 finally, I designed a pattern in which the word or symbol constituents
14634 are followed optionally by characters that are not white space and
14635 then followed optionally by white space.
14636
14637 @need 800
14638 Here is the full regular expression:
14639
14640 @smallexample
14641 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
14642 @end smallexample
14643
14644 @node count-words-in-defun
14645 @section The @code{count-words-in-defun} Function
14646 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14647
14648 We have seen that there are several ways to write a
14649 @code{count-words-region} function. To write a
14650 @code{count-words-in-defun}, we need merely adapt one of these
14651 versions.
14652
14653 The version that uses a @code{while} loop is easy to understand, so I
14654 am going to adapt that. Because @code{count-words-in-defun} will be
14655 part of a more complex program, it need not be interactive and it need
14656 not display a message but just return the count. These considerations
14657 simplify the definition a little.
14658
14659 On the other hand, @code{count-words-in-defun} will be used within a
14660 buffer that contains function definitions. Consequently, it is
14661 reasonable to ask that the function determine whether it is called
14662 when point is within a function definition, and if it is, to return
14663 the count for that definition. This adds complexity to the
14664 definition, but saves us from needing to pass arguments to the
14665 function.
14666
14667 @need 1250
14668 These considerations lead us to prepare the following template:
14669
14670 @smallexample
14671 @group
14672 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
14673 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14674 (@var{set up}@dots{}
14675 (@var{while loop}@dots{})
14676 @var{return count})
14677 @end group
14678 @end smallexample
14679
14680 @noindent
14681 As usual, our job is to fill in the slots.
14682
14683 First, the set up.
14684
14685 We are presuming that this function will be called within a buffer
14686 containing function definitions. Point will either be within a
14687 function definition or not. For @code{count-words-in-defun} to work,
14688 point must move to the beginning of the definition, a counter must
14689 start at zero, and the counting loop must stop when point reaches the
14690 end of the definition.
14691
14692 The @code{beginning-of-defun} function searches backwards for an
14693 opening delimiter such as a @samp{(} at the beginning of a line, and
14694 moves point to that position, or else to the limit of the search. In
14695 practice, this means that @code{beginning-of-defun} moves point to the
14696 beginning of an enclosing or preceding function definition, or else to
14697 the beginning of the buffer. We can use @code{beginning-of-defun} to
14698 place point where we wish to start.
14699
14700 The @code{while} loop requires a counter to keep track of the words or
14701 symbols being counted. A @code{let} expression can be used to create
14702 a local variable for this purpose, and bind it to an initial value of zero.
14703
14704 The @code{end-of-defun} function works like @code{beginning-of-defun}
14705 except that it moves point to the end of the definition.
14706 @code{end-of-defun} can be used as part of an expression that
14707 determines the position of the end of the definition.
14708
14709 The set up for @code{count-words-in-defun} takes shape rapidly: first
14710 we move point to the beginning of the definition, then we create a
14711 local variable to hold the count, and finally, we record the position
14712 of the end of the definition so the @code{while} loop will know when to stop
14713 looping.
14714
14715 @need 1250
14716 The code looks like this:
14717
14718 @smallexample
14719 @group
14720 (beginning-of-defun)
14721 (let ((count 0)
14722 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
14723 @end group
14724 @end smallexample
14725
14726 @noindent
14727 The code is simple. The only slight complication is likely to concern
14728 @code{end}: it is bound to the position of the end of the definition
14729 by a @code{save-excursion} expression that returns the value of point
14730 after @code{end-of-defun} temporarily moves it to the end of the
14731 definition.
14732
14733 The second part of the @code{count-words-in-defun}, after the set up,
14734 is the @code{while} loop.
14735
14736 The loop must contain an expression that jumps point forward word by
14737 word and symbol by symbol, and another expression that counts the
14738 jumps. The true-or-false-test for the @code{while} loop should test
14739 true so long as point should jump forward, and false when point is at
14740 the end of the definition. We have already redefined the regular
14741 expression for this, so the loop is straightforward:
14742
14743 @smallexample
14744 @group
14745 (while (and (< (point) end)
14746 (re-search-forward
14747 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*" end t))
14748 (setq count (1+ count)))
14749 @end group
14750 @end smallexample
14751
14752 The third part of the function definition returns the count of words
14753 and symbols. This part is the last expression within the body of the
14754 @code{let} expression, and can be, very simply, the local variable
14755 @code{count}, which when evaluated returns the count.
14756
14757 @need 1250
14758 Put together, the @code{count-words-in-defun} definition looks like this:
14759
14760 @findex count-words-in-defun
14761 @smallexample
14762 @group
14763 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
14764 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
14765 (beginning-of-defun)
14766 (let ((count 0)
14767 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
14768 @end group
14769 @group
14770 (while
14771 (and (< (point) end)
14772 (re-search-forward
14773 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
14774 end t))
14775 (setq count (1+ count)))
14776 count))
14777 @end group
14778 @end smallexample
14779
14780 How to test this? The function is not interactive, but it is easy to
14781 put a wrapper around the function to make it interactive; we can use
14782 almost the same code as for the recursive version of
14783 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}:
14784
14785 @smallexample
14786 @group
14787 ;;; @r{Interactive version.}
14788 (defun count-words-defun ()
14789 "Number of words and symbols in a function definition."
14790 (interactive)
14791 (message
14792 "Counting words and symbols in function definition ... ")
14793 @end group
14794 @group
14795 (let ((count (count-words-in-defun)))
14796 (cond
14797 ((zerop count)
14798 (message
14799 "The definition does NOT have any words or symbols."))
14800 @end group
14801 @group
14802 ((= 1 count)
14803 (message
14804 "The definition has 1 word or symbol."))
14805 (t
14806 (message
14807 "The definition has %d words or symbols." count)))))
14808 @end group
14809 @end smallexample
14810
14811 @need 800
14812 @noindent
14813 Let's re-use @kbd{C-c =} as a convenient keybinding:
14814
14815 @smallexample
14816 (global-set-key "\C-c=" 'count-words-defun)
14817 @end smallexample
14818
14819 Now we can try out @code{count-words-defun}: install both
14820 @code{count-words-in-defun} and @code{count-words-defun}, and set the
14821 keybinding, and then place the cursor within the following definition:
14822
14823 @smallexample
14824 @group
14825 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
14826 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
14827 (* 7 number))
14828 @result{} 10
14829 @end group
14830 @end smallexample
14831
14832 @noindent
14833 Success! The definition has 10 words and symbols.
14834
14835 The next problem is to count the numbers of words and symbols in
14836 several definitions within a single file.
14837
14838 @node Several defuns
14839 @section Count Several @code{defuns} Within a File
14840
14841 A file such as @file{simple.el} may have a hundred or more function
14842 definitions within it. Our long term goal is to collect statistics on
14843 many files, but as a first step, our immediate goal is to collect
14844 statistics on one file.
14845
14846 The information will be a series of numbers, each number being the
14847 length of a function definition. We can store the numbers in a list.
14848
14849 We know that we will want to incorporate the information regarding one
14850 file with information about many other files; this means that the
14851 function for counting definition lengths within one file need only
14852 return the list of lengths. It need not and should not display any
14853 messages.
14854
14855 The word count commands contain one expression to jump point forward
14856 word by word and another expression to count the jumps. The function
14857 to return the lengths of definitions can be designed to work the same
14858 way, with one expression to jump point forward definition by
14859 definition and another expression to construct the lengths' list.
14860
14861 This statement of the problem makes it elementary to write the
14862 function definition. Clearly, we will start the count at the
14863 beginning of the file, so the first command will be @code{(goto-char
14864 (point-min))}. Next, we start the @code{while} loop; and the
14865 true-or-false test of the loop can be a regular expression search for
14866 the next function definition---so long as the search succeeds, point
14867 is moved forward and then the body of the loop is evaluated. The body
14868 needs an expression that constructs the lengths' list. @code{cons},
14869 the list construction command, can be used to create the list. That
14870 is almost all there is to it.
14871
14872 @need 800
14873 Here is what this fragment of code looks like:
14874
14875 @smallexample
14876 @group
14877 (goto-char (point-min))
14878 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
14879 (setq lengths-list
14880 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
14881 @end group
14882 @end smallexample
14883
14884 What we have left out is the mechanism for finding the file that
14885 contains the function definitions.
14886
14887 In previous examples, we either used this, the Info file, or we
14888 switched back and forth to some other buffer, such as the
14889 @file{*scratch*} buffer.
14890
14891 Finding a file is a new process that we have not yet discussed.
14892
14893 @node Find a File
14894 @section Find a File
14895 @cindex Find a File
14896
14897 To find a file in Emacs, you use the @kbd{C-x C-f} (@code{find-file})
14898 command. This command is almost, but not quite right for the lengths
14899 problem.
14900
14901 @need 1200
14902 Let's look at the source for @code{find-file}:
14903
14904 @smallexample
14905 @group
14906 (defun find-file (filename)
14907 "Edit file FILENAME.
14908 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
14909 creating one if none already exists."
14910 (interactive "FFind file: ")
14911 (switch-to-buffer (find-file-noselect filename)))
14912 @end group
14913 @end smallexample
14914
14915 @noindent
14916 (The most recent version of the @code{find-file} function definition
14917 permits you to specify optional wildcards to visit multiple files; that
14918 makes the definition more complex and we will not discuss it here,
14919 since it is not relevant. You can see its source using either
14920 @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) or @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}).)
14921
14922 @ignore
14923 In Emacs 22
14924 (defun find-file (filename &optional wildcards)
14925 "Edit file FILENAME.
14926 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
14927 creating one if none already exists.
14928 Interactively, the default if you just type RET is the current directory,
14929 but the visited file name is available through the minibuffer history:
14930 type M-n to pull it into the minibuffer.
14931
14932 Interactively, or if WILDCARDS is non-nil in a call from Lisp,
14933 expand wildcards (if any) and visit multiple files. You can
14934 suppress wildcard expansion by setting `find-file-wildcards' to nil.
14935
14936 To visit a file without any kind of conversion and without
14937 automatically choosing a major mode, use \\[find-file-literally]."
14938 (interactive (find-file-read-args "Find file: " nil))
14939 (let ((value (find-file-noselect filename nil nil wildcards)))
14940 (if (listp value)
14941 (mapcar 'switch-to-buffer (nreverse value))
14942 (switch-to-buffer value))))
14943 @end ignore
14944
14945 The definition I am showing possesses short but complete documentation
14946 and an interactive specification that prompts you for a file name when
14947 you use the command interactively. The body of the definition
14948 contains two functions, @code{find-file-noselect} and
14949 @code{switch-to-buffer}.
14950
14951 According to its documentation as shown by @kbd{C-h f} (the
14952 @code{describe-function} command), the @code{find-file-noselect}
14953 function reads the named file into a buffer and returns the buffer.
14954 (Its most recent version includes an optional wildcards argument,
14955 too, as well as another to read a file literally and an other you
14956 suppress warning messages. These optional arguments are irrelevant.)
14957
14958 However, the @code{find-file-noselect} function does not select the
14959 buffer in which it puts the file. Emacs does not switch its attention
14960 (or yours if you are using @code{find-file-noselect}) to the selected
14961 buffer. That is what @code{switch-to-buffer} does: it switches the
14962 buffer to which Emacs attention is directed; and it switches the
14963 buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer. We have discussed
14964 buffer switching elsewhere. (@xref{Switching Buffers}.)
14965
14966 In this histogram project, we do not need to display each file on the
14967 screen as the program determines the length of each definition within
14968 it. Instead of employing @code{switch-to-buffer}, we can work with
14969 @code{set-buffer}, which redirects the attention of the computer
14970 program to a different buffer but does not redisplay it on the screen.
14971 So instead of calling on @code{find-file} to do the job, we must write
14972 our own expression.
14973
14974 The task is easy: use @code{find-file-noselect} and @code{set-buffer}.
14975
14976 @node lengths-list-file
14977 @section @code{lengths-list-file} in Detail
14978
14979 The core of the @code{lengths-list-file} function is a @code{while}
14980 loop containing a function to move point forward ``defun by defun'' and
14981 a function to count the number of words and symbols in each defun.
14982 This core must be surrounded by functions that do various other tasks,
14983 including finding the file, and ensuring that point starts out at the
14984 beginning of the file. The function definition looks like this:
14985 @findex lengths-list-file
14986
14987 @smallexample
14988 @group
14989 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
14990 "Return list of definitions’ lengths within FILE.
14991 The returned list is a list of numbers.
14992 Each number is the number of words or
14993 symbols in one function definition."
14994 @end group
14995 @group
14996 (message "Working on ‘%s’ ... " filename)
14997 (save-excursion
14998 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
14999 (lengths-list))
15000 (set-buffer buffer)
15001 (setq buffer-read-only t)
15002 (widen)
15003 (goto-char (point-min))
15004 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
15005 (setq lengths-list
15006 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
15007 (kill-buffer buffer)
15008 lengths-list)))
15009 @end group
15010 @end smallexample
15011
15012 @noindent
15013 The function is passed one argument, the name of the file on which it
15014 will work. It has four lines of documentation, but no interactive
15015 specification. Since people worry that a computer is broken if they
15016 don't see anything going on, the first line of the body is a
15017 message.
15018
15019 The next line contains a @code{save-excursion} that returns Emacs's
15020 attention to the current buffer when the function completes. This is
15021 useful in case you embed this function in another function that
15022 presumes point is restored to the original buffer.
15023
15024 In the varlist of the @code{let} expression, Emacs finds the file and
15025 binds the local variable @code{buffer} to the buffer containing the
15026 file. At the same time, Emacs creates @code{lengths-list} as a local
15027 variable.
15028
15029 Next, Emacs switches its attention to the buffer.
15030
15031 In the following line, Emacs makes the buffer read-only. Ideally,
15032 this line is not necessary. None of the functions for counting words
15033 and symbols in a function definition should change the buffer.
15034 Besides, the buffer is not going to be saved, even if it were changed.
15035 This line is entirely the consequence of great, perhaps excessive,
15036 caution. The reason for the caution is that this function and those
15037 it calls work on the sources for Emacs and it is inconvenient if they
15038 are inadvertently modified. It goes without saying that I did not
15039 realize a need for this line until an experiment went awry and started
15040 to modify my Emacs source files @dots{}
15041
15042 Next comes a call to widen the buffer if it is narrowed. This
15043 function is usually not needed---Emacs creates a fresh buffer if none
15044 already exists; but if a buffer visiting the file already exists Emacs
15045 returns that one. In this case, the buffer may be narrowed and must
15046 be widened. If we wanted to be fully ``user-friendly'', we would
15047 arrange to save the restriction and the location of point, but we
15048 won't.
15049
15050 The @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression moves point to the
15051 beginning of the buffer.
15052
15053 Then comes a @code{while} loop in which the ``work'' of the function is
15054 carried out. In the loop, Emacs determines the length of each
15055 definition and constructs a lengths' list containing the information.
15056
15057 Emacs kills the buffer after working through it. This is to save
15058 space inside of Emacs. My version of GNU Emacs 19 contained over 300
15059 source files of interest; GNU Emacs 22 contains over a thousand source
15060 files. Another function will apply @code{lengths-list-file} to each
15061 of the files.
15062
15063 Finally, the last expression within the @code{let} expression is the
15064 @code{lengths-list} variable; its value is returned as the value of
15065 the whole function.
15066
15067 You can try this function by installing it in the usual fashion. Then
15068 place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
15069 C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}).
15070
15071 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15072 @smallexample
15073 (lengths-list-file
15074 "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el")
15075 @end smallexample
15076
15077 @noindent
15078 You may need to change the pathname of the file; the one here is for
15079 GNU Emacs version 22.1. To change the expression, copy it to
15080 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and edit it.
15081
15082 @need 1200
15083 @noindent
15084 Also, to see the full length of the list, rather than a truncated
15085 version, you may have to evaluate the following:
15086 @c We do not want to insert, so do not mention the zero prefix argument.
15087
15088 @smallexample
15089 (custom-set-variables '(eval-expression-print-length nil))
15090 @end smallexample
15091
15092 @noindent
15093 (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}}.
15094 Then evaluate the @code{lengths-list-file} expression.)
15095
15096 @need 1200
15097 The lengths' list for @file{debug.el} takes less than a second to
15098 produce and looks like this in GNU Emacs 22:
15099
15100 @smallexample
15101 (83 113 105 144 289 22 30 97 48 89 25 52 52 88 28 29 77 49 43 290 232 587)
15102 @end smallexample
15103
15104 @need 1500
15105 (Using my old machine, the version 19 lengths' list for @file{debug.el}
15106 took seven seconds to produce and looked like this:
15107
15108 @smallexample
15109 (75 41 80 62 20 45 44 68 45 12 34 235)
15110 @end smallexample
15111
15112 @noindent
15113 The newer version of @file{debug.el} contains more defuns than the
15114 earlier one; and my new machine is much faster than the old one.)
15115
15116 Note that the length of the last definition in the file is first in
15117 the list.
15118
15119 @node Several files
15120 @section Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
15121
15122 In the previous section, we created a function that returns a list of
15123 the lengths of each definition in a file. Now, we want to define a
15124 function to return a master list of the lengths of the definitions in
15125 a list of files.
15126
15127 Working on each of a list of files is a repetitious act, so we can use
15128 either a @code{while} loop or recursion.
15129
15130 @menu
15131 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
15132 * append:: Attach one list to another.
15133 @end menu
15134
15135 @ifnottex
15136 @node lengths-list-many-files
15137 @unnumberedsubsec Determine the lengths of @code{defuns}
15138 @end ifnottex
15139
15140 The design using a @code{while} loop is routine. The argument passed
15141 the function is a list of files. As we saw earlier (@pxref{Loop
15142 Example}), you can write a @code{while} loop so that the body of the
15143 loop is evaluated if such a list contains elements, but to exit the
15144 loop if the list is empty. For this design to work, the body of the
15145 loop must contain an expression that shortens the list each time the
15146 body is evaluated, so that eventually the list is empty. The usual
15147 technique is to set the value of the list to the value of the @sc{cdr}
15148 of the list each time the body is evaluated.
15149
15150 @need 800
15151 The template looks like this:
15152
15153 @smallexample
15154 @group
15155 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
15156 @var{body}@dots{}
15157 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
15158 @end group
15159 @end smallexample
15160
15161 Also, we remember that a @code{while} loop returns @code{nil} (the
15162 result of evaluating the true-or-false-test), not the result of any
15163 evaluation within its body. (The evaluations within the body of the
15164 loop are done for their side effects.) However, the expression that
15165 sets the lengths' list is part of the body---and that is the value
15166 that we want returned by the function as a whole. To do this, we
15167 enclose the @code{while} loop within a @code{let} expression, and
15168 arrange that the last element of the @code{let} expression contains
15169 the value of the lengths' list. (@xref{Incrementing Example, , Loop
15170 Example with an Incrementing Counter}.)
15171
15172 @findex lengths-list-many-files
15173 @need 1250
15174 These considerations lead us directly to the function itself:
15175
15176 @smallexample
15177 @group
15178 ;;; @r{Use @code{while} loop.}
15179 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15180 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
15181 @end group
15182 @group
15183 (let (lengths-list)
15184
15185 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
15186 (while list-of-files
15187 (setq lengths-list
15188 (append
15189 lengths-list
15190
15191 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
15192 (lengths-list-file
15193 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
15194 @end group
15195
15196 @group
15197 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
15198 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
15199
15200 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
15201 lengths-list))
15202 @end group
15203 @end smallexample
15204
15205 @code{expand-file-name} is a built-in function that converts a file
15206 name to the absolute, long, path name form. The function employs the
15207 name of the directory in which the function is called.
15208
15209 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15210 @need 1500
15211 Thus, if @code{expand-file-name} is called on @code{debug.el} when
15212 Emacs is visiting the
15213 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/} directory,
15214
15215 @smallexample
15216 debug.el
15217 @end smallexample
15218
15219 @need 800
15220 @noindent
15221 becomes
15222
15223 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15224 @smallexample
15225 /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el
15226 @end smallexample
15227
15228 The only other new element of this function definition is the as yet
15229 unstudied function @code{append}, which merits a short section for
15230 itself.
15231
15232 @node append
15233 @subsection The @code{append} Function
15234
15235 @need 800
15236 The @code{append} function attaches one list to another. Thus,
15237
15238 @smallexample
15239 (append '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15240 @end smallexample
15241
15242 @need 800
15243 @noindent
15244 produces the list
15245
15246 @smallexample
15247 (1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8)
15248 @end smallexample
15249
15250 This is exactly how we want to attach two lengths' lists produced by
15251 @code{lengths-list-file} to each other. The results contrast with
15252 @code{cons},
15253
15254 @smallexample
15255 (cons '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15256 @end smallexample
15257
15258 @need 1250
15259 @noindent
15260 which constructs a new list in which the first argument to @code{cons}
15261 becomes the first element of the new list:
15262
15263 @smallexample
15264 ((1 2 3 4) 5 6 7 8)
15265 @end smallexample
15266
15267 @node Several files recursively
15268 @section Recursively Count Words in Different Files
15269
15270 Besides a @code{while} loop, you can work on each of a list of files
15271 with recursion. A recursive version of @code{lengths-list-many-files}
15272 is short and simple.
15273
15274 The recursive function has the usual parts: the ``do-again-test'', the
15275 ``next-step-expression'', and the recursive call. The ``do-again-test''
15276 determines whether the function should call itself again, which it
15277 will do if the @code{list-of-files} contains any remaining elements;
15278 the ``next-step-expression'' resets the @code{list-of-files} to the
15279 @sc{cdr} of itself, so eventually the list will be empty; and the
15280 recursive call calls itself on the shorter list. The complete
15281 function is shorter than this description!
15282 @findex recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15283
15284 @smallexample
15285 @group
15286 (defun recursive-lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15287 "Return list of lengths of each defun in LIST-OF-FILES."
15288 (if list-of-files ; @r{do-again-test}
15289 (append
15290 (lengths-list-file
15291 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))
15292 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15293 (cdr list-of-files)))))
15294 @end group
15295 @end smallexample
15296
15297 @noindent
15298 In a sentence, the function returns the lengths' list for the first of
15299 the @code{list-of-files} appended to the result of calling itself on
15300 the rest of the @code{list-of-files}.
15301
15302 Here is a test of @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}, along with
15303 the results of running @code{lengths-list-file} on each of the files
15304 individually.
15305
15306 Install @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} and
15307 @code{lengths-list-file}, if necessary, and then evaluate the
15308 following expressions. You may need to change the files' pathnames;
15309 those here work when this Info file and the Emacs sources are located
15310 in their customary places. To change the expressions, copy them to
15311 the @file{*scratch*} buffer, edit them, and then evaluate them.
15312
15313 The results are shown after the @samp{@result{}}. (These results are
15314 for files from Emacs version 22.1.1; files from other versions of
15315 Emacs may produce different results.)
15316
15317 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15318 @smallexample
15319 @group
15320 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/")
15321
15322 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/macros.el")
15323 @result{} (283 263 480 90)
15324 @end group
15325
15326 @group
15327 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el")
15328 @result{} (38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324)
15329 @end group
15330
15331 @group
15332 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/makesum.el")
15333 @result{} (85 181)
15334 @end group
15335
15336 @group
15337 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15338 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15339 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15340 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15341 @result{} (283 263 480 90 38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324 85 181)
15342 @end group
15343 @end smallexample
15344
15345 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function produces the
15346 output we want.
15347
15348 The next step is to prepare the data in the list for display in a graph.
15349
15350 @node Prepare the data
15351 @section Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
15352
15353 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a list
15354 of numbers. Each number records the length of a function definition.
15355 What we need to do now is transform this data into a list of numbers
15356 suitable for generating a graph. The new list will tell how many
15357 functions definitions contain less than 10 words and
15358 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
15359 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
15360
15361 In brief, we need to go through the lengths' list produced by the
15362 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function and count the number
15363 of defuns within each range of lengths, and produce a list of those
15364 numbers.
15365
15366 @menu
15367 * Data for Display in Detail::
15368 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
15369 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
15370 * Counting function definitions::
15371 @end menu
15372
15373 @ifnottex
15374 @node Data for Display in Detail
15375 @unnumberedsubsec The Data for Display in Detail
15376 @end ifnottex
15377
15378 Based on what we have done before, we can readily foresee that it
15379 should not be too hard to write a function that ``@sc{cdr}s'' down the
15380 lengths' list, looks at each element, determines which length range it
15381 is in, and increments a counter for that range.
15382
15383 However, before beginning to write such a function, we should consider
15384 the advantages of sorting the lengths' list first, so the numbers are
15385 ordered from smallest to largest. First, sorting will make it easier
15386 to count the numbers in each range, since two adjacent numbers will
15387 either be in the same length range or in adjacent ranges. Second, by
15388 inspecting a sorted list, we can discover the highest and lowest
15389 number, and thereby determine the largest and smallest length range
15390 that we will need.
15391
15392 @node Sorting
15393 @subsection Sorting Lists
15394 @findex sort
15395
15396 Emacs contains a function to sort lists, called (as you might guess)
15397 @code{sort}. The @code{sort} function takes two arguments, the list
15398 to be sorted, and a predicate that determines whether the first of
15399 two list elements is ``less'' than the second.
15400
15401 As we saw earlier (@pxref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong
15402 Type Object as an Argument}), a predicate is a function that
15403 determines whether some property is true or false. The @code{sort}
15404 function will reorder a list according to whatever property the
15405 predicate uses; this means that @code{sort} can be used to sort
15406 non-numeric lists by non-numeric criteria---it can, for example,
15407 alphabetize a list.
15408
15409 @need 1250
15410 The @code{<} function is used when sorting a numeric list. For example,
15411
15412 @smallexample
15413 (sort '(4 8 21 17 33 7 21 7) '<)
15414 @end smallexample
15415
15416 @need 800
15417 @noindent
15418 produces this:
15419
15420 @smallexample
15421 (4 7 7 8 17 21 21 33)
15422 @end smallexample
15423
15424 @noindent
15425 (Note that in this example, both the arguments are quoted so that the
15426 symbols are not evaluated before being passed to @code{sort} as
15427 arguments.)
15428
15429 Sorting the list returned by the
15430 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function is straightforward;
15431 it uses the @code{<} function:
15432
15433 @ignore
15434 2006 Oct 29
15435 In GNU Emacs 22, eval
15436 (progn
15437 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.0.50/")
15438 (sort
15439 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15440 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15441 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15442 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15443 '<))
15444
15445 @end ignore
15446
15447 @smallexample
15448 @group
15449 (sort
15450 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15451 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15452 "./lisp/mailalias.el"
15453 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15454 '<)
15455 @end group
15456 @end smallexample
15457
15458 @need 800
15459 @noindent
15460 which produces:
15461
15462 @smallexample
15463 (29 32 38 85 90 95 178 180 181 218 263 283 321 324 480)
15464 @end smallexample
15465
15466 @noindent
15467 (Note that in this example, the first argument to @code{sort} is not
15468 quoted, since the expression must be evaluated so as to produce the
15469 list that is passed to @code{sort}.)
15470
15471 @node Files List
15472 @subsection Making a List of Files
15473
15474 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function requires a list
15475 of files as its argument. For our test examples, we constructed such
15476 a list by hand; but the Emacs Lisp source directory is too large for
15477 us to do for that. Instead, we will write a function to do the job
15478 for us. In this function, we will use both a @code{while} loop and a
15479 recursive call.
15480
15481 @findex directory-files
15482 We did not have to write a function like this for older versions of
15483 GNU Emacs, since they placed all the @samp{.el} files in one
15484 directory. Instead, we were able to use the @code{directory-files}
15485 function, which lists the names of files that match a specified
15486 pattern within a single directory.
15487
15488 However, recent versions of Emacs place Emacs Lisp files in
15489 sub-directories of the top level @file{lisp} directory. This
15490 re-arrangement eases navigation. For example, all the mail related
15491 files are in a @file{lisp} sub-directory called @file{mail}. But at
15492 the same time, this arrangement forces us to create a file listing
15493 function that descends into the sub-directories.
15494
15495 @findex files-in-below-directory
15496 We can create this function, called @code{files-in-below-directory},
15497 using familiar functions such as @code{car}, @code{nthcdr}, and
15498 @code{substring} in conjunction with an existing function called
15499 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}. This latter function not only
15500 lists all the filenames in a directory, including the names
15501 of sub-directories, but also their attributes.
15502
15503 To restate our goal: to create a function that will enable us
15504 to feed filenames to @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}
15505 as a list that looks like this (but with more elements):
15506
15507 @smallexample
15508 @group
15509 ("./lisp/macros.el"
15510 "./lisp/mail/rmail.el"
15511 "./lisp/makesum.el")
15512 @end group
15513 @end smallexample
15514
15515 The @code{directory-files-and-attributes} function returns a list of
15516 lists. Each of the lists within the main list consists of 13
15517 elements. The first element is a string that contains the name of the
15518 file---which, in GNU/Linux, may be a ``directory file'', that is to
15519 say, a file with the special attributes of a directory. The second
15520 element of the list is @code{t} for a directory, a string
15521 for symbolic link (the string is the name linked to), or @code{nil}.
15522
15523 For example, the first @samp{.el} file in the @file{lisp/} directory
15524 is @file{abbrev.el}. Its name is
15525 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/abbrev.el} and it is not a
15526 directory or a symbolic link.
15527
15528 @need 1000
15529 This is how @code{directory-files-and-attributes} lists that file and
15530 its attributes:
15531
15532 @smallexample
15533 @group
15534 ("abbrev.el"
15535 nil
15536 1
15537 1000
15538 100
15539 @end group
15540 @group
15541 (20615 27034 579989 697000)
15542 (17905 55681 0 0)
15543 (20615 26327 734791 805000)
15544 13188
15545 "-rw-r--r--"
15546 @end group
15547 @group
15548 t
15549 2971624
15550 773)
15551 @end group
15552 @end smallexample
15553
15554 @need 1200
15555 On the other hand, @file{mail/} is a directory within the @file{lisp/}
15556 directory. The beginning of its listing looks like this:
15557
15558 @smallexample
15559 @group
15560 ("mail"
15561 t
15562 @dots{}
15563 )
15564 @end group
15565 @end smallexample
15566
15567 (To learn about the different attributes, look at the documentation of
15568 @code{file-attributes}. Bear in mind that the @code{file-attributes}
15569 function does not list the filename, so its first element is
15570 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}'s second element.)
15571
15572 We will want our new function, @code{files-in-below-directory}, to
15573 list the @samp{.el} files in the directory it is told to check, and in
15574 any directories below that directory.
15575
15576 This gives us a hint on how to construct
15577 @code{files-in-below-directory}: within a directory, the function
15578 should add @samp{.el} filenames to a list; and if, within a directory,
15579 the function comes upon a sub-directory, it should go into that
15580 sub-directory and repeat its actions.
15581
15582 However, we should note that every directory contains a name that
15583 refers to itself, called @file{.}, (``dot'') and a name that refers to
15584 its parent directory, called @file{..} (``double dot''). (In
15585 @file{/}, the root directory, @file{..} refers to itself, since
15586 @file{/} has no parent.) Clearly, we do not want our
15587 @code{files-in-below-directory} function to enter those directories,
15588 since they always lead us, directly or indirectly, to the current
15589 directory.
15590
15591 Consequently, our @code{files-in-below-directory} function must do
15592 several tasks:
15593
15594 @itemize @bullet
15595 @item
15596 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that ends in
15597 @samp{.el}; and if so, add its name to a list.
15598
15599 @item
15600 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that is the name of a
15601 directory; and if so,
15602
15603 @itemize @minus
15604 @item
15605 Check to see whether it is looking at @file{.} or @file{..}; and if
15606 so skip it.
15607
15608 @item
15609 Or else, go into that directory and repeat the process.
15610 @end itemize
15611 @end itemize
15612
15613 Let's write a function definition to do these tasks. We will use a
15614 @code{while} loop to move from one filename to another within a
15615 directory, checking what needs to be done; and we will use a recursive
15616 call to repeat the actions on each sub-directory. The recursive
15617 pattern is ``accumulate''
15618 (@pxref{Accumulate}),
15619 using @code{append} as the combiner.
15620
15621 @ignore
15622 (directory-files "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15623 (shell-command "find /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15624
15625 (directory-files "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15626 (shell-command "find /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15627 @end ignore
15628
15629 @c /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/
15630
15631 @need 800
15632 Here is the function:
15633
15634 @smallexample
15635 @group
15636 (defun files-in-below-directory (directory)
15637 "List the .el files in DIRECTORY and in its sub-directories."
15638 ;; Although the function will be used non-interactively,
15639 ;; it will be easier to test if we make it interactive.
15640 ;; The directory will have a name such as
15641 ;; "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"
15642 (interactive "DDirectory name: ")
15643 @end group
15644 @group
15645 (let (el-files-list
15646 (current-directory-list
15647 (directory-files-and-attributes directory t)))
15648 ;; while we are in the current directory
15649 (while current-directory-list
15650 @end group
15651 @group
15652 (cond
15653 ;; check to see whether filename ends in '.el'
15654 ;; and if so, append its name to a list.
15655 ((equal ".el" (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -3))
15656 (setq el-files-list
15657 (cons (car (car current-directory-list)) el-files-list)))
15658 @end group
15659 @group
15660 ;; check whether filename is that of a directory
15661 ((eq t (car (cdr (car current-directory-list))))
15662 ;; decide whether to skip or recurse
15663 (if
15664 (equal "."
15665 (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -1))
15666 ;; then do nothing since filename is that of
15667 ;; current directory or parent, "." or ".."
15668 ()
15669 @end group
15670 @group
15671 ;; else descend into the directory and repeat the process
15672 (setq el-files-list
15673 (append
15674 (files-in-below-directory
15675 (car (car current-directory-list)))
15676 el-files-list)))))
15677 ;; move to the next filename in the list; this also
15678 ;; shortens the list so the while loop eventually comes to an end
15679 (setq current-directory-list (cdr current-directory-list)))
15680 ;; return the filenames
15681 el-files-list))
15682 @end group
15683 @end smallexample
15684
15685 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/")
15686 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15687
15688 The @code{files-in-below-directory} @code{directory-files} function
15689 takes one argument, the name of a directory.
15690
15691 @need 1250
15692 Thus, on my system,
15693
15694 @c (length (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15695
15696 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15697 @smallexample
15698 @group
15699 (length
15700 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"))
15701 @end group
15702 @end smallexample
15703
15704 @noindent
15705 tells me that in and below my Lisp sources directory are 1031
15706 @samp{.el} files.
15707
15708 @code{files-in-below-directory} returns a list in reverse alphabetical
15709 order. An expression to sort the list in alphabetical order looks
15710 like this:
15711
15712 @smallexample
15713 @group
15714 (sort
15715 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15716 'string-lessp)
15717 @end group
15718 @end smallexample
15719
15720 @ignore
15721 (defun test ()
15722 "Test how long it takes to find lengths of all sorted elisp defuns."
15723 (insert "\n" (current-time-string) "\n")
15724 (sit-for 0)
15725 (sort
15726 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15727 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15728 '<)
15729 (insert (format "%s" (current-time-string))))
15730 @end ignore
15731
15732 @node Counting function definitions
15733 @subsection Counting function definitions
15734
15735 Our immediate goal is to generate a list that tells us how many
15736 function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and symbols, how many
15737 contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how many contain between
15738 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
15739
15740 With a sorted list of numbers, this is easy: count how many elements
15741 of the list are smaller than 10, then, after moving past the numbers
15742 just counted, count how many are smaller than 20, then, after moving
15743 past the numbers just counted, count how many are smaller than 30, and
15744 so on. Each of the numbers, 10, 20, 30, 40, and the like, is one
15745 larger than the top of that range. We can call the list of such
15746 numbers the @code{top-of-ranges} list.
15747
15748 @need 1200
15749 If we wished, we could generate this list automatically, but it is
15750 simpler to write a list manually. Here it is:
15751 @vindex top-of-ranges
15752
15753 @smallexample
15754 @group
15755 (defvar top-of-ranges
15756 '(10 20 30 40 50
15757 60 70 80 90 100
15758 110 120 130 140 150
15759 160 170 180 190 200
15760 210 220 230 240 250
15761 260 270 280 290 300)
15762 "List specifying ranges for ‘defuns-per-range’.")
15763 @end group
15764 @end smallexample
15765
15766 To change the ranges, we edit this list.
15767
15768 Next, we need to write the function that creates the list of the
15769 number of definitions within each range. Clearly, this function must
15770 take the @code{sorted-lengths} and the @code{top-of-ranges} lists
15771 as arguments.
15772
15773 The @code{defuns-per-range} function must do two things again and
15774 again: it must count the number of definitions within a range
15775 specified by the current top-of-range value; and it must shift to the
15776 next higher value in the @code{top-of-ranges} list after counting the
15777 number of definitions in the current range. Since each of these
15778 actions is repetitive, we can use @code{while} loops for the job.
15779 One loop counts the number of definitions in the range defined by the
15780 current top-of-range value, and the other loop selects each of the
15781 top-of-range values in turn.
15782
15783 Several entries of the @code{sorted-lengths} list are counted for each
15784 range; this means that the loop for the @code{sorted-lengths} list
15785 will be inside the loop for the @code{top-of-ranges} list, like a
15786 small gear inside a big gear.
15787
15788 The inner loop counts the number of definitions within the range. It
15789 is a simple counting loop of the type we have seen before.
15790 (@xref{Incrementing Loop, , A loop with an incrementing counter}.)
15791 The true-or-false test of the loop tests whether the value from the
15792 @code{sorted-lengths} list is smaller than the current value of the
15793 top of the range. If it is, the function increments the counter and
15794 tests the next value from the @code{sorted-lengths} list.
15795
15796 @need 1250
15797 The inner loop looks like this:
15798
15799 @smallexample
15800 @group
15801 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
15802 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
15803 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
15804 @end group
15805 @end smallexample
15806
15807 The outer loop must start with the lowest value of the
15808 @code{top-of-ranges} list, and then be set to each of the succeeding
15809 higher values in turn. This can be done with a loop like this:
15810
15811 @smallexample
15812 @group
15813 (while top-of-ranges
15814 @var{body-of-loop}@dots{}
15815 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
15816 @end group
15817 @end smallexample
15818
15819 @need 1200
15820 Put together, the two loops look like this:
15821
15822 @smallexample
15823 @group
15824 (while top-of-ranges
15825
15826 ;; @r{Count the number of elements within the current range.}
15827 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
15828 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
15829 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
15830
15831 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
15832 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
15833 @end group
15834 @end smallexample
15835
15836 In addition, in each circuit of the outer loop, Emacs should record
15837 the number of definitions within that range (the value of
15838 @code{number-within-range}) in a list. We can use @code{cons} for
15839 this purpose. (@xref{cons, , @code{cons}}.)
15840
15841 The @code{cons} function works fine, except that the list it
15842 constructs will contain the number of definitions for the highest
15843 range at its beginning and the number of definitions for the lowest
15844 range at its end. This is because @code{cons} attaches new elements
15845 of the list to the beginning of the list, and since the two loops are
15846 working their way through the lengths' list from the lower end first,
15847 the @code{defuns-per-range-list} will end up largest number first.
15848 But we will want to print our graph with smallest values first and the
15849 larger later. The solution is to reverse the order of the
15850 @code{defuns-per-range-list}. We can do this using the
15851 @code{nreverse} function, which reverses the order of a list.
15852 @findex nreverse
15853
15854 @need 800
15855 For example,
15856
15857 @smallexample
15858 (nreverse '(1 2 3 4))
15859 @end smallexample
15860
15861 @need 800
15862 @noindent
15863 produces:
15864
15865 @smallexample
15866 (4 3 2 1)
15867 @end smallexample
15868
15869 Note that the @code{nreverse} function is ``destructive''---that is,
15870 it changes the list to which it is applied; this contrasts with the
15871 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions, which are non-destructive. In
15872 this case, we do not want the original @code{defuns-per-range-list},
15873 so it does not matter that it is destroyed. (The @code{reverse}
15874 function provides a reversed copy of a list, leaving the original list
15875 as is.)
15876 @findex reverse
15877
15878 @need 1250
15879 Put all together, the @code{defuns-per-range} looks like this:
15880
15881 @smallexample
15882 @group
15883 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
15884 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
15885 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
15886 (number-within-range 0)
15887 defuns-per-range-list)
15888 @end group
15889
15890 @group
15891 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
15892 (while top-of-ranges
15893 @end group
15894
15895 @group
15896 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
15897 (while (and
15898 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
15899 (car sorted-lengths)
15900 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
15901 @end group
15902
15903 @group
15904 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
15905 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
15906 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
15907
15908 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
15909 @end group
15910
15911 @group
15912 (setq defuns-per-range-list
15913 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
15914 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
15915 @end group
15916
15917 @group
15918 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
15919 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
15920 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
15921 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
15922 @end group
15923
15924 @group
15925 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
15926 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
15927 (setq defuns-per-range-list
15928 (cons
15929 (length sorted-lengths)
15930 defuns-per-range-list))
15931 @end group
15932
15933 @group
15934 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
15935 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
15936 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
15937 @end group
15938 @end smallexample
15939
15940 @need 1200
15941 @noindent
15942 The function is straightforward except for one subtle feature. The
15943 true-or-false test of the inner loop looks like this:
15944
15945 @smallexample
15946 @group
15947 (and (car sorted-lengths)
15948 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
15949 @end group
15950 @end smallexample
15951
15952 @need 800
15953 @noindent
15954 instead of like this:
15955
15956 @smallexample
15957 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range)
15958 @end smallexample
15959
15960 The purpose of the test is to determine whether the first item in the
15961 @code{sorted-lengths} list is less than the value of the top of the
15962 range.
15963
15964 The simple version of the test works fine unless the
15965 @code{sorted-lengths} list has a @code{nil} value. In that case, the
15966 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression function returns
15967 @code{nil}. The @code{<} function cannot compare a number to
15968 @code{nil}, which is an empty list, so Emacs signals an error and
15969 stops the function from attempting to continue to execute.
15970
15971 The @code{sorted-lengths} list always becomes @code{nil} when the
15972 counter reaches the end of the list. This means that any attempt to
15973 use the @code{defuns-per-range} function with the simple version of
15974 the test will fail.
15975
15976 We solve the problem by using the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
15977 expression in conjunction with the @code{and} expression. The
15978 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression returns a non-@code{nil}
15979 value so long as the list has at least one number within it, but
15980 returns @code{nil} if the list is empty. The @code{and} expression
15981 first evaluates the @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression, and
15982 if it is @code{nil}, returns false @emph{without} evaluating the
15983 @code{<} expression. But if the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
15984 expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, the @code{and} expression
15985 evaluates the @code{<} expression, and returns that value as the value
15986 of the @code{and} expression.
15987
15988 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
15989 This way, we avoid an error.
15990 @iftex
15991 @noindent
15992 (For information about @code{and}, see
15993 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
15994 @end iftex
15995 @ifinfo
15996 @noindent
15997 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
15998 information about @code{and}.)
15999 @end ifinfo
16000
16001 Here is a short test of the @code{defuns-per-range} function. First,
16002 evaluate the expression that binds (a shortened)
16003 @code{top-of-ranges} list to the list of values, then evaluate the
16004 expression for binding the @code{sorted-lengths} list, and then
16005 evaluate the @code{defuns-per-range} function.
16006
16007 @smallexample
16008 @group
16009 ;; @r{(Shorter list than we will use later.)}
16010 (setq top-of-ranges
16011 '(110 120 130 140 150
16012 160 170 180 190 200))
16013
16014 (setq sorted-lengths
16015 '(85 86 110 116 122 129 154 176 179 200 265 300 300))
16016
16017 (defuns-per-range sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
16018 @end group
16019 @end smallexample
16020
16021 @need 800
16022 @noindent
16023 The list returned looks like this:
16024
16025 @smallexample
16026 (2 2 2 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 4)
16027 @end smallexample
16028
16029 @noindent
16030 Indeed, there are two elements of the @code{sorted-lengths} list
16031 smaller than 110, two elements between 110 and 119, two elements
16032 between 120 and 129, and so on. There are four elements with a value
16033 of 200 or larger.
16034
16035 @c The next step is to turn this numbers' list into a graph.
16036 @node Readying a Graph
16037 @chapter Readying a Graph
16038 @cindex Readying a graph
16039 @cindex Graph prototype
16040 @cindex Prototype graph
16041 @cindex Body of graph
16042
16043 Our goal is to construct a graph showing the numbers of function
16044 definitions of various lengths in the Emacs lisp sources.
16045
16046 As a practical matter, if you were creating a graph, you would
16047 probably use a program such as @code{gnuplot} to do the job.
16048 (@code{gnuplot} is nicely integrated into GNU Emacs.) In this case,
16049 however, we create one from scratch, and in the process we will
16050 re-acquaint ourselves with some of what we learned before and learn
16051 more.
16052
16053 In this chapter, we will first write a simple graph printing function.
16054 This first definition will be a @dfn{prototype}, a rapidly written
16055 function that enables us to reconnoiter this unknown graph-making
16056 territory. We will discover dragons, or find that they are myth.
16057 After scouting the terrain, we will feel more confident and enhance
16058 the function to label the axes automatically.
16059
16060 @menu
16061 * Columns of a graph::
16062 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
16063 * recursive-graph-body-print::
16064 * Printed Axes::
16065 * Line Graph Exercise::
16066 @end menu
16067
16068 @ifnottex
16069 @node Columns of a graph
16070 @unnumberedsec Printing the Columns of a Graph
16071 @end ifnottex
16072
16073 Since Emacs is designed to be flexible and work with all kinds of
16074 terminals, including character-only terminals, the graph will need to
16075 be made from one of the ``typewriter'' symbols. An asterisk will do; as
16076 we enhance the graph-printing function, we can make the choice of
16077 symbol a user option.
16078
16079 We can call this function @code{graph-body-print}; it will take a
16080 @code{numbers-list} as its only argument. At this stage, we will not
16081 label the graph, but only print its body.
16082
16083 The @code{graph-body-print} function inserts a vertical column of
16084 asterisks for each element in the @code{numbers-list}. The height of
16085 each line is determined by the value of that element of the
16086 @code{numbers-list}.
16087
16088 Inserting columns is a repetitive act; that means that this function can
16089 be written either with a @code{while} loop or recursively.
16090
16091 Our first challenge is to discover how to print a column of asterisks.
16092 Usually, in Emacs, we print characters onto a screen horizontally,
16093 line by line, by typing. We have two routes we can follow: write our
16094 own column-insertion function or discover whether one exists in Emacs.
16095
16096 To see whether there is one in Emacs, we can use the @kbd{M-x apropos}
16097 command. This command is like the @kbd{C-h a} (@code{command-apropos})
16098 command, except that the latter finds only those functions that are
16099 commands. The @kbd{M-x apropos} command lists all symbols that match
16100 a regular expression, including functions that are not interactive.
16101 @findex apropos
16102
16103 What we want to look for is some command that prints or inserts
16104 columns. Very likely, the name of the function will contain either
16105 the word ``print'' or the word ``insert'' or the word ``column''.
16106 Therefore, we can simply type @kbd{M-x apropos RET
16107 print\|insert\|column RET} and look at the result. On my system, this
16108 command once too takes quite some time, and then produced a list of 79
16109 functions and variables. Now it does not take much time at all and
16110 produces a list of 211 functions and variables. Scanning down the
16111 list, the only function that looks as if it might do the job is
16112 @code{insert-rectangle}.
16113
16114 @need 1200
16115 Indeed, this is the function we want; its documentation says:
16116
16117 @smallexample
16118 @group
16119 insert-rectangle:
16120 Insert text of RECTANGLE with upper left corner at point.
16121 RECTANGLE's first line is inserted at point,
16122 its second line is inserted at a point vertically under point, etc.
16123 RECTANGLE should be a list of strings.
16124 After this command, the mark is at the upper left corner
16125 and point is at the lower right corner.
16126 @end group
16127 @end smallexample
16128
16129 We can run a quick test, to make sure it does what we expect of it.
16130
16131 Here is the result of placing the cursor after the
16132 @code{insert-rectangle} expression and typing @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
16133 (@code{eval-last-sexp}). The function inserts the strings
16134 @samp{"first"}, @samp{"second"}, and @samp{"third"} at and below
16135 point. Also the function returns @code{nil}.
16136
16137 @smallexample
16138 @group
16139 (insert-rectangle '("first" "second" "third"))first
16140 second
16141 thirdnil
16142 @end group
16143 @end smallexample
16144
16145 @noindent
16146 Of course, we won't be inserting the text of the
16147 @code{insert-rectangle} expression itself into the buffer in which we
16148 are making the graph, but will call the function from our program. We
16149 shall, however, have to make sure that point is in the buffer at the
16150 place where the @code{insert-rectangle} function will insert its
16151 column of strings.
16152
16153 If you are reading this in Info, you can see how this works by
16154 switching to another buffer, such as the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
16155 placing point somewhere in the buffer, typing @kbd{M-:}, typing the
16156 @code{insert-rectangle} expression into the minibuffer at the prompt,
16157 and then typing @key{RET}. This causes Emacs to evaluate the
16158 expression in the minibuffer, but to use as the value of point the
16159 position of point in the @file{*scratch*} buffer. (@kbd{M-:} is the
16160 keybinding for @code{eval-expression}. Also, @code{nil} does not
16161 appear in the @file{*scratch*} buffer since the expression is
16162 evaluated in the minibuffer.)
16163
16164 We find when we do this that point ends up at the end of the last
16165 inserted line---that is to say, this function moves point as a
16166 side-effect. If we were to repeat the command, with point at this
16167 position, the next insertion would be below and to the right of the
16168 previous insertion. We don't want this! If we are going to make a
16169 bar graph, the columns need to be beside each other.
16170
16171 So we discover that each cycle of the column-inserting @code{while}
16172 loop must reposition point to the place we want it, and that place
16173 will be at the top, not the bottom, of the column. Moreover, we
16174 remember that when we print a graph, we do not expect all the columns
16175 to be the same height. This means that the top of each column may be
16176 at a different height from the previous one. We cannot simply
16177 reposition point to the same line each time, but moved over to the
16178 right---or perhaps we can@dots{}
16179
16180 We are planning to make the columns of the bar graph out of asterisks.
16181 The number of asterisks in the column is the number specified by the
16182 current element of the @code{numbers-list}. We need to construct a
16183 list of asterisks of the right length for each call to
16184 @code{insert-rectangle}. If this list consists solely of the requisite
16185 number of asterisks, then we will have position point the right number
16186 of lines above the base for the graph to print correctly. This could
16187 be difficult.
16188
16189 Alternatively, if we can figure out some way to pass
16190 @code{insert-rectangle} a list of the same length each time, then we
16191 can place point on the same line each time, but move it over one
16192 column to the right for each new column. If we do this, however, some
16193 of the entries in the list passed to @code{insert-rectangle} must be
16194 blanks rather than asterisks. For example, if the maximum height of
16195 the graph is 5, but the height of the column is 3, then
16196 @code{insert-rectangle} requires an argument that looks like this:
16197
16198 @smallexample
16199 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16200 @end smallexample
16201
16202 This last proposal is not so difficult, so long as we can determine
16203 the column height. There are two ways for us to specify the column
16204 height: we can arbitrarily state what it will be, which would work
16205 fine for graphs of that height; or we can search through the list of
16206 numbers and use the maximum height of the list as the maximum height
16207 of the graph. If the latter operation were difficult, then the former
16208 procedure would be easiest, but there is a function built into Emacs
16209 that determines the maximum of its arguments. We can use that
16210 function. The function is called @code{max} and it returns the
16211 largest of all its arguments, which must be numbers. Thus, for
16212 example,
16213
16214 @smallexample
16215 (max 3 4 6 5 7 3)
16216 @end smallexample
16217
16218 @noindent
16219 returns 7. (A corresponding function called @code{min} returns the
16220 smallest of all its arguments.)
16221 @findex max
16222 @findex min
16223
16224 However, we cannot simply call @code{max} on the @code{numbers-list};
16225 the @code{max} function expects numbers as its argument, not a list of
16226 numbers. Thus, the following expression,
16227
16228 @smallexample
16229 (max '(3 4 6 5 7 3))
16230 @end smallexample
16231
16232 @need 800
16233 @noindent
16234 produces the following error message;
16235
16236 @smallexample
16237 Wrong type of argument: number-or-marker-p, (3 4 6 5 7 3)
16238 @end smallexample
16239
16240 @findex apply
16241 We need a function that passes a list of arguments to a function.
16242 This function is @code{apply}. This function ``applies'' its first
16243 argument (a function) to its remaining arguments, the last of which
16244 may be a list.
16245
16246 @need 1250
16247 For example,
16248
16249 @smallexample
16250 (apply 'max 3 4 7 3 '(4 8 5))
16251 @end smallexample
16252
16253 @noindent
16254 returns 8.
16255
16256 (Incidentally, I don't know how you would learn of this function
16257 without a book such as this. It is possible to discover other
16258 functions, like @code{search-forward} or @code{insert-rectangle}, by
16259 guessing at a part of their names and then using @code{apropos}. Even
16260 though its base in metaphor is clear---``apply'' its first argument to
16261 the rest---I doubt a novice would come up with that particular word
16262 when using @code{apropos} or other aid. Of course, I could be wrong;
16263 after all, the function was first named by someone who had to invent
16264 it.)
16265
16266 The second and subsequent arguments to @code{apply} are optional, so
16267 we can use @code{apply} to call a function and pass the elements of a
16268 list to it, like this, which also returns 8:
16269
16270 @smallexample
16271 (apply 'max '(4 8 5))
16272 @end smallexample
16273
16274 This latter way is how we will use @code{apply}. The
16275 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a numbers'
16276 list to which we can apply @code{max} (we could also apply @code{max} to
16277 the sorted numbers' list; it does not matter whether the list is
16278 sorted or not.)
16279
16280 @need 800
16281 Hence, the operation for finding the maximum height of the graph is this:
16282
16283 @smallexample
16284 (setq max-graph-height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16285 @end smallexample
16286
16287 Now we can return to the question of how to create a list of strings
16288 for a column of the graph. Told the maximum height of the graph
16289 and the number of asterisks that should appear in the column, the
16290 function should return a list of strings for the
16291 @code{insert-rectangle} command to insert.
16292
16293 Each column is made up of asterisks or blanks. Since the function is
16294 passed the value of the height of the column and the number of
16295 asterisks in the column, the number of blanks can be found by
16296 subtracting the number of asterisks from the height of the column.
16297 Given the number of blanks and the number of asterisks, two
16298 @code{while} loops can be used to construct the list:
16299
16300 @smallexample
16301 @group
16302 ;;; @r{First version.}
16303 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16304 "Return list of strings that is one column of a graph."
16305 (let ((insert-list nil)
16306 (number-of-top-blanks
16307 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16308 @end group
16309
16310 @group
16311 ;; @r{Fill in asterisks.}
16312 (while (> actual-height 0)
16313 (setq insert-list (cons "*" insert-list))
16314 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16315 @end group
16316
16317 @group
16318 ;; @r{Fill in blanks.}
16319 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16320 (setq insert-list (cons " " insert-list))
16321 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16322 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16323 @end group
16324
16325 @group
16326 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16327 insert-list))
16328 @end group
16329 @end smallexample
16330
16331 If you install this function and then evaluate the following
16332 expression you will see that it returns the list as desired:
16333
16334 @smallexample
16335 (column-of-graph 5 3)
16336 @end smallexample
16337
16338 @need 800
16339 @noindent
16340 returns
16341
16342 @smallexample
16343 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16344 @end smallexample
16345
16346 As written, @code{column-of-graph} contains a major flaw: the symbols
16347 used for the blank and for the marked entries in the column are
16348 ``hard-coded'' as a space and asterisk. This is fine for a prototype,
16349 but you, or another user, may wish to use other symbols. For example,
16350 in testing the graph function, you many want to use a period in place
16351 of the space, to make sure the point is being repositioned properly
16352 each time the @code{insert-rectangle} function is called; or you might
16353 want to substitute a @samp{+} sign or other symbol for the asterisk.
16354 You might even want to make a graph-column that is more than one
16355 display column wide. The program should be more flexible. The way to
16356 do that is to replace the blank and the asterisk with two variables
16357 that we can call @code{graph-blank} and @code{graph-symbol} and define
16358 those variables separately.
16359
16360 Also, the documentation is not well written. These considerations
16361 lead us to the second version of the function:
16362
16363 @smallexample
16364 @group
16365 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
16366 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
16367 @end group
16368
16369 @group
16370 (defvar graph-blank " "
16371 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
16372 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
16373 as graph-symbol.")
16374 @end group
16375 @end smallexample
16376
16377 @noindent
16378 (For an explanation of @code{defvar}, see
16379 @ref{defvar, , Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}}.)
16380
16381 @smallexample
16382 @group
16383 ;;; @r{Second version.}
16384 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16385 "Return MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings; ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
16386
16387 @end group
16388 @group
16389 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
16390 of the list.
16391 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
16392 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
16393 @end group
16394
16395 @group
16396 (let ((insert-list nil)
16397 (number-of-top-blanks
16398 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16399 @end group
16400
16401 @group
16402 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
16403 (while (> actual-height 0)
16404 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
16405 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16406 @end group
16407
16408 @group
16409 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
16410 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16411 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
16412 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16413 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16414
16415 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16416 insert-list))
16417 @end group
16418 @end smallexample
16419
16420 If we wished, we could rewrite @code{column-of-graph} a third time to
16421 provide optionally for a line graph as well as for a bar graph. This
16422 would not be hard to do. One way to think of a line graph is that it
16423 is no more than a bar graph in which the part of each bar that is
16424 below the top is blank. To construct a column for a line graph, the
16425 function first constructs a list of blanks that is one shorter than
16426 the value, then it uses @code{cons} to attach a graph symbol to the
16427 list; then it uses @code{cons} again to attach the ``top blanks'' to
16428 the list.
16429
16430 It is easy to see how to write such a function, but since we don't
16431 need it, we will not do it. But the job could be done, and if it were
16432 done, it would be done with @code{column-of-graph}. Even more
16433 important, it is worth noting that few changes would have to be made
16434 anywhere else. The enhancement, if we ever wish to make it, is
16435 simple.
16436
16437 Now, finally, we come to our first actual graph printing function.
16438 This prints the body of a graph, not the labels for the vertical and
16439 horizontal axes, so we can call this @code{graph-body-print}.
16440
16441 @node graph-body-print
16442 @section The @code{graph-body-print} Function
16443 @findex graph-body-print
16444
16445 After our preparation in the preceding section, the
16446 @code{graph-body-print} function is straightforward. The function
16447 will print column after column of asterisks and blanks, using the
16448 elements of a numbers' list to specify the number of asterisks in each
16449 column. This is a repetitive act, which means we can use a
16450 decrementing @code{while} loop or recursive function for the job. In
16451 this section, we will write the definition using a @code{while} loop.
16452
16453 The @code{column-of-graph} function requires the height of the graph
16454 as an argument, so we should determine and record that as a local variable.
16455
16456 This leads us to the following template for the @code{while} loop
16457 version of this function:
16458
16459 @smallexample
16460 @group
16461 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16462 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
16463 (let ((height @dots{}
16464 @dots{}))
16465 @end group
16466
16467 @group
16468 (while numbers-list
16469 @var{insert-columns-and-reposition-point}
16470 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))))
16471 @end group
16472 @end smallexample
16473
16474 @noindent
16475 We need to fill in the slots of the template.
16476
16477 Clearly, we can use the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression to
16478 determine the height of the graph.
16479
16480 The @code{while} loop will cycle through the @code{numbers-list} one
16481 element at a time. As it is shortened by the @code{(setq numbers-list
16482 (cdr numbers-list))} expression, the @sc{car} of each instance of the
16483 list is the value of the argument for @code{column-of-graph}.
16484
16485 At each cycle of the @code{while} loop, the @code{insert-rectangle}
16486 function inserts the list returned by @code{column-of-graph}. Since
16487 the @code{insert-rectangle} function moves point to the lower right of
16488 the inserted rectangle, we need to save the location of point at the
16489 time the rectangle is inserted, move back to that position after the
16490 rectangle is inserted, and then move horizontally to the next place
16491 from which @code{insert-rectangle} is called.
16492
16493 If the inserted columns are one character wide, as they will be if
16494 single blanks and asterisks are used, the repositioning command is
16495 simply @code{(forward-char 1)}; however, the width of a column may be
16496 greater than one. This means that the repositioning command should be
16497 written @code{(forward-char symbol-width)}. The @code{symbol-width}
16498 itself is the length of a @code{graph-blank} and can be found using
16499 the expression @code{(length graph-blank)}. The best place to bind
16500 the @code{symbol-width} variable to the value of the width of graph
16501 column is in the varlist of the @code{let} expression.
16502
16503 @need 1250
16504 These considerations lead to the following function definition:
16505
16506 @smallexample
16507 @group
16508 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16509 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16510 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16511
16512 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16513 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16514 from-position)
16515 @end group
16516
16517 @group
16518 (while numbers-list
16519 (setq from-position (point))
16520 (insert-rectangle
16521 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16522 (goto-char from-position)
16523 (forward-char symbol-width)
16524 @end group
16525 @group
16526 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16527 (sit-for 0)
16528 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
16529 @end group
16530 @group
16531 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
16532 (forward-line height)
16533 (insert "\n")
16534 ))
16535 @end group
16536 @end smallexample
16537
16538 @noindent
16539 The one unexpected expression in this function is the
16540 @w{@code{(sit-for 0)}} expression in the @code{while} loop. This
16541 expression makes the graph printing operation more interesting to
16542 watch than it would be otherwise. The expression causes Emacs to
16543 ``sit'' or do nothing for a zero length of time and then redraw the
16544 screen. Placed here, it causes Emacs to redraw the screen column by
16545 column. Without it, Emacs would not redraw the screen until the
16546 function exits.
16547
16548 We can test @code{graph-body-print} with a short list of numbers.
16549
16550 @enumerate
16551 @item
16552 Install @code{graph-symbol}, @code{graph-blank},
16553 @code{column-of-graph}, which are in
16554 @iftex
16555 @ref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph},
16556 @end iftex
16557 @ifinfo
16558 @ref{Columns of a graph},
16559 @end ifinfo
16560 and @code{graph-body-print}.
16561
16562 @need 800
16563 @item
16564 Copy the following expression:
16565
16566 @smallexample
16567 (graph-body-print '(1 2 3 4 6 4 3 5 7 6 5 2 3))
16568 @end smallexample
16569
16570 @item
16571 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
16572 want the graph to start.
16573
16574 @item
16575 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
16576
16577 @item
16578 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
16579 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
16580
16581 @item
16582 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the @code{graph-body-print} expression.
16583 @end enumerate
16584
16585 @need 800
16586 Emacs will print a graph like this:
16587
16588 @smallexample
16589 @group
16590 *
16591 * **
16592 * ****
16593 *** ****
16594 ********* *
16595 ************
16596 *************
16597 @end group
16598 @end smallexample
16599
16600 @node recursive-graph-body-print
16601 @section The @code{recursive-graph-body-print} Function
16602 @findex recursive-graph-body-print
16603
16604 The @code{graph-body-print} function may also be written recursively.
16605 The recursive solution is divided into two parts: an outside ``wrapper''
16606 that uses a @code{let} expression to determine the values of several
16607 variables that need only be found once, such as the maximum height of
16608 the graph, and an inside function that is called recursively to print
16609 the graph.
16610
16611 @need 1250
16612 The ``wrapper'' is uncomplicated:
16613
16614 @smallexample
16615 @group
16616 (defun recursive-graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16617 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16618 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16619 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16620 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16621 from-position)
16622 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16623 numbers-list
16624 height
16625 symbol-width)))
16626 @end group
16627 @end smallexample
16628
16629 The recursive function is a little more difficult. It has four parts:
16630 the ``do-again-test'', the printing code, the recursive call, and the
16631 ``next-step-expression''. The ``do-again-test'' is a @code{when}
16632 expression that determines whether the @code{numbers-list} contains
16633 any remaining elements; if it does, the function prints one column of
16634 the graph using the printing code and calls itself again. The
16635 function calls itself again according to the value produced by the
16636 ``next-step-expression'' which causes the call to act on a shorter
16637 version of the @code{numbers-list}.
16638
16639 @smallexample
16640 @group
16641 (defun recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16642 (numbers-list height symbol-width)
16643 "Print a bar graph.
16644 Used within recursive-graph-body-print function."
16645 @end group
16646
16647 @group
16648 (when numbers-list
16649 (setq from-position (point))
16650 (insert-rectangle
16651 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16652 @end group
16653 @group
16654 (goto-char from-position)
16655 (forward-char symbol-width)
16656 (sit-for 0) ; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16657 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16658 (cdr numbers-list) height symbol-width)))
16659 @end group
16660 @end smallexample
16661
16662 @need 1250
16663 After installation, this expression can be tested; here is a sample:
16664
16665 @smallexample
16666 (recursive-graph-body-print '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
16667 @end smallexample
16668
16669 @need 800
16670 Here is what @code{recursive-graph-body-print} produces:
16671
16672 @smallexample
16673 @group
16674 *
16675 ** *
16676 **** *
16677 **** ***
16678 * *********
16679 ************
16680 *************
16681 @end group
16682 @end smallexample
16683
16684 Either of these two functions, @code{graph-body-print} or
16685 @code{recursive-graph-body-print}, create the body of a graph.
16686
16687 @node Printed Axes
16688 @section Need for Printed Axes
16689
16690 A graph needs printed axes, so you can orient yourself. For a do-once
16691 project, it may be reasonable to draw the axes by hand using Emacs's
16692 Picture mode; but a graph drawing function may be used more than once.
16693
16694 For this reason, I have written enhancements to the basic
16695 @code{print-graph-body} function that automatically print labels for
16696 the horizontal and vertical axes. Since the label printing functions
16697 do not contain much new material, I have placed their description in
16698 an appendix. @xref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labeled Axes}.
16699
16700 @node Line Graph Exercise
16701 @section Exercise
16702
16703 Write a line graph version of the graph printing functions.
16704
16705 @node Emacs Initialization
16706 @chapter Your @file{.emacs} File
16707 @cindex @file{.emacs} file
16708 @cindex Customizing your @file{.emacs} file
16709 @cindex Initialization file
16710
16711 ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it''---this seemingly
16712 paradoxical statement is the secret of GNU Emacs. The plain, ``out of
16713 the box'' Emacs is a generic tool. Most people who use it, customize
16714 it to suit themselves.
16715
16716 GNU Emacs is mostly written in Emacs Lisp; this means that by writing
16717 expressions in Emacs Lisp you can change or extend Emacs.
16718
16719 @menu
16720 * Default Configuration::
16721 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
16722 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
16723 * Beginning init File:: How to write a @file{.emacs} init file.
16724 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
16725 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
16726 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
16727 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
16728 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
16729 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
16730 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
16731 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
16732 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
16733 * Miscellaneous::
16734 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
16735 @end menu
16736
16737 @ifnottex
16738 @node Default Configuration
16739 @unnumberedsec Emacs's Default Configuration
16740 @end ifnottex
16741
16742 There are those who appreciate Emacs's default configuration. After
16743 all, Emacs starts you in C mode when you edit a C file, starts you in
16744 Fortran mode when you edit a Fortran file, and starts you in
16745 Fundamental mode when you edit an unadorned file. This all makes
16746 sense, if you do not know who is going to use Emacs. Who knows what a
16747 person hopes to do with an unadorned file? Fundamental mode is the
16748 right default for such a file, just as C mode is the right default for
16749 editing C code. (Enough programming languages have syntaxes
16750 that enable them to share or nearly share features, so C mode is
16751 now provided by CC mode, the ``C Collection''.)
16752
16753 But when you do know who is going to use Emacs---you,
16754 yourself---then it makes sense to customize Emacs.
16755
16756 For example, I seldom want Fundamental mode when I edit an
16757 otherwise undistinguished file; I want Text mode. This is why I
16758 customize Emacs: so it suits me.
16759
16760 You can customize and extend Emacs by writing or adapting a
16761 @file{~/.emacs} file. This is your personal initialization file; its
16762 contents, written in Emacs Lisp, tell Emacs what to do.@footnote{You
16763 may also add @file{.el} to @file{~/.emacs} and call it a
16764 @file{~/.emacs.el} file. In the past, you were forbidden to type the
16765 extra keystrokes that the name @file{~/.emacs.el} requires, but now
16766 you may. The new format is consistent with the Emacs Lisp file
16767 naming conventions; the old format saves typing.}
16768
16769 A @file{~/.emacs} file contains Emacs Lisp code. You can write this
16770 code yourself; or you can use Emacs's @code{customize} feature to write
16771 the code for you. You can combine your own expressions and
16772 auto-written Customize expressions in your @file{.emacs} file.
16773
16774 (I myself prefer to write my own expressions, except for those,
16775 particularly fonts, that I find easier to manipulate using the
16776 @code{customize} command. I combine the two methods.)
16777
16778 Most of this chapter is about writing expressions yourself. It
16779 describes a simple @file{.emacs} file; for more information, see
16780 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, and
16781 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
16782 Manual}.
16783
16784 @node Site-wide Init
16785 @section Site-wide Initialization Files
16786
16787 @cindex @file{default.el} init file
16788 @cindex @file{site-init.el} init file
16789 @cindex @file{site-load.el} init file
16790 In addition to your personal initialization file, Emacs automatically
16791 loads various site-wide initialization files, if they exist. These
16792 have the same form as your @file{.emacs} file, but are loaded by
16793 everyone.
16794
16795 Two site-wide initialization files, @file{site-load.el} and
16796 @file{site-init.el}, are loaded into Emacs and then ``dumped'' if a
16797 ``dumped'' version of Emacs is created, as is most common. (Dumped
16798 copies of Emacs load more quickly. However, once a file is loaded and
16799 dumped, a change to it does not lead to a change in Emacs unless you
16800 load it yourself or re-dump Emacs. @xref{Building Emacs, , Building
16801 Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, and the
16802 @file{INSTALL} file.)
16803
16804 Three other site-wide initialization files are loaded automatically
16805 each time you start Emacs, if they exist. These are
16806 @file{site-start.el}, which is loaded @emph{before} your @file{.emacs}
16807 file, and @file{default.el}, and the terminal type file, which are both
16808 loaded @emph{after} your @file{.emacs} file.
16809
16810 Settings and definitions in your @file{.emacs} file will overwrite
16811 conflicting settings and definitions in a @file{site-start.el} file,
16812 if it exists; but the settings and definitions in a @file{default.el}
16813 or terminal type file will overwrite those in your @file{.emacs} file.
16814 (You can prevent interference from a terminal type file by setting
16815 @code{term-file-prefix} to @code{nil}. @xref{Simple Extension, , A
16816 Simple Extension}.)
16817
16818 @c Rewritten to avoid overfull hbox.
16819 The @file{INSTALL} file that comes in the distribution contains
16820 descriptions of the @file{site-init.el} and @file{site-load.el} files.
16821
16822 The @file{loadup.el}, @file{startup.el}, and @file{loaddefs.el} files
16823 control loading. These files are in the @file{lisp} directory of the
16824 Emacs distribution and are worth perusing.
16825
16826 The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains a good many suggestions as to
16827 what to put into your own @file{.emacs} file, or into a site-wide
16828 initialization file.
16829
16830 @node defcustom
16831 @section Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}
16832 @findex defcustom
16833
16834 You can specify variables using @code{defcustom} so that you and
16835 others can then use Emacs's @code{customize} feature to set their
16836 values. (You cannot use @code{customize} to write function
16837 definitions; but you can write @code{defuns} in your @file{.emacs}
16838 file. Indeed, you can write any Lisp expression in your @file{.emacs}
16839 file.)
16840
16841 The @code{customize} feature depends on the @code{defcustom} macro.
16842 Although you can use @code{defvar} or @code{setq} for variables that
16843 users set, the @code{defcustom} macro is designed for the job.
16844
16845 You can use your knowledge of @code{defvar} for writing the
16846 first three arguments for @code{defcustom}. The first argument to
16847 @code{defcustom} is the name of the variable. The second argument is
16848 the variable's initial value, if any; and this value is set only if
16849 the value has not already been set. The third argument is the
16850 documentation.
16851
16852 The fourth and subsequent arguments to @code{defcustom} specify types
16853 and options; these are not featured in @code{defvar}. (These
16854 arguments are optional.)
16855
16856 Each of these arguments consists of a keyword followed by a value.
16857 Each keyword starts with the colon character @samp{:}.
16858
16859 @need 1250
16860 For example, the customizable user option variable
16861 @code{text-mode-hook} looks like this:
16862
16863 @smallexample
16864 @group
16865 (defcustom text-mode-hook nil
16866 "Normal hook run when entering Text mode and many related modes."
16867 :type 'hook
16868 :options '(turn-on-auto-fill flyspell-mode)
16869 :group 'wp)
16870 @end group
16871 @end smallexample
16872
16873 @noindent
16874 The name of the variable is @code{text-mode-hook}; it has no default
16875 value; and its documentation string tells you what it does.
16876
16877 The @code{:type} keyword tells Emacs the kind of data to which
16878 @code{text-mode-hook} should be set and how to display the value in a
16879 Customization buffer.
16880
16881 The @code{:options} keyword specifies a suggested list of values for
16882 the variable. Usually, @code{:options} applies to a hook.
16883 The list is only a suggestion; it is not exclusive; a person who sets
16884 the variable may set it to other values; the list shown following the
16885 @code{:options} keyword is intended to offer convenient choices to a
16886 user.
16887
16888 Finally, the @code{:group} keyword tells the Emacs Customization
16889 command in which group the variable is located. This tells where to
16890 find it.
16891
16892 The @code{defcustom} macro recognizes more than a dozen keywords.
16893 For more information, see @ref{Customization, , Writing Customization
16894 Definitions, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
16895
16896 Consider @code{text-mode-hook} as an example.
16897
16898 There are two ways to customize this variable. You can use the
16899 customization command or write the appropriate expressions yourself.
16900
16901 @need 800
16902 Using the customization command, you can type:
16903
16904 @smallexample
16905 M-x customize
16906 @end smallexample
16907
16908 @noindent
16909 and find that the group for editing files of data is called ``data''.
16910 Enter that group. Text Mode Hook is the first member. You can click
16911 on its various options, such as @code{turn-on-auto-fill}, to set the
16912 values. After you click on the button to
16913
16914 @smallexample
16915 Save for Future Sessions
16916 @end smallexample
16917
16918 @noindent
16919 Emacs will write an expression into your @file{.emacs} file.
16920 It will look like this:
16921
16922 @smallexample
16923 @group
16924 (custom-set-variables
16925 ;; custom-set-variables was added by Custom.
16926 ;; If you edit it by hand, you could mess it up, so be careful.
16927 ;; Your init file should contain only one such instance.
16928 ;; If there is more than one, they won't work right.
16929 '(text-mode-hook (quote (turn-on-auto-fill text-mode-hook-identify))))
16930 @end group
16931 @end smallexample
16932
16933 @noindent
16934 (The @code{text-mode-hook-identify} function tells
16935 @code{toggle-text-mode-auto-fill} which buffers are in Text mode.
16936 It comes on automatically.)
16937
16938 The @code{custom-set-variables} function works somewhat differently
16939 than a @code{setq}. While I have never learned the differences, I
16940 modify the @code{custom-set-variables} expressions in my @file{.emacs}
16941 file by hand: I make the changes in what appears to me to be a
16942 reasonable manner and have not had any problems. Others prefer to use
16943 the Customization command and let Emacs do the work for them.
16944
16945 Another @code{custom-set-@dots{}} function is @code{custom-set-faces}.
16946 This function sets the various font faces. Over time, I have set a
16947 considerable number of faces. Some of the time, I re-set them using
16948 @code{customize}; other times, I simply edit the
16949 @code{custom-set-faces} expression in my @file{.emacs} file itself.
16950
16951 The second way to customize your @code{text-mode-hook} is to set it
16952 yourself in your @file{.emacs} file using code that has nothing to do
16953 with the @code{custom-set-@dots{}} functions.
16954
16955 @need 800
16956 When you do this, and later use @code{customize}, you will see a
16957 message that says
16958
16959 @smallexample
16960 CHANGED outside Customize; operating on it here may be unreliable.
16961 @end smallexample
16962
16963 @need 800
16964 This message is only a warning. If you click on the button to
16965
16966 @smallexample
16967 Save for Future Sessions
16968 @end smallexample
16969
16970 @noindent
16971 Emacs will write a @code{custom-set-@dots{}} expression near the end
16972 of your @file{.emacs} file that will be evaluated after your
16973 hand-written expression. It will, therefore, overrule your
16974 hand-written expression. No harm will be done. When you do this,
16975 however, be careful to remember which expression is active; if you
16976 forget, you may confuse yourself.
16977
16978 So long as you remember where the values are set, you will have no
16979 trouble. In any event, the values are always set in your
16980 initialization file, which is usually called @file{.emacs}.
16981
16982 I myself use @code{customize} for hardly anything. Mostly, I write
16983 expressions myself.
16984
16985 @findex defsubst
16986 @findex defconst
16987 Incidentally, to be more complete concerning defines: @code{defsubst}
16988 defines an inline function. The syntax is just like that of
16989 @code{defun}. @code{defconst} defines a symbol as a constant. The
16990 intent is that neither programs nor users should ever change a value
16991 set by @code{defconst}. (You can change it; the value set is a
16992 variable; but please do not.)
16993
16994 @node Beginning init File
16995 @section Beginning a @file{.emacs} File
16996 @cindex @file{.emacs} file, beginning of
16997
16998 When you start Emacs, it loads your @file{.emacs} file unless you tell
16999 it not to by specifying @samp{-q} on the command line. (The
17000 @code{emacs -q} command gives you a plain, out-of-the-box Emacs.)
17001
17002 A @file{.emacs} file contains Lisp expressions. Often, these are no
17003 more than expressions to set values; sometimes they are function
17004 definitions.
17005
17006 @xref{Init File, , The Init File @file{~/.emacs}, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17007 Manual}, for a short description of initialization files.
17008
17009 This chapter goes over some of the same ground, but is a walk among
17010 extracts from a complete, long-used @file{.emacs} file---my own.
17011
17012 The first part of the file consists of comments: reminders to myself.
17013 By now, of course, I remember these things, but when I started, I did
17014 not.
17015
17016 @need 1200
17017 @smallexample
17018 @group
17019 ;;;; Bob's .emacs file
17020 ; Robert J. Chassell
17021 ; 26 September 1985
17022 @end group
17023 @end smallexample
17024
17025 @noindent
17026 Look at that date! I started this file a long time ago. I have been
17027 adding to it ever since.
17028
17029 @smallexample
17030 @group
17031 ; Each section in this file is introduced by a
17032 ; line beginning with four semicolons; and each
17033 ; entry is introduced by a line beginning with
17034 ; three semicolons.
17035 @end group
17036 @end smallexample
17037
17038 @noindent
17039 This describes the usual conventions for comments in Emacs Lisp.
17040 Everything on a line that follows a semicolon is a comment. Two,
17041 three, and four semicolons are used as subsection and section markers.
17042 (@xref{Comments, ,, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for
17043 more about comments.)
17044
17045 @smallexample
17046 @group
17047 ;;;; The Help Key
17048 ; Control-h is the help key;
17049 ; after typing control-h, type a letter to
17050 ; indicate the subject about which you want help.
17051 ; For an explanation of the help facility,
17052 ; type control-h two times in a row.
17053 @end group
17054 @end smallexample
17055
17056 @noindent
17057 Just remember: type @kbd{C-h} two times for help.
17058
17059 @smallexample
17060 @group
17061 ; To find out about any mode, type control-h m
17062 ; while in that mode. For example, to find out
17063 ; about mail mode, enter mail mode and then type
17064 ; control-h m.
17065 @end group
17066 @end smallexample
17067
17068 @noindent
17069 ``Mode help'', as I call this, is very helpful. Usually, it tells you
17070 all you need to know.
17071
17072 Of course, you don't need to include comments like these in your
17073 @file{.emacs} file. I included them in mine because I kept forgetting
17074 about Mode help or the conventions for comments---but I was able to
17075 remember to look here to remind myself.
17076
17077 @node Text and Auto-fill
17078 @section Text and Auto Fill Mode
17079
17080 Now we come to the part that ``turns on'' Text mode and
17081 Auto Fill mode.
17082
17083 @smallexample
17084 @group
17085 ;;; Text mode and Auto Fill mode
17086 ;; The next two lines put Emacs into Text mode
17087 ;; and Auto Fill mode, and are for writers who
17088 ;; want to start writing prose rather than code.
17089 (setq-default major-mode 'text-mode)
17090 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17091 @end group
17092 @end smallexample
17093
17094 Here is the first part of this @file{.emacs} file that does something
17095 besides remind a forgetful human!
17096
17097 The first of the two lines in parentheses tells Emacs to turn on Text
17098 mode when you find a file, @emph{unless} that file should go into some
17099 other mode, such as C mode.
17100
17101 @cindex Per-buffer, local variables list
17102 @cindex Local variables list, per-buffer,
17103 @cindex Automatic mode selection
17104 @cindex Mode selection, automatic
17105 When Emacs reads a file, it looks at the extension to the file name,
17106 if any. (The extension is the part that comes after a @samp{.}.) If
17107 the file ends with a @samp{.c} or @samp{.h} extension then Emacs turns
17108 on C mode. Also, Emacs looks at first nonblank line of the file; if
17109 the line says @w{@samp{-*- C -*-}}, Emacs turns on C mode. Emacs
17110 possesses a list of extensions and specifications that it uses
17111 automatically. In addition, Emacs looks near the last page for a
17112 per-buffer, ``local variables list'', if any.
17113
17114 @ifinfo
17115 @xref{Choosing Modes, , How Major Modes are Chosen, emacs, The GNU
17116 Emacs Manual}.
17117
17118 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17119 Manual}.
17120 @end ifinfo
17121 @iftex
17122 See sections ``How Major Modes are Chosen'' and ``Local Variables in
17123 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17124 @end iftex
17125
17126 Now, back to the @file{.emacs} file.
17127
17128 @need 800
17129 Here is the line again; how does it work?
17130
17131 @cindex Text Mode turned on
17132 @smallexample
17133 (setq major-mode 'text-mode)
17134 @end smallexample
17135
17136 @noindent
17137 This line is a short, but complete Emacs Lisp expression.
17138
17139 We are already familiar with @code{setq}. It sets the following variable,
17140 @code{major-mode}, to the subsequent value, which is @code{text-mode}.
17141 The single quote mark before @code{text-mode} tells Emacs to deal directly
17142 with the @code{text-mode} symbol, not with whatever it might stand for.
17143 @xref{set & setq, , Setting the Value of a Variable},
17144 for a reminder of how @code{setq} works.
17145 The main point is that there is no difference between the procedure you
17146 use to set a value in your @file{.emacs} file and the procedure you use
17147 anywhere else in Emacs.
17148
17149 @need 800
17150 Here is the next line:
17151
17152 @cindex Auto Fill mode turned on
17153 @findex add-hook
17154 @smallexample
17155 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17156 @end smallexample
17157
17158 @noindent
17159 In this line, the @code{add-hook} command adds
17160 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} to the variable.
17161
17162 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} is the name of a program, that, you guessed
17163 it!, turns on Auto Fill mode.
17164
17165 Every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs runs the commands ``hooked''
17166 onto Text mode. So every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs also
17167 turns on Auto Fill mode.
17168
17169 In brief, the first line causes Emacs to enter Text mode when you edit a
17170 file, unless the file name extension, a first non-blank line, or local
17171 variables to tell Emacs otherwise.
17172
17173 Text mode among other actions, sets the syntax table to work
17174 conveniently for writers. In Text mode, Emacs considers an apostrophe
17175 as part of a word like a letter; but Emacs does not consider a period
17176 or a space as part of a word. Thus, @kbd{M-f} moves you over
17177 @samp{it's}. On the other hand, in C mode, @kbd{M-f} stops just after
17178 the @samp{t} of @samp{it's}.
17179
17180 The second line causes Emacs to turn on Auto Fill mode when it turns
17181 on Text mode. In Auto Fill mode, Emacs automatically breaks a line
17182 that is too wide and brings the excessively wide part of the line down
17183 to the next line. Emacs breaks lines between words, not within them.
17184
17185 When Auto Fill mode is turned off, lines continue to the right as you
17186 type them. Depending on how you set the value of
17187 @code{truncate-lines}, the words you type either disappear off the
17188 right side of the screen, or else are shown, in a rather ugly and
17189 unreadable manner, as a continuation line on the screen.
17190
17191 @need 1250
17192 In addition, in this part of my @file{.emacs} file, I tell the Emacs
17193 fill commands to insert two spaces after a colon:
17194
17195 @smallexample
17196 (setq colon-double-space t)
17197 @end smallexample
17198
17199 @node Mail Aliases
17200 @section Mail Aliases
17201
17202 Here is a @code{setq} that ``turns on'' mail aliases, along with more
17203 reminders.
17204
17205 @smallexample
17206 @group
17207 ;;; Mail mode
17208 ; To enter mail mode, type 'C-x m'
17209 ; To enter RMAIL (for reading mail),
17210 ; type 'M-x rmail'
17211 (setq mail-aliases t)
17212 @end group
17213 @end smallexample
17214
17215 @cindex Mail aliases
17216 @noindent
17217 This @code{setq} command sets the value of the variable
17218 @code{mail-aliases} to @code{t}. Since @code{t} means true, the line
17219 says, in effect, ``Yes, use mail aliases.''
17220
17221 Mail aliases are convenient short names for long email addresses or
17222 for lists of email addresses. The file where you keep your ``aliases''
17223 is @file{~/.mailrc}. You write an alias like this:
17224
17225 @smallexample
17226 alias geo george@@foobar.wiz.edu
17227 @end smallexample
17228
17229 @noindent
17230 When you write a message to George, address it to @samp{geo}; the
17231 mailer will automatically expand @samp{geo} to the full address.
17232
17233 @node Indent Tabs Mode
17234 @section Indent Tabs Mode
17235 @cindex Tabs, preventing
17236 @findex indent-tabs-mode
17237
17238 By default, Emacs inserts tabs in place of multiple spaces when it
17239 formats a region. (For example, you might indent many lines of text
17240 all at once with the @code{indent-region} command.) Tabs look fine on
17241 a terminal or with ordinary printing, but they produce badly indented
17242 output when you use @TeX{} or Texinfo since @TeX{} ignores tabs.
17243
17244 @need 1250
17245 The following turns off Indent Tabs mode:
17246
17247 @smallexample
17248 @group
17249 ;;; Prevent Extraneous Tabs
17250 (setq-default indent-tabs-mode nil)
17251 @end group
17252 @end smallexample
17253
17254 Note that this line uses @code{setq-default} rather than the
17255 @code{setq} command that we have seen before. The @code{setq-default}
17256 command sets values only in buffers that do not have their own local
17257 values for the variable.
17258
17259 @ifinfo
17260 @xref{Just Spaces, , Tabs vs.@: Spaces, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17261
17262 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17263 Manual}.
17264 @end ifinfo
17265 @iftex
17266 See sections ``Tabs vs.@: Spaces'' and ``Local Variables in
17267 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17268 @end iftex
17269
17270 @need 1700
17271 @node Keybindings
17272 @section Some Keybindings
17273
17274 Now for some personal keybindings:
17275
17276 @smallexample
17277 @group
17278 ;;; Compare windows
17279 (global-set-key "\C-cw" 'compare-windows)
17280 @end group
17281 @end smallexample
17282
17283 @findex compare-windows
17284 @code{compare-windows} is a nifty command that compares the text in
17285 your current window with text in the next window. It makes the
17286 comparison by starting at point in each window, moving over text in
17287 each window as far as they match. I use this command all the time.
17288
17289 This also shows how to set a key globally, for all modes.
17290
17291 @cindex Setting a key globally
17292 @cindex Global set key
17293 @cindex Key setting globally
17294 @findex global-set-key
17295 The command is @code{global-set-key}. It is followed by the
17296 keybinding. In a @file{.emacs} file, the keybinding is written as
17297 shown: @code{\C-c} stands for ``control-c'', which means ``press the
17298 control key and the @key{c} key at the same time''. The @code{w} means
17299 ``press the @key{w} key''. The keybinding is surrounded by double
17300 quotation marks. In documentation, you would write this as
17301 @w{@kbd{C-c w}}. (If you were binding a @key{META} key, such as
17302 @kbd{M-c}, rather than a @key{CTRL} key, you would write
17303 @w{@code{\M-c}} in your @file{.emacs} file. @xref{Init Rebinding, ,
17304 Rebinding Keys in Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for
17305 details.)
17306
17307 The command invoked by the keys is @code{compare-windows}. Note that
17308 @code{compare-windows} is preceded by a single quote; otherwise, Emacs
17309 would first try to evaluate the symbol to determine its value.
17310
17311 These three things, the double quotation marks, the backslash before
17312 the @samp{C}, and the single quote mark are necessary parts of
17313 keybinding that I tend to forget. Fortunately, I have come to
17314 remember that I should look at my existing @file{.emacs} file, and
17315 adapt what is there.
17316
17317 As for the keybinding itself: @kbd{C-c w}. This combines the prefix
17318 key, @kbd{C-c}, with a single character, in this case, @kbd{w}. This
17319 set of keys, @kbd{C-c} followed by a single character, is strictly
17320 reserved for individuals' own use. (I call these ``own'' keys, since
17321 these are for my own use.) You should always be able to create such a
17322 keybinding for your own use without stomping on someone else's
17323 keybinding. If you ever write an extension to Emacs, please avoid
17324 taking any of these keys for public use. Create a key like @kbd{C-c
17325 C-w} instead. Otherwise, we will run out of ``own'' keys.
17326
17327 @need 1250
17328 Here is another keybinding, with a comment:
17329
17330 @smallexample
17331 @group
17332 ;;; Keybinding for 'occur'
17333 ; I use occur a lot, so let's bind it to a key:
17334 (global-set-key "\C-co" 'occur)
17335 @end group
17336 @end smallexample
17337
17338 @findex occur
17339 The @code{occur} command shows all the lines in the current buffer
17340 that contain a match for a regular expression. Matching lines are
17341 shown in a buffer called @file{*Occur*}. That buffer serves as a menu
17342 to jump to occurrences.
17343
17344 @findex global-unset-key
17345 @cindex Unbinding key
17346 @cindex Key unbinding
17347 @need 1250
17348 Here is how to unbind a key, so it does not
17349 work:
17350
17351 @smallexample
17352 @group
17353 ;;; Unbind 'C-x f'
17354 (global-unset-key "\C-xf")
17355 @end group
17356 @end smallexample
17357
17358 There is a reason for this unbinding: I found I inadvertently typed
17359 @w{@kbd{C-x f}} when I meant to type @kbd{C-x C-f}. Rather than find a
17360 file, as I intended, I accidentally set the width for filled text,
17361 almost always to a width I did not want. Since I hardly ever reset my
17362 default width, I simply unbound the key.
17363
17364 @findex list-buffers, @r{rebound}
17365 @findex buffer-menu, @r{bound to key}
17366 @need 1250
17367 The following rebinds an existing key:
17368
17369 @smallexample
17370 @group
17371 ;;; Rebind 'C-x C-b' for 'buffer-menu'
17372 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17373 @end group
17374 @end smallexample
17375
17376 By default, @kbd{C-x C-b} runs the
17377 @code{list-buffers} command. This command lists
17378 your buffers in @emph{another} window. Since I
17379 almost always want to do something in that
17380 window, I prefer the @code{buffer-menu}
17381 command, which not only lists the buffers,
17382 but moves point into that window.
17383
17384 @node Keymaps
17385 @section Keymaps
17386 @cindex Keymaps
17387 @cindex Rebinding keys
17388
17389 Emacs uses @dfn{keymaps} to record which keys call which commands.
17390 When you use @code{global-set-key} to set the keybinding for a single
17391 command in all parts of Emacs, you are specifying the keybinding in
17392 @code{current-global-map}.
17393
17394 Specific modes, such as C mode or Text mode, have their own keymaps;
17395 the mode-specific keymaps override the global map that is shared by
17396 all buffers.
17397
17398 The @code{global-set-key} function binds, or rebinds, the global
17399 keymap. For example, the following binds the key @kbd{C-x C-b} to the
17400 function @code{buffer-menu}:
17401
17402 @smallexample
17403 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17404 @end smallexample
17405
17406 Mode-specific keymaps are bound using the @code{define-key} function,
17407 which takes a specific keymap as an argument, as well as the key and
17408 the command. For example, my @file{.emacs} file contains the
17409 following expression to bind the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} command
17410 to @kbd{C-c C-c g}:
17411
17412 @smallexample
17413 @group
17414 (define-key texinfo-mode-map "\C-c\C-cg" 'texinfo-insert-@@group)
17415 @end group
17416 @end smallexample
17417
17418 @noindent
17419 The @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function itself is a little extension
17420 to Texinfo mode that inserts @samp{@@group} into a Texinfo file. I
17421 use this command all the time and prefer to type the three strokes
17422 @kbd{C-c C-c g} rather than the six strokes @kbd{@@ g r o u p}.
17423 (@samp{@@group} and its matching @samp{@@end group} are commands that
17424 keep all enclosed text together on one page; many multi-line examples
17425 in this book are surrounded by @samp{@@group @dots{} @@end group}.)
17426
17427 @need 1250
17428 Here is the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function definition:
17429
17430 @smallexample
17431 @group
17432 (defun texinfo-insert-@@group ()
17433 "Insert the string @@group in a Texinfo buffer."
17434 (interactive)
17435 (beginning-of-line)
17436 (insert "@@group\n"))
17437 @end group
17438 @end smallexample
17439
17440 (Of course, I could have used Abbrev mode to save typing, rather than
17441 write a function to insert a word; but I prefer key strokes consistent
17442 with other Texinfo mode key bindings.)
17443
17444 You will see numerous @code{define-key} expressions in
17445 @file{loaddefs.el} as well as in the various mode libraries, such as
17446 @file{cc-mode.el} and @file{lisp-mode.el}.
17447
17448 @xref{Key Bindings, , Customizing Key Bindings, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17449 Manual}, and @ref{Keymaps, , Keymaps, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17450 Reference Manual}, for more information about keymaps.
17451
17452 @node Loading Files
17453 @section Loading Files
17454 @cindex Loading files
17455 @c findex load
17456
17457 Many people in the GNU Emacs community have written extensions to
17458 Emacs. As time goes by, these extensions are often included in new
17459 releases. For example, the Calendar and Diary packages are now part
17460 of the standard GNU Emacs, as is Calc.
17461
17462 You can use a @code{load} command to evaluate a complete file and
17463 thereby install all the functions and variables in the file into Emacs.
17464 For example:
17465
17466 @c (auto-compression-mode t)
17467
17468 @smallexample
17469 (load "~/emacs/slowsplit")
17470 @end smallexample
17471
17472 This evaluates, i.e., loads, the @file{slowsplit.el} file or if it
17473 exists, the faster, byte compiled @file{slowsplit.elc} file from the
17474 @file{emacs} sub-directory of your home directory. The file contains
17475 the function @code{split-window-quietly}, which John Robinson wrote in
17476 1989.
17477
17478 The @code{split-window-quietly} function splits a window with the
17479 minimum of redisplay. I installed it in 1989 because it worked well
17480 with the slow 1200 baud terminals I was then using. Nowadays, I only
17481 occasionally come across such a slow connection, but I continue to use
17482 the function because I like the way it leaves the bottom half of a
17483 buffer in the lower of the new windows and the top half in the upper
17484 window.
17485
17486 @need 1250
17487 To replace the key binding for the default
17488 @code{split-window-vertically}, you must also unset that key and bind
17489 the keys to @code{split-window-quietly}, like this:
17490
17491 @smallexample
17492 @group
17493 (global-unset-key "\C-x2")
17494 (global-set-key "\C-x2" 'split-window-quietly)
17495 @end group
17496 @end smallexample
17497
17498 @vindex load-path
17499 If you load many extensions, as I do, then instead of specifying the
17500 exact location of the extension file, as shown above, you can specify
17501 that directory as part of Emacs's @code{load-path}. Then, when Emacs
17502 loads a file, it will search that directory as well as its default
17503 list of directories. (The default list is specified in @file{paths.h}
17504 when Emacs is built.)
17505
17506 @need 1250
17507 The following command adds your @file{~/emacs} directory to the
17508 existing load path:
17509
17510 @smallexample
17511 @group
17512 ;;; Emacs Load Path
17513 (setq load-path (cons "~/emacs" load-path))
17514 @end group
17515 @end smallexample
17516
17517 Incidentally, @code{load-library} is an interactive interface to the
17518 @code{load} function. The complete function looks like this:
17519
17520 @findex load-library
17521 @smallexample
17522 @group
17523 (defun load-library (library)
17524 "Load the Emacs Lisp library named LIBRARY.
17525 This is an interface to the function `load'. LIBRARY is searched
17526 for in `load-path', both with and without `load-suffixes' (as
17527 well as `load-file-rep-suffixes').
17528
17529 See Info node `(emacs)Lisp Libraries' for more details.
17530 See `load-file' for a different interface to `load'."
17531 (interactive
17532 (list (completing-read "Load library: "
17533 (apply-partially 'locate-file-completion-table
17534 load-path
17535 (get-load-suffixes)))))
17536 (load library))
17537 @end group
17538 @end smallexample
17539
17540 The name of the function, @code{load-library}, comes from the use of
17541 ``library'' as a conventional synonym for ``file''. The source for the
17542 @code{load-library} command is in the @file{files.el} library.
17543
17544 Another interactive command that does a slightly different job is
17545 @code{load-file}. @xref{Lisp Libraries, , Libraries of Lisp Code for
17546 Emacs, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for information on the
17547 distinction between @code{load-library} and this command.
17548
17549 @node Autoload
17550 @section Autoloading
17551 @findex autoload
17552
17553 Instead of installing a function by loading the file that contains it,
17554 or by evaluating the function definition, you can make the function
17555 available but not actually install it until it is first called. This
17556 is called @dfn{autoloading}.
17557
17558 When you execute an autoloaded function, Emacs automatically evaluates
17559 the file that contains the definition, and then calls the function.
17560
17561 Emacs starts quicker with autoloaded functions, since their libraries
17562 are not loaded right away; but you need to wait a moment when you
17563 first use such a function, while its containing file is evaluated.
17564
17565 Rarely used functions are frequently autoloaded. The
17566 @file{loaddefs.el} library contains thousands of autoloaded functions,
17567 from @code{5x5} to @code{zone}. Of course, you may
17568 come to use a ``rare'' function frequently. When you do, you should
17569 load that function's file with a @code{load} expression in your
17570 @file{.emacs} file.
17571
17572 In my @file{.emacs} file, I load 14 libraries that contain functions
17573 that would otherwise be autoloaded. (Actually, it would have been
17574 better to include these files in my ``dumped'' Emacs, but I forgot.
17575 @xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17576 Reference Manual}, and the @file{INSTALL} file for more about
17577 dumping.)
17578
17579 You may also want to include autoloaded expressions in your @file{.emacs}
17580 file. @code{autoload} is a built-in function that takes up to five
17581 arguments, the final three of which are optional. The first argument
17582 is the name of the function to be autoloaded; the second is the name
17583 of the file to be loaded. The third argument is documentation for the
17584 function, and the fourth tells whether the function can be called
17585 interactively. The fifth argument tells what type of
17586 object---@code{autoload} can handle a keymap or macro as well as a
17587 function (the default is a function).
17588
17589 @need 800
17590 Here is a typical example:
17591
17592 @smallexample
17593 @group
17594 (autoload 'html-helper-mode
17595 "html-helper-mode" "Edit HTML documents" t)
17596 @end group
17597 @end smallexample
17598
17599 @noindent
17600 (@code{html-helper-mode} is an older alternative to @code{html-mode},
17601 which is a standard part of the distribution.)
17602
17603 @noindent
17604 This expression autoloads the @code{html-helper-mode} function. It
17605 takes it from the @file{html-helper-mode.el} file (or from the byte
17606 compiled version @file{html-helper-mode.elc}, if that exists.) The
17607 file must be located in a directory specified by @code{load-path}.
17608 The documentation says that this is a mode to help you edit documents
17609 written in the HyperText Markup Language. You can call this mode
17610 interactively by typing @kbd{M-x html-helper-mode}. (You need to
17611 duplicate the function's regular documentation in the autoload
17612 expression because the regular function is not yet loaded, so its
17613 documentation is not available.)
17614
17615 @xref{Autoload, , Autoload, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
17616 Manual}, for more information.
17617
17618 @node Simple Extension
17619 @section A Simple Extension: @code{line-to-top-of-window}
17620 @findex line-to-top-of-window
17621 @cindex Simple extension in @file{.emacs} file
17622
17623 Here is a simple extension to Emacs that moves the line point is on to
17624 the top of the window. I use this all the time, to make text easier
17625 to read.
17626
17627 You can put the following code into a separate file and then load it
17628 from your @file{.emacs} file, or you can include it within your
17629 @file{.emacs} file.
17630
17631 @need 1250
17632 Here is the definition:
17633
17634 @smallexample
17635 @group
17636 ;;; Line to top of window;
17637 ;;; replace three keystroke sequence C-u 0 C-l
17638 (defun line-to-top-of-window ()
17639 "Move the line point is on to top of window."
17640 (interactive)
17641 (recenter 0))
17642 @end group
17643 @end smallexample
17644
17645 @need 1250
17646 Now for the keybinding.
17647
17648 Nowadays, function keys as well as mouse button events and
17649 non-@sc{ascii} characters are written within square brackets, without
17650 quotation marks. (In Emacs version 18 and before, you had to write
17651 different function key bindings for each different make of terminal.)
17652
17653 I bind @code{line-to-top-of-window} to my @key{F6} function key like
17654 this:
17655
17656 @smallexample
17657 (global-set-key [f6] 'line-to-top-of-window)
17658 @end smallexample
17659
17660 For more information, see @ref{Init Rebinding, , Rebinding Keys in
17661 Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17662
17663 @cindex Conditional 'twixt two versions of Emacs
17664 @cindex Version of Emacs, choosing
17665 @cindex Emacs version, choosing
17666 If you run two versions of GNU Emacs, such as versions 22 and 23, and
17667 use one @file{.emacs} file, you can select which code to evaluate with
17668 the following conditional:
17669
17670 @smallexample
17671 @group
17672 (cond
17673 ((= 22 emacs-major-version)
17674 ;; evaluate version 22 code
17675 ( @dots{} ))
17676 ((= 23 emacs-major-version)
17677 ;; evaluate version 23 code
17678 ( @dots{} )))
17679 @end group
17680 @end smallexample
17681
17682 For example, recent versions blink
17683 their cursors by default. I hate such blinking, as well as other
17684 features, so I placed the following in my @file{.emacs}
17685 file@footnote{When I start instances of Emacs that do not load my
17686 @file{.emacs} file or any site file, I also turn off blinking:
17687
17688 @smallexample
17689 emacs -q --no-site-file -eval '(blink-cursor-mode nil)'
17690
17691 @exdent Or nowadays, using an even more sophisticated set of options,
17692
17693 emacs -Q -D
17694 @end smallexample
17695 }:
17696
17697 @smallexample
17698 @group
17699 (when (>= emacs-major-version 21)
17700 (blink-cursor-mode 0)
17701 ;; Insert newline when you press 'C-n' (next-line)
17702 ;; at the end of the buffer
17703 (setq next-line-add-newlines t)
17704 @end group
17705 @group
17706 ;; Turn on image viewing
17707 (auto-image-file-mode t)
17708 @end group
17709 @group
17710 ;; Turn on menu bar (this bar has text)
17711 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17712 (menu-bar-mode 1)
17713 @end group
17714 @group
17715 ;; Turn off tool bar (this bar has icons)
17716 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17717 (tool-bar-mode nil)
17718 @end group
17719 @group
17720 ;; Turn off tooltip mode for tool bar
17721 ;; (This mode causes icon explanations to pop up)
17722 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17723 (tooltip-mode nil)
17724 ;; If tooltips turned on, make tips appear promptly
17725 (setq tooltip-delay 0.1) ; default is 0.7 second
17726 )
17727 @end group
17728 @end smallexample
17729
17730 @node X11 Colors
17731 @section X11 Colors
17732
17733 You can specify colors when you use Emacs with the MIT X Windowing
17734 system.
17735
17736 I dislike the default colors and specify my own.
17737
17738 @need 1250
17739 Here are the expressions in my @file{.emacs}
17740 file that set values:
17741
17742 @smallexample
17743 @group
17744 ;; Set cursor color
17745 (set-cursor-color "white")
17746
17747 ;; Set mouse color
17748 (set-mouse-color "white")
17749
17750 ;; Set foreground and background
17751 (set-foreground-color "white")
17752 (set-background-color "darkblue")
17753 @end group
17754
17755 @group
17756 ;;; Set highlighting colors for isearch and drag
17757 (set-face-foreground 'highlight "white")
17758 (set-face-background 'highlight "blue")
17759 @end group
17760
17761 @group
17762 (set-face-foreground 'region "cyan")
17763 (set-face-background 'region "blue")
17764 @end group
17765
17766 @group
17767 (set-face-foreground 'secondary-selection "skyblue")
17768 (set-face-background 'secondary-selection "darkblue")
17769 @end group
17770
17771 @group
17772 ;; Set calendar highlighting colors
17773 (add-hook 'calendar-load-hook
17774 (lambda ()
17775 (set-face-foreground 'diary-face "skyblue")
17776 (set-face-background 'holiday-face "slate blue")
17777 (set-face-foreground 'holiday-face "white")))
17778 @end group
17779 @end smallexample
17780
17781 The various shades of blue soothe my eye and prevent me from seeing
17782 the screen flicker.
17783
17784 Alternatively, I could have set my specifications in various X
17785 initialization files. For example, I could set the foreground,
17786 background, cursor, and pointer (i.e., mouse) colors in my
17787 @file{~/.Xresources} file like this:
17788
17789 @smallexample
17790 @group
17791 Emacs*foreground: white
17792 Emacs*background: darkblue
17793 Emacs*cursorColor: white
17794 Emacs*pointerColor: white
17795 @end group
17796 @end smallexample
17797
17798 In any event, since it is not part of Emacs, I set the root color of
17799 my X window in my @file{~/.xinitrc} file, like this@footnote{I also
17800 run more modern window managers, such as Enlightenment, Gnome, or KDE;
17801 in those cases, I often specify an image rather than a plain color.}:
17802
17803 @smallexample
17804 xsetroot -solid Navy -fg white &
17805 @end smallexample
17806
17807 @need 1700
17808 @node Miscellaneous
17809 @section Miscellaneous Settings for a @file{.emacs} File
17810
17811 @need 1250
17812 Here are a few miscellaneous settings:
17813 @sp 1
17814
17815 @itemize @minus
17816 @item
17817 Set the shape and color of the mouse cursor:
17818
17819 @smallexample
17820 @group
17821 ; Cursor shapes are defined in
17822 ; '/usr/include/X11/cursorfont.h';
17823 ; for example, the 'target' cursor is number 128;
17824 ; the 'top_left_arrow' cursor is number 132.
17825 @end group
17826
17827 @group
17828 (let ((mpointer (x-get-resource "*mpointer"
17829 "*emacs*mpointer")))
17830 ;; If you have not set your mouse pointer
17831 ;; then set it, otherwise leave as is:
17832 (if (eq mpointer nil)
17833 (setq mpointer "132")) ; top_left_arrow
17834 @end group
17835 @group
17836 (setq x-pointer-shape (string-to-int mpointer))
17837 (set-mouse-color "white"))
17838 @end group
17839 @end smallexample
17840
17841 @item
17842 Or you can set the values of a variety of features in an alist, like
17843 this:
17844
17845 @smallexample
17846 @group
17847 (setq-default
17848 default-frame-alist
17849 '((cursor-color . "white")
17850 (mouse-color . "white")
17851 (foreground-color . "white")
17852 (background-color . "DodgerBlue4")
17853 ;; (cursor-type . bar)
17854 (cursor-type . box)
17855 @end group
17856 @group
17857 (tool-bar-lines . 0)
17858 (menu-bar-lines . 1)
17859 (width . 80)
17860 (height . 58)
17861 (font .
17862 "-Misc-Fixed-Medium-R-Normal--20-200-75-75-C-100-ISO8859-1")
17863 ))
17864 @end group
17865 @end smallexample
17866
17867 @item
17868 Convert @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h} into @key{DEL} and @key{DEL}
17869 into @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h}.@*
17870 (Some older keyboards needed this, although I have not seen the
17871 problem recently.)
17872
17873 @smallexample
17874 @group
17875 ;; Translate 'C-h' to <DEL>.
17876 ; (keyboard-translate ?\C-h ?\C-?)
17877
17878 ;; Translate <DEL> to 'C-h'.
17879 (keyboard-translate ?\C-? ?\C-h)
17880 @end group
17881 @end smallexample
17882
17883 @item Turn off a blinking cursor!
17884
17885 @smallexample
17886 @group
17887 (if (fboundp 'blink-cursor-mode)
17888 (blink-cursor-mode -1))
17889 @end group
17890 @end smallexample
17891
17892 @noindent
17893 or start GNU Emacs with the command @code{emacs -nbc}.
17894
17895 @need 1250
17896 @item When using @command{grep}@*
17897 @samp{-i}@w{ } Ignore case distinctions@*
17898 @samp{-n}@w{ } Prefix each line of output with line number@*
17899 @samp{-H}@w{ } Print the filename for each match.@*
17900 @samp{-e}@w{ } Protect patterns beginning with a hyphen character, @samp{-}
17901
17902 @smallexample
17903 (setq grep-command "grep -i -nH -e ")
17904 @end smallexample
17905
17906 @ignore
17907 @c Evidently, no longer needed in GNU Emacs 22
17908
17909 item Automatically uncompress compressed files when visiting them
17910
17911 smallexample
17912 (load "uncompress")
17913 end smallexample
17914
17915 @end ignore
17916
17917 @item Find an existing buffer, even if it has a different name@*
17918 This avoids problems with symbolic links.
17919
17920 @smallexample
17921 (setq find-file-existing-other-name t)
17922 @end smallexample
17923
17924 @item Set your language environment and default input method
17925
17926 @smallexample
17927 @group
17928 (set-language-environment "latin-1")
17929 ;; Remember you can enable or disable multilingual text input
17930 ;; with the @code{toggle-input-method'} (@kbd{C-\}) command
17931 (setq default-input-method "latin-1-prefix")
17932 @end group
17933 @end smallexample
17934
17935 If you want to write with Chinese ``GB'' characters, set this instead:
17936
17937 @smallexample
17938 @group
17939 (set-language-environment "Chinese-GB")
17940 (setq default-input-method "chinese-tonepy")
17941 @end group
17942 @end smallexample
17943 @end itemize
17944
17945 @subsubheading Fixing Unpleasant Key Bindings
17946 @cindex Key bindings, fixing
17947 @cindex Bindings, key, fixing unpleasant
17948
17949 Some systems bind keys unpleasantly. Sometimes, for example, the
17950 @key{CTRL} key appears in an awkward spot rather than at the far left
17951 of the home row.
17952
17953 Usually, when people fix these sorts of keybindings, they do not
17954 change their @file{~/.emacs} file. Instead, they bind the proper keys
17955 on their consoles with the @code{loadkeys} or @code{install-keymap}
17956 commands in their boot script and then include @code{xmodmap} commands
17957 in their @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file for X Windows.
17958
17959 @need 1250
17960 @noindent
17961 For a boot script:
17962
17963 @smallexample
17964 @group
17965 loadkeys /usr/share/keymaps/i386/qwerty/emacs2.kmap.gz
17966 @exdent or
17967 install-keymap emacs2
17968 @end group
17969 @end smallexample
17970
17971 @need 1250
17972 @noindent
17973 For a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file when the @key{Caps
17974 Lock} key is at the far left of the home row:
17975
17976 @smallexample
17977 @group
17978 # Bind the key labeled 'Caps Lock' to 'Control'
17979 # (Such a broken user interface suggests that keyboard manufacturers
17980 # think that computers are typewriters from 1885.)
17981
17982 xmodmap -e "clear Lock"
17983 xmodmap -e "add Control = Caps_Lock"
17984 @end group
17985 @end smallexample
17986
17987 @need 1250
17988 @noindent
17989 In a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file, to convert an @key{ALT}
17990 key to a @key{META} key:
17991
17992 @smallexample
17993 @group
17994 # Some ill designed keyboards have a key labeled ALT and no Meta
17995 xmodmap -e "keysym Alt_L = Meta_L Alt_L"
17996 @end group
17997 @end smallexample
17998
17999 @need 1700
18000 @node Mode Line
18001 @section A Modified Mode Line
18002 @vindex mode-line-format
18003 @cindex Mode line format
18004
18005 Finally, a feature I really like: a modified mode line.
18006
18007 When I work over a network, I forget which machine I am using. Also,
18008 I tend to I lose track of where I am, and which line point is on.
18009
18010 So I reset my mode line to look like this:
18011
18012 @smallexample
18013 -:-- foo.texi rattlesnake:/home/bob/ Line 1 (Texinfo Fill) Top
18014 @end smallexample
18015
18016 I am visiting a file called @file{foo.texi}, on my machine
18017 @file{rattlesnake} in my @file{/home/bob} buffer. I am on line 1, in
18018 Texinfo mode, and am at the top of the buffer.
18019
18020 @need 1200
18021 My @file{.emacs} file has a section that looks like this:
18022
18023 @smallexample
18024 @group
18025 ;; Set a Mode Line that tells me which machine, which directory,
18026 ;; and which line I am on, plus the other customary information.
18027 (setq-default mode-line-format
18028 (quote
18029 (#("-" 0 1
18030 (help-echo
18031 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18032 mode-line-mule-info
18033 mode-line-modified
18034 mode-line-frame-identification
18035 " "
18036 @end group
18037 @group
18038 mode-line-buffer-identification
18039 " "
18040 (:eval (substring
18041 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18042 ":"
18043 default-directory
18044 #(" " 0 1
18045 (help-echo
18046 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18047 (line-number-mode " Line %l ")
18048 global-mode-string
18049 @end group
18050 @group
18051 #(" %[(" 0 6
18052 (help-echo
18053 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18054 (:eval (mode-line-mode-name))
18055 mode-line-process
18056 minor-mode-alist
18057 #("%n" 0 2 (help-echo "mouse-2: widen" local-map (keymap ...)))
18058 ")%] "
18059 (-3 . "%P")
18060 ;; "-%-"
18061 )))
18062 @end group
18063 @end smallexample
18064
18065 @noindent
18066 Here, I redefine the default mode line. Most of the parts are from
18067 the original; but I make a few changes. I set the @emph{default} mode
18068 line format so as to permit various modes, such as Info, to override
18069 it.
18070
18071 Many elements in the list are self-explanatory:
18072 @code{mode-line-modified} is a variable that tells whether the buffer
18073 has been modified, @code{mode-name} tells the name of the mode, and so
18074 on. However, the format looks complicated because of two features we
18075 have not discussed.
18076
18077 @cindex Properties, in mode line example
18078 The first string in the mode line is a dash or hyphen, @samp{-}. In
18079 the old days, it would have been specified simply as @code{"-"}. But
18080 nowadays, Emacs can add properties to a string, such as highlighting
18081 or, as in this case, a help feature. If you place your mouse cursor
18082 over the hyphen, some help information appears (By default, you must
18083 wait seven-tenths of a second before the information appears. You can
18084 change that timing by changing the value of @code{tooltip-delay}.)
18085
18086 @need 1000
18087 The new string format has a special syntax:
18088
18089 @smallexample
18090 #("-" 0 1 (help-echo "mouse-1: select window, ..."))
18091 @end smallexample
18092
18093 @noindent
18094 The @code{#(} begins a list. The first element of the list is the
18095 string itself, just one @samp{-}. The second and third
18096 elements specify the range over which the fourth element applies. A
18097 range starts @emph{after} a character, so a zero means the range
18098 starts just before the first character; a 1 means that the range ends
18099 just after the first character. The third element is the property for
18100 the range. It consists of a property list, a
18101 property name, in this case, @samp{help-echo}, followed by a value, in this
18102 case, a string. The second, third, and fourth elements of this new
18103 string format can be repeated.
18104
18105 @xref{Text Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
18106 Reference Manual}, and see @ref{Mode Line Format, , Mode Line Format,
18107 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more information.
18108
18109 @code{mode-line-buffer-identification}
18110 displays the current buffer name. It is a list
18111 beginning @code{(#("%12b" 0 4 @dots{}}.
18112 The @code{#(} begins the list.
18113
18114 The @samp{"%12b"} displays the current buffer name, using the
18115 @code{buffer-name} function with which we are familiar; the @samp{12}
18116 specifies the maximum number of characters that will be displayed.
18117 When a name has fewer characters, whitespace is added to fill out to
18118 this number. (Buffer names can and often should be longer than 12
18119 characters; this length works well in a typical 80 column wide
18120 window.)
18121
18122 @code{:eval} says to evaluate the following form and use the result as
18123 a string to display. In this case, the expression displays the first
18124 component of the full system name. The end of the first component is
18125 a @samp{.} (``period''), so I use the @code{string-match} function to
18126 tell me the length of the first component. The substring from the
18127 zeroth character to that length is the name of the machine.
18128
18129 @need 1250
18130 This is the expression:
18131
18132 @smallexample
18133 @group
18134 (:eval (substring
18135 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18136 @end group
18137 @end smallexample
18138
18139 @samp{%[} and @samp{%]} cause a pair of square brackets
18140 to appear for each recursive editing level. @samp{%n} says ``Narrow''
18141 when narrowing is in effect. @samp{%P} tells you the percentage of
18142 the buffer that is above the bottom of the window, or ``Top'', ``Bottom'',
18143 or ``All''. (A lower case @samp{p} tell you the percentage above the
18144 @emph{top} of the window.) @samp{%-} inserts enough dashes to fill
18145 out the line.
18146
18147 Remember, ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it''---your own
18148 Emacs can have different colors, different commands, and different
18149 keys than a default Emacs.
18150
18151 On the other hand, if you want to bring up a plain ``out of the box''
18152 Emacs, with no customization, type:
18153
18154 @smallexample
18155 emacs -q
18156 @end smallexample
18157
18158 @noindent
18159 This will start an Emacs that does @emph{not} load your
18160 @file{~/.emacs} initialization file. A plain, default Emacs. Nothing
18161 more.
18162
18163 @node Debugging
18164 @chapter Debugging
18165 @cindex debugging
18166
18167 GNU Emacs has two debuggers, @code{debug} and @code{edebug}. The
18168 first is built into the internals of Emacs and is always with you;
18169 the second requires that you instrument a function before you can use it.
18170
18171 Both debuggers are described extensively in @ref{Debugging, ,
18172 Debugging Lisp Programs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18173 In this chapter, I will walk through a short example of each.
18174
18175 @menu
18176 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
18177 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
18178 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
18179 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
18180 * Debugging Exercises::
18181 @end menu
18182
18183 @node debug
18184 @section @code{debug}
18185 @findex debug
18186
18187 Suppose you have written a function definition that is intended to
18188 return the sum of the numbers 1 through a given number. (This is the
18189 @code{triangle} function discussed earlier. @xref{Decrementing
18190 Example, , Example with Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18191 @c xref{Decrementing Loop,, Loop with a Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18192
18193 However, your function definition has a bug. You have mistyped
18194 @samp{1=} for @samp{1-}. Here is the broken definition:
18195
18196 @findex triangle-bugged
18197 @smallexample
18198 @group
18199 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18200 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18201 (let ((total 0))
18202 (while (> number 0)
18203 (setq total (+ total number))
18204 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18205 total))
18206 @end group
18207 @end smallexample
18208
18209 If you are reading this in Info, you can evaluate this definition in
18210 the normal fashion. You will see @code{triangle-bugged} appear in the
18211 echo area.
18212
18213 @need 1250
18214 Now evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged} function with an
18215 argument of 4:
18216
18217 @smallexample
18218 (triangle-bugged 4)
18219 @end smallexample
18220
18221 @noindent
18222 In a recent GNU Emacs, you will create and enter a @file{*Backtrace*}
18223 buffer that says:
18224
18225 @noindent
18226 @smallexample
18227 @group
18228 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18229 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18230 (1= number)
18231 (setq number (1= number))
18232 (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18233 (setq number (1= number)))
18234 (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18235 (setq number ...)) total)
18236 triangle-bugged(4)
18237 @end group
18238 @group
18239 eval((triangle-bugged 4))
18240 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18241 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18242 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18243 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18244 @end group
18245 @end smallexample
18246
18247 @noindent
18248 (I have reformatted this example slightly; the debugger does not fold
18249 long lines. As usual, you can quit the debugger by typing @kbd{q} in
18250 the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
18251
18252 In practice, for a bug as simple as this, the ``Lisp error'' line will
18253 tell you what you need to know to correct the definition. The
18254 function @code{1=} is ``void''.
18255
18256 @ignore
18257 @need 800
18258 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will see:
18259
18260 @smallexample
18261 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18262 @end smallexample
18263
18264 @noindent
18265 which has the same meaning as the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer line in
18266 version 21.
18267 @end ignore
18268
18269 However, suppose you are not quite certain what is going on?
18270 You can read the complete backtrace.
18271
18272 In this case, you need to run a recent GNU Emacs, which automatically
18273 starts the debugger that puts you in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer; or
18274 else, you need to start the debugger manually as described below.
18275
18276 Read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells you
18277 what Emacs did that led to the error. Emacs made an interactive call
18278 to @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}), which led to the evaluation
18279 of the @code{triangle-bugged} expression. Each line above tells you
18280 what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
18281
18282 @need 1250
18283 The third line from the top of the buffer is
18284
18285 @smallexample
18286 (setq number (1= number))
18287 @end smallexample
18288
18289 @noindent
18290 Emacs tried to evaluate this expression; in order to do so, it tried
18291 to evaluate the inner expression shown on the second line from the
18292 top:
18293
18294 @smallexample
18295 (1= number)
18296 @end smallexample
18297
18298 @need 1250
18299 @noindent
18300 This is where the error occurred; as the top line says:
18301
18302 @smallexample
18303 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18304 @end smallexample
18305
18306 @noindent
18307 You can correct the mistake, re-evaluate the function definition, and
18308 then run your test again.
18309
18310 @node debug-on-entry
18311 @section @code{debug-on-entry}
18312 @findex debug-on-entry
18313
18314 A recent GNU Emacs starts the debugger automatically when your
18315 function has an error.
18316
18317 @ignore
18318 GNU Emacs version 20 and before did not; it simply
18319 presented you with an error message. You had to start the debugger
18320 manually.
18321 @end ignore
18322
18323 Incidentally, you can start the debugger manually for all versions of
18324 Emacs; the advantage is that the debugger runs even if you do not have
18325 a bug in your code. Sometimes your code will be free of bugs!
18326
18327 You can enter the debugger when you call the function by calling
18328 @code{debug-on-entry}.
18329
18330 @need 1250
18331 @noindent
18332 Type:
18333
18334 @smallexample
18335 M-x debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18336 @end smallexample
18337
18338 @need 1250
18339 @noindent
18340 Now, evaluate the following:
18341
18342 @smallexample
18343 (triangle-bugged 5)
18344 @end smallexample
18345
18346 @noindent
18347 All versions of Emacs will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer and tell
18348 you that it is beginning to evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged}
18349 function:
18350
18351 @smallexample
18352 @group
18353 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18354 Debugger entered--entering a function:
18355 * triangle-bugged(5)
18356 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18357 @end group
18358 @group
18359 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18360 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18361 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18362 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18363 @end group
18364 @end smallexample
18365
18366 In the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, type @kbd{d}. Emacs will evaluate
18367 the first expression in @code{triangle-bugged}; the buffer will look
18368 like this:
18369
18370 @smallexample
18371 @group
18372 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18373 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18374 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18375 (setq number ...)) total)
18376 * triangle-bugged(5)
18377 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18378 @end group
18379 @group
18380 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18381 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18382 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18383 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18384 @end group
18385 @end smallexample
18386
18387 @noindent
18388 Now, type @kbd{d} again, eight times, slowly. Each time you type
18389 @kbd{d}, Emacs will evaluate another expression in the function
18390 definition.
18391
18392 @need 1750
18393 Eventually, the buffer will look like this:
18394
18395 @smallexample
18396 @group
18397 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18398 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18399 * (setq number (1= number))
18400 * (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18401 (setq number (1= number)))
18402 @group
18403 @end group
18404 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18405 (setq number ...)) total)
18406 * triangle-bugged(5)
18407 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18408 @group
18409 @end group
18410 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18411 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18412 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18413 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18414 @end group
18415 @end smallexample
18416
18417 @need 1500
18418 @noindent
18419 Finally, after you type @kbd{d} two more times, Emacs will reach the
18420 error, and the top two lines of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer will look
18421 like this:
18422
18423 @smallexample
18424 @group
18425 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18426 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18427 * (1= number)
18428 @dots{}
18429 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18430 @end group
18431 @end smallexample
18432
18433 By typing @kbd{d}, you were able to step through the function.
18434
18435 You can quit a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer by typing @kbd{q} in it; this
18436 quits the trace, but does not cancel @code{debug-on-entry}.
18437
18438 @findex cancel-debug-on-entry
18439 To cancel the effect of @code{debug-on-entry}, call
18440 @code{cancel-debug-on-entry} and the name of the function, like this:
18441
18442 @smallexample
18443 M-x cancel-debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18444 @end smallexample
18445
18446 @noindent
18447 (If you are reading this in Info, cancel @code{debug-on-entry} now.)
18448
18449 @node debug-on-quit
18450 @section @code{debug-on-quit} and @code{(debug)}
18451
18452 In addition to setting @code{debug-on-error} or calling @code{debug-on-entry},
18453 there are two other ways to start @code{debug}.
18454
18455 @findex debug-on-quit
18456 You can start @code{debug} whenever you type @kbd{C-g}
18457 (@code{keyboard-quit}) by setting the variable @code{debug-on-quit} to
18458 @code{t}. This is useful for debugging infinite loops.
18459
18460 @need 1500
18461 @cindex @code{(debug)} in code
18462 Or, you can insert a line that says @code{(debug)} into your code
18463 where you want the debugger to start, like this:
18464
18465 @smallexample
18466 @group
18467 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18468 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18469 (let ((total 0))
18470 (while (> number 0)
18471 (setq total (+ total number))
18472 (debug) ; @r{Start debugger.}
18473 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18474 total))
18475 @end group
18476 @end smallexample
18477
18478 The @code{debug} function is described in detail in @ref{Debugger, ,
18479 The Lisp Debugger, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18480
18481 @node edebug
18482 @section The @code{edebug} Source Level Debugger
18483 @cindex Source level debugger
18484 @findex edebug
18485
18486 Edebug is a source level debugger. Edebug normally displays the
18487 source of the code you are debugging, with an arrow at the left that
18488 shows which line you are currently executing.
18489
18490 You can walk through the execution of a function, line by line, or run
18491 quickly until reaching a @dfn{breakpoint} where execution stops.
18492
18493 Edebug is described in @ref{Edebug, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs
18494 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18495
18496 @need 1250
18497 Here is a bugged function definition for @code{triangle-recursively}.
18498 @xref{Recursive triangle function, , Recursion in place of a counter},
18499 for a review of it.
18500
18501 @smallexample
18502 @group
18503 (defun triangle-recursively-bugged (number)
18504 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
18505 Uses recursion."
18506 (if (= number 1)
18507 1
18508 (+ number
18509 (triangle-recursively-bugged
18510 (1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18511 @end group
18512 @end smallexample
18513
18514 @noindent
18515 Normally, you would install this definition by positioning your cursor
18516 after the function's closing parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}
18517 (@code{eval-last-sexp}) or else by positioning your cursor within the
18518 definition and typing @kbd{C-M-x} (@code{eval-defun}). (By default,
18519 the @code{eval-defun} command works only in Emacs Lisp mode or in Lisp
18520 Interaction mode.)
18521
18522 @need 1500
18523 However, to prepare this function definition for Edebug, you must
18524 first @dfn{instrument} the code using a different command. You can do
18525 this by positioning your cursor within or just after the definition
18526 and typing
18527
18528 @smallexample
18529 M-x edebug-defun RET
18530 @end smallexample
18531
18532 @noindent
18533 This will cause Emacs to load Edebug automatically if it is not
18534 already loaded, and properly instrument the function.
18535
18536 After instrumenting the function, place your cursor after the
18537 following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}):
18538
18539 @smallexample
18540 (triangle-recursively-bugged 3)
18541 @end smallexample
18542
18543 @noindent
18544 You will be jumped back to the source for
18545 @code{triangle-recursively-bugged} and the cursor positioned at the
18546 beginning of the @code{if} line of the function. Also, you will see
18547 an arrowhead at the left hand side of that line. The arrowhead marks
18548 the line where the function is executing. (In the following examples,
18549 we show the arrowhead with @samp{=>}; in a windowing system, you may
18550 see the arrowhead as a solid triangle in the window ``fringe''.)
18551
18552 @smallexample
18553 =>@point{}(if (= number 1)
18554 @end smallexample
18555
18556 @noindent
18557 @iftex
18558 In the example, the location of point is displayed with a star,
18559 @samp{@point{}} (in Info, it is displayed as @samp{-!-}).
18560 @end iftex
18561 @ifnottex
18562 In the example, the location of point is displayed as @samp{@point{}}
18563 (in a printed book, it is displayed with a five pointed star).
18564 @end ifnottex
18565
18566 If you now press @key{SPC}, point will move to the next expression to
18567 be executed; the line will look like this:
18568
18569 @smallexample
18570 =>(if @point{}(= number 1)
18571 @end smallexample
18572
18573 @noindent
18574 As you continue to press @key{SPC}, point will move from expression to
18575 expression. At the same time, whenever an expression returns a value,
18576 that value will be displayed in the echo area. For example, after you
18577 move point past @code{number}, you will see the following:
18578
18579 @smallexample
18580 Result: 3 (#o3, #x3, ?\C-c)
18581 @end smallexample
18582
18583 @noindent
18584 This means the value of @code{number} is 3, which is octal three,
18585 hexadecimal three, and @sc{ascii} ``control-c'' (the third letter of the
18586 alphabet, in case you need to know this information).
18587
18588 You can continue moving through the code until you reach the line with
18589 the error. Before evaluation, that line looks like this:
18590
18591 @smallexample
18592 => @point{}(1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18593 @end smallexample
18594
18595 @need 1250
18596 @noindent
18597 When you press @key{SPC} once again, you will produce an error message
18598 that says:
18599
18600 @smallexample
18601 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18602 @end smallexample
18603
18604 @noindent
18605 This is the bug.
18606
18607 Press @kbd{q} to quit Edebug.
18608
18609 To remove instrumentation from a function definition, simply
18610 re-evaluate it with a command that does not instrument it.
18611 For example, you could place your cursor after the definition's
18612 closing parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
18613
18614 Edebug does a great deal more than walk with you through a function.
18615 You can set it so it races through on its own, stopping only at an
18616 error or at specified stopping points; you can cause it to display the
18617 changing values of various expressions; you can find out how many
18618 times a function is called, and more.
18619
18620 Edebug is described in @ref{Edebug, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs
18621 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18622
18623 @need 1500
18624 @node Debugging Exercises
18625 @section Debugging Exercises
18626
18627 @itemize @bullet
18628 @item
18629 Install the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function and then cause it to
18630 enter the built-in debugger when you call it. Run the command on a
18631 region containing two words. You will need to press @kbd{d} a
18632 remarkable number of times. On your system, is a ``hook'' called after
18633 the command finishes? (For information on hooks, see @ref{Command
18634 Overview, , Command Loop Overview, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
18635 Manual}.)
18636
18637 @item
18638 Copy @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} into the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
18639 instrument the function for Edebug, and walk through its execution.
18640 The function does not need to have a bug, although you can introduce
18641 one if you wish. If the function lacks a bug, the walk-through
18642 completes without problems.
18643
18644 @item
18645 While running Edebug, type @kbd{?} to see a list of all the Edebug commands.
18646 (The @code{global-edebug-prefix} is usually @kbd{C-x X}, i.e.,
18647 @kbd{@key{CTRL}-x} followed by an upper case @kbd{X}; use this prefix
18648 for commands made outside of the Edebug debugging buffer.)
18649
18650 @item
18651 In the Edebug debugging buffer, use the @kbd{p}
18652 (@code{edebug-bounce-point}) command to see where in the region the
18653 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} is working.
18654
18655 @item
18656 Move point to some spot further down the function and then type the
18657 @kbd{h} (@code{edebug-goto-here}) command to jump to that location.
18658
18659 @item
18660 Use the @kbd{t} (@code{edebug-trace-mode}) command to cause Edebug to
18661 walk through the function on its own; use an upper case @kbd{T} for
18662 @code{edebug-Trace-fast-mode}.
18663
18664 @item
18665 Set a breakpoint, then run Edebug in Trace mode until it reaches the
18666 stopping point.
18667 @end itemize
18668
18669 @node Conclusion
18670 @chapter Conclusion
18671
18672 We have now reached the end of this Introduction. You have now
18673 learned enough about programming in Emacs Lisp to set values, to write
18674 simple @file{.emacs} files for yourself and your friends, and write
18675 simple customizations and extensions to Emacs.
18676
18677 This is a place to stop. Or, if you wish, you can now go onward, and
18678 teach yourself.
18679
18680 You have learned some of the basic nuts and bolts of programming. But
18681 only some. There are a great many more brackets and hinges that are
18682 easy to use that we have not touched.
18683
18684 A path you can follow right now lies among the sources to GNU Emacs
18685 and in
18686 @ifnotinfo
18687 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18688 @end ifnotinfo
18689 @ifinfo
18690 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
18691 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18692 @end ifinfo
18693
18694 The Emacs Lisp sources are an adventure. When you read the sources and
18695 come across a function or expression that is unfamiliar, you need to
18696 figure out or find out what it does.
18697
18698 Go to the Reference Manual. It is a thorough, complete, and fairly
18699 easy-to-read description of Emacs Lisp. It is written not only for
18700 experts, but for people who know what you know. (The @cite{Reference
18701 Manual} comes with the standard GNU Emacs distribution. Like this
18702 introduction, it comes as a Texinfo source file, so you can read it
18703 on your computer and as a typeset, printed book.)
18704
18705 Go to the other built-in help that is part of GNU Emacs: the built-in
18706 documentation for all functions and variables, and @code{find-tag},
18707 the program that takes you to sources.
18708
18709 Here is an example of how I explore the sources. Because of its name,
18710 @file{simple.el} is the file I looked at first, a long time ago. As
18711 it happens some of the functions in @file{simple.el} are complicated,
18712 or at least look complicated at first sight. The @code{open-line}
18713 function, for example, looks complicated.
18714
18715 You may want to walk through this function slowly, as we did with the
18716 @code{forward-sentence} function. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
18717 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Or you may want to skip that
18718 function and look at another, such as @code{split-line}. You don't
18719 need to read all the functions. According to
18720 @code{count-words-in-defun}, the @code{split-line} function contains
18721 102 words and symbols.
18722
18723 Even though it is short, @code{split-line} contains expressions
18724 we have not studied: @code{skip-chars-forward}, @code{indent-to},
18725 @code{current-column} and @code{insert-and-inherit}.
18726
18727 Consider the @code{skip-chars-forward} function. (It is part of the
18728 function definition for @code{back-to-indentation}, which is shown in
18729 @ref{Review, , Review}.)
18730
18731 In GNU Emacs, you can find out more about @code{skip-chars-forward} by
18732 typing @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and the name of the
18733 function. This gives you the function documentation.
18734
18735 You may be able to guess what is done by a well named function such as
18736 @code{indent-to}; or you can look it up, too. Incidentally, the
18737 @code{describe-function} function itself is in @file{help.el}; it is
18738 one of those long, but decipherable functions. You can look up
18739 @code{describe-function} using the @kbd{C-h f} command!
18740
18741 In this instance, since the code is Lisp, the @file{*Help*} buffer
18742 contains the name of the library containing the function's source.
18743 You can put point over the name of the library and press the RET key,
18744 which in this situation is bound to @code{help-follow}, and be taken
18745 directly to the source, in the same way as @kbd{M-.}
18746 (@code{find-tag}).
18747
18748 The definition for @code{describe-function} illustrates how to
18749 customize the @code{interactive} expression without using the standard
18750 character codes; and it shows how to create a temporary buffer.
18751
18752 (The @code{indent-to} function is written in C rather than Emacs Lisp;
18753 it is a ``built-in'' function. @code{help-follow} takes you to its
18754 source as does @code{find-tag}, when properly set up.)
18755
18756 You can look at a function's source using @code{find-tag}, which is
18757 bound to @kbd{M-.} Finally, you can find out what the Reference
18758 Manual has to say by visiting the manual in Info, and typing @kbd{i}
18759 (@code{Info-index}) and the name of the function, or by looking up the
18760 function in the index to a printed copy of the manual.
18761
18762 Similarly, you can find out what is meant by
18763 @code{insert-and-inherit}.
18764
18765 Other interesting source files include @file{paragraphs.el},
18766 @file{loaddefs.el}, and @file{loadup.el}. The @file{paragraphs.el}
18767 file includes short, easily understood functions as well as longer
18768 ones. The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains the many standard
18769 autoloads and many keymaps. I have never looked at it all; only at
18770 parts. @file{loadup.el} is the file that loads the standard parts of
18771 Emacs; it tells you a great deal about how Emacs is built.
18772 (@xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
18773 Reference Manual}, for more about building.)
18774
18775 As I said, you have learned some nuts and bolts; however, and very
18776 importantly, we have hardly touched major aspects of programming; I
18777 have said nothing about how to sort information, except to use the
18778 predefined @code{sort} function; I have said nothing about how to store
18779 information, except to use variables and lists; I have said nothing
18780 about how to write programs that write programs. These are topics for
18781 another, and different kind of book, a different kind of learning.
18782
18783 What you have done is learn enough for much practical work with GNU
18784 Emacs. What you have done is get started. This is the end of a
18785 beginning.
18786
18787 @c ================ Appendix ================
18788
18789 @node the-the
18790 @appendix The @code{the-the} Function
18791 @findex the-the
18792 @cindex Duplicated words function
18793 @cindex Words, duplicated
18794
18795 Sometimes when you you write text, you duplicate words---as with ``you
18796 you'' near the beginning of this sentence. I find that most
18797 frequently, I duplicate ``the''; hence, I call the function for
18798 detecting duplicated words, @code{the-the}.
18799
18800 @need 1250
18801 As a first step, you could use the following regular expression to
18802 search for duplicates:
18803
18804 @smallexample
18805 \\(\\w+[ \t\n]+\\)\\1
18806 @end smallexample
18807
18808 @noindent
18809 This regexp matches one or more word-constituent characters followed
18810 by one or more spaces, tabs, or newlines. However, it does not detect
18811 duplicated words on different lines, since the ending of the first
18812 word, the end of the line, is different from the ending of the second
18813 word, a space. (For more information about regular expressions, see
18814 @ref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, as well as
18815 @ref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
18816 Manual}, and @ref{Regular Expressions, , Regular Expressions, elisp,
18817 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
18818
18819 You might try searching just for duplicated word-constituent
18820 characters but that does not work since the pattern detects doubles
18821 such as the two occurrences of ``th'' in ``with the''.
18822
18823 Another possible regexp searches for word-constituent characters
18824 followed by non-word-constituent characters, reduplicated. Here,
18825 @w{@samp{\\w+}} matches one or more word-constituent characters and
18826 @w{@samp{\\W*}} matches zero or more non-word-constituent characters.
18827
18828 @smallexample
18829 \\(\\(\\w+\\)\\W*\\)\\1
18830 @end smallexample
18831
18832 @noindent
18833 Again, not useful.
18834
18835 Here is the pattern that I use. It is not perfect, but good enough.
18836 @w{@samp{\\b}} matches the empty string, provided it is at the beginning
18837 or end of a word; @w{@samp{[^@@ \n\t]+}} matches one or more occurrences of
18838 any characters that are @emph{not} an @@-sign, space, newline, or tab.
18839
18840 @smallexample
18841 \\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b
18842 @end smallexample
18843
18844 One can write more complicated expressions, but I found that this
18845 expression is good enough, so I use it.
18846
18847 Here is the @code{the-the} function, as I include it in my
18848 @file{.emacs} file, along with a handy global key binding:
18849
18850 @smallexample
18851 @group
18852 (defun the-the ()
18853 "Search forward for for a duplicated word."
18854 (interactive)
18855 (message "Searching for for duplicated words ...")
18856 (push-mark)
18857 @end group
18858 @group
18859 ;; This regexp is not perfect
18860 ;; but is fairly good over all:
18861 (if (re-search-forward
18862 "\\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b" nil 'move)
18863 (message "Found duplicated word.")
18864 (message "End of buffer")))
18865 @end group
18866
18867 @group
18868 ;; Bind 'the-the' to C-c \
18869 (global-set-key "\C-c\\" 'the-the)
18870 @end group
18871 @end smallexample
18872
18873 @sp 1
18874 Here is test text:
18875
18876 @smallexample
18877 @group
18878 one two two three four five
18879 five six seven
18880 @end group
18881 @end smallexample
18882
18883 You can substitute the other regular expressions shown above in the
18884 function definition and try each of them on this list.
18885
18886 @node Kill Ring
18887 @appendix Handling the Kill Ring
18888 @cindex Kill ring handling
18889 @cindex Handling the kill ring
18890 @cindex Ring, making a list like a
18891
18892 The kill ring is a list that is transformed into a ring by the
18893 workings of the @code{current-kill} function. The @code{yank} and
18894 @code{yank-pop} commands use the @code{current-kill} function.
18895
18896 This appendix describes the @code{current-kill} function as well as
18897 both the @code{yank} and the @code{yank-pop} commands, but first,
18898 consider the workings of the kill ring.
18899
18900 @menu
18901 * What the Kill Ring Does::
18902 * current-kill::
18903 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
18904 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
18905 * ring file::
18906 @end menu
18907
18908 @ifnottex
18909 @node What the Kill Ring Does
18910 @unnumberedsec What the Kill Ring Does
18911 @end ifnottex
18912
18913 @need 1250
18914 The kill ring has a default maximum length of sixty items; this number
18915 is too large for an explanation. Instead, set it to four. Please
18916 evaluate the following:
18917
18918 @smallexample
18919 @group
18920 (setq old-kill-ring-max kill-ring-max)
18921 (setq kill-ring-max 4)
18922 @end group
18923 @end smallexample
18924
18925 @noindent
18926 Then, please copy each line of the following indented example into the
18927 kill ring. You may kill each line with @kbd{C-k} or mark it and copy
18928 it with @kbd{M-w}.
18929
18930 @noindent
18931 (In a read-only buffer, such as the @file{*info*} buffer, the kill
18932 command, @kbd{C-k} (@code{kill-line}), will not remove the text,
18933 merely copy it to the kill ring. However, your machine may beep at
18934 you. Alternatively, for silence, you may copy the region of each line
18935 with the @kbd{M-w} (@code{kill-ring-save}) command. You must mark
18936 each line for this command to succeed, but it does not matter at which
18937 end you put point or mark.)
18938
18939 @need 1250
18940 @noindent
18941 Please invoke the calls in order, so that five elements attempt to
18942 fill the kill ring:
18943
18944 @smallexample
18945 @group
18946 first some text
18947 second piece of text
18948 third line
18949 fourth line of text
18950 fifth bit of text
18951 @end group
18952 @end smallexample
18953
18954 @need 1250
18955 @noindent
18956 Then find the value of @code{kill-ring} by evaluating
18957
18958 @smallexample
18959 kill-ring
18960 @end smallexample
18961
18962 @need 800
18963 @noindent
18964 It is:
18965
18966 @smallexample
18967 @group
18968 ("fifth bit of text" "fourth line of text"
18969 "third line" "second piece of text")
18970 @end group
18971 @end smallexample
18972
18973 @noindent
18974 The first element, @samp{first some text}, was dropped.
18975
18976 @need 1250
18977 To return to the old value for the length of the kill ring, evaluate:
18978
18979 @smallexample
18980 (setq kill-ring-max old-kill-ring-max)
18981 @end smallexample
18982
18983 @node current-kill
18984 @appendixsec The @code{current-kill} Function
18985 @findex current-kill
18986
18987 The @code{current-kill} function changes the element in the kill ring
18988 to which @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points. (Also, the
18989 @code{kill-new} function sets @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to point
18990 to the latest element of the kill ring. The @code{kill-new}
18991 function is used directly or indirectly by @code{kill-append},
18992 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line},
18993 and @code{kill-region}.)
18994
18995 @menu
18996 * Code for current-kill::
18997 * Understanding current-kill::
18998 @end menu
18999
19000 @ifnottex
19001 @node Code for current-kill
19002 @unnumberedsubsec The code for @code{current-kill}
19003 @end ifnottex
19004
19005
19006 @need 1500
19007 The @code{current-kill} function is used by @code{yank} and by
19008 @code{yank-pop}. Here is the code for @code{current-kill}:
19009
19010 @smallexample
19011 @group
19012 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19013 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
19014 If N is zero and `interprogram-paste-function' is set to a
19015 function that returns a string or a list of strings, and if that
19016 function doesn't return nil, then that string (or list) is added
19017 to the front of the kill ring and the string (or first string in
19018 the list) is returned as the latest kill.
19019 @end group
19020 @group
19021 If N is not zero, and if `yank-pop-change-selection' is
19022 non-nil, use `interprogram-cut-function' to transfer the
19023 kill at the new yank point into the window system selection.
19024 @end group
19025 @group
19026 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually
19027 move the yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
19028
19029 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
19030 interprogram-paste-function
19031 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
19032 @end group
19033 @group
19034 (if interprogram-paste
19035 (progn
19036 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
19037 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
19038 ;; selection, with identical text.
19039 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
19040 (if (listp interprogram-paste)
19041 (mapc 'kill-new (nreverse interprogram-paste))
19042 (kill-new interprogram-paste)))
19043 (car kill-ring))
19044 @end group
19045 @group
19046 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19047 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19048 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19049 (length kill-ring))
19050 kill-ring)))
19051 (unless do-not-move
19052 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element)
19053 (when (and yank-pop-change-selection
19054 (> n 0)
19055 interprogram-cut-function)
19056 (funcall interprogram-cut-function (car ARGth-kill-element))))
19057 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
19058 @end group
19059 @end smallexample
19060
19061 Remember also that the @code{kill-new} function sets
19062 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to the latest element of the kill
19063 ring, which means that all the functions that call it set the value
19064 indirectly: @code{kill-append}, @code{copy-region-as-kill},
19065 @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line}, and @code{kill-region}.
19066
19067 @need 1500
19068 Here is the line in @code{kill-new}, which is explained in
19069 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.
19070
19071 @smallexample
19072 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
19073 @end smallexample
19074
19075 @ifnottex
19076 @node Understanding current-kill
19077 @unnumberedsubsec @code{current-kill} in Outline
19078 @end ifnottex
19079
19080 The @code{current-kill} function looks complex, but as usual, it can
19081 be understood by taking it apart piece by piece. First look at it in
19082 skeletal form:
19083
19084 @smallexample
19085 @group
19086 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19087 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill."
19088 (let @var{varlist}
19089 @var{body}@dots{})
19090 @end group
19091 @end smallexample
19092
19093 This function takes two arguments, one of which is optional. It has a
19094 documentation string. It is @emph{not} interactive.
19095
19096 @menu
19097 * Body of current-kill::
19098 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
19099 * Determining the Element::
19100 @end menu
19101
19102 @ifnottex
19103 @node Body of current-kill
19104 @unnumberedsubsubsec The Body of @code{current-kill}
19105 @end ifnottex
19106
19107 The body of the function definition is a @code{let} expression, which
19108 itself has a body as well as a @var{varlist}.
19109
19110 The @code{let} expression declares a variable that will be only usable
19111 within the bounds of this function. This variable is called
19112 @code{interprogram-paste} and is for copying to another program. It
19113 is not for copying within this instance of GNU Emacs. Most window
19114 systems provide a facility for interprogram pasting. Sadly, that
19115 facility usually provides only for the last element. Most windowing
19116 systems have not adopted a ring of many possibilities, even though
19117 Emacs has provided it for decades.
19118
19119 The @code{if} expression has two parts, one if there exists
19120 @code{interprogram-paste} and one if not.
19121
19122 @need 2000
19123 Let us consider the ``if not'' or else-part of the @code{current-kill}
19124 function. (The then-part uses the @code{kill-new} function, which
19125 we have already described. @xref{kill-new function, , The
19126 @code{kill-new} function}.)
19127
19128 @smallexample
19129 @group
19130 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19131 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19132 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19133 (length kill-ring))
19134 kill-ring)))
19135 (or do-not-move
19136 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19137 (car ARGth-kill-element))
19138 @end group
19139 @end smallexample
19140
19141 @noindent
19142 The code first checks whether the kill ring has content; otherwise it
19143 signals an error.
19144
19145 @need 1000
19146 Note that the @code{or} expression is very similar to testing length
19147 with an @code{if}:
19148
19149 @findex zerop
19150 @findex error
19151 @smallexample
19152 @group
19153 (if (zerop (length kill-ring)) ; @r{if-part}
19154 (error "Kill ring is empty")) ; @r{then-part}
19155 ;; No else-part
19156 @end group
19157 @end smallexample
19158
19159 @noindent
19160 If there is not anything in the kill ring, its length must be zero and
19161 an error message sent to the user: @samp{Kill ring is empty}. The
19162 @code{current-kill} function uses an @code{or} expression which is
19163 simpler. But an @code{if} expression reminds us what goes on.
19164
19165 This @code{if} expression uses the function @code{zerop} which returns
19166 true if the value it is testing is zero. When @code{zerop} tests
19167 true, the then-part of the @code{if} is evaluated. The then-part is a
19168 list starting with the function @code{error}, which is a function that
19169 is similar to the @code{message} function
19170 (@pxref{message, , The @code{message} Function}) in that
19171 it prints a one-line message in the echo area. However, in addition
19172 to printing a message, @code{error} also stops evaluation of the
19173 function within which it is embedded. This means that the rest of the
19174 function will not be evaluated if the length of the kill ring is zero.
19175
19176 Then the @code{current-kill} function selects the element to return.
19177 The selection depends on the number of places that @code{current-kill}
19178 rotates and on where @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19179
19180 Next, either the optional @code{do-not-move} argument is true or the
19181 current value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is set to point to the
19182 list. Finally, another expression returns the first element of the
19183 list even if the @code{do-not-move} argument is true.
19184
19185 @ifnottex
19186 @node Digression concerning error
19187 @unnumberedsubsubsec Digression about the word ``error''
19188 @end ifnottex
19189
19190 In my opinion, it is slightly misleading, at least to humans, to use
19191 the term ``error'' as the name of the @code{error} function. A better
19192 term would be ``cancel''. Strictly speaking, of course, you cannot
19193 point to, much less rotate a pointer to a list that has no length, so
19194 from the point of view of the computer, the word ``error'' is correct.
19195 But a human expects to attempt this sort of thing, if only to find out
19196 whether the kill ring is full or empty. This is an act of
19197 exploration.
19198
19199 From the human point of view, the act of exploration and discovery is
19200 not necessarily an error, and therefore should not be labeled as one,
19201 even in the bowels of a computer. As it is, the code in Emacs implies
19202 that a human who is acting virtuously, by exploring his or her
19203 environment, is making an error. This is bad. Even though the computer
19204 takes the same steps as it does when there is an ``error'', a term such as
19205 ``cancel'' would have a clearer connotation.
19206
19207 @ifnottex
19208 @node Determining the Element
19209 @unnumberedsubsubsec Determining the Element
19210 @end ifnottex
19211
19212 Among other actions, the else-part of the @code{if} expression sets
19213 the value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to
19214 @code{ARGth-kill-element} when the kill ring has something in it and
19215 the value of @code{do-not-move} is @code{nil}.
19216
19217 @need 800
19218 The code looks like this:
19219
19220 @smallexample
19221 @group
19222 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19223 (length kill-ring))
19224 kill-ring)))
19225 @end group
19226 @end smallexample
19227
19228 This needs some examination. Unless it is not supposed to move the
19229 pointer, the @code{current-kill} function changes where
19230 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19231 That is what the
19232 @w{@code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))}}
19233 expression does. Also, clearly, @code{ARGth-kill-element} is being
19234 set to be equal to some @sc{cdr} of the kill ring, using the
19235 @code{nthcdr} function that is described in an earlier section.
19236 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.) How does it do this?
19237
19238 As we have seen before (@pxref{nthcdr}), the @code{nthcdr} function
19239 works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a list---it takes the
19240 @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} @dots{}
19241
19242 @need 800
19243 The two following expressions produce the same result:
19244
19245 @smallexample
19246 @group
19247 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (cdr kill-ring))
19248
19249 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (nthcdr 1 kill-ring))
19250 @end group
19251 @end smallexample
19252
19253 However, the @code{nthcdr} expression is more complicated. It uses
19254 the @code{mod} function to determine which @sc{cdr} to select.
19255
19256 (You will remember to look at inner functions first; indeed, we will
19257 have to go inside the @code{mod}.)
19258
19259 The @code{mod} function returns the value of its first argument modulo
19260 the second; that is to say, it returns the remainder after dividing
19261 the first argument by the second. The value returned has the same
19262 sign as the second argument.
19263
19264 @need 800
19265 Thus,
19266
19267 @smallexample
19268 @group
19269 (mod 12 4)
19270 @result{} 0 ;; @r{because there is no remainder}
19271 (mod 13 4)
19272 @result{} 1
19273 @end group
19274 @end smallexample
19275
19276 @need 1250
19277 In this case, the first argument is often smaller than the second.
19278 That is fine.
19279
19280 @smallexample
19281 @group
19282 (mod 0 4)
19283 @result{} 0
19284 (mod 1 4)
19285 @result{} 1
19286 @end group
19287 @end smallexample
19288
19289 We can guess what the @code{-} function does. It is like @code{+} but
19290 subtracts instead of adds; the @code{-} function subtracts its second
19291 argument from its first. Also, we already know what the @code{length}
19292 function does (@pxref{length}). It returns the length of a list.
19293
19294 And @code{n} is the name of the required argument to the
19295 @code{current-kill} function.
19296
19297 @need 1250
19298 So when the first argument to @code{nthcdr} is zero, the @code{nthcdr}
19299 expression returns the whole list, as you can see by evaluating the
19300 following:
19301
19302 @smallexample
19303 @group
19304 ;; kill-ring-yank-pointer @r{and} kill-ring @r{have a length of four}
19305 ;; @r{and} (mod (- 0 4) 4) @result{} 0
19306 (nthcdr (mod (- 0 4) 4)
19307 '("fourth line of text"
19308 "third line"
19309 "second piece of text"
19310 "first some text"))
19311 @end group
19312 @end smallexample
19313
19314 @need 1250
19315 When the first argument to the @code{current-kill} function is one,
19316 the @code{nthcdr} expression returns the list without its first
19317 element.
19318
19319 @smallexample
19320 @group
19321 (nthcdr (mod (- 1 4) 4)
19322 '("fourth line of text"
19323 "third line"
19324 "second piece of text"
19325 "first some text"))
19326 @end group
19327 @end smallexample
19328
19329 @cindex @samp{global variable} defined
19330 @cindex @samp{variable, global}, defined
19331 Incidentally, both @code{kill-ring} and @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
19332 are @dfn{global variables}. That means that any expression in Emacs
19333 Lisp can access them. They are not like the local variables set by
19334 @code{let} or like the symbols in an argument list.
19335 Local variables can only be accessed
19336 within the @code{let} that defines them or the function that specifies
19337 them in an argument list (and within expressions called by them).
19338
19339 @ignore
19340 @c texi2dvi fails when the name of the section is within ifnottex ...
19341 (@xref{Prevent confusion, , @code{let} Prevents Confusion}, and
19342 @ref{defun, , The @code{defun} Macro}.)
19343 @end ignore
19344
19345 @node yank
19346 @appendixsec @code{yank}
19347 @findex yank
19348
19349 After learning about @code{current-kill}, the code for the
19350 @code{yank} function is almost easy.
19351
19352 The @code{yank} function does not use the
19353 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable directly. It calls
19354 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{current-kill} which sets the
19355 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
19356
19357 @need 1250
19358 The code looks like this:
19359
19360 @c in GNU Emacs 22
19361 @smallexample
19362 @group
19363 (defun yank (&optional arg)
19364 "Reinsert (\"paste\") the last stretch of killed text.
19365 More precisely, reinsert the stretch of killed text most recently
19366 killed OR yanked. Put point at end, and set mark at beginning.
19367 With just \\[universal-argument] as argument, same but put point at beginning (and mark at end).
19368 With argument N, reinsert the Nth most recently killed stretch of killed
19369 text.
19370
19371 When this command inserts killed text into the buffer, it honors
19372 `yank-excluded-properties' and `yank-handler' as described in the
19373 doc string for `insert-for-yank-1', which see.
19374
19375 See also the command `yank-pop' (\\[yank-pop])."
19376 @end group
19377 @group
19378 (interactive "*P")
19379 (setq yank-window-start (window-start))
19380 ;; If we don't get all the way thru, make last-command indicate that
19381 ;; for the following command.
19382 (setq this-command t)
19383 (push-mark (point))
19384 @end group
19385 @group
19386 (insert-for-yank (current-kill (cond
19387 ((listp arg) 0)
19388 ((eq arg '-) -2)
19389 (t (1- arg)))))
19390 (if (consp arg)
19391 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark, but doesn't activate the mark.
19392 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19393 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19394 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19395 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer)))))
19396 @end group
19397 @group
19398 ;; If we do get all the way thru, make this-command indicate that.
19399 (if (eq this-command t)
19400 (setq this-command 'yank))
19401 nil)
19402 @end group
19403 @end smallexample
19404
19405 The key expression is @code{insert-for-yank}, which inserts the string
19406 returned by @code{current-kill}, but removes some text properties from
19407 it.
19408
19409 However, before getting to that expression, the function sets the value
19410 of @code{yank-window-start} to the position returned by the
19411 @code{(window-start)} expression, the position at which the display
19412 currently starts. The @code{yank} function also sets
19413 @code{this-command} and pushes the mark.
19414
19415 After it yanks the appropriate element, if the optional argument is a
19416 @sc{cons} rather than a number or nothing, it puts point at beginning
19417 of the yanked text and mark at its end.
19418
19419 (The @code{prog1} function is like @code{progn} but returns the value
19420 of its first argument rather than the value of its last argument. Its
19421 first argument is forced to return the buffer's mark as an integer.
19422 You can see the documentation for these functions by placing point
19423 over them in this buffer and then typing @kbd{C-h f}
19424 (@code{describe-function}) followed by a @kbd{RET}; the default is the
19425 function.)
19426
19427 The last part of the function tells what to do when it succeeds.
19428
19429 @node yank-pop
19430 @appendixsec @code{yank-pop}
19431 @findex yank-pop
19432
19433 After understanding @code{yank} and @code{current-kill}, you know how
19434 to approach the @code{yank-pop} function. Leaving out the
19435 documentation to save space, it looks like this:
19436
19437 @c GNU Emacs 22
19438 @smallexample
19439 @group
19440 (defun yank-pop (&optional arg)
19441 "@dots{}"
19442 (interactive "*p")
19443 (if (not (eq last-command 'yank))
19444 (error "Previous command was not a yank"))
19445 @end group
19446 @group
19447 (setq this-command 'yank)
19448 (unless arg (setq arg 1))
19449 (let ((inhibit-read-only t)
19450 (before (< (point) (mark t))))
19451 @end group
19452 @group
19453 (if before
19454 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (point) (mark t))
19455 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (mark t) (point)))
19456 (setq yank-undo-function nil)
19457 @end group
19458 @group
19459 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer))
19460 (insert-for-yank (current-kill arg))
19461 ;; Set the window start back where it was in the yank command,
19462 ;; if possible.
19463 (set-window-start (selected-window) yank-window-start t)
19464 @end group
19465 @group
19466 (if before
19467 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19468 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19469 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19470 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19471 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19472 (set-marker (mark-marker)
19473 (point)
19474 (current-buffer))))))
19475 nil)
19476 @end group
19477 @end smallexample
19478
19479 The function is interactive with a small @samp{p} so the prefix
19480 argument is processed and passed to the function. The command can
19481 only be used after a previous yank; otherwise an error message is
19482 sent. This check uses the variable @code{last-command} which is set
19483 by @code{yank} and is discussed elsewhere.
19484 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
19485
19486 The @code{let} clause sets the variable @code{before} to true or false
19487 depending whether point is before or after mark and then the region
19488 between point and mark is deleted. This is the region that was just
19489 inserted by the previous yank and it is this text that will be
19490 replaced.
19491
19492 @code{funcall} calls its first argument as a function, passing
19493 remaining arguments to it. The first argument is whatever the
19494 @code{or} expression returns. The two remaining arguments are the
19495 positions of point and mark set by the preceding @code{yank} command.
19496
19497 There is more, but that is the hardest part.
19498
19499 @node ring file
19500 @appendixsec The @file{ring.el} File
19501 @cindex @file{ring.el} file
19502
19503 Interestingly, GNU Emacs posses a file called @file{ring.el} that
19504 provides many of the features we just discussed. But functions such
19505 as @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} do not use this library, possibly
19506 because they were written earlier.
19507
19508 @node Full Graph
19509 @appendix A Graph with Labeled Axes
19510
19511 Printed axes help you understand a graph. They convey scale. In an
19512 earlier chapter (@pxref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}), we
19513 wrote the code to print the body of a graph. Here we write the code
19514 for printing and labeling vertical and horizontal axes, along with the
19515 body itself.
19516
19517 @menu
19518 * Labeled Example::
19519 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
19520 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
19521 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
19522 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
19523 @end menu
19524
19525 @ifnottex
19526 @node Labeled Example
19527 @unnumberedsec Labeled Example Graph
19528 @end ifnottex
19529
19530 Since insertions fill a buffer to the right and below point, the new
19531 graph printing function should first print the Y or vertical axis,
19532 then the body of the graph, and finally the X or horizontal axis.
19533 This sequence lays out for us the contents of the function:
19534
19535 @enumerate
19536 @item
19537 Set up code.
19538
19539 @item
19540 Print Y axis.
19541
19542 @item
19543 Print body of graph.
19544
19545 @item
19546 Print X axis.
19547 @end enumerate
19548
19549 @need 800
19550 Here is an example of how a finished graph should look:
19551
19552 @smallexample
19553 @group
19554 10 -
19555 *
19556 * *
19557 * **
19558 * ***
19559 5 - * *******
19560 * *** *******
19561 *************
19562 ***************
19563 1 - ****************
19564 | | | |
19565 1 5 10 15
19566 @end group
19567 @end smallexample
19568
19569 @noindent
19570 In this graph, both the vertical and the horizontal axes are labeled
19571 with numbers. However, in some graphs, the horizontal axis is time
19572 and would be better labeled with months, like this:
19573
19574 @smallexample
19575 @group
19576 5 - *
19577 * ** *
19578 *******
19579 ********** **
19580 1 - **************
19581 | ^ |
19582 Jan June Jan
19583 @end group
19584 @end smallexample
19585
19586 Indeed, with a little thought, we can easily come up with a variety of
19587 vertical and horizontal labeling schemes. Our task could become
19588 complicated. But complications breed confusion. Rather than permit
19589 this, it is better choose a simple labeling scheme for our first
19590 effort, and to modify or replace it later.
19591
19592 @need 1200
19593 These considerations suggest the following outline for the
19594 @code{print-graph} function:
19595
19596 @smallexample
19597 @group
19598 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
19599 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
19600 (let ((height @dots{}
19601 @dots{}))
19602 @end group
19603 @group
19604 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
19605 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
19606 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
19607 @end group
19608 @end smallexample
19609
19610 We can work on each part of the @code{print-graph} function definition
19611 in turn.
19612
19613 @node print-graph Varlist
19614 @appendixsec The @code{print-graph} Varlist
19615 @cindex @code{print-graph} varlist
19616
19617 In writing the @code{print-graph} function, the first task is to write
19618 the varlist in the @code{let} expression. (We will leave aside for the
19619 moment any thoughts about making the function interactive or about the
19620 contents of its documentation string.)
19621
19622 The varlist should set several values. Clearly, the top of the label
19623 for the vertical axis must be at least the height of the graph, which
19624 means that we must obtain this information here. Note that the
19625 @code{print-graph-body} function also requires this information. There
19626 is no reason to calculate the height of the graph in two different
19627 places, so we should change @code{print-graph-body} from the way we
19628 defined it earlier to take advantage of the calculation.
19629
19630 Similarly, both the function for printing the X axis labels and the
19631 @code{print-graph-body} function need to learn the value of the width of
19632 each symbol. We can perform the calculation here and change the
19633 definition for @code{print-graph-body} from the way we defined it in the
19634 previous chapter.
19635
19636 The length of the label for the horizontal axis must be at least as long
19637 as the graph. However, this information is used only in the function
19638 that prints the horizontal axis, so it does not need to be calculated here.
19639
19640 These thoughts lead us directly to the following form for the varlist
19641 in the @code{let} for @code{print-graph}:
19642
19643 @smallexample
19644 @group
19645 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list)) ; @r{First version.}
19646 (symbol-width (length graph-blank)))
19647 @end group
19648 @end smallexample
19649
19650 @noindent
19651 As we shall see, this expression is not quite right.
19652
19653 @need 2000
19654 @node print-Y-axis
19655 @appendixsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
19656 @cindex Axis, print vertical
19657 @cindex Y axis printing
19658 @cindex Vertical axis printing
19659 @cindex Print vertical axis
19660
19661 The job of the @code{print-Y-axis} function is to print a label for
19662 the vertical axis that looks like this:
19663
19664 @smallexample
19665 @group
19666 10 -
19667
19668
19669
19670
19671 5 -
19672
19673
19674
19675 1 -
19676 @end group
19677 @end smallexample
19678
19679 @noindent
19680 The function should be passed the height of the graph, and then should
19681 construct and insert the appropriate numbers and marks.
19682
19683 @menu
19684 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
19685 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
19686 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
19687 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
19688 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
19689 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
19690 @end menu
19691
19692 @ifnottex
19693 @node print-Y-axis in Detail
19694 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function in Detail
19695 @end ifnottex
19696
19697 It is easy enough to see in the figure what the Y axis label should
19698 look like; but to say in words, and then to write a function
19699 definition to do the job is another matter. It is not quite true to
19700 say that we want a number and a tic every five lines: there are only
19701 three lines between the @samp{1} and the @samp{5} (lines 2, 3, and 4),
19702 but four lines between the @samp{5} and the @samp{10} (lines 6, 7, 8,
19703 and 9). It is better to say that we want a number and a tic mark on
19704 the base line (number 1) and then that we want a number and a tic on
19705 the fifth line from the bottom and on every line that is a multiple of
19706 five.
19707
19708 @ifnottex
19709 @node Height of label
19710 @unnumberedsubsec What height should the label be?
19711 @end ifnottex
19712
19713 The next issue is what height the label should be? Suppose the maximum
19714 height of tallest column of the graph is seven. Should the highest
19715 label on the Y axis be @samp{5 -}, and should the graph stick up above
19716 the label? Or should the highest label be @samp{7 -}, and mark the peak
19717 of the graph? Or should the highest label be @code{10 -}, which is a
19718 multiple of five, and be higher than the topmost value of the graph?
19719
19720 The latter form is preferred. Most graphs are drawn within rectangles
19721 whose sides are an integral number of steps long---5, 10, 15, and so
19722 on for a step distance of five. But as soon as we decide to use a
19723 step height for the vertical axis, we discover that the simple
19724 expression in the varlist for computing the height is wrong. The
19725 expression is @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)}. This returns the
19726 precise height, not the maximum height plus whatever is necessary to
19727 round up to the nearest multiple of five. A more complex expression
19728 is required.
19729
19730 As usual in cases like this, a complex problem becomes simpler if it is
19731 divided into several smaller problems.
19732
19733 First, consider the case when the highest value of the graph is an
19734 integral multiple of five---when it is 5, 10, 15, or some higher
19735 multiple of five. We can use this value as the Y axis height.
19736
19737 A fairly simply way to determine whether a number is a multiple of
19738 five is to divide it by five and see if the division results in a
19739 remainder. If there is no remainder, the number is a multiple of
19740 five. Thus, seven divided by five has a remainder of two, and seven
19741 is not an integral multiple of five. Put in slightly different
19742 language, more reminiscent of the classroom, five goes into seven
19743 once, with a remainder of two. However, five goes into ten twice,
19744 with no remainder: ten is an integral multiple of five.
19745
19746 @node Compute a Remainder
19747 @appendixsubsec Side Trip: Compute a Remainder
19748
19749 @findex % @r{(remainder function)}
19750 @cindex Remainder function, @code{%}
19751 In Lisp, the function for computing a remainder is @code{%}. The
19752 function returns the remainder of its first argument divided by its
19753 second argument. As it happens, @code{%} is a function in Emacs Lisp
19754 that you cannot discover using @code{apropos}: you find nothing if you
19755 type @kbd{M-x apropos @key{RET} remainder @key{RET}}. The only way to
19756 learn of the existence of @code{%} is to read about it in a book such
19757 as this or in the Emacs Lisp sources.
19758
19759 You can try the @code{%} function by evaluating the following two
19760 expressions:
19761
19762 @smallexample
19763 @group
19764 (% 7 5)
19765
19766 (% 10 5)
19767 @end group
19768 @end smallexample
19769
19770 @noindent
19771 The first expression returns 2 and the second expression returns 0.
19772
19773 To test whether the returned value is zero or some other number, we
19774 can use the @code{zerop} function. This function returns @code{t} if
19775 its argument, which must be a number, is zero.
19776
19777 @smallexample
19778 @group
19779 (zerop (% 7 5))
19780 @result{} nil
19781
19782 (zerop (% 10 5))
19783 @result{} t
19784 @end group
19785 @end smallexample
19786
19787 Thus, the following expression will return @code{t} if the height
19788 of the graph is evenly divisible by five:
19789
19790 @smallexample
19791 (zerop (% height 5))
19792 @end smallexample
19793
19794 @noindent
19795 (The value of @code{height}, of course, can be found from @code{(apply
19796 'max numbers-list)}.)
19797
19798 On the other hand, if the value of @code{height} is not a multiple of
19799 five, we want to reset the value to the next higher multiple of five.
19800 This is straightforward arithmetic using functions with which we are
19801 already familiar. First, we divide the value of @code{height} by five
19802 to determine how many times five goes into the number. Thus, five
19803 goes into twelve twice. If we add one to this quotient and multiply by
19804 five, we will obtain the value of the next multiple of five that is
19805 larger than the height. Five goes into twelve twice. Add one to two,
19806 and multiply by five; the result is fifteen, which is the next multiple
19807 of five that is higher than twelve. The Lisp expression for this is:
19808
19809 @smallexample
19810 (* (1+ (/ height 5)) 5)
19811 @end smallexample
19812
19813 @noindent
19814 For example, if you evaluate the following, the result is 15:
19815
19816 @smallexample
19817 (* (1+ (/ 12 5)) 5)
19818 @end smallexample
19819
19820 All through this discussion, we have been using ``five'' as the value
19821 for spacing labels on the Y axis; but we may want to use some other
19822 value. For generality, we should replace ``five'' with a variable to
19823 which we can assign a value. The best name I can think of for this
19824 variable is @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
19825
19826 @need 1250
19827 Using this term, and an @code{if} expression, we produce the
19828 following:
19829
19830 @smallexample
19831 @group
19832 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19833 height
19834 ;; @r{else}
19835 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19836 Y-axis-label-spacing))
19837 @end group
19838 @end smallexample
19839
19840 @noindent
19841 This expression returns the value of @code{height} itself if the height
19842 is an even multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing} or
19843 else it computes and returns a value of @code{height} that is equal to
19844 the next higher multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
19845
19846 We can now include this expression in the @code{let} expression of the
19847 @code{print-graph} function (after first setting the value of
19848 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}):
19849 @vindex Y-axis-label-spacing
19850
19851 @smallexample
19852 @group
19853 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
19854 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
19855 @end group
19856
19857 @group
19858 @dots{}
19859 (let* ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
19860 (height-of-top-line
19861 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19862 height
19863 @end group
19864 @group
19865 ;; @r{else}
19866 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19867 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
19868 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))))
19869 @dots{}
19870 @end group
19871 @end smallexample
19872
19873 @noindent
19874 (Note use of the @code{let*} function: the initial value of height is
19875 computed once by the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression and
19876 then the resulting value of @code{height} is used to compute its
19877 final value. @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}, for
19878 more about @code{let*}.)
19879
19880 @node Y Axis Element
19881 @appendixsubsec Construct a Y Axis Element
19882
19883 When we print the vertical axis, we want to insert strings such as
19884 @w{@samp{5 -}} and @w{@samp{10 - }} every five lines.
19885 Moreover, we want the numbers and dashes to line up, so shorter
19886 numbers must be padded with leading spaces. If some of the strings
19887 use two digit numbers, the strings with single digit numbers must
19888 include a leading blank space before the number.
19889
19890 @findex number-to-string
19891 To figure out the length of the number, the @code{length} function is
19892 used. But the @code{length} function works only with a string, not with
19893 a number. So the number has to be converted from being a number to
19894 being a string. This is done with the @code{number-to-string} function.
19895 For example,
19896
19897 @smallexample
19898 @group
19899 (length (number-to-string 35))
19900 @result{} 2
19901
19902 (length (number-to-string 100))
19903 @result{} 3
19904 @end group
19905 @end smallexample
19906
19907 @noindent
19908 (@code{number-to-string} is also called @code{int-to-string}; you will
19909 see this alternative name in various sources.)
19910
19911 In addition, in each label, each number is followed by a string such
19912 as @w{@samp{ - }}, which we will call the @code{Y-axis-tic} marker.
19913 This variable is defined with @code{defvar}:
19914
19915 @vindex Y-axis-tic
19916 @smallexample
19917 @group
19918 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
19919 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
19920 @end group
19921 @end smallexample
19922
19923 The length of the Y label is the sum of the length of the Y axis tic
19924 mark and the length of the number of the top of the graph.
19925
19926 @smallexample
19927 (length (concat (number-to-string height) Y-axis-tic)))
19928 @end smallexample
19929
19930 This value will be calculated by the @code{print-graph} function in
19931 its varlist as @code{full-Y-label-width} and passed on. (Note that we
19932 did not think to include this in the varlist when we first proposed it.)
19933
19934 To make a complete vertical axis label, a tic mark is concatenated
19935 with a number; and the two together may be preceded by one or more
19936 spaces depending on how long the number is. The label consists of
19937 three parts: the (optional) leading spaces, the number, and the tic
19938 mark. The function is passed the value of the number for the specific
19939 row, and the value of the width of the top line, which is calculated
19940 (just once) by @code{print-graph}.
19941
19942 @smallexample
19943 @group
19944 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
19945 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
19946 A numbered element looks like this ‘ 5 - ’,
19947 and is padded as needed so all line up with
19948 the element for the largest number."
19949 @end group
19950 @group
19951 (let* ((leading-spaces
19952 (- full-Y-label-width
19953 (length
19954 (concat (number-to-string number)
19955 Y-axis-tic)))))
19956 @end group
19957 @group
19958 (concat
19959 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
19960 (number-to-string number)
19961 Y-axis-tic)))
19962 @end group
19963 @end smallexample
19964
19965 The @code{Y-axis-element} function concatenates together the leading
19966 spaces, if any; the number, as a string; and the tic mark.
19967
19968 To figure out how many leading spaces the label will need, the
19969 function subtracts the actual length of the label---the length of the
19970 number plus the length of the tic mark---from the desired label width.
19971
19972 @findex make-string
19973 Blank spaces are inserted using the @code{make-string} function. This
19974 function takes two arguments: the first tells it how long the string
19975 will be and the second is a symbol for the character to insert, in a
19976 special format. The format is a question mark followed by a blank
19977 space, like this, @samp{? }. @xref{Character Type, , Character Type,
19978 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a description of the
19979 syntax for characters. (Of course, you might want to replace the
19980 blank space by some other character @dots{} You know what to do.)
19981
19982 The @code{number-to-string} function is used in the concatenation
19983 expression, to convert the number to a string that is concatenated
19984 with the leading spaces and the tic mark.
19985
19986 @node Y-axis-column
19987 @appendixsubsec Create a Y Axis Column
19988
19989 The preceding functions provide all the tools needed to construct a
19990 function that generates a list of numbered and blank strings to insert
19991 as the label for the vertical axis:
19992
19993 @findex Y-axis-column
19994 @smallexample
19995 @group
19996 (defun Y-axis-column (height width-of-label)
19997 "Construct list of Y axis labels and blank strings.
19998 For HEIGHT of line above base and WIDTH-OF-LABEL."
19999 (let (Y-axis)
20000 @group
20001 @end group
20002 (while (> height 1)
20003 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20004 ;; @r{Insert label.}
20005 (setq Y-axis
20006 (cons
20007 (Y-axis-element height width-of-label)
20008 Y-axis))
20009 @group
20010 @end group
20011 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
20012 (setq Y-axis
20013 (cons
20014 (make-string width-of-label ? )
20015 Y-axis)))
20016 (setq height (1- height)))
20017 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
20018 (setq Y-axis
20019 (cons (Y-axis-element 1 width-of-label) Y-axis))
20020 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20021 @end group
20022 @end smallexample
20023
20024 In this function, we start with the value of @code{height} and
20025 repetitively subtract one from its value. After each subtraction, we
20026 test to see whether the value is an integral multiple of the
20027 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}. If it is, we construct a numbered label
20028 using the @code{Y-axis-element} function; if not, we construct a
20029 blank label using the @code{make-string} function. The base line
20030 consists of the number one followed by a tic mark.
20031
20032 @need 2000
20033 @node print-Y-axis Penultimate
20034 @appendixsubsec The Not Quite Final Version of @code{print-Y-axis}
20035
20036 The list constructed by the @code{Y-axis-column} function is passed to
20037 the @code{print-Y-axis} function, which inserts the list as a column.
20038
20039 @findex print-Y-axis
20040 @smallexample
20041 @group
20042 (defun print-Y-axis (height full-Y-label-width)
20043 "Insert Y axis using HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
20044 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
20045 Full width is the width of the highest label element."
20046 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
20047 ;; are passed by ‘print-graph’.
20048 @end group
20049 @group
20050 (let ((start (point)))
20051 (insert-rectangle
20052 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width))
20053 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
20054 (goto-char start)
20055 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
20056 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
20057 @end group
20058 @end smallexample
20059
20060 The @code{print-Y-axis} uses the @code{insert-rectangle} function to
20061 insert the Y axis labels created by the @code{Y-axis-column} function.
20062 In addition, it places point at the correct position for printing the body of
20063 the graph.
20064
20065 You can test @code{print-Y-axis}:
20066
20067 @enumerate
20068 @item
20069 Install
20070
20071 @smallexample
20072 @group
20073 Y-axis-label-spacing
20074 Y-axis-tic
20075 Y-axis-element
20076 Y-axis-column
20077 print-Y-axis
20078 @end group
20079 @end smallexample
20080
20081 @item
20082 Copy the following expression:
20083
20084 @smallexample
20085 (print-Y-axis 12 5)
20086 @end smallexample
20087
20088 @item
20089 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20090 want the axis labels to start.
20091
20092 @item
20093 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20094
20095 @item
20096 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
20097 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20098
20099 @item
20100 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20101 @end enumerate
20102
20103 Emacs will print labels vertically, the top one being @w{@samp{10 -@w{
20104 }}}. (The @code{print-graph} function will pass the value of
20105 @code{height-of-top-line}, which in this case will end up as 15,
20106 thereby getting rid of what might appear as a bug.)
20107
20108 @need 2000
20109 @node print-X-axis
20110 @appendixsec The @code{print-X-axis} Function
20111 @cindex Axis, print horizontal
20112 @cindex X axis printing
20113 @cindex Print horizontal axis
20114 @cindex Horizontal axis printing
20115
20116 X axis labels are much like Y axis labels, except that the ticks are on a
20117 line above the numbers. Labels should look like this:
20118
20119 @smallexample
20120 @group
20121 | | | |
20122 1 5 10 15
20123 @end group
20124 @end smallexample
20125
20126 The first tic is under the first column of the graph and is preceded by
20127 several blank spaces. These spaces provide room in rows above for the Y
20128 axis labels. The second, third, fourth, and subsequent ticks are all
20129 spaced equally, according to the value of @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20130
20131 The second row of the X axis consists of numbers, preceded by several
20132 blank spaces and also separated according to the value of the variable
20133 @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20134
20135 The value of the variable @code{X-axis-label-spacing} should itself be
20136 measured in units of @code{symbol-width}, since you may want to change
20137 the width of the symbols that you are using to print the body of the
20138 graph without changing the ways the graph is labeled.
20139
20140 @menu
20141 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
20142 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
20143 @end menu
20144
20145 @ifnottex
20146 @node Similarities differences
20147 @unnumberedsubsec Similarities and differences
20148 @end ifnottex
20149
20150 The @code{print-X-axis} function is constructed in more or less the
20151 same fashion as the @code{print-Y-axis} function except that it has
20152 two lines: the line of tic marks and the numbers. We will write a
20153 separate function to print each line and then combine them within the
20154 @code{print-X-axis} function.
20155
20156 This is a three step process:
20157
20158 @enumerate
20159 @item
20160 Write a function to print the X axis tic marks, @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}.
20161
20162 @item
20163 Write a function to print the X numbers, @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20164
20165 @item
20166 Write a function to print both lines, the @code{print-X-axis} function,
20167 using @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20168 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20169 @end enumerate
20170
20171 @node X Axis Tic Marks
20172 @appendixsubsec X Axis Tic Marks
20173
20174 The first function should print the X axis tic marks. We must specify
20175 the tic marks themselves and their spacing:
20176
20177 @smallexample
20178 @group
20179 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
20180 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
20181 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
20182 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
20183 @end group
20184 @end smallexample
20185
20186 @noindent
20187 (Note that the value of @code{graph-blank} is set by another
20188 @code{defvar}. The @code{boundp} predicate checks whether it has
20189 already been set; @code{boundp} returns @code{nil} if it has not. If
20190 @code{graph-blank} were unbound and we did not use this conditional
20191 construction, in a recent GNU Emacs, we would enter the debugger and
20192 see an error message saying @samp{@w{Debugger entered--Lisp error:}
20193 @w{(void-variable graph-blank)}}.)
20194
20195 @need 1200
20196 Here is the @code{defvar} for @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}:
20197
20198 @smallexample
20199 @group
20200 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
20201 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
20202 @end group
20203 @end smallexample
20204
20205 @need 1250
20206 The goal is to make a line that looks like this:
20207
20208 @smallexample
20209 | | | |
20210 @end smallexample
20211
20212 The first tic is indented so that it is under the first column, which is
20213 indented to provide space for the Y axis labels.
20214
20215 A tic element consists of the blank spaces that stretch from one tic to
20216 the next plus a tic symbol. The number of blanks is determined by the
20217 width of the tic symbol and the @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20218
20219 @need 1250
20220 The code looks like this:
20221
20222 @smallexample
20223 @group
20224 ;;; X-axis-tic-element
20225 @dots{}
20226 (concat
20227 (make-string
20228 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20229 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20230 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20231 ? )
20232 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20233 X-axis-tic-symbol)
20234 @dots{}
20235 @end group
20236 @end smallexample
20237
20238 Next, we determine how many blanks are needed to indent the first tic
20239 mark to the first column of the graph. This uses the value of
20240 @code{full-Y-label-width} passed it by the @code{print-graph} function.
20241
20242 @need 1250
20243 The code to make @code{X-axis-leading-spaces}
20244 looks like this:
20245
20246 @smallexample
20247 @group
20248 ;; X-axis-leading-spaces
20249 @dots{}
20250 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? )
20251 @dots{}
20252 @end group
20253 @end smallexample
20254
20255 We also need to determine the length of the horizontal axis, which is
20256 the length of the numbers list, and the number of ticks in the horizontal
20257 axis:
20258
20259 @smallexample
20260 @group
20261 ;; X-length
20262 @dots{}
20263 (length numbers-list)
20264 @end group
20265
20266 @group
20267 ;; tic-width
20268 @dots{}
20269 (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20270 @end group
20271
20272 @group
20273 ;; number-of-X-ticks
20274 (if (zerop (% (X-length tic-width)))
20275 (/ (X-length tic-width))
20276 (1+ (/ (X-length tic-width))))
20277 @end group
20278 @end smallexample
20279
20280 @need 1250
20281 All this leads us directly to the function for printing the X axis tic line:
20282
20283 @findex print-X-axis-tic-line
20284 @smallexample
20285 @group
20286 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
20287 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
20288 "Print ticks for X axis."
20289 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20290 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
20291 @end group
20292 @group
20293 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
20294 (insert (concat
20295 (make-string
20296 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20297 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
20298 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
20299 ? )
20300 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20301 @end group
20302 @group
20303 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
20304 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20305 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
20306 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
20307 @end group
20308 @end smallexample
20309
20310 The line of numbers is equally straightforward:
20311
20312 @need 1250
20313 First, we create a numbered element with blank spaces before each number:
20314
20315 @findex X-axis-element
20316 @smallexample
20317 @group
20318 (defun X-axis-element (number)
20319 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
20320 (let ((leading-spaces
20321 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20322 (length (number-to-string number)))))
20323 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
20324 (number-to-string number))))
20325 @end group
20326 @end smallexample
20327
20328 Next, we create the function to print the numbered line, starting with
20329 the number ``1'' under the first column:
20330
20331 @findex print-X-axis-numbered-line
20332 @smallexample
20333 @group
20334 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
20335 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces)
20336 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
20337 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing))
20338 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20339 (insert "1")
20340 @end group
20341 @group
20342 (insert (concat
20343 (make-string
20344 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
20345 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing) 2)
20346 ? )
20347 (number-to-string number)))
20348 @end group
20349 @group
20350 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
20351 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20352 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20353 (insert (X-axis-element number))
20354 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20355 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
20356 @end group
20357 @end smallexample
20358
20359 Finally, we need to write the @code{print-X-axis} that uses
20360 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20361 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20362
20363 The function must determine the local values of the variables used by both
20364 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and
20365 then it must call them. Also, it must print the carriage return that
20366 separates the two lines.
20367
20368 The function consists of a varlist that specifies five local variables,
20369 and calls to each of the two line printing functions:
20370
20371 @findex print-X-axis
20372 @smallexample
20373 @group
20374 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list)
20375 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST."
20376 (let* ((leading-spaces
20377 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
20378 @end group
20379 @group
20380 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
20381 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
20382 (X-length (length numbers-list))
20383 @end group
20384 @group
20385 (X-tic
20386 (concat
20387 (make-string
20388 @end group
20389 @group
20390 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20391 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20392 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20393 ? )
20394 @end group
20395 @group
20396 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20397 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20398 @end group
20399 @group
20400 (tic-number
20401 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
20402 (/ X-length tic-width)
20403 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
20404 @end group
20405 @group
20406 (print-X-axis-tic-line tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
20407 (insert "\n")
20408 (print-X-axis-numbered-line tic-number leading-spaces)))
20409 @end group
20410 @end smallexample
20411
20412 @need 1250
20413 You can test @code{print-X-axis}:
20414
20415 @enumerate
20416 @item
20417 Install @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}, @code{X-axis-label-spacing},
20418 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}, as well as @code{X-axis-element},
20419 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and @code{print-X-axis}.
20420
20421 @item
20422 Copy the following expression:
20423
20424 @smallexample
20425 @group
20426 (progn
20427 (let ((full-Y-label-width 5)
20428 (symbol-width 1))
20429 (print-X-axis
20430 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16))))
20431 @end group
20432 @end smallexample
20433
20434 @item
20435 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20436 want the axis labels to start.
20437
20438 @item
20439 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20440
20441 @item
20442 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20443 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20444
20445 @item
20446 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20447 @end enumerate
20448
20449 @need 1250
20450 Emacs will print the horizontal axis like this:
20451 @sp 1
20452
20453 @smallexample
20454 @group
20455 | | | | |
20456 1 5 10 15 20
20457 @end group
20458 @end smallexample
20459
20460 @node Print Whole Graph
20461 @appendixsec Printing the Whole Graph
20462 @cindex Printing the whole graph
20463 @cindex Whole graph printing
20464 @cindex Graph, printing all
20465
20466 Now we are nearly ready to print the whole graph.
20467
20468 The function to print the graph with the proper labels follows the
20469 outline we created earlier (@pxref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labeled
20470 Axes}), but with additions.
20471
20472 @need 1250
20473 Here is the outline:
20474
20475 @smallexample
20476 @group
20477 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
20478 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
20479 (let ((height @dots{}
20480 @dots{}))
20481 @end group
20482 @group
20483 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
20484 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
20485 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
20486 @end group
20487 @end smallexample
20488
20489 @menu
20490 * The final version:: A few changes.
20491 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
20492 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
20493 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
20494 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
20495 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
20496 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
20497 @end menu
20498
20499 @ifnottex
20500 @node The final version
20501 @unnumberedsubsec Changes for the Final Version
20502 @end ifnottex
20503
20504 The final version is different from what we planned in two ways:
20505 first, it contains additional values calculated once in the varlist;
20506 second, it carries an option to specify the labels' increment per row.
20507 This latter feature turns out to be essential; otherwise, a graph may
20508 have more rows than fit on a display or on a sheet of paper.
20509
20510 @need 1500
20511 This new feature requires a change to the @code{Y-axis-column}
20512 function, to add @code{vertical-step} to it. The function looks like
20513 this:
20514
20515 @findex Y-axis-column @r{Final version.}
20516 @smallexample
20517 @group
20518 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20519 (defun Y-axis-column
20520 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
20521 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
20522 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20523 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
20524 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
20525 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
20526 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
20527 that each line is five units of the graph."
20528 @end group
20529 @group
20530 (let (Y-axis
20531 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
20532 (while (> height 1)
20533 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20534 @end group
20535 @group
20536 ;; @r{Insert label.}
20537 (setq Y-axis
20538 (cons
20539 (Y-axis-element
20540 (* height number-per-line)
20541 width-of-label)
20542 Y-axis))
20543 @end group
20544 @group
20545 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
20546 (setq Y-axis
20547 (cons
20548 (make-string width-of-label ? )
20549 Y-axis)))
20550 (setq height (1- height)))
20551 @end group
20552 @group
20553 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
20554 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
20555 (or vertical-step 1)
20556 width-of-label)
20557 Y-axis))
20558 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20559 @end group
20560 @end smallexample
20561
20562 The values for the maximum height of graph and the width of a symbol
20563 are computed by @code{print-graph} in its @code{let} expression; so
20564 @code{graph-body-print} must be changed to accept them.
20565
20566 @findex graph-body-print @r{Final version.}
20567 @smallexample
20568 @group
20569 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20570 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
20571 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20572 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20573 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20574 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
20575 @end group
20576 @group
20577 (let (from-position)
20578 (while numbers-list
20579 (setq from-position (point))
20580 (insert-rectangle
20581 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
20582 (goto-char from-position)
20583 (forward-char symbol-width)
20584 @end group
20585 @group
20586 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
20587 (sit-for 0)
20588 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
20589 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
20590 (forward-line height)
20591 (insert "\n")))
20592 @end group
20593 @end smallexample
20594
20595 @need 1250
20596 Finally, the code for the @code{print-graph} function:
20597
20598 @findex print-graph @r{Final version.}
20599 @smallexample
20600 @group
20601 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20602 (defun print-graph
20603 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step)
20604 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20605 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20606 @end group
20607
20608 @group
20609 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
20610 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
20611 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
20612 each row is five units."
20613 @end group
20614 @group
20615 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
20616 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
20617 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
20618 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
20619 @end group
20620 @group
20621 (height-of-top-line
20622 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20623 height
20624 ;; @r{else}
20625 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20626 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
20627 @end group
20628 @group
20629 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
20630 (full-Y-label-width
20631 (length
20632 @end group
20633 @group
20634 (concat
20635 (number-to-string
20636 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
20637 Y-axis-tic))))
20638 @end group
20639
20640 @group
20641 (print-Y-axis
20642 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
20643 @end group
20644 @group
20645 (graph-body-print
20646 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
20647 (print-X-axis numbers-list)))
20648 @end group
20649 @end smallexample
20650
20651 @node Test print-graph
20652 @appendixsubsec Testing @code{print-graph}
20653
20654 @need 1250
20655 We can test the @code{print-graph} function with a short list of numbers:
20656
20657 @enumerate
20658 @item
20659 Install the final versions of @code{Y-axis-column},
20660 @code{graph-body-print}, and @code{print-graph} (in addition to the
20661 rest of the code.)
20662
20663 @item
20664 Copy the following expression:
20665
20666 @smallexample
20667 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
20668 @end smallexample
20669
20670 @item
20671 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20672 want the axis labels to start.
20673
20674 @item
20675 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20676
20677 @item
20678 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20679 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20680
20681 @item
20682 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20683 @end enumerate
20684
20685 @need 1250
20686 Emacs will print a graph that looks like this:
20687
20688 @smallexample
20689 @group
20690 10 -
20691
20692
20693 *
20694 ** *
20695 5 - **** *
20696 **** ***
20697 * *********
20698 ************
20699 1 - *************
20700
20701 | | | |
20702 1 5 10 15
20703 @end group
20704 @end smallexample
20705
20706 @need 1200
20707 On the other hand, if you pass @code{print-graph} a
20708 @code{vertical-step} value of 2, by evaluating this expression:
20709
20710 @smallexample
20711 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1) 2)
20712 @end smallexample
20713
20714 @need 1250
20715 @noindent
20716 The graph looks like this:
20717
20718 @smallexample
20719 @group
20720 20 -
20721
20722
20723 *
20724 ** *
20725 10 - **** *
20726 **** ***
20727 * *********
20728 ************
20729 2 - *************
20730
20731 | | | |
20732 1 5 10 15
20733 @end group
20734 @end smallexample
20735
20736 @noindent
20737 (A question: is the @samp{2} on the bottom of the vertical axis a bug or a
20738 feature? If you think it is a bug, and should be a @samp{1} instead, (or
20739 even a @samp{0}), you can modify the sources.)
20740
20741 @node Graphing words in defuns
20742 @appendixsubsec Graphing Numbers of Words and Symbols
20743
20744 Now for the graph for which all this code was written: a graph that
20745 shows how many function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and
20746 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
20747 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
20748
20749 This is a multi-step process. First make sure you have loaded all the
20750 requisite code.
20751
20752 @need 1500
20753 It is a good idea to reset the value of @code{top-of-ranges} in case
20754 you have set it to some different value. You can evaluate the
20755 following:
20756
20757 @smallexample
20758 @group
20759 (setq top-of-ranges
20760 '(10 20 30 40 50
20761 60 70 80 90 100
20762 110 120 130 140 150
20763 160 170 180 190 200
20764 210 220 230 240 250
20765 260 270 280 290 300)
20766 @end group
20767 @end smallexample
20768
20769 @noindent
20770 Next create a list of the number of words and symbols in each range.
20771
20772 @need 1500
20773 @noindent
20774 Evaluate the following:
20775
20776 @smallexample
20777 @group
20778 (setq list-for-graph
20779 (defuns-per-range
20780 (sort
20781 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
20782 (directory-files "/usr/local/emacs/lisp"
20783 t ".+el$"))
20784 '<)
20785 top-of-ranges))
20786 @end group
20787 @end smallexample
20788
20789 @noindent
20790 On my old machine, this took about an hour. It looked though 303 Lisp
20791 files in my copy of Emacs version 19.23. After all that computing,
20792 the @code{list-for-graph} had this value:
20793
20794 @smallexample
20795 @group
20796 (537 1027 955 785 594 483 349 292 224 199 166 120 116 99
20797 90 80 67 48 52 45 41 33 28 26 25 20 12 28 11 13 220)
20798 @end group
20799 @end smallexample
20800
20801 @noindent
20802 This means that my copy of Emacs had 537 function definitions with
20803 fewer than 10 words or symbols in them, 1,027 function definitions
20804 with 10 to 19 words or symbols in them, 955 function definitions with
20805 20 to 29 words or symbols in them, and so on.
20806
20807 Clearly, just by looking at this list we can see that most function
20808 definitions contain ten to thirty words and symbols.
20809
20810 Now for printing. We do @emph{not} want to print a graph that is
20811 1,030 lines high @dots{} Instead, we should print a graph that is
20812 fewer than twenty-five lines high. A graph that height can be
20813 displayed on almost any monitor, and easily printed on a sheet of paper.
20814
20815 This means that each value in @code{list-for-graph} must be reduced to
20816 one-fiftieth its present value.
20817
20818 Here is a short function to do just that, using two functions we have
20819 not yet seen, @code{mapcar} and @code{lambda}.
20820
20821 @smallexample
20822 @group
20823 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
20824 "Return list, each number one-fiftieth of previous."
20825 (mapcar (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
20826 @end group
20827 @end smallexample
20828
20829 @node lambda
20830 @appendixsubsec A @code{lambda} Expression: Useful Anonymity
20831 @cindex Anonymous function
20832 @findex lambda
20833
20834 @code{lambda} is the symbol for an anonymous function, a function
20835 without a name. Every time you use an anonymous function, you need to
20836 include its whole body.
20837
20838 @need 1250
20839 @noindent
20840 Thus,
20841
20842 @smallexample
20843 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
20844 @end smallexample
20845
20846 @noindent
20847 is a function definition that says ``return the value resulting from
20848 dividing whatever is passed to me as @code{arg} by 50''.
20849
20850 @need 1200
20851 Earlier, for example, we had a function @code{multiply-by-seven}; it
20852 multiplied its argument by 7. This function is similar, except it
20853 divides its argument by 50; and, it has no name. The anonymous
20854 equivalent of @code{multiply-by-seven} is:
20855
20856 @smallexample
20857 (lambda (number) (* 7 number))
20858 @end smallexample
20859
20860 @noindent
20861 (@xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Macro}.)
20862
20863 @need 1250
20864 @noindent
20865 If we want to multiply 3 by 7, we can write:
20866
20867 @c clear print-postscript-figures
20868 @c lambda example diagram #1
20869 @ifnottex
20870 @smallexample
20871 @group
20872 (multiply-by-seven 3)
20873 \_______________/ ^
20874 | |
20875 function argument
20876 @end group
20877 @end smallexample
20878 @end ifnottex
20879 @ifset print-postscript-figures
20880 @sp 1
20881 @tex
20882 @center @image{lambda-1}
20883 @end tex
20884 @sp 1
20885 @end ifset
20886 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
20887 @iftex
20888 @smallexample
20889 @group
20890 (multiply-by-seven 3)
20891 \_______________/ ^
20892 | |
20893 function argument
20894 @end group
20895 @end smallexample
20896 @end iftex
20897 @end ifclear
20898
20899 @noindent
20900 This expression returns 21.
20901
20902 @need 1250
20903 @noindent
20904 Similarly, we can write:
20905
20906 @c lambda example diagram #2
20907 @ifnottex
20908 @smallexample
20909 @group
20910 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
20911 \____________________________/ ^
20912 | |
20913 anonymous function argument
20914 @end group
20915 @end smallexample
20916 @end ifnottex
20917 @ifset print-postscript-figures
20918 @sp 1
20919 @tex
20920 @center @image{lambda-2}
20921 @end tex
20922 @sp 1
20923 @end ifset
20924 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
20925 @iftex
20926 @smallexample
20927 @group
20928 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
20929 \____________________________/ ^
20930 | |
20931 anonymous function argument
20932 @end group
20933 @end smallexample
20934 @end iftex
20935 @end ifclear
20936
20937 @need 1250
20938 @noindent
20939 If we want to divide 100 by 50, we can write:
20940
20941 @c lambda example diagram #3
20942 @ifnottex
20943 @smallexample
20944 @group
20945 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
20946 \______________________/ \_/
20947 | |
20948 anonymous function argument
20949 @end group
20950 @end smallexample
20951 @end ifnottex
20952 @ifset print-postscript-figures
20953 @sp 1
20954 @tex
20955 @center @image{lambda-3}
20956 @end tex
20957 @sp 1
20958 @end ifset
20959 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
20960 @iftex
20961 @smallexample
20962 @group
20963 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
20964 \______________________/ \_/
20965 | |
20966 anonymous function argument
20967 @end group
20968 @end smallexample
20969 @end iftex
20970 @end ifclear
20971
20972 @noindent
20973 This expression returns 2. The 100 is passed to the function, which
20974 divides that number by 50.
20975
20976 @xref{Lambda Expressions, , Lambda Expressions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
20977 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{lambda}. Lisp and lambda
20978 expressions derive from the Lambda Calculus.
20979
20980 @node mapcar
20981 @appendixsubsec The @code{mapcar} Function
20982 @findex mapcar
20983
20984 @code{mapcar} is a function that calls its first argument with each
20985 element of its second argument, in turn. The second argument must be
20986 a sequence.
20987
20988 The @samp{map} part of the name comes from the mathematical phrase,
20989 ``mapping over a domain'', meaning to apply a function to each of the
20990 elements in a domain. The mathematical phrase is based on the
20991 metaphor of a surveyor walking, one step at a time, over an area he is
20992 mapping. And @samp{car}, of course, comes from the Lisp notion of the
20993 first of a list.
20994
20995 @need 1250
20996 @noindent
20997 For example,
20998
20999 @smallexample
21000 @group
21001 (mapcar '1+ '(2 4 6))
21002 @result{} (3 5 7)
21003 @end group
21004 @end smallexample
21005
21006 @noindent
21007 The function @code{1+} which adds one to its argument, is executed on
21008 @emph{each} element of the list, and a new list is returned.
21009
21010 Contrast this with @code{apply}, which applies its first argument to
21011 all the remaining.
21012 (@xref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}, for a explanation of
21013 @code{apply}.)
21014
21015 @need 1250
21016 In the definition of @code{one-fiftieth}, the first argument is the
21017 anonymous function:
21018
21019 @smallexample
21020 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
21021 @end smallexample
21022
21023 @noindent
21024 and the second argument is @code{full-range}, which will be bound to
21025 @code{list-for-graph}.
21026
21027 @need 1250
21028 The whole expression looks like this:
21029
21030 @smallexample
21031 (mapcar (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21032 @end smallexample
21033
21034 @xref{Mapping Functions, , Mapping Functions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
21035 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{mapcar}.
21036
21037 Using the @code{one-fiftieth} function, we can generate a list in
21038 which each element is one-fiftieth the size of the corresponding
21039 element in @code{list-for-graph}.
21040
21041 @smallexample
21042 @group
21043 (setq fiftieth-list-for-graph
21044 (one-fiftieth list-for-graph))
21045 @end group
21046 @end smallexample
21047
21048 @need 1250
21049 The resulting list looks like this:
21050
21051 @smallexample
21052 @group
21053 (10 20 19 15 11 9 6 5 4 3 3 2 2
21054 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4)
21055 @end group
21056 @end smallexample
21057
21058 @noindent
21059 This, we are almost ready to print! (We also notice the loss of
21060 information: many of the higher ranges are 0, meaning that fewer than
21061 50 defuns had that many words or symbols---but not necessarily meaning
21062 that none had that many words or symbols.)
21063
21064 @node Another Bug
21065 @appendixsubsec Another Bug @dots{} Most Insidious
21066 @cindex Bug, most insidious type
21067 @cindex Insidious type of bug
21068
21069 I said ``almost ready to print''! Of course, there is a bug in the
21070 @code{print-graph} function @dots{} It has a @code{vertical-step}
21071 option, but not a @code{horizontal-step} option. The
21072 @code{top-of-range} scale goes from 10 to 300 by tens. But the
21073 @code{print-graph} function will print only by ones.
21074
21075 This is a classic example of what some consider the most insidious
21076 type of bug, the bug of omission. This is not the kind of bug you can
21077 find by studying the code, for it is not in the code; it is an omitted
21078 feature. Your best actions are to try your program early and often;
21079 and try to arrange, as much as you can, to write code that is easy to
21080 understand and easy to change. Try to be aware, whenever you can,
21081 that whatever you have written, @emph{will} be rewritten, if not soon,
21082 eventually. A hard maxim to follow.
21083
21084 It is the @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line} function that needs the
21085 work; and then the @code{print-X-axis} and the @code{print-graph}
21086 functions need to be adapted. Not much needs to be done; there is one
21087 nicety: the numbers ought to line up under the tic marks. This takes
21088 a little thought.
21089
21090 @need 1250
21091 Here is the corrected @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}:
21092
21093 @smallexample
21094 @group
21095 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21096 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21097 &optional horizontal-step)
21098 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21099 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21100 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21101 @end group
21102 @group
21103 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21104 ;; @r{Delete extra leading spaces.}
21105 (delete-char
21106 (- (1-
21107 (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21108 (insert (concat
21109 (make-string
21110 @end group
21111 @group
21112 ;; @r{Insert white space.}
21113 (- (* symbol-width
21114 X-axis-label-spacing)
21115 (1-
21116 (length
21117 (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21118 2)
21119 ? )
21120 (number-to-string
21121 (* number horizontal-step))))
21122 @end group
21123 @group
21124 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21125 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21126 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21127 (insert (X-axis-element
21128 (* number horizontal-step)))
21129 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21130 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21131 @end group
21132 @end smallexample
21133
21134 @need 1500
21135 If you are reading this in Info, you can see the new versions of
21136 @code{print-X-axis} @code{print-graph} and evaluate them. If you are
21137 reading this in a printed book, you can see the changed lines here
21138 (the full text is too much to print).
21139
21140 @iftex
21141 @smallexample
21142 @group
21143 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21144 @dots{}
21145 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21146 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step))
21147 @end group
21148 @end smallexample
21149
21150 @smallexample
21151 @group
21152 (defun print-graph
21153 (numbers-list
21154 &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21155 @dots{}
21156 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step))
21157 @end group
21158 @end smallexample
21159 @end iftex
21160
21161 @ifnottex
21162 @smallexample
21163 @group
21164 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21165 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21166 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21167 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21168 each column."
21169 @end group
21170 @group
21171 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21172 ;; are passed by ‘print-graph’.
21173 (let* ((leading-spaces
21174 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21175 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21176 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21177 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21178 @end group
21179 @group
21180 (X-tic
21181 (concat
21182 (make-string
21183 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21184 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21185 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21186 ? )
21187 @end group
21188 @group
21189 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21190 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21191 (tic-number
21192 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21193 (/ X-length tic-width)
21194 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21195 @end group
21196
21197 @group
21198 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21199 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21200 (insert "\n")
21201 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21202 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21203 @end group
21204 @end smallexample
21205
21206 @smallexample
21207 @group
21208 (defun print-graph
21209 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21210 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21211 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21212 @end group
21213
21214 @group
21215 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21216 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21217 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21218 each row is five units.
21219 @end group
21220
21221 @group
21222 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21223 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21224 each column."
21225 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
21226 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
21227 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
21228 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
21229 @end group
21230 @group
21231 (height-of-top-line
21232 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21233 height
21234 ;; @r{else}
21235 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21236 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
21237 @end group
21238 @group
21239 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
21240 (full-Y-label-width
21241 (length
21242 (concat
21243 (number-to-string
21244 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
21245 Y-axis-tic))))
21246 @end group
21247 @group
21248 (print-Y-axis
21249 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
21250 (graph-body-print
21251 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
21252 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
21253 @end group
21254 @end smallexample
21255 @end ifnottex
21256
21257 @c qqq
21258 @ignore
21259 Graphing Definitions Re-listed
21260
21261 @need 1250
21262 Here are all the graphing definitions in their final form:
21263
21264 @smallexample
21265 @group
21266 (defvar top-of-ranges
21267 '(10 20 30 40 50
21268 60 70 80 90 100
21269 110 120 130 140 150
21270 160 170 180 190 200
21271 210 220 230 240 250)
21272 "List specifying ranges for ‘defuns-per-range’.")
21273 @end group
21274
21275 @group
21276 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
21277 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
21278 @end group
21279
21280 @group
21281 (defvar graph-blank " "
21282 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
21283 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
21284 as graph-symbol.")
21285 @end group
21286
21287 @group
21288 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
21289 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
21290 @end group
21291
21292 @group
21293 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
21294 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
21295 @end group
21296
21297 @group
21298 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
21299 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
21300 @end group
21301
21302 @group
21303 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
21304 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
21305 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
21306 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
21307 @end group
21308 @end smallexample
21309
21310 @smallexample
21311 @group
21312 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
21313 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
21314 (beginning-of-defun)
21315 (let ((count 0)
21316 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
21317 @end group
21318
21319 @group
21320 (while
21321 (and (< (point) end)
21322 (re-search-forward
21323 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
21324 end t))
21325 (setq count (1+ count)))
21326 count))
21327 @end group
21328 @end smallexample
21329
21330 @smallexample
21331 @group
21332 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
21333 "Return list of definitions’ lengths within FILE.
21334 The returned list is a list of numbers.
21335 Each number is the number of words or
21336 symbols in one function definition."
21337 @end group
21338
21339 @group
21340 (message "Working on ‘%s’ ... " filename)
21341 (save-excursion
21342 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
21343 (lengths-list))
21344 (set-buffer buffer)
21345 (setq buffer-read-only t)
21346 (widen)
21347 (goto-char (point-min))
21348 @end group
21349
21350 @group
21351 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
21352 (setq lengths-list
21353 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
21354 (kill-buffer buffer)
21355 lengths-list)))
21356 @end group
21357 @end smallexample
21358
21359 @smallexample
21360 @group
21361 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
21362 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
21363 (let (lengths-list)
21364 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
21365 (while list-of-files
21366 (setq lengths-list
21367 (append
21368 lengths-list
21369 @end group
21370 @group
21371 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
21372 (lengths-list-file
21373 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
21374 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
21375 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
21376 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
21377 lengths-list))
21378 @end group
21379 @end smallexample
21380
21381 @smallexample
21382 @group
21383 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
21384 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
21385 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
21386 (number-within-range 0)
21387 defuns-per-range-list)
21388 @end group
21389
21390 @group
21391 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
21392 (while top-of-ranges
21393
21394 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
21395 (while (and
21396 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
21397 (car sorted-lengths)
21398 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
21399
21400 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
21401 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
21402 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
21403 @end group
21404
21405 @group
21406 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
21407
21408 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21409 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
21410 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
21411
21412 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
21413 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
21414 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
21415 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
21416 @end group
21417
21418 @group
21419 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
21420 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
21421 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21422 (cons
21423 (length sorted-lengths)
21424 defuns-per-range-list))
21425
21426 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
21427 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
21428 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
21429 @end group
21430 @end smallexample
21431
21432 @smallexample
21433 @group
21434 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
21435 "Return list of MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings;
21436 ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
21437 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
21438 of the list.
21439 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
21440 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
21441 @end group
21442
21443 @group
21444 (let ((insert-list nil)
21445 (number-of-top-blanks
21446 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
21447
21448 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
21449 (while (> actual-height 0)
21450 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
21451 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
21452 @end group
21453
21454 @group
21455 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
21456 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
21457 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
21458 (setq number-of-top-blanks
21459 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
21460
21461 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
21462 insert-list))
21463 @end group
21464 @end smallexample
21465
21466 @smallexample
21467 @group
21468 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
21469 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
21470 A numbered element looks like this ‘ 5 - ’,
21471 and is padded as needed so all line up with
21472 the element for the largest number."
21473 @end group
21474 @group
21475 (let* ((leading-spaces
21476 (- full-Y-label-width
21477 (length
21478 (concat (number-to-string number)
21479 Y-axis-tic)))))
21480 @end group
21481 @group
21482 (concat
21483 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21484 (number-to-string number)
21485 Y-axis-tic)))
21486 @end group
21487 @end smallexample
21488
21489 @smallexample
21490 @group
21491 (defun print-Y-axis
21492 (height full-Y-label-width &optional vertical-step)
21493 "Insert Y axis by HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
21494 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
21495 Full width is the width of the highest label element.
21496 Optionally, print according to VERTICAL-STEP."
21497 @end group
21498 @group
21499 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
21500 ;; are passed by ‘print-graph’.
21501 (let ((start (point)))
21502 (insert-rectangle
21503 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width vertical-step))
21504 @end group
21505 @group
21506 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
21507 (goto-char start)
21508 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
21509 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
21510 @end group
21511 @end smallexample
21512
21513 @smallexample
21514 @group
21515 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
21516 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
21517 "Print ticks for X axis."
21518 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21519 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
21520 @end group
21521 @group
21522 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
21523 (insert (concat
21524 (make-string
21525 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21526 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
21527 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
21528 ? )
21529 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21530 @end group
21531 @group
21532 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
21533 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21534 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
21535 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
21536 @end group
21537 @end smallexample
21538
21539 @smallexample
21540 @group
21541 (defun X-axis-element (number)
21542 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
21543 (let ((leading-spaces
21544 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21545 (length (number-to-string number)))))
21546 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21547 (number-to-string number))))
21548 @end group
21549 @end smallexample
21550
21551 @smallexample
21552 @group
21553 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
21554 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21555 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21556 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21557 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
21558 @end group
21559 @group
21560 (let (from-position)
21561 (while numbers-list
21562 (setq from-position (point))
21563 (insert-rectangle
21564 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
21565 (goto-char from-position)
21566 (forward-char symbol-width)
21567 @end group
21568 @group
21569 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
21570 (sit-for 0)
21571 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
21572 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
21573 (forward-line height)
21574 (insert "\n")))
21575 @end group
21576 @end smallexample
21577
21578 @smallexample
21579 @group
21580 (defun Y-axis-column
21581 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
21582 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
21583 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21584 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
21585 @end group
21586 @group
21587 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
21588 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
21589 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
21590 that each line is five units of the graph."
21591 (let (Y-axis
21592 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
21593 @end group
21594 @group
21595 (while (> height 1)
21596 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21597 ;; @r{Insert label.}
21598 (setq Y-axis
21599 (cons
21600 (Y-axis-element
21601 (* height number-per-line)
21602 width-of-label)
21603 Y-axis))
21604 @end group
21605 @group
21606 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
21607 (setq Y-axis
21608 (cons
21609 (make-string width-of-label ? )
21610 Y-axis)))
21611 (setq height (1- height)))
21612 @end group
21613 @group
21614 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
21615 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
21616 (or vertical-step 1)
21617 width-of-label)
21618 Y-axis))
21619 (nreverse Y-axis)))
21620 @end group
21621 @end smallexample
21622
21623 @smallexample
21624 @group
21625 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21626 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21627 &optional horizontal-step)
21628 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21629 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21630 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21631 @end group
21632 @group
21633 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21634 ;; line up number
21635 (delete-char (- (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21636 (insert (concat
21637 (make-string
21638 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
21639 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21640 (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21641 2)
21642 ? )
21643 (number-to-string (* number horizontal-step))))
21644 @end group
21645 @group
21646 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21647 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21648 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21649 (insert (X-axis-element (* number horizontal-step)))
21650 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21651 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21652 @end group
21653 @end smallexample
21654
21655 @smallexample
21656 @group
21657 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21658 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21659 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21660 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21661 each column."
21662 @end group
21663 @group
21664 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21665 ;; are passed by ‘print-graph’.
21666 (let* ((leading-spaces
21667 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21668 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21669 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21670 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21671 @end group
21672 @group
21673 (X-tic
21674 (concat
21675 (make-string
21676 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21677 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21678 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21679 ? )
21680 @end group
21681 @group
21682 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21683 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21684 (tic-number
21685 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21686 (/ X-length tic-width)
21687 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21688 @end group
21689
21690 @group
21691 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21692 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21693 (insert "\n")
21694 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21695 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21696 @end group
21697 @end smallexample
21698
21699 @smallexample
21700 @group
21701 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
21702 "Return list, each number of which is 1/50th previous."
21703 (mapcar (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21704 @end group
21705 @end smallexample
21706
21707 @smallexample
21708 @group
21709 (defun print-graph
21710 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21711 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21712 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21713 @end group
21714
21715 @group
21716 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21717 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21718 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21719 each row is five units.
21720 @end group
21721
21722 @group
21723 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21724 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21725 each column."
21726 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
21727 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
21728 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
21729 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
21730 @end group
21731 @group
21732 (height-of-top-line
21733 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21734 height
21735 ;; @r{else}
21736 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21737 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
21738 @end group
21739 @group
21740 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
21741 (full-Y-label-width
21742 (length
21743 (concat
21744 (number-to-string
21745 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
21746 Y-axis-tic))))
21747 @end group
21748 @group
21749
21750 (print-Y-axis
21751 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
21752 (graph-body-print
21753 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
21754 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
21755 @end group
21756 @end smallexample
21757 @c qqq
21758 @end ignore
21759
21760 @page
21761 @node Final printed graph
21762 @appendixsubsec The Printed Graph
21763
21764 When made and installed, you can call the @code{print-graph} command
21765 like this:
21766 @sp 1
21767
21768 @smallexample
21769 @group
21770 (print-graph fiftieth-list-for-graph 50 10)
21771 @end group
21772 @end smallexample
21773 @sp 1
21774
21775 @noindent
21776 Here is the graph:
21777 @sp 2
21778
21779 @smallexample
21780 @group
21781 1000 - *
21782 **
21783 **
21784 **
21785 **
21786 750 - ***
21787 ***
21788 ***
21789 ***
21790 ****
21791 500 - *****
21792 ******
21793 ******
21794 ******
21795 *******
21796 250 - ********
21797 ********* *
21798 *********** *
21799 ************* *
21800 50 - ***************** * *
21801 | | | | | | | |
21802 10 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
21803 @end group
21804 @end smallexample
21805
21806 @sp 2
21807
21808 @noindent
21809 The largest group of functions contain 10--19 words and symbols each.
21810
21811 @node Free Software and Free Manuals
21812 @appendix Free Software and Free Manuals
21813
21814 @strong{by Richard M. Stallman}
21815 @sp 1
21816
21817 The biggest deficiency in free operating systems is not in the
21818 software---it is the lack of good free manuals that we can include in
21819 these systems. Many of our most important programs do not come with
21820 full manuals. Documentation is an essential part of any software
21821 package; when an important free software package does not come with a
21822 free manual, that is a major gap. We have many such gaps today.
21823
21824 Once upon a time, many years ago, I thought I would learn Perl. I got
21825 a copy of a free manual, but I found it hard to read. When I asked
21826 Perl users about alternatives, they told me that there were better
21827 introductory manuals---but those were not free.
21828
21829 Why was this? The authors of the good manuals had written them for
21830 O'Reilly Associates, which published them with restrictive terms---no
21831 copying, no modification, source files not available---which exclude
21832 them from the free software community.
21833
21834 That wasn't the first time this sort of thing has happened, and (to
21835 our community's great loss) it was far from the last. Proprietary
21836 manual publishers have enticed a great many authors to restrict their
21837 manuals since then. Many times I have heard a GNU user eagerly tell me
21838 about a manual that he is writing, with which he expects to help the
21839 GNU project---and then had my hopes dashed, as he proceeded to explain
21840 that he had signed a contract with a publisher that would restrict it
21841 so that we cannot use it.
21842
21843 Given that writing good English is a rare skill among programmers, we
21844 can ill afford to lose manuals this way.
21845
21846 Free documentation, like free software, is a matter of freedom, not
21847 price. The problem with these manuals was not that O'Reilly Associates
21848 charged a price for printed copies---that in itself is fine. The Free
21849 Software Foundation @uref{http://shop.fsf.org, sells printed copies} of
21850 free @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/doc.html, GNU manuals}, too.
21851 But GNU manuals are available in source code form, while these manuals
21852 are available only on paper. GNU manuals come with permission to copy
21853 and modify; the Perl manuals do not. These restrictions are the
21854 problems.
21855
21856 The criterion for a free manual is pretty much the same as for free
21857 software: it is a matter of giving all users certain
21858 freedoms. Redistribution (including commercial redistribution) must be
21859 permitted, so that the manual can accompany every copy of the program,
21860 on-line or on paper. Permission for modification is crucial too.
21861
21862 As a general rule, I don't believe that it is essential for people to
21863 have permission to modify all sorts of articles and books. The issues
21864 for writings are not necessarily the same as those for software. For
21865 example, I don't think you or I are obliged to give permission to
21866 modify articles like this one, which describe our actions and our
21867 views.
21868
21869 But there is a particular reason why the freedom to modify is crucial
21870 for documentation for free software. When people exercise their right
21871 to modify the software, and add or change its features, if they are
21872 conscientious they will change the manual too---so they can provide
21873 accurate and usable documentation with the modified program. A manual
21874 which forbids programmers to be conscientious and finish the job, or
21875 more precisely requires them to write a new manual from scratch if
21876 they change the program, does not fill our community's needs.
21877
21878 While a blanket prohibition on modification is unacceptable, some
21879 kinds of limits on the method of modification pose no problem. For
21880 example, requirements to preserve the original author's copyright
21881 notice, the distribution terms, or the list of authors, are ok. It is
21882 also no problem to require modified versions to include notice that
21883 they were modified, even to have entire sections that may not be
21884 deleted or changed, as long as these sections deal with nontechnical
21885 topics. (Some GNU manuals have them.)
21886
21887 These kinds of restrictions are not a problem because, as a practical
21888 matter, they don't stop the conscientious programmer from adapting the
21889 manual to fit the modified program. In other words, they don't block
21890 the free software community from making full use of the manual.
21891
21892 However, it must be possible to modify all the technical content of
21893 the manual, and then distribute the result in all the usual media,
21894 through all the usual channels; otherwise, the restrictions do block
21895 the community, the manual is not free, and so we need another manual.
21896
21897 Unfortunately, it is often hard to find someone to write another
21898 manual when a proprietary manual exists. The obstacle is that many
21899 users think that a proprietary manual is good enough---so they don't
21900 see the need to write a free manual. They do not see that the free
21901 operating system has a gap that needs filling.
21902
21903 Why do users think that proprietary manuals are good enough? Some have
21904 not considered the issue. I hope this article will do something to
21905 change that.
21906
21907 Other users consider proprietary manuals acceptable for the same
21908 reason so many people consider proprietary software acceptable: they
21909 judge in purely practical terms, not using freedom as a
21910 criterion. These people are entitled to their opinions, but since
21911 those opinions spring from values which do not include freedom, they
21912 are no guide for those of us who do value freedom.
21913
21914 Please spread the word about this issue. We continue to lose manuals
21915 to proprietary publishing. If we spread the word that proprietary
21916 manuals are not sufficient, perhaps the next person who wants to help
21917 GNU by writing documentation will realize, before it is too late, that
21918 he must above all make it free.
21919
21920 We can also encourage commercial publishers to sell free, copylefted
21921 manuals instead of proprietary ones. One way you can help this is to
21922 check the distribution terms of a manual before you buy it, and prefer
21923 copylefted manuals to non-copylefted ones.
21924
21925 @sp 2
21926 @noindent
21927 Note: The Free Software Foundation maintains a page on its Web site
21928 that lists free books available from other publishers:@*
21929 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/other-free-books.html}
21930
21931 @node GNU Free Documentation License
21932 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
21933
21934 @cindex FDL, GNU Free Documentation License
21935 @include doclicense.texi
21936
21937 @node Index
21938 @unnumbered Index
21939
21940 @ignore
21941 MENU ENTRY: NODE NAME.
21942 @end ignore
21943
21944 @printindex cp
21945
21946 @iftex
21947 @c Place biographical information on right-hand (verso) page
21948
21949 @tex
21950 \par\vfill\supereject
21951 \ifodd\pageno
21952 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
21953 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
21954 %\page\hbox{}\page
21955 \else
21956 % \par\vfill\supereject
21957 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
21958 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
21959 %\page\hbox{}%\page
21960 %\page\hbox{}%\page
21961 \fi
21962 @end tex
21963
21964 @c page
21965 @w{ }
21966
21967 @c ================ Biographical information ================
21968
21969 @w{ }
21970 @sp 8
21971 @center About the Author
21972 @sp 1
21973 @end iftex
21974
21975 @ifnottex
21976 @node About the Author
21977 @unnumbered About the Author
21978 @end ifnottex
21979
21980 @quotation
21981 Robert J. Chassell has worked with GNU Emacs since 1985. He writes
21982 and edits, teaches Emacs and Emacs Lisp, and speaks throughout the
21983 world on software freedom. Chassell was a founding Director and
21984 Treasurer of the Free Software Foundation, Inc. He is co-author of
21985 the @cite{Texinfo} manual, and has edited more than a dozen other
21986 books. He graduated from Cambridge University, in England. He has an
21987 abiding interest in social and economic history and flies his own
21988 airplane.
21989 @end quotation
21990
21991 @c @page
21992 @c @w{ }
21993 @c
21994 @c @c Prevent page number on blank verso, so eject it first.
21995 @c @tex
21996 @c \par\vfill\supereject
21997 @c @end tex
21998
21999 @c @iftex
22000 @c @headings off
22001 @c @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thistitle
22002 @c @oddheading @| @| @thispage
22003 @c @end iftex
22004
22005 @bye